Home

PTL Pty Limited

1. Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Brickwork and Dulux Sealer Dulux Dulux SD 1021 concrete flush Binder solvent Weathershield Low Weathershield Low finish bagged or based B15 Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic sponged no B7a B7a texture Brickwork and Dulux AcraPrime Dulux Acratex Dulux Acratex SA 0754 concrete flush 501 1 Water Based AcraSand Acrylic Acrashield B7a finish bagged or Primer B17A 2nd coat Optional sponged slight texture Brickwork and Dulux AcraPrime Dulux Acratex Dulux Acratex SA 2266 concrete flush 501 1 Water Based Mediteranean Bag AcraShield finish medium Primer B17A Finish 2 coats texture Textured acrylic paint system Exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Concrete Dulux Acraprime Dulux Acratex Dulux Acratex SA 1868 blockwork and 501 1 Water Based Contempo 959 Contempo 959 cement render Primer B15 Advance Base Advance Finish Coat B38a Coat B38a Concrete Dulux Acraprime Dulux Acratex Roll Dulux Acratex SA 0696 blockwork and 501 1 Water Based On 950 00 Low Acrashield 955 cement render Primer B15 Profile Texture Finish B38a B38a Concrete masonry Dulux Acraprime Dulux Acratex Dulux Acratex SA 0770 blockwork and 501 1 Water Based Acrashield 955 Low Acrashield 955 Low NATSPEC 356 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber1211467
2. ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES List identification Rate Wall mounted 90 91 Floor mounted 136 36 Equipment General Unit price supply and installation of one additional single pole circuit breaker List identification Rate 16A 43 64 20A 43 64 32A 43 64 63A 43 64 General Unit price supply and installation of one additional triple pole circuit breaker List identification Rate 16A 138 18 20A 138 18 32A 138 18 63A 138 18 Labour and Materials General For variations not covered by above items List identification Rate Normal time 55 34 Time and a half 67 19 Double time 79 05 Percentage additional to trade prices of materials inclusive of 10 handling and deliver costs 1 5 MECHANICAL TRADE RATES General Information General All rates include all costs associated with the design supply installation testing commissioning materials workshop drawing alterations cartage freight tools plant scaffolding painting and defects liability associated with such works Schedule of manufacturers suppliers and subcontractors Item Nominated Air conditioning units Daikin Ventilation fans All Vent CO monitoring system Gastech Australia Air diffusers and grilles Holyoake Ductwork and pipework insulation Axiflow Flexible ductwork Axiflow
3. NATSPEC Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES Ductwork Air conditioning ductwork externally insulated 75mm Duct size Straight duct Bends with Transition Branch with mm per metre turning vanes largest size splitter 200x200 30 70 65 45 60 250x200 30 70 65 45 60 250x250 36 36 75 45 70 65 45 300x200 36 36 80 70 65 45 300x250 40 80 75 55 70 400x200 40 90 75 55 70 400x250 45 45 95 45 80 75 55 Air conditioning ductwork internally insulated 75mm Duct size Straight duct Bends with Transition Branch with mm per metre turning vanes largest size splitter 250x250 38 18 110 90 80 300x200 38 18 110 90 80 300x250 39 09 119 09 110 95 45 400x250 50 125 45 110 95 45 450x300 55 45 135 45 120 100 600x200 60 140 130 110 800x300 75 45 160 145 45 130 Ventilation ductwork internally insulated 25mm Duct size Straight duct Bends with Transition Branch with mm per metre turning vanes largest size splitter 250x200 30 90 80 75 45 300x250 35 45 95 45 80 75 45 400x250 45 45 110 95 45 84 45 400x400 50 115 45 105 45 95 45 600x400 65 45 115 45 115 45 105 45 1800x400 110 281 82 250 230 Ventilation ductwork uninsulated Duct
4. 1 4 ELECTRICAL TRADE RATES General Information General All rates include all costs associated with the design supply installation testing commissioning materials workshop drawing alterations cartage freight tools plant scaffolding painting and defects liability associated with such works Schedule of manufacturers suppliers and subcontractors Item Nominated Main switchboard manufacturer Relec Distribution switchboard manufacturer Relec Typical luminaires manufacturer Pierlite MATV systems installer New Edge Telecommunications wiring installer New Edge Fire detection amp alarm system installer New Edge Video intercom system and manufacturer Airphone Luminaries General Unit prices are per luminaire including lamps control gear etc Installation of luminaries includes up to 20m of TPS wiring in ceiling spaces List identification Supply Install B1 40 91 100 B2 45 45 90 91 B3 61 82 90 91 B4 77 27 90 91 C2 527 27 90 91 D1 54 55 77 27 D2 68 18 77 27 P1 95 45 113 64 P2 59 09 113 64 S1 43 64 90 91 W1 68 18 100 W2 45 45 109 09 W3 68 18 100 U 527 27 163 64 Linear batten 81 82 77 27 Spitfire 122 73 100 Exit 140 91 109 09 Socket Outlets General Unit prices are per socket outlet including 20m route length of wiring in TPS within ceiling space NATSPEC 8 Tuesday 21 May 2013
5. Fabrication Form up with front and back members and full height cross members at not more than 900 mm centres Finish High pressure decorative laminated sheet Fasteners Conceal with finish Installation Scribe to floor and secure to wall to provide level platform for carcasses Carcasses Material Select from the following Overlaid high moisture resistant particleboard Overlaid high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard Thickness 16 mm Joints Select from the following Proprietary mechanical connections Dowels and glue Screws and glue Proprietary joining plates and glue Adjustable shelves Support on proprietary pins in holes bored at equal centres vertically NATSPEC 261 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0551 Joinery Spacing 32 mm Fasteners Conceal with finish Installation Secure to walls at not more than 600 mm centres Drawer fronts and doors Material Select from the following Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant particleboard Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard Thickness 16 mm Maximum door size 2400 mm high 900 mm wide 1 5 m on face Drawer fronts Rout for drawer bottoms Drawer backs and sides Material PVC film wrapped particleboard Thickness 12 mm Installation Mitre corners leaving outer skin of foil intact finish with butt joints glue to form carcass and screw to
6. Sliding assemblies Hanging Hang the sliding sash on stainless steel or nylon sheaves on overhead channel track formed in the frame head and fit nylon or equivalent bottom guides Hardware Pull handles on both sides of sash or of leading sash in multiple sash arrangements Fixing Proprietary shower screens To the manufacturer s recommendations 3 5 GLASS BALUSTRADES Standard Glass balustrades To AS 1288 Section 7 3 6 COMPLETION Trade clean Method Clean with soft clean cloths and clean water finishing with a clean squeegee Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials Extent All frames and glass surfaces inside and outside Warranty Shower screens Manufacturer s warranty Form Against failure of materials and execution under normal environment and use conditions Period As offered by the manufacturer NATSPEC 248 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0471 Insulation and pliable membranes 0471 INSULATION AND PLIABLE MEMBRANES 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide insulation and pliable membrane systems Complete for their function Conforming to the detail and location drawings Firmly fixed in position 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Ther
7. ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling Adhesive bedding application General Apply adhesive by notched trowel to walls and floors and direct to tiles if required to provide evenly distributed coverage after laying as follows Domestic internal walls gt 65 Domestic internal floors gt 80 Other wall and floors gt 90 Wet areas and bench tops 100 Pattern of distribution of adhesive As described in AS 3958 1 clause 5 6 4 3 Verify by examining one tile in ten as work proceeds Wall tile spacers Do not use spacer types that inhibit the distribution of adhesive Curing Allow the adhesive to cure for the period nominated by the manufacturer prior to grouting or allowing foot traffic Mortar beds For floor tiles Either lightly dust the screeded bed surface with dry cement and trowel level until the cement is damp or spread a thin slurry of neat cement or cement based thin bed adhesive on to the tile back Do not provide mortar after initial set has occurred Nominal thickness 20 to 40 mm Thick reinforced beds Place mortar bed in two layers and incorporate the mesh reinforcement in the first layer 3 8 CONTROL OF MOVEMENT General General Provide control joints carried through the tile and the bedding to AS 3958 1 clause 5 4 5 and as follows Floor location Over structural control joints To divide complex room plans into rectangles Around the perimeter
8. 1 Place anything in this stairway or any associated passageway leading to the exterior of the building which may impede the free passage of persons or 2 Interfere with or cause obstruction or impediment to the normal operation of fire doors providing access to this stairway or 3 Remove damage or otherwise interfere with this notice Letter height minimum 20 mm title 3 mm rest Sign type Engraved and filled in contrasting colours Compliance BCA ACT D1 101 Fire hose reels and fire hydrants Position Cupboard door or adjacent the FHR Message FIRE HOSE REEL and or FIRE HYDRANT Letter height minimum External cabinets 75 mm Internal cabinets 50 mm Sign type White adhesive backed vinyl Compliance AS 2441 AS 2419 1 BCA E1 3 and BCA E1 4 NATSPEC 270 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0581b Signs and display Fire brigade booster assembly cabinet location sign Position Cabinet doors Message FIRE HYDRANT BOOSTER or FIRE HYDRANT AND SPRINKLER BOOSTER or COMBINED FIRE HYDRANT AND SPRINKLER BOOSTER as appropriate If a feed fire hydrant is enclosed in the cabinet add the symbol FH within a 100 mm circle of thickness and colour to match lettering Letter height minimum 50 mm Sign type Adhesive backed vinyl Compliance AS 2419 1 clause 7 10 1 Fire brigade booster assem
9. Evaluation of formed surfaces General If evaluation of formed surface tolerance or colour is required complete the evaluation before surface treatment Surface repairs Method If surface repairs are required submit proposals Finishing methods General If soffits of concrete elements or faces of concrete columns are to have a finish other than an off form finish provide details of proposed procedures Blasted finishes Abrasive Blast the cured surface using hard sharp graded abrasive particles until the coarse aggregate is in uniform relief Light abrasive Blast the cured surface using hard sharp graded abrasive particles to provide a uniform matt finish without exposing the coarse aggregate Bush hammered finish Remove the minimum matrix using bush hammering to expose the coarse aggregate recessing the matrix no deeper than half the aggregate size to give a uniform texture Exposed aggregate finish Remove the vertical face formwork while the concrete is green Wet the surface and scrub using stiff fibre or wire brushes using clean water freely until the aggregate is uniformly exposed Do not use acid etching Rinse the surface with clean water Floated finishes Sand floated finish Remove the vertical face formwork while the concrete is green Wet the surface and rub using a wood float Rub fine sand into the surface until a uniform colour and texture are produced Grout floated finish Remove the vertical
10. Key material Pin tumbler locks Nickel alloy not brass Lever locks Malleable cast iron or mild steel Keying system Requirement Provide a keying system in conformance with the Key codes schedule Coding of locks If window locks are included in building key code groups provide cylinder or pin tumbler locks coded accordingly Number of keys table Code Key type Minimum number of keys KD Locks keyed to differ 2 for each lock KA Locks keyed alike 2 locks in code group 4 8 10 locks in code group 6 11 40 locks in code group 10 41 and over locks in code group 1 for every 4 locks or part thereof 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Glazing General Install the glass so that Each piece is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials Building movements are not transferred to the glass External glazing is watertight and airtight Temporary marking Use a method which does not harm the glass Remove marking on completion Toughened glass Do not cut work or permanently mark after toughening Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non resilient materials Heat absorbing glass In locations exposed to direct sunlight provide wheel cut edges free from damage or blemishes with minimum feather
11. On site preservative treated members before being concealed Post holes foundations before placing concrete Bolts after final tightening 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Certification Design If design by the contractor is required submit independent certification by a professional engineer of the design and documentation and of the erected work for compliance with AS 1720 1 and project performance criteria Shop drawings General Submit shop drawings showing the following Marking plans Arrangement of members Location of the members in the building Loading parameters and bracing lengths assumed in the design Species stress grade strength group and joint group of timber Size of each member Tolerances on member sizes Joint details including connector plates Lifting points NATSPEC 188 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0381 Structural timber Method of fixing and bracing Preservative treatment if any Long term deflection Moisture content at time of manufacture Method of fabrication Precamber For pole construction Pole footing hole diameter and pole embedment length Glued laminated timber Show the following additional information Design stresses Appearance grade Service class Strength grade Precamber Contractor design For items designed by the contractor submit independent certification of shop details by a pro
12. Pigments Pigments for coloured grout Provide colourfast pigments compatible with the grout material For cement based grouts provide inorganic mineral pigments or lime proof synthetic metallic oxides compatible with cement Water General Clean and free from any deleterious matter Grout to resin terrazzo tiles Resinous material supplied by the tile supplier 2 4 PAVERS Standard Masonry units pavers and flags To AS NZS 4455 2 NATSPEC 115 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0275b Segmental pavers mortar bed Sandstone flagging Description Provide sound stone flags of uniform quality Reject flags with the following defects liable to affect strength and durability vents cracks fissures seams porous inclusions foreign material loose surface material and discolouration Matching Select for optimum matching of colour and pattern Split flagging thickness Minimum 50 mm maximum 75 mm Face size Utilise smaller sizes for pathways and larger sizes for open areas and maintain traditional stone flagging appearance Stone setts Description Igneous stone cubed cobble style setts 2 5 OTHER MATERIALS Tactile ground surface indicators Standard To AS NZS 1428 4 1 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SUBSTRATES Drying and shrinkage General Before paving allow at least the following times to elapse for curing and initial shrinkage for these substrates Concrete slabs 28 days Toppin
13. 1 6 TOLERANCES Formwork Plumb of elements 8 m high 1 in 1000 Plumb of elements lt 8 m high To AS 3610 1 Position Construct formwork so that finished concrete conforms to AS 3600 clause 17 5 and the Formwork dimensional deviation schedule Reinforcement Fabrication and fixing To AS 3600 clause 17 2 Reinforcement and tendon position To AS 3600 clause 17 5 3 Finishes Surface quality of formed surfaces Conforming to the surface finish requirements of AS 3610 1 Table 3 3 2 for the surface class nominated in the Formed surface finishes schedule Flatness of unformed surfaces Conforming to the Flatness tolerance class table for the class of finish nominated using a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction Flatness tolerance class table Class Measurement Maximum deviation mm A 3 m straight edge 3 B 3 m straight edge 6 C 600 mm straight edge 6 1 7 SUBMISSIONS Calculations Design Submit structural performance calculations Certification Formwork execution certification Submit certification by a professional engineer experienced in formwork design and construction verifying conformance of the completed formwork including the suitability of the formwork for the documented surface finish class Design Loading Submit details of proposed construction systems loads and procedures including propping and re shoring Execution details Re shoring If re shoring is intende
14. 2 1 GENERAL General Care Handle store mix and apply all protective coatings in conformance with the manufacturer s recommendations Original containers Provide coating products in unopened containers bearing the brand name and name of the manufacturer with a clearly legible batch number Ambient temperature range for storage 15 C to 25 Use by date Use products with limited shelf life before their use by date unless written authorisation from the coating manufacturer s technical services section is provided Proprietary products Requirement Provide all products in the Protective paint coating schedule from the one manufacturer s supply 3 EXECUTION 3 4 GENERAL General Product warnings Conform to the requirements and recommendations of product MSDS s 3 2 PROTECTION Surroundings Protection Prevent the release of abrasive overspray or paint waste debris to air ground or to any watercourse Repair or clean affected surrounding areas Damage Prevent damage to other assets services or equipment Contamination Coating contamination Prevent contamination of coatings contaminated from abrasive or other foreign matter Surfaces Prevent contamination of coated surfaces which are not yet dry from blasting dust abrasive or surface preparation debris Post application care General Provide protection to the coating against physical chemical or atmospheric damage until all components are fully cured Care Stac
15. 3 4 COMPLETION Cleaning General Vacuum clean the area and protect with fabric drop sheets Do not use plastic sheeting NATSPEC 322 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0657 Resin based seamless flooring 0657 RESIN BASED SEAMLESS FLOORING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Apply resin based floor finishes to substrates as documented that satisfy the product performance requirements for the stated warranty life 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Resin based seamless floor finish Any combination of a resin based flooring system that combines two pack resins with or without an aggregate to provide a continuous floor coating without joints except those that may already exist in the substrate Substrate The surface to which a material or product is applied Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply MMA Methyl methylacrylate 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following Completion of substrate preparation Completion of each coat in the flooring system Completed application 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Samples Resin based flooring generally Build up a sample on
16. Aluminium doors Application Provide aluminium hinges for aluminium doors or for doors of other materials in aluminium frames of a weight of 40 kg or less to Hinge table B Hinge table B Nominal hinge size Door leaf weight kg Minimum construction L x W x T mm approx Knuckles Screws hinge leaf 100 x 70 x 3 s 30 3 3 100 x 80 x 8 5 s 50 5 4 130x 50x 3 4 lt 75 Interfold 3 NATSPEC 231 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0455 Door hardware 2 4 DOOR HANGING SYSTEMS General General Provide sliding door tracks in conformance with the Sliding track schedule 2 5 ANCILLARIES Bolts General Provide bolts including barrel bolts flush bolts and tower bolts with keepers including lock plates staples ferrules or floor sockets Mortar guards General For steel door frame installations provide mortar guards designed to enable the full extension of the lock tongue or similar devices and the correct operation of the locking mechanism Rebated doors General For mortice locks or latches to rebated doors provide purpose made rebated pattern items Strike plates General Use strike plates provided with the locks or latches Do not provide universal strike plates 2 6 DOOR CONTROLLERS Standard General To AS 4145 5 General Performance Provide door controllers pivots flow or overhead door closers and automatic door operators which are suita
17. Application to aluminium and aluminium alloy substrates for architectural applications To AS 3715 Application to metal substrates other than aluminium for architectural applications To AS 4506 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Substrate The surface to which a material or product is applied Powder coating The process of applying a thermoset powder coat to a substrate Thermoset powder coat A mixture of finely ground particles of pigment and resin sprayed on to the substrate The charged powder particles adhere to the electrically grounded surfaces until heated and fused into a smooth coating in a curing oven Thermoset polyester powder coat Uses an enhanced polyester resin Thermoset fluoropolymer coat Factory applied spray coatings on aluminium products includes PVF polyvinyl fluoride and PTFE poly tetra fluoro ethylene coatings 2 EXECUTION 2 1 PREPARATION Substrate pre treatment and application Power coating to aluminium To AS 3715 Appendix G Power coating to metals other than aluminium To AS 4506 Appendix I 2 2 CLEANING Architectural aluminium applications Completed assembly Clean to AS 3715 Appendix C NATSPEC 361 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0702 Mechanical design and install 0702 MECHANICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Ref
18. Coating system Type Provide the coating system as documented Quality Provide premium quality lines Combinations Do not combine clear finishes from different manufacturers in a coating system Provide only the combinations of filler stain and sealer recommended by the manufacturer of the top coats Delivery Deliver all products to the site in the manufacturer s labelled and unopened containers 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Protection Extent Protect immediate area against damage during sanding and finishing Openings Cover any openings such as general power outlets switches and air grilles Lighting General Provide supplementary lighting to allow close examination of the entire process Substrate General Do not commence sanding until Adhesives have cured Floor heating has been switched off for 48 hours Filler has dried as indicated by the colour fading Before finishing Make sure substrates are clean and free of any deposit which may impair the following Application of the coating system Adhesion of resilient finishes NATSPEC 320 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0656 Floor sanding and finishing Preparation General Punch nails 3 mm below the surface Remove items protruding from floor such as staples nails and tacks Fill open grained timber with materials compatible with those used in subsequent finishing operations 3 2 SANDING Sanding proc
19. Depth 600 mm from finished ground level to the top of the object Compaction Eliminate voids Mulch Seed free aerial vegetative matter Put through a chipper Reduce to pieces not larger than 75 x 50 x 15 mm and stockpile for re use as mulch Material not permitted Leaf matter and tree loppings from privet camphor laurel coral tree poplar willow and noxious weeds 2 12 COMPLETION Joining up Abutments Join new and existing work including cutting if required in the manner appropriate to the materials and make good to existing work NATSPEC 72 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0221b Site management Clean up Progressive cleaning Keep the work under the contract clean and tidy as it proceeds and regularly remove from the site rubbish and surplus material arising from the execution of the work including any work performed during the defects liability period or the plant establishment period Removal of plant Within fourteen days of the date of practical completion remove temporary works construction plant buildings workshops and equipment not forming part of the works except what is required for work during the defects liability period or the plant establishment period which shall be removed on completion of that work 2 13 VERMIN Vermin management Requirement Employ an approved firm of pest exterminators and provide a certificate from the firm stating that the completed build
20. Emergencies If mixing by hand is carried out provide details Plant Mix concrete in a plant located on the construction site Pre mixed supply Addition of water Do not add water Transport Make sure that the mode of transport prevents segregation loss of material and contamination of the environment and does not adversely affect placing or compaction Concrete delivery docket For each batch submit a docket listing the information required by AS 1379 clause 1 7 3 and the following information Any binders or additives Method of placement and climate conditions during pour Name of concrete delivery supervisor The concrete element or part of the works for which the concrete was ordered and where it was placed 3 4 INSTALLATION Junctions with existing pavements Trimming Where the pavement is to be joined to an existing pavement remove a strip of the existing pavement at least 300 mm wide for its full depth and trim the edge vertically before placing new pavement material Existing sealed pavement Trim the seal to a neat edge Fixed formwork Description Steel forms Seasoned dressed timber planks free of warps bends or kinks with the full width of their top edges covered with steel angle sections finishing flush with the form face Depth Equal to the edge thickness of the slab and in one piece Tolerances on position Absolute level tolerance 5 mm maximum departure of top surface from the
21. Excessive projections are removed Voids and hollows gt 10 mm with abrupt edges are filled with a cement sand mix not stronger than the substrate or weaker than the bedding Laying pattern Stretcher bond with edges tightly butted Fixing Adhesive fixed directly to the concrete floor slab Under suspended concrete slab rigid insulation Product type Rigid cellular extruded sheets Joints Apply reinforced foil tape to all joints Under suspended concrete slab bulk insulation Product type Fibre batts Fixing Mechanical fasteners and support mesh or nylon twine Pliable membrane Fixing Install as follows To timber Proprietary fixings or metallic coated clouts or staples at 300 mm maximum centres To steel Hex head screws with either 20 mm diameter washers or fixed through hardboard strips Overlap minimum 150 mm and adhesive tape fix Support mesh 300 x 150 mm mesh size of 2 mm wire gauge to AS NZS 4389 3 8 WALL INSULATION Framed wall thermal break strips Product type Proprietary item Application To steel or timber framing with lightweight external cladding R value 2 0 2 Screw fixing Button head screws at 1 m centres Adhesive fixing Wallboard adhesive walnuts at 1 m centres Framed walls bulk insulation Product type Fibre batts Installation Friction fit between framing members If other support is not provided staple nylon twine to the framing and stretch tight Masonry veneer c
22. Green Star Office v3 VOC Limits MAX g litre DULUX Products VOC g litre Untinted Product Type compared to the GBCA Specification Trim Exterior Semi 75 Dulux Weathershield lt 60 Gloss Semi Gloss Acrylic Trim Exterior Low 75 Dulux Weathershield lt 55 Sheen Low Sheen Acrylic Timber Primer 30 Dulux Professional lt 1 Enviros Acrylic Sealer Undercoat ASU Timber Primer 30 Dulux Acrylic Sealer lt 5 Undercoat eco choice lt 1 Dulux Professional Enviro Acrylic Sealer Undercoat ASU Binding Primer 30 Dulux Professional lt 5 EnvirO2 Water Based Sealer Binder Latex primer for 60 Dulux Galvanised Iron lt 40 galvanised iron and Primer zincalume Latex primer for 60 Dulux Quit Rust lt 60 galvanised iron and Galvanised Iron Primer zincalume Interior Latex Undercoat 65 Dulux Professional lt 1 Enviro Acrylic Sealer Undercoat ASU Interior Latex Undercoat 65 Dulux Acrylic Sealer lt 5 Undercoat eco choice Exterior Latex Undercoat 65 Dulux One Step Acrylic lt 60 Primer Sealer Undercoat PSU Interior Sealer 65 Dulux Professional lt 1 Enviros Acrylic Sealer Undercoat ASU Interior Sealer 65 Dulux Luxafloor Eco2 lt 10 clear One and two pack 140 Dulux Luxafloor Eco2 lt 10 performance coatings for Feast Watson lt 100 floors EnviroMax Clear timber finish 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Standards General To AS NZS 2311 Sections
23. Hexagon screws Grades A and B To AS 1110 2 Hexagon screws Grade C To AS 1111 2 Hexagon socket screws To AS 1420 and AS NZS 1421 Machine screws To AS NZS 1427 Self drilling screws To AS 3566 1 and AS 3566 2 Self tapping screws Crossed recessed countersunk flat common head style To AS NZS 4407 Crossed recessed pan To AS NZS 4406 Crossed recessed raised countersunk oval To AS NZS 4408 Hexagon To AS NZS 4402 Hexagon flange To AS NZS 4410 Hexagon washer To AS NZS 4409 Slotted countersunk flat common head style To AS NZS 4404 Slotted pan To AS NZS 4403 Slotted raised countersunk oval common head style To AS NZS 4405 Blind rivets Description Expanding end type with snap mandrel Type Closed end for external application open end for internal application End material Aluminium base alloy for metallic coated or colourbond coated steel Stainless steel for stainless steel sheet Copper for copper sheet Size For sheet metal to sheet metal 3 mm For sheet metal to supports brackets and rolled steel angles 4 8 mm Performance Loads Provide fasteners capable of transmitting the loads imposed and sufficient to make sure the rigidity of the assembly 3 EXECUTION 3 1 ADHESIVES Preparation Substrates Make sure substrates are Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion If framed or discontinuous support members are
24. NATSPEC 292 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0621 Waterproofing wet areas 3 4 COMPLETION Protection General Keep traffic off membrane surfaces until bonding has set or for 24 hours after laying whichever period is the longer Reinstatement Repair or replace faulty or damaged work If the work cannot be repaired satisfactorily replace the whole area affected Warranty Waterproofing Cover materials and workmanship in the terms of the warranty in the form of interlocking warranties from the supplier and the applicator Form Against failure of materials and execution under normal environment and use conditions Period As offered by the supplier NATSPEC 293 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling 0631B CERAMIC TILING 1 GENERAL 1 34 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide tiling systems to walls floors and other substrates as documented and as follows Consistent in colour and finish Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the installation Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plumb To direct all water flowing from supply points to drainage outlets without leakage to the substrate or adjacent areas 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS Tiling Gen
25. Nailing plates General Where timber joists rafters or purlins bear on or into steel members provide nailing plates to transfer the design loads bolted to the steel member at 500 mm maximum centres and 100 mm maximum from the end of the nailing plate Nailing plates General Where timber joists rafters or purlins bear on or into steel members provide 50 mm thick nailing plates bolted to the steel member at 500 mm maximum centres Beam framing Ridge straps Butt ends of rafters together at ridge and strap each pair together with 900 mm long Steel strap passing over the ridge triple nailed to each rafter Roof space If a water container or heater is located in the roof space provide a support platform to AS NZS 3500 4 clause 5 5 Additional support Provide a frame member behind every joint in fibre cement sheeting or lining Anti ponding boards Standard To AS NZS 4200 2 3 5 COMPLETION Tightening General Tighten bolts screws and other fixings so that joints and anchorages are secure at the date of practical completion NATSPEC 197 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0383 Sheet flooring and decking 0383 SHEET FLOORING AND DECKING 1 GENERAL 1 1 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 2 STANDARD General Flooring and decking To AS 1684 2 AS 1684 3 or AS 1684 4 as appropriate 1 3 INTERPRETATION Definiti
26. Return legs at least 50 mm on each wall Overlap shower tray upstands at least 50 mm Do not penetrate flashing with wall lining fasteners Reinforcement At coves corners and wall floor junctions with gaps greater than 3 mm reinforce liquid applied membranes with reinforcement fabric tape recommended by the membrane manufacturer Fold the tape in half lengthways and imbed it in the first flashing coat of membrane with one half of the tape on each side of the corner or joint Apply a second coat of liquid membrane to seal the fabric Door jambs and architraves Requirement If the bottom of doorjambs and architraves do not finish above the floor tiling waterproof their surfaces below tile level to provide a continuous seal between the perimeter flashing to the wall floor junction and the water stop angle Drainage connections Floor wastes Provide floor wastes of sufficient height to accommodate the thickness of floor finishes and bedding at the outlet position Position drainage flange to drain at membrane level Turn membrane down 50 mm minimum into the floor waste drainage flanges and adhere to form a waterproof connection Floor wastes in shower trays Provide drainage of the tile bed and a waterproof connection between the tray and the drain Preformed drainage channels with continuous drainage flanges Provide a continuous waterproof connection between the membrane and the channel Preformed drainage channels without drainage fla
27. Transit Prevent spillage of demolished materials in transit Contractor NATSPEC 63 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0201b Demolition 3 EXECUTION 3 4 SUPPORT Temporary support General If temporary support is required certification for its design and installation is required from a professional engineer engaged by the contractor Existing buildings Until permanent support is provided provide temporary support for sections of existing buildings which are to be altered and which normally rely for support on work to be demolished Ground support Support excavations for demolition of underground structures Adjacent structures Provide supports to adjacent structures where necessary sufficient to prevent damage resulting from the works Lateral supports Provide lateral support equal to that given by the structure to be demolished Vertical supports Provide vertical support equal to that given by the structure to be demolished Permanent supports General If permanent supports for adjacent structures are necessary and are not documented give notice and obtain instructions 3 2 PROTECTION Encroachment General Prevent the encroachment of demolished materials onto adjoining property including public places Weather protection General If walls or roofs are opened for alterations and additions or the surfaces of adjoining buildings are exposed provide temporary
28. WET AREAS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide wet area waterproofing systems which Are graded to floor wastes to dispose of water without ponding Prevent moisture entering the substrate or adjacent areas Selections As documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS Wet areas Standard To AS 3740 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 3740 and the following apply Substrates The surface to which a material or product is applied Bond breaker A system preventing a membrane bonding to the substrate bedding or lining Membranes Impervious barriers to liquid water which may be Installed below floor finishes Installed behind the wall sheeting or render and termed External Installed to the face of the wall sheeting or render and termed Internal Applied in liquid or gel form and air cured to form a seamless film Applied in sheet form with joints lapped and sealed Preformed shower base A preformed prefinished vessel including integral upstands installed as the finished floor of a shower compartment and provided with a connection point to a sanitary drainage system Shower tray An internal or external liquid or sheet membrane system used to waterproof the floor and the wall floor junctions of a shower area Waterproof
29. low VOC B7a B7a Semi gloss latex Exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Weatherboard Dulux 1 Step Dulux Dulux SD 5035 hardboard cladding Acrylic Primer Weathershield Weathershield Undercoat B10A Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a B8a Fibre cement Dulux Dulux Optional Dulux SD 2034 products Weathershield Weathershield Weathershield Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a B8a B8a Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Dulux SD 3424 veneers Acrylic Primer Weathershield Weathershield Undercoat B10A Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a B8a Concrete OFC tilt Dulux Dulux Dulux Optional SD 2577 slab or pre cast Weathershield Weathershield Weathershield Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a B8a B8a Concrete OFC tilt Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 0770 slab or pre cast 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 High build Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller performance Finish B38a Finish B38a coating system Cement render Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 4029 High build 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 performance Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller coating system Finish B38a Finish B38a Clay brick and Dulux Dulux Dulux Optional SD 2577 masonry Weathershield Weathershield Weathershield Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss
30. 6 Painter 82 50 7 Metal worker 112 50 8 Electrical Refer to clause 1 4 9 Hydraulic Refer to clause 1 3 10 Plumber 135 00 11 Mechanical Refer to clause 1 5 13 Foreperson or site supervisor 165 00 14 Project manager 130 00 195 00 Trade Item Unit Rate Masonry Single skin brick wall m 115 Masonry Single skin blockwork wall hollow m 135 Masonry Single skin blockwork wall core filled m 225 Roofing Stratco roof sheeting m 80 Roofing Stratco 900 Colorbond downpipes Lm 56 Roofing Stratco flat back half round 150 Colorbond downpipes Lm 73 Windows Skylights no 800 Windows Aluminium windows m 400 Windows Extra over for white laminated glazing m 147 Windows Flyscreens black aluminium mesh m 50 O NATSPEC 4 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES Doors Aluminium glazed bi folds Lm 1 145 Paint Painting internal walls m 14 Paint Painting external walls m 14 Paint Painting ceilings and soffits m 14 Cladding Weathertex cladding m 130 Cladding Rendering m 35 Tiling Wall tiling m 85 Tiling Floor tiling m 135 Tiling Feature tiling m 390 Floors Carpet with underlay m 85 Floors Timber boards with underlay m 125 Floors Skirting Lm 19 Ceiling Ceiling lining m 43 Ceiling Access panel no 250 Fixtures Shower screens m 450 Waterproofing Retaining walls m 55 Wat
31. Architect Demolished material for recycling in the works schedule Material Nil Demolished material for recycling off site schedule Material Refer to demolition plan Dismantle for relocation schedule Item Location for storage Location for re assembly Nil N A N A Demolish for removal schedule Item Refer to demolition plan NATSPEC 66 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0221b Site management 0221B SITE MANAGEMENT 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Designated areas for protection Existing front wall and associated hedging Incidental works Generally Undertake the following Reinstatement Reinstate undeveloped ground surfaces to the condition existing at the commencement of the contract Minor trimming As required to complete the works as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Clearance authority Any authority covering statutory requirements relating to the project and requiring clearances for work in that particular area Clearances A formal certificate approval or condition issued by a statutory authority to allow work to be carried out in a particular area Contaminatio
32. Branding Brand structural timber under the authority of a recognised product certification program applicable to the product Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works For timbers not covered by the branding provisions of Australian standards or regulations for which branding is required include the following data Stress grade Method of grading Seasoned or as s The certification mark of the product certification program The applicable standard Certification Forest certification chain of custody and product labelling to the Timber products finishes and treatment worksection Fascias and barge boards Hardwood To AS 2796 1 Seasoned cypress pine To AS 1810 Softwood To AS 4785 1 Preservation treatment To the Timber products finishes and treatment worksection Fascia dimensions NATSPEC 194 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0382 Light timber framing Refer to architectural drawings Barge board dimensions Refer to architectural drawings 2 2 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER AND GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER Laminated veneer lumber Standard To AS NZS 4357 0 Glued laminated timber Standard To AS NZS 1328 1 2 3 SHEET PRODUCTS Structural plywood Standard To AS NZS 2269 0 Bond Type A to AS NZS 2754 1 Int Veneer Veneer quality to visible surfaces CD minimum to AS NZS 2269 0 Identification Branding To AS NZS 2269
33. Clean and free from any deleterious matter 3 EXECUTION 3 4 PREPARATION Substrates General Provide substrates as follows Clean and free from any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of plaster f framed or discontinuous support members in full lengths without splicing If solid or continuous remove excessive projections hacked off and fill voids and hollows with plaster stronger than the first coat and not weaker than the substrate Absorbent substrates If suction is excessive control it by dampening without over wetting and do not plaster substrates showing surface moisture Dense concrete If not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key roughen by scabbling or the like to remove 2 mm of the laitance and expose the aggregate before applying a bonding treatment Painted surfaces Remove paint and hack the surface at close intervals Untrue substrates If the substrate is not sufficiently true to ensure conformity with the thickness limits for the plaster system or has excessively uneven suction resulting from variations in the composition of the substrate apply additional coats without exceeding the thickness limits for the substrate or system Beads Location Fix beads as follows Angle beads At all external corners Drip beads At all lower terminations of external plaster Beads for control of movement At all control joints Stop beads At all terminations of plaster and junctions wit
34. Finishing Visible joints Finish visible joints made by welding brazing or soldering using methods appropriate to the class of work including grinding or buffing before further treatment such as painting galvanizing or electroplating Make sure self finished metals are without surface colour variations after jointing Preparation General Before applying decorative or protective prefinishes to metal components complete welding cutting drilling and other fabrication and prepare the surface using a suitable method Standard To AS 1627 Priming steel surfaces If site painting is specified to otherwise uncoated mild steel or similar surfaces prime as follows After fabrication and before delivery to the works After installation repair damaged priming and complete the coverage to unprimed surfaces Welding Aluminium To AS 1665 Stainless steel To AS NZS 1554 6 Steel To AS NZS 1554 1 3 2 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES Preassembly Mechanically polished and brushed finishes Apply grit faced belts or fibre brushes that achieve uni directional finishes with buffing as required to provide the following Bead blasted finish Provide a uniform non directional low reflective surface by bead blasting Do not use sand iron or carbon steel shot Blast both sides of austenitic grades or stainless steel to eqalise induced stress Post assembly pre treatment Heat discolouration Remove by pickling Welds Grind excess material
35. Key ASU Acrylic Sealer Undercoat NE No Equivalent PSU Primer Sealer Undercoat Low VOC products are noted in the Table Use is discouraged in favour of water based paints because of environmental concerns These paints have either limited availability or low requirement in the Building Industry DuluxGroup Dulux paint type reference table Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu Dulux PDS No AS NZS Standard x material 2311 PRN description Semi gloss solvent Dulux Super DD0028 B3 AS 3730 5 NATSPEC 330 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu Dulux PDS No AS NZS Standard x material 2311 PRN description borne interior Enamel Semi Gloss Semi gloss water Dulux Aquanamel DD1281 B41 NE borne interior Semi Gloss exterior trim alt low VOC B8b Gloss solvent Dulux Spray Pak DDOOO9 B4 NE borne aerosols Full gloss solvent Dulux Super DD0145 B5a AS 3730 6 borne exterior Enamel Full Gloss Full gloss solvent Dulux Super DD0026 B5b AS 3730 6 borne interior Enamel Full Gloss Full gloss water Dulux Aquanamel DD1282 B42 NE borne Gloss interior exterior trim low VOC alt B9b Flat latex exterior Dulux DD1450 B6a AS 3730 7 Weathershield Matt Acrylic low VOC Flat latex interior Dulux Wash amp DD1095 B6b AS 3730 1 Wear 101 Adv Flat Acryl
36. Provide proprietary support systems of metallic coated steel construction Vertical pipes Provide anchors and guides to maintain long pipes in position and supports to balance the mass of the pipe and its contents Saddles Do not provide saddle type supports for pipes gt DN 25 NATSPEC 25 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Dissimilar metals If pipe and support materials are dissimilar provide industrial grade electrically non conductive material securely bonded to the pipe to separate them Provide fixings of electrolytically compatible material Uninsulated pipes Clamp piping supports directly to pipes Insulated pipes Spacers Provide spacers at least as thick as the insulation between piping supports and pipes Extend either side of the support by at least 20 mm Spacer material Rigid insulation material of sufficient strength to support the piping and suitable for the temperature application Support spacing Cold and heated water pipes To AS NZS 3500 1 Table 5 2 Provide additional brackets clips or hangers to prevent pipe movement caused by water pressure effects Sanitary plumbing To AS NZS 3500 2 Table 9 1 Fuel gas To AS NZS 5601 1 Table 5 5 Other pipes To AS NZS 3500 1 Table 5 2 Hangers Conform to the Hanger size table Hanger size table Nominal pipe size DN Minimum hanger diameter mm for single hangers lt
37. Sealer Undercoat low VOC DD1192 Undercoat solvent borne Dulux 1 Step Cil Based Primer Sealer Undercoat DD1227 B17 AS 3730 14 Undercoat latex exterior Dulux 1 Step Acrylic Primer Sealer Undercoat low VOC Dulux Acratex Water Based 501 1 DD1192 DD0441 B17a AS 3730 18 Undercoat latex interior Dulux 1 Step Acrylic Primer Sealer Undercoat low VOC Dulux Acrylic Sealer Undercoat eco choice low VOC DD1192 DD1402 B17a AS 3730 18 Wood Stain spirit Feast Watson Prooftint DW0729 B18a NE Wood Stain oil Cabot s Interior Stain Feast Watson Woodshield int ext DW0661 DW 1248 B18b Wood Stain latex Cabot s Woodcraft Stain interior low VOC Intergrain Natural Stain exterior low VOC DW0662 DW0758 Bi8c NE Interior clear varnish solvent based one pack Cabot s Cabothane Gloss Cabot s Cabothane Satin Cabot s Stain amp Varnish Satin Cabot s Stain amp Varnish Gloss Feast Watson Floorclear Satin Feast Watson Floorclear Gloss Feast Watson Stain amp Varnish Satin Feast Watson Stain amp Varnish Gloss Feast Watson DW0669 DW0668 DW 1292 DW0664 DW0737 DW0736 DW1295 DW 1294 DW0726 DW0727 DW0730 B19 AS 3730 25 or AS 3730 27 for floors NATSPEC 333 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671
38. Section 8 Grade to AS 2796 2 Select Softwood To AS 4785 1 Section 7 Seasoned cypress pine To AS 1810 Section 5 Preservative treatment Timber type Provide only timbers with preservative treatment appropriate to the Hazard class Cut surfaces Provide supplementary preservative treatment to all cut and damaged surfaces CCA treated timber If proposed to be used provide details 22 STEEL Steel tubes Posts rails stays and pickets To AS NZS 1163 Grade C 350 LO Wire Cable wire tie wire and barbed wire To AS 2423 NATSPEC 91 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0242b Landscape fences and barriers 2 3 CONCRETE General Standard To AS 1379 Exposure classification To AS 3600 Table 4 3 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY Set out General Set out the fence line and mark the positions of posts gates and bracing panels Property boundaries Confirm by survey Clearing Fence line Except trees or shrubs to be retained clear vegetation within 1 metre of the fence alignment Grub out the stumps and roots of removed trees or shrubs and trim the grass to ground level but do not remove the topsoil Excavation Posts Excavate post holes so that they have vertical sides and a firm base Spread surplus material on the principal s side of the fence Erection Line and level Erect posts vertically Set heights to follow the contours of natural ground E
39. Standard To AS NZS 2699 2 Corrosion protection To AS NZS 2699 2 Flashings and damp proof courses Standard To AS NZS 2904 Slip joints Standard To AS 3700 clause 4 13 O NATSPEC 160 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0331b Brick and block construction Material Refer to structural engineer s specification 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL Mortar mixing General Measure volumes accurately to the documented proportions Machine mix for at least six minutes Protection from contamination General Protect masonry materials and components from ground moisture and contamination Bond Type Stretcher bond Building in Embedded items Build in wall ties and accessories as the construction proceeds If it is not practicable to obtain the required embedment wholly in the mortar joint in hollow masonry units fill appropriate cores with grout or mortar Steel door frames Fill the backs of jambs and heads solid with mortar as the work proceeds Clearance for timber frame shrinkage General In timber frame brick veneer construction leave clearances between window frames and brick sill and between roof frames and the brick veneer as follows Additional clearance To accommodate additional shrinkage of unseasoned floor timbers Single storey frames and ground floor windows not for slab on ground 10 mm Two storey frames and upper floor windows 20 mm Consiruction at different rates
40. Timber doorsets Install butt hinges in housings equal in depth to the thickness of the hinge leaf except for hinges designed for mounting without housing and fix with countersunk screws 3 2 COMPLETION Adjustment General Leave the hardware properly adjusted with working parts in working order and clean undamaged properly adjusted and lubricated where appropriate Automatic door operators Maintain and adjust the system throughout the defects liability period Keys Contractor s keys Immediately before practical completion replace or reset cylinders to which the contractor has had key access during construction and make sure the exclusion of the contractor s keys Maintenance Manual Submit the manufacturer s published recommendations for use care and maintenance of the hardware provided Product warranties Warranty Cover materials and workmanship in the terms of the warranty in the form of interlocking warranties from the manufacturer or distributor and the applicator 4 SELECTIONS 4 4 SELECTION SCHEDULE General door hardware requirements Product Refer to architectural drawings 4 2 PADLOCK SCHEDULE Padlock schedule Property Room or space group Room or space group Room or space group 1 2 3 Room or space type Security Keying security Durability Corrosion resistance 4 3 KEYING SCHEDULE Keying requirements Requirement Provide door hardware and keys based on the Key c
41. Time and a half 136 36 Double time 181 82 Percentage additional to trade prices of materials inclusive of 5 1096 handling and deliver costs NATSPEC 11 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES NATSPEC 12 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0142 Preliminaries ABIC SW 2008 0142 PRELIMINARIES ABIC SW 2008 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL General conditions General To ABIC SW 2008 Simple Works Contract issued by the Australian Institute of Architects and Master Builders Australia Interpretation Cross reference The clause INTERPRETATION in the General requirements worksection also applies 1 2 THE SITE Protection of persons and property Temporary works Provide and maintain required hoardings barricades guards fencing shoring temporary roadways footpaths signs lighting watching and traffic flagging Accessways services Do not obstruct or damage roadways and footpaths drains and watercourses and other existing services in use on or adjacent to the site Determine the location of such services Property Do not interfere with or damage property which is to remain on or adjacent to the site including adjoining property encroaching onto the site and trees Control of run off stormwater Control stormwater runoff as required by development consent and any other regulatory requirements Rectification Accessways
42. distribute variations in hue colour or pattern uniformly by mixing pavers or paving batches before laying Paving joints Joint widths Set out pavers to give uniform joint widths of 6 to 12 mm NATSPEC 116 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0275b Segmental pavers mortar bed Margins General Provide whole or purpose made pavers at margins where practicable otherwise set out to give equal margins of cut pavers If margins less than half paver width are unavoidable locate the cut pavers where they are least conspicuous Protection Traffic Keep pedestrian and vehicular traffic off paving until the bedding has set and attained its working strength Cleaning Keep the work clean as it proceeds and protect finished work from damage 3 4 MORTAR BEDDING Preparation of pavers Suction Soak porous pavers in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has disappeared Bedding General Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the paver the substrate the conditions of service and which leave the paver firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and adhered to the substrate Form falls integral with the substrate Mortar beds Substrate preparation Either lightly dust the screeded bed surface with dry cement and trowel level until the cement is damp or spread a thin slurry of neat cement or cement based thin bed adhesive on to the tile back Do n
43. hazardous AS 1141 52 Maximum dry compressive strength on fraction passing 19 mm sieve only applies if plasticity index is less than 1 min 1 7 MPa min 1 7 MPa min 1 7 MPa min 1 7 MPa min 1 7 MPa AS 1141 14 Particle shape by proportional calliper misshapen 2 1 max 35 max 35 max 35 max 35 AS 1141 22 Aggregate wet strength min 100 kN min 80 kN min 100 kN min 80 kN AS 1141 22 Wet dry strength variation dry wet dry max 3596 max 3596 max 3596 max 3596 AS 1141 23 Los Angeles value max 3596 max 3596 max 4096 max 4096 AS 1289 6 1 1 4 day soaked CBR 9896 modified compaction min 8096 min 8096 min 8096 min 8096 min 8096 NOTES All fractions of the proposed mix must satisfy this requirement Use the fraction with the highest wet dry strength variation as the value for determining conformance Test the fraction 19 0 mm to 9 5 mm In the case of blended materials also test the fraction 9 5 mm to 4 75 mm Test any other fraction which is at risk of failing in the opinion of the Engineer Subbase material properties Subbase materials Conform to the Subbase material properties table Subbase material properties table Test method Description CRS20 CRS40 RCCS20 NGS20 NGS40 AS 1289 3 6 1 Particle size distribution AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 53
44. or suppliers recommendations General Provide and select if no selection is given transport deliver store handle protect finish adjust and prepare for use the manufactured items in conformance with the current written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier Proprietary items systems assemblies Assemble install or fix to substrate in conformance with the current written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier Project modifications Advise of activities that supplement or are contrary to manufacturers or suppliers written recommendations and instructions NATSPEC 22 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Sealed containers General If materials or products are supplied by the manufacturer in closed or sealed containers or packages bring the materials or products to point of use in the original containers or packages Prohibited materials Do not provide the following Materials listed in the Safe Work Australia Hazardous Substances Information System HSIS Materials that use chlorofluorocarbon CFC or hydro chlorofluorocarbon HCFC in the manufacturing process 2 2 TESTS Attendance General Provide attendance on tests Testing authorities General Except for site tests have tests carried out by a Registered testing authority and submit test reports Reports Submit copies of test reports includi
45. resistant types e g FRP UPVC Water Based Stain Blocker B17A Gloss Acrylic B42 amp B9 Gloss Acrylic B42 amp B9 Full gloss solvent borne Exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber and primed Dulux 1 Step Oil Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 0039 hardboard veneers Based PSU Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss solvent based B5 B5 B17 Zinc coated metals Dulux Professional Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 0381 incl HD Galvanized steel Galvanised Iron Primer B12A Enamel High Gloss BS Enamel High Gloss B5 NATSPEC 358 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref zincalume Apply 2 coats Galvabond zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel Shop primed or red Spot Prime with Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 1085 oxide primed Dulux Quit Rust All Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss ROZP ferrous Metal Primer B11 B5 B5 metal Non ferrous metals Dulux Dulux Quit Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 3451 incl aluminium Rust Etch Primer Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss brass copper tin B17A B5 B5 plate Plastics solvent Dulux Dulux Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 5052 resistant types e g PrepLock Water Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss FRP U
46. s com au Low VOC Compliance Reference table Green Star Office v3 VOC Limits MAX g litre DULUX Products VOC g litre Untinted Product Type compared to the GBCA Specification COMPLIANCE CRITERIA GBCA Specifications obtain latest figures Walls and ceilings 16 Dulux Professional lt 1 Interior Semi Gloss Enviro Interior Semi Gloss Walls and ceilings 16 Dulux Wash amp Wear 101 lt 5 Interior Semi Gloss Advanced Semi Gloss 5 Dulux Wash amp Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Semi Gloss Walls and ceilings 16 Dulux Professional lt 1 Interior Low Sheen Enviro Interior Low Sheen Walls and ceilings 16 Dulux Wash amp Wear 101 lt 5 Interior Low Sheen Advanced Low Sheen 5 Dulux Wash amp Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Low Sheen Walls and ceilings 16 Dulux Professional lt 1 Interior Flat Washable Enviro Interior Flat Walls and ceilings 16 Dulux Wash amp Wear 101 lt 5 Interior Flat Washable Advanced Flat Ceilings Interior Flat 14 Dulux Professional lt 1 Enviro Interior Flat Ceilings Interior Flat 14 Dulux White Ceiling lt 5 Paint eco choice Trim Interior Gloss 75 Dulux Aquanamel Gloss lt 74 Trim Exterior Gloss 75 Dulux Weathershield 65 Gloss Acrylic Trim Interior Semi 75 Dulux Aquanamel Semi 74 gloss Gloss NATSPEC 337 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting
47. system Paint B24 Paint B24 Paint B24 Concrete Berger Jet Dry Berger Jet Dry SD 1145 low VOC water Aqua Tread Satin Aqua Tread Satin based system B24A B24A Clear sealer for concrete Interior or Exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Concrete Berger Jet Dry Berger Jet Dry Berger Jet Dry SD 1145 domestic Aqua Tread Satin Aqua Tread Satin Aqua Tread Satin low VOC water B15a B15a B15a based system Concrete Dulux Luxafloor Dulux Luxafloor SI 3030 commercial low ECO2 B29a ECO2 B29a VOC water based system Concrete Dulux 956 1 Dulux 956 1 Optional SA 2589 NATSPEC 352 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref commercial water based system Acraglaze B15a Interior only Acraglaze B15a Interior only Dulux 956 1 Acraglaze B15a Interior only Concrete commercial solvent based system Dulux Dureseal ACS B15a Dulux Dureseal ACS B15a SI 1574 4 3 Low gloss latex Exterior EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULES Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Weatherboard Dulux 1 Step Dulux Dulux SD 5032 hardboard cladding Acrylic Primer Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Weathert
48. 0 Brand mark Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be clearly visible for certification inspections and concealed in the works 2 4 COMPONENTS Nail plated joined beams Standard To AS 4446 Type Proprietary composite member made up by butt and horizontally joining timber with pressed in nail plates Mild steel post bases Minimum dimensions Conform to AS 1684 2 Table 9 20 p and AS 1684 3 Table 9 20 p as appropriate Location To timber posts supported off concrete slabs or footings Finish Galvanize after fabrication Fasteners General Conform to the Adhesives sealants and fasteners worksection Installation Do not split or otherwise damage the timber Coating Before placing bolts in contact with CCA treated timber coat the shank of the bolt in a grease or bituminous coating Damp proof course Material To AS NZS 2904 Flashings Material To AS NZS 2904 2 5 FINGER JOINTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER General Standard To AS 5068 2 6 RECONSTITUTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER PRODUCTS Wet processed fibreboard including hardboard Standard To AS NZS 1859 4 NATSPEC 195 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0382 Light timber framing 3 EXECUTION 3 4 TRANSPORT AND DELIVERY General Handling and protection Do not distort or damage timber or timber products Moisture content Maintain the equilibrium moisture content of seasoned timber Protection from weather Gen
49. 0 mm 100 100 sieve NATSPEC 100 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0271 Pavement base and subbase Test method Description CRS40 RCCS20 NGS40 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 37 5 mm sieve CRS20 90 100 NGS20 z 95 100 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 26 5 mm sieve 100 74 97 100 100 80 97 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 19 0 mm sieve 90 100 62 86 95 100 96 100 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 13 2 mm sieve 74 96 74 95 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 9 5 mm sieve 61 85 42 66 60 90 65 90 48 85 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 4 75 mm sieve 42 66 28 50 42 76 47 80 35 73 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 2 36 mm sieve 28 50 20 39 28 60 32 67 25 58 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 0 425 mm sieve 11 27 8 21 10 28 14 42 10 33 AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 0 075 mm sieve 4 14 2 10 6 26 3 21 AS 1289 3 1 1 Liquid limit max 35 max 40 max 35 max 35 AS 1289 3 3 1 Plasticity index Areas with annual rainfall gt 500 mm max 12 max 12 max 12 max 12 Areas with annual rainfall lt 500 mm max 15 max 15 max 15 max 15 AS 1289 3 4 1 Linear shrinkage Areas with annual rainfall gt 500 mm max 4 5 max 4 5 max 4 5 max 4 5 max 4 5 Areas with annual rainfall lt 500 mm max 6 0 max 6 0 max 6 0 max 6 0 max 6 0
50. 12 14 m litre 14 m litre Tung oil Semi gloss finish Interior Timber floors Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber soft wood Toby Tung Oil Seal Toby Tung Oil Seal Toby Floor polish SW 1517 apply 8 9 m litre apply 8 9 m litre 50 80 m litre Timber hardwood Toby Tung Oil Seal Toby Tung Oil Seal Toby Floor polish SW 1517 apply 10 11 m litre apply 10 1 1 m litre 50 80 m litre Clear single pack polyurethane Interior Timber floors Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber floors low VOC water based system Intergrain Enviropro Endure 1 B39c Gloss Satin or Matt Intergrain Enviropro Endure 1 B39c Gloss Satin or Matt Intergrain Enviropro Endure 1 B39c Gloss Satin or Matt SW4012 gloss or SW4014 satin or SW4016 matt Timber floors Feast Watson Floorproof solvent based B20a Gloss or Satin Feast Watson Floorproof solvent based B20a Gloss or Satin Feast Watson Floorproof solvent based B20a Gloss or Satin SW 1332 Paving paint for co ncrete Interior or exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Concrete Berger Jet Dry Berger Jet Dry Berger Jet Dry SD 0643 solvent based Non Slip Paving Non Slip Paving Non Slip Paving
51. 1345 as appropriate otherwise black lettering on white background except as follows Danger warning labels White lettering on red background Main switch and caution labels Red lettering on white background Edges If labels exceed 1 5 mm thickness radius or bevel the edges Fixing Fix labels securely using screws rivets proprietary self adhesive labels or double sided adhesive tape and as follows If labels are mounted in extruded aluminium sections use rivets or countersunk screws to fix the extrusions Use aluminium or monel rivets for aluminium labels Label locations Locate labels so that they are easily seen and are either attached to below or next to the item being marked Labelling text and marking To correspond to terminology and identifying number of the respective item as shown on the record drawings and documents and in operating and maintenance manuals Lettering heights Danger warning and caution notices 2 10 mm for main heading 2 5 mm for remainder Equipment labels within cabinets 2 3 5 mm Equipment nameplates 2 40 mm Identifying labels on outside of cabinets 2 5 mm lsolating switches 2 5 mm Switchboards main assembly designation 2 25 mm Switchboards outgoing functional units 2 8 mm Switchboards sub assembly designations z 15 mm Valves 2 20 mm Self adhesive flexible plastic labels Labels lt 2000 mm above floor 3 mm on 6 mm wide tape Labels 2 2000 mm a
52. 2 rails for fences up to 1800 mm high and locate 200 mm from the tops and bottoms of the palings Close butt palings and nail twice to each rail Lap and cap paling fence Provide 2 rails for fences up to 1800 mm high and locate 200 mm from the bottoms of the palings and abutting the tops of palings Close butt larger palings and nail twice to each rail Fix smaller palings over joints and nail twice to each rail Nail capping to the top rail Gates Ledges and braces Match fence rails Pickets or palings Match fence Fencing for swimming pools Design construction and performance To AS 1926 1 Location of fencing for private swimming pools To AS 1926 2 3 4 CHAIN LINK FABRIC SECURITY FENCING AND GATES General Standard To AS 1725 1 Installation Standard To AS 1725 1 3 5 WELDED FENCING Fence dimensions Maximum post spacing 2440 mm Installation General Fit tightly fittings caps to steel posts Attach panels to posts with fixing clips and M8 x 75 mm hexagon head bolts before concreting footing Footing type Concrete NATSPEC 93 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0250b Landscape gardening 0250B LANDSCAPE GARDENING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to landscape designer s specification NATSPEC 94 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0255b Landscape plant procurement 0255B LANDSCAPE PLANT PROCURE
53. 20 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 60 25 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 65 32 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 72 Gas Service below ground Size Item Rate per metre 32 Cromford Buried Below Ground 63 40 Cromford Buried Below Ground 66 Gas Service Size Item Rate per metre 15 Stop valve Supplied and installed 57 20 Stop valve Supplied and installed 85 25 Stop valve Supplied and installed 230 32 Stop valve Supplied and installed 370 Rainwater Harvesting Pipe above ground Size Item Rate per metre 15 Rehau as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 35 20 Rehau as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 40 25 Rehau as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 35 32 Rehau as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 45 40 Rehau as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 55 50 Rehau as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 68 63 Rehau as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 80 Rainwater Harvesting Pipe below ground Size Item Rate per metre O NATSPEC Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES 32 Cromford Buried Below Ground 95 40 Cromford Buried Below Ground 105 50 Cromford Buried Below Ground 118 63 Cromford Buried Below Ground 130
54. 3 Order of work Other trades Before painting complete the work of other trades as far as practicable within the area to be painted except for installation of fittings floor sanding and laying flooring materials Clear finishes Complete clear timber finishes before commencing opaque paint finishes in the same area NATSPEC 338 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Protection Fixtures Remove door furniture switch plates light fittings and other fixtures before starting to paint and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation Adjacent surfaces Protect adjacent finished surfaces liable to damage from painting operations Wet paint warning General Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until the paint is dry Repair General Clean off marks paint spots and stains progressively and restore damaged surfaces to their original condition Touch up new damaged decorative paintwork or misses only with the paint batch used in the original application Substrate preparation General Prepare all substrates to receive the painting systems in accordance with AS NZS 2311 and the paint manufacturer s recommendations Cleaning Clean down the substrate surface Do not cause undue damage to the substrate or damage to or contamination of the surroundings Filling Fill cracks and holes with fillers sealants putties or grouting cements as a
55. 4 x the thickness if the member is plywood or building board lt 10 mm thick Unified hexagon bolts screws and nuts To AS NZS 2465 Fasteners in CCA treated timber Epoxy coated or stainless steel Bolts Coach bolts To AS NZS 1390 Hexagon bolts Grades A and B To AS 1110 1 Hexagon bolts Grade C To AS 1111 1 Corrosion resistance Atmospheric corrosivity category To the General requirements worksection NATSPEC 34 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0181 Adhesives sealants and fasteners Steel products Conform to the Corrosion resistance table or provide proprietary products with metallic and or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance Corrosion resistance table Atmospheric corrosivity categories A and B to AS NZS 2312 Situation Self drilling Threaded fasteners and Powder actuated fasteners screws to anchors AS 3566 2 Class Material Minimum local Material Minimum local metallic coating grade metallic coating thickness pm thickness pm Internal 1 Electroplated 4 Electroplated 4 zinc zinc External 3 Electroplated 30 Stainless zinc or Hot steel 316 dip galvanized Corrosion resistance table Atmospheric corrosivity category C to AS NZS 2312 Situation Self drilling Threaded fasteners and Powder actuated fasteners screws to anchors AS 3566 2 Class Material Minimum local Material Minimum local metallic coating grade me
56. AND BLOCK CONSTRUCTION 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide brick and block construction as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS General Materials and construction To AS 3700 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Set out Unit type colour and texture Bottoms of cavities after cleaning out Bottoms of core holes before grouting Reinforcement type and diameter Positioning of reinforcing before grouting Control joints ready for insertion of joint filler Damp proof courses in position Flashings in position Lintels in position Structural steelwork including bolts and shelf angles in position 1 5 TOLERANCES Brick and block construction Standard To AS 3700 Table 12 1 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 DURABILITY General Exposure locations To AS 3700 clause 5 4 2 2 MATERIALS Brick and block units Selections To Brick and block construction schedule Standard To AS NZS 4455 1 and AS NZS 4455 3 Salt attack resistance grade To AS 3700 Table 5 1 Minimum age of clay bricks 7 days Mortar materials Mortar class To AS 3700 Table 5 1 Cement To AS 3972 NATSPEC 159 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec White cement With lt 1 iron salts content Lime To AS 1
57. Corners Cut the horizontal leg and bend the vertical leg at corners instead of forming vertical joints between separate lengths of angle Fixing Fix water stop angles to the substrate with compatible sealant or adhesive and corrosion resistant countersunk or wafer head screws Priming General If required by the membrane manufacturer prime the substrates with a primer compatible with the membrane system Bond breakers Requirement After the priming of surfaces provide bond breakers at all wall floor hob wall junctions and at control joints where the membrane is bonded to the substrate Sealant fillet bond breakers Application Form a triangular fillet or cove of sealant to internal corners within the period recommended by the membrane manufacturer after the application of the primer Widths 5 mm x 5 mm to vertical corners 6 mm x 6 mm 9 mm x 9 mm to horizontal corners Backing rod bond breakers Retain in position with continuous length of tape pressed firmly in place against the surfaces on each side of the rod 3 2 APPLICATION Protection General Protect membrane from damage during installation and for the period after installation until the membrane achieves its service characteristics that resist damage Extent of waterproofing Waterproof or water resistant surfaces To the requirements of BCA F1 7 Sheet membrane joints Bituminous sheet membranes Side laps 75 mm Endlaps 100 mm NATSPEC 289 T
58. Direct measurement Foreign materials in that fraction of RCCB retained on 4 75 mm sieve by mass High density brick etc max 3 0 Low density plaster etc max 1 0 Organic matter wood etc max 0 2 Asbestos and hazardous AS 1141 52 Maximum dry compressive strength on fraction passing 19 mm sieve only applies if plasticity index is less than 1 min 1 0 MPa min 1 0 MPa min 1 0 MPa min 1 0 MPa min 1 0 MPa AS 1141 14 Particle shape by proportional calliper misshapen 2 1 max 35 max 35 max 35 AS 1141 22 Aggregate wet min 50 kN min 50 kN min 50 kN NATSPEC 101 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0271 Pavement base and subbase Test method Description CRS20 CRS40 RCCS20 NGS20 NGS40 strength AS 1141 22 Wet dry strength max 40 max4096 max4096 variation dry wet dry AS 1141 23 Los Angeles value max 40 max 40 max40 AS 1289 6 1 1 4 day soaked CBR min 30 min 3096 min 3096 min 30 min 30 9496 modified compaction NOTES All fractions of the proposed mix must satisfy this requirement Use the fraction with the highest wet dry strength variation as the value for determining conformance Test the fraction 19 0 mm to 9 5 mm In the case of blended materials also test the fraction 9 5 mm
59. Do not solder stainless steel 3 4 METAL FIXTURES General General Provide metal fixtures noted on drawings as follows Components and their location indicative construction details scribes and trims materials dimensions and thicknesses and finishes shall be as detailed NATSPEC 266 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0552b Metalwork fabricated Confirm on site all dimensions noted on drawings Finishes selections as documented Hardware and equipment 3 5 PIPE RAIL BALUSTRADES Fabrication Method Welding Joints Produce smooth unbroken surfaces at joints Scribe the joints between posts and rails Make end to end joints over an internal sleeve Bends Make changes of direction in rails by evenly curved pipe bends Free ends Seal the free ends of pipes with fabricated or purpose made end caps Fixing to structure General Provide fabricated predrilled or purpose made brackets or post bases and attach the piping to the building structure with fixings including bolts into masonry anchors and coach screws or bolts into timber of metal compatible with the piping Galvanizing General If possible complete fabrication before galvanizing otherwise apply a zinc rich primer to affected joint surfaces 3 6 CORNER GUARDS Guards General Where salient corners of the structure are required to be protected from mechanical damage provide metal corner guards as follows Co
60. Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 1066 low VOC system Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b B17a MDF Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 3615 low VOC system Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b B17a Brick and masonry Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0678 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv eco choice B16 Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 2797 low VOC system Acrylic Block Filler B15 Wear 101 Adv Semi Gloss B8b Wear 101 Adv Semi Gloss B8b Semi gloss latex mould resistant Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 4848 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp eco choice B16 Bathroom Semi Bathroom Semi Gloss B8b Gloss B8b Plasterboard MR Dulux Professional Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 4581 grade EnvirO2 Water Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp low VOC system Based Sealer Bathroom Semi Bathroom Semi Binder B15b Gloss B8b Gloss B8b Fibrous set plaster Dulux Sealer Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5014 Binder solvent Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp bas
61. Epoxy zinc 50 um High Solids Nil phosphate conforming to Polyurethane AS NZS 3750 13 conforming to AS NZS 3750 6 External non decorative 75 um Epoxy Zinc 50 um High Solids Nil conforming to phosphate conforming to Polyurethane AS NZS 2312 PUR2 AS NZS 3750 13 conforming to AS NZS 3750 6 External decorative 75 um Epoxy zinc 50 um High Solids Nil conforming to phosphate conforming to Polyurethane AS NZS 2312 PUR2 AS NZS 3750 13 conforming to AS NZS 3750 6 Polyurethane AS NZS 2312 Category C D and E table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy Nil Nil conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 Internal decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy 75 um High Solids Nil conforming to Polyurethane AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 conforming to AS NZS 3750 6 External non decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy 200 um High Build Nil conforming to AS NZS 2312 EHB4 conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 Epoxy MIO conforming to AS NZS 3750 14 External decorative conforming to AS NZS 2312 PUR 5 75 um Zinc rich epoxy conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 200 um High Build Epoxy MIO conforming to AS NZS 3750 14 75 um High Solids Polyurethane conformin g to AS NZS 3750 6 Micaceous Iron Oxide AS NZS 2312 Category A and B table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 75 um Alkyd zinc Nil Nil phosphate containing MIO and Aluminium NATSPEC
62. Fibre stuffing Installation Compress to 40 of its uncompressed volume Fire stop sealants Ambient conditions Do not store above 32 C Do not install outside the temperature range recommended by the sealant manufacturer Do not install wnen humidity exceeds that recommended by the sealant manufacturer for safe installation Fire stop foams Ambient conditions Do not store above 32 C Do not install below 15 C or above 32 C Do not apply when temperature of substrate and air is below 15 C Maintain this minimum temperature before during and for 3 days after installation Installation Test substrates for adhesion and prime if necessary Place in layers for homogenous density filling cavities and spaces Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials Fire stop putty Ambient conditions Do not install below 5 C Do not allow the material to freeze Fire stop pillows Ambient conditions Do not install in conditions outside of the manufacturer s recommendations Labelling General Label each fire stopping installation with a permanently fixed tag or sticker containing the following information Manufacturer s name Name and address of installer Date of installation 3 8 COMPLETION SUBMISSIONS Certification General Submit evidence of compliance in conformance with the recommendations of AS 4072 1 Appendix B Certification Submit a completed certification document for installed fire
63. Form roughened surfaces to the faces Compaction control tests Compaction control tests To AS 1289 5 4 1 or AS 1289 5 7 1 Compaction control test frequency Standard To AS 3798 Table 8 1 Confined operations 1 test per 2 layers per 50 m 3 18 COMPLETION Grading External areas Grade to give falls away from buildings minimum 1 100 Subfloor areas Grade the ground surface under suspended floors to drain ground or surface water away from buildings without ponding Temporary works Tree enclosures Remove temporary tree enclosures at completion Tree marking Remove temporary marks and tags at completion Temporary supports Remove temporary supports to adjacent structures at completion Site restoration Requirement Where variation of existing ground surfaces is not required as part of the works restore surfaces to the condition existing at the commencement of the contract NATSPEC 81 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0223 Service trenching 0223 SERVICE TRENCHING 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide trenching for underground services Design Steel shoring and trench lining systems To AS 4744 1 Hydraulic shoring and trench lining equipment To AS 5047 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Earthwork Pavement base and subbase Asphaltic concrete Sprayed bituminou
64. Gold Label Dulux Dulux SD 1555 Acrylic Blockfiller Weathershield Low Weathershield Low B15 Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic B7a B7a Concrete blockwork Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 2957 High build 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 performance Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller NATSPEC 353 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref coating system Finish B38a Finish B38a Zinc coated metals Dulux Dulux Dulux SD 3275 incl Zincalume Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Galvabond Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic Zincanneal B7a B7a B7a zincseal zinc primed steel HD Galvanized Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Dulux SD 0313 steel or zinc primed Galvanised Iron Weathershield Low Weathershield Low steel Primer Plus B12A Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic B7a B7a Shop primed or red Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Dulux SD 2915 oxide primed Metal Primer B11 Weathershield Low Weathershield Low ROZP ferrous Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic metal B7a B7a Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Dulux SD 5047 resistant types e g Water Based Stain Weathershield Low Weathershield Low FRP UPVC Blocker B17A Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic
65. Prepare piped or channelled stormwater and subsoil drainage to the Stormwater site worksection Service trenches Backfill all drainage trenches to perform similar to the undisturbed ground 3 2 BASE COURSE Preparation Base course extent Extend base course below the edge restraint for its full width except at walls or pits Base course Conform to the Pavement base and subbase worksection 3 3 EDGE RESTRAINT Lateral restraint to segmental paving Perimeter Provide edge restraints to bedding and units where not provided by other structures Drainage Position edge restraint and pavers so that the top of the pavers are slightly above the front edge of the edge restraint Edge restraint shape Ensure the edge restraint has a vertical or near vertical side abutting the pavers Sleeper edging General Fix sleepers in position by spiking with two 13 mm diameter galvanized mild steel rods per sleeper penetrating at least 400 mm into the subgrade Drive the rods flush with the upper surface of the sleeper Arris the upper exposed sleeper edges to produce a 15 mm wide face at 45 to the edges NATSPEC 122 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0276 Segmental pavers sand bed Concrete edging or kerb Construction Fixed form extrusion or slip forms to AS 2876 Edging Place in a shallow trench between timber forms Wood float finish flush with the adjacent finished grass level Joints Provide co
66. Primer B11 Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss brass copper tin B5 B5 plate Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 0385 resistant types e g Water based Stain Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss FRP UPVC Blocker B17a B5 B5 Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Use water based Use water based N A sensitive types e g polystyrene Water based Stain Blocker B17a paints not solvent based paints not solvent based Full gloss epoxy primed enamel Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Zinc coated metals incl HD Galvanized steel zincalume Galvabond zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel Dulux Duremax GPE Zinc Phosphate to 125 microns DFT B29 Dulux Duraflex 2 High Gloss B5 Dulux Duraflex 2 High Gloss B5 SI 3371 Full gloss epoxy primed two pack Polyurethane Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Zinc coated metals incl HD Galvanized steel zincalume Galvabond zincanneal zincseal zinc Dulux Duremax GPE Zinc Phosphate to 125 microns DFT B29 Dulux Duremax GPE to 100 microns DFT B29 Dulux Weathermax HBR to 75 microns DFT B29c SI3359 NATSPEC 350 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX paint
67. Structure 45 20 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 60 25 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 65 32 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 72 40 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 80 50 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 95 Cold Water below ground Size Item Rate per metre 32 Cromford Buried Below Ground 63 40 Cromford Buried Below Ground 66 50 Cromford Buried Below Ground 70 63 Cromford Buried Below Ground 77 75 Cromford Buried Below Ground 83 NATSPEC 6 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES Cold Water Size Item Rate per metre 15 Stop valve Supplied and installed 57 20 Stop valve Supplied and installed 85 25 Stop valve Supplied and installed 230 32 Stop valve Supplied and installed 370 40 Stop valve Supplied and installed 430 50 Stop valve Supplied and installed 580 Hydrant Size Item Rate per metre 100 Fire Hydrant Internal Supplied and installed 1200 100 Fire Hydrant double headed External Supplied and installed 2400 100 Inground Hydrant Service as specified 1m deep including E amp B 180 Gas Service above ground Size Item Rate per metre 15 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 45
68. Support Fully support shower bases without causing distortion or cracking Junction with walls for bases with integral perimeter upstands Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3 1 and as follows Recess shower base into walls or batten off wall lining sufficiently to allow water resistant wall finishes to overlap the integral upstands along the top edge of the shower base Maintain the structural integrity of walls that are rebated Baths and spas Junction of walls with baths Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3 2 and as follows Baths with integral upstands Recess bath edges into walls or batten off wall lining sufficiently to allow water resistant wall finishes to overlap the bath s integral perimeter upstands Maintain the structural integrity of walls that are rebated Baths without integral upstands or with showers over rendered masonry walls Form or chase a rebate in the render to receive the bath edge Waterproof the wall above and below the rebate including the rebate and the floor area under the bath Seal the edge of the bath into the rebate Baths without integral upstands or with showers over framed and lined walls Form a rebate in the wall lining with a corrosion resistant lipped channel to receive the bath edge Waterproof the wall above and below the rebate including the rebate and the floor area under the bath Seal the edge of the bath into the rebate Plinth mounted insert baths and spas Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3 2 an
69. Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0346 Structural fire protection systems Thickness gauge Where possible use a reliable direct reading pin type thickness gauge with a base plate of 25 mm diameter of the sort shown in AS 3784 1 Figure 5 Otherwise use prefixed gauges which will not impair fire performance Frequency of measurement Flat substrates 4 measurements for an area of 3 x 3 m and 1 measurement for each additional area of 3 x 3 m Take measurements where thickness is likely to be low Contoured substrates As for flat substrates Take random measurements at changes in plane For columns and beams take at least 1 measurement per 3 m on each surface Check thickness across the flange and over the flange edges if the coating appears to taper on the flanges Substrates overlaid with expanded metal lath or steel wire mesh As for flat and contoured substrates Measure thickness to the face of the overlay Density measurements Acceptance criterion Manufacturer s stated average dry density 15 Frequency of measurement 1 per 10 m of sprayed surface 3 2 BOARD FIRE PROTECTION Fixing System Fix the following proprietary systems in conformance with the current written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier to achieve the required FRL as calculated or prototype tested Mineral fibre board Vermiculite board Gypsum plasterboard Joints Gen
70. Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0551 Joinery Fasteners Visibility Do not provide visible fixings except in the following locations Inside cupboards and drawer units Inside open units in which case provide proprietary caps to conceal fixings Visible fixings Where fastenings are unavoidable on visible joinery faces sink the heads below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish In surfaces which are to have clear or tinted finish provide matching wood plugs showing face not end grain In surfaces which are to have melamine finish provide proprietary screws and caps finished to match Fix joinery units to substrates as follows Floor mounted units 600 mm centres max Wall mounted units To each nogging and or stud stiffener Fixings Screws with washers into timber or steel framing or masonry anchors Adhesives General Provide adhesives to transmit the loads imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly without causing discolouration of finished surfaces Finishing Junctions with structure Scribe plinths benchtops splashbacks ends of cupboards kickboards and returns to follow the line of structure Joints Scribe internal and mitre external joints Edge strips Finish exposed edges of sheets with edge strips which match sheet faces Matching For surfaces which are to have clear or tinted finish arrange adjacent piece
71. WP The property of a material that does not allow moisture to penetrate through it Waterproofing systems Combinations of membranes flashings drainage and accessories which form waterproof barriers and which may be Loose laid Bonded to substrates Water resistant WR The property of a material that restricts moisture movement and will not degrade under conditions of moisture Wet area An area within a building supplied with a floor waste 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so inspection may be made of the following Substrate preparation completed Secondary layers preparation completed NATSPEC 287 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0621 Waterproofing wet areas Before membranes are covered up or concealed 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Execution records Placing records Photographically record the application of membranes and information as follows Date Portion of work Substrate preparation Protection provided from traffic Products documentation General Submit copies of product manufacturers Product technical data sheets Material safety data sheets MSDS Type tests certificates verifying conformance to AS NZS 4858 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PRODUCTS Membranes Standard To AS NZS 4858 Membrane systems Requirement Proprietary membrane systems suitable for the intended wet area waterproofing Shower tray General Purpose made jointle
72. Wear 101 Adv Flat low VOC system eco choice B16 B6b B6b Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 3147 veneers Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Flat Wear 101 Adv Flat Sealer Undercoat B6b B6b B10a Concrete Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 1430 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Flat Wear 101 Adv Flat eco choice B16 B6b B6b Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 3665 low VOC system Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Flat Wear 101 Adv Flat Sealer Undercoat B6b B6b B10a Vermiculite Dulux Sealer Dulux White Dulux White SD 3505 Binder solvent Ceiling Paint eco Ceiling Paint eco based B15 choice B6c choice B6c Low gloss latex Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0002 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 101 Adv Low eco choice B16 Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Fibrous set plaster Dulux Sealer Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0813 Binder solvent Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 101 Adv Low based B15 Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Fibre cement Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 2971 products Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 101 Adv Low low VOC system eco choice B16 Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 1528 veneers Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 1
73. a suitable base showing the thickness of each coat for each finish selected Resinous terrazzo Provide 3 samples on a fibre cement base showing the range of variation in aggregate arrangement for each colour selected Size 300 x 300 mm minimum Identification Labelling Label each sample giving brand product name and manufacturer s code reference including the code for each coat of multi coat work Prototype panels Location To be determined on site Size mm 1200x1200 Tests Test results Submit the following Slip resistance site test to completed surfaces to AS NZS 4663 Subcontractors General Submit names and contact details of proposed suppliers and applicators NATSPEC 323 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Materials and components Manufacturer s data Submit the manufacturer s published product data for each type of finish and recommendations for its application in the project including the following Composition thickness finish and time between coats for multi coat work Material Safety Data Sheets 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL Critical radiant flux Standard To AS ISO 9239 1 Flooring system Conform to the values of critical radiant flux nominated in finishes schedule Smoke development rate Standard To AS ISO 9239 1 Floor finishes in non sprinklered buildings 750 percent minutes 2 2 Identification MARKING 0657 Resin based seam
74. abutting lt 2mm ends of cladding 3 2 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY Substrates or framing Requirement Before fixing cladding check and if necessary adjust the alignment of substrates or framing Fixing Method Nail to timber framing screw to steel framing Accessories and trim Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation Fixing eaves and soffit lining Nailing 150 mm centres to bearers at maximum 450 mm centres Metal separation Requirement Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals and between green hardwood or chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel by either Applying an anti corrosion low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces Inserting a separation layer 3 8 PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS OR PRODUCTS Fixing Product fixing Fix the following proprietary systems in conformance with the current written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier Hardboard plank cladding Fibre cement plank cladding Fibre cement cladding Compressed fibre cement cladding 3 4 COMPLETION Warranties Cladding materials Submit the manufacturer s published product warranties NATSPEC 214 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0431b Cladding combined NATSPEC 215 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0431b Cladding combined NATSPEC 216 Tuesday 21 May 2013
75. adjacent to closest access panel Items to be labelled include but are not limited to Fancoil units and terminal equipment e g VAV boxes Fire and smoke dampers Isolating valves not directly connected to items otherwise labelled Motorised dampers Wall mounted equipment in occupied areas Provide labels on wall mounted items in occupied areas including the following Services control switches Temperature and humidity sensors Points lists Automatic control points Provide plasticised fade free points lists for each automatic control panel Store in a pocket on the door of the panel Lists to include terminal numbers point addresses short and long descriptors Pressure vessels General Mount manufacturer s certificates in glazed frames on a wall next to the vessel Valves and pumps General Label to associate pumps with their starters and valves Screw fix labels to body or attach label to valve handwheels with a key ring Underground services Survey Accurately record the routes of underground cables and pipes before backfilling Include on the record drawings Records Provide digital photographic records of underground cable and pipe routes before backfilling Include in operation and maintenance manual Location marking Accurately mark the location of underground cables and pipes with route markers consisting of a marker plate set flush in a concrete base engraved to show the direction of the line and
76. all joints with pressure sensitive adhesive tape Fixing Install as follows Timber frames Metallic coated clouts 20 mm long 6 8 mm staples or punched multi point metallic coated steel brads Steel or aluminium Hex head screws with either 20 mm diameter washers or through hardboard strips Plywood Alternatives Metallic coated clouts 20 mm long 6 8 mm staples or punched multi point metallic coated steel brads at minimum 300 mm centres Water based contact adhesive with a 5096 adhesive cover 3 4 ROOF INSULATION Mesh support to roof insulation General Location The whole of the roof area including skylight shaft walls except the following Eaves overhangs skylights vents and openings Roofs to outbuildings garages and semi enclosed spaces such as verandahs porches and carports NATSPEC 252 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0471 Insulation and pliable membranes Mesh support to roof insulation Locations Provide support to the following Sarking vapour barrier or reflective thermal insulation membranes laid over roof framing members which are spaced at more than 900 mm centres Blanket type thermal insulation laid over roof framing members as sound insulation to metal roofing Installing wire netting Lay over the roof framing providing sufficient slack or sag between members to suit the application Fixing wire netting Staple to timber frame wire to
77. and installation lugs Fire resistant doorsets Standard To AS 1905 1 and BCA Spec C3 4 Security screen doorsets Standard To AS 5039 2 4 ANCILLARY MATERIALS Trims Timber Solid timber at least 19 mm thick mitred at corners Extruded gaskets and seals General Provide seals to the architectural drawings Materials Non cellular solid elastopressive seals as follows NATSPEC 226 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0453b Doors and access panels Flexible polyvinyl chloride PVC To BS 2571 100 solids with high consistency ultra violet stabilised Rubber products neoprene ethylene propylene diene monomer EPDM or silicone rubber To BS 4255 1 Flashings General Corrosion resistant compatible with the other materials in the installation and coated with a non staining compound where necessary Standard To AS NZS 2904 Jointing materials General Compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces Nylon brush seals General Dense nylon bristles locked into galvanized steel strips and fixed in a groove in the edge of the door or in purpose made anodised aluminium holders fixed to the door with double sided PVC foam tape Pile weather strips General Polypropylene or equivalent pile and backing low friction silicone treated ultra violet stabilised Standard To
78. area with the appropriate intermediate and finishing coat materials Areas damaged to the primer or steel surface Blast clean to the original standard Prepare at least 50 mm into the sound coating and to a further feathering zone of approximately 50 mm Recoat with the specified system to restore the film thickness and integrity over the whole prepared surface including the feathered zone Aesthetic reinstatement If required repaint to a physical or discernable boundary line NATSPEC 180 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings Defects If corrosion pitting or areas of significant metal loss and defects are exposed by the blasting process advise for inspection and have areas passed as being fit for service before proceeding with the coating system Timing Apply the Protective Coating system within 4 hours of blast cleaning or in any case before visual tarnishing of the steel occurs 3 6 COMPLETION General Joints On completion seal all joints and mating surfaces with a compatible polyurethane sealant Warranty General Provide the approved warranty 4 SELECTIONS 4 1 PROTECTIVE PAINT COATING SYSTEMS Polyurethane AS NZS 2312 Category A and B table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 75 um Epoxy zinc Nil Nil phosphate conforming to AS NZS 3750 13 Internal decorative 75 um
79. areas 40 mm above the finished external floor surface or overflow level whichever is the higher Exposed areas 150 mm upturn from the finished external floor level or overflow level whichever is the higher Hobless and flush thresholds Install membrane before the fixing of door or window frames with a continuous grated drain abutting the external face of the door or window sill Membrane around skylights and hatches Requirement Install membranes to upstands before the installation of the skylight or hatch Membrane at parapets Requirement Terminate membrane upstands under parapet flashing or capping giving 75 mm overlap Do not top fix parapet cappings Seal heads of fasteners against capping Membrane at gutters Requirement Terminate membrane over a corrosion resistant metal angle fixed to the gutter support substrate with the vertical leg of the angle turned down into the gutter at least 35 mm Overlaying finishes on membranes Compatibility If a membrane is to be overlayed with another system such as tiles pavers ballast insulation or soil provide an overlaying system that is compatible with and will not cause damage to the membrane Bonded or partially bonded systems If the topping or bedding mortar requires to be bonded to the membrane provide sufficient control joints in the topping or bedding mortar to reduce the movement over the membrane Slip sheet If the topping or bedding mortar is structurally sufficient n
80. as necessary Moulding Individual plastic hollow three dimensional characters and shapes formed by Injection moulding Vacuum forming Built up individual shapes by fabricating the faces and edges from separate pieces neatly and securely joined Installation General Install signage level and plumb securely mounted with concealed theft resistant fixings Fix self adhesive signs free of bubbles and creases 4 4 1 GENERAL SIGNS Refer to architectural drawings 4 2 STATUTORY SIGNS Required fire door and required smoke door SELECTIONS Position On or adjacent to the door on the side of the door that faces a person seeking egress and if the door is in the held open position on either the wall adjacent the doorway or both sides of the door Message if auto door with auto hold open device FIRE SAFETY DOOR DO NOT OBSTRUCT Message if self closing door FIRE SAFETY DOOR DO NOT OBSTRUCT DO NOT KEEP OPEN Message if door discharging from a fire isolated exit FIRE SAFETY DOOR DO NOT OBSTRUCT Letter height minimum 20 mm Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed Compliance BCA D2 23 Non required stair ramp or escalator Position Outside the shaft near all doors opening to the shaft Message DO NOT USE THIS STAIRWAY IF THERE IS A FIRE or Do not use this stairway if there is a fire Letter height minimum 20 mm upper case 16 mm lower
81. brush and polish to match the pre assembly finish Post assembly finish Electropolish finish for external installations Provide an electro chemical process to stainless steel grade 316 Brushed electropolish finish Conform to the following Preassembly finish No 4 brushed finish Post assembly finish Provide an electro chemical processed finish to achieve a No 7 to No 8 brushed finish Mirror electropolish finish Pre assembly finish Mill finish 2B or mirror polished finish Post assembly finish Provide an electro chemical processed finish to achieve a No 8 mirror finish Completion Cleaning Clean and rinse to an acid free condition and allow to dry Do not use carbon steel abrasives or materials containing chloride Protection Secure packaging or strippable plastic sheet NATSPEC 43 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0183b Metals and prefinishes 3 3 ELECTROPLATING Electroplated coatings Chromium on metals To AS 1192 Service condition number At least 2 Nickel on metals To AS 1192 Service condition number At least 2 Zinc on iron or steel To AS 1789 3 4 ANODISING General Standard To AS 1231 Thickness grade To AS 1231 Table H1 3 5 PREPAINTING Air drying enamel Application Spray or brush Finish Full gloss General use Primer Two pack epoxy primer to AS NZS 3750 13 Top coats 2 coats to AS 3730 6 Oil resistant use Prime
82. buildup after each rain event Effect repairs immediately Removal When the upslope areas have been permanently stabilised Straw bale filters Description Temporary structures made of straw bales cereal straw laid end to end across direction of stormwater flow in order to filter sediment Location As required Slopes If filter is at toe of a slope place bales 1500 2000 mm away from slope to provide access for maintenance and to allow coarse sediment to drop out of suspension before reaching sediment filter Binding Wire bound or with string tied bindings wrapped around the bale sides Installation Trench 100 mm deep trench the width of a bale and the length of the proposed sediment filter Placing Lengthwise in the trench with ends tightly abutting and corners lapped Fixing Drive two 50 x 50 mm wooden stakes or metal star pickets through each bale Ensure bales are packed closely and staked securely Eliminate gaps with loose straw wedged between tight Backfilling Compacted excavated soil to ground level on downhill side of barrier and 100 mm above ground level on the uphill side of the bales Silt fence Description A temporary barrier of geotextile supported on wire or mesh fencing in order to filter sediment from stormwater flow Location As required Slopes If filter is at toe of a slope locate fence 1500 2000 mm away from slope to provide access for maintenance and to allow coarse sedimen
83. by mass Durability All constituent fraction of constituent or aggregates to conform to AS 1141 22 and the following Wet strength not less than 80 kN 10 Fines Wet Dry Variation not to exceed 35 Recycled concrete aggregate RCA Use coarse aggregates from demolition concrete or RCA Blending If blending coarse RCA with natural aggregates ensure substitution rates are below 30 2 3 CEMENT General Standard To AS 3972 Type Refer to structural engineer Transport Cement in watertight packaging and protect from moisture until used Do not use caked or lumpy cement Age Less than 6 months old Storage Store cement bags under cover and above ground 2 4 FLY ASH General Standard Fine grade fly ash to AS 3582 1 Fly ash quantity Nil to 70 kg m Minimum binder content fly ash plus cement 300 to 330 kg m 2 5 WATER General Standard Chloride ion to AS 3583 13 and sulphate ion to AS 1289 4 2 1 Quality Water used in the production of concrete to be potable free from materials harmful to concrete or reinforcement and be neither salty nor brackish Limits Not containing more than 600 parts per million of chloride ion as determined to AS 3583 13 400 parts per million of sulphate ion as determined to AS 1289 4 2 1 2 6 ADMIXTURES General Standard Chemical admixtures to AS 1478 1 Quality Provide admixtures free from calcium chloride calcium formate or triethanolamine or any oth
84. clause 1 5 3 Early age strength A mean compressive strength at 7 days exceeding the values shown in AS 1379 Table 1 2 Formwork Lost formwork Sacrificial formwork left in place Slip formwork Continuously slipped or moving formwork Green concrete Concrete which has set but not appreciably hardened Production assessment An assessment procedure for concrete specified by strength grade carried out by the supplier on concrete produced by a specific supplying plant and based on the statistical assessment of standard compressive strength tests on concrete NATSPEC 130 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Sample A portion of the material used in the works or to take such a sample Specimen A portion of a sample which is submitted for testing Weather Cold Ambient shade temperature lt 10 C Hot Ambient shade temperature gt 30 C 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Base or subgrade before covering Membrane or film underlay installed on the base or subgrade Completed formwork and reinforcement tendons cores fixings and embedded items fixed in place Used formwork after cleaning and before re use Surfaces or elements to be concealed in the final work before covering Commencement of concrete placing Evaluation of the off form finishes Evaluation of surface finish
85. coil diameter to compressed length at the designated minimum static deflection 2 0 8 1 Snubbing Snub the springs to prevent bounce at start up Vertical resilient limit stops To prevent spring extension when unloaded to serve as blocking during erection and which remain out of contact during normal operation 3 12 SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF BUILDING SERVICES Provisions General Arrange all components other than service items exempted in AS 1170 4 to resist seismic loads determined in conformance with AS 1170 4 Securely fix all plant and equipment to the building structure Do not rely on gravity and or friction to resist seismic forces Anti vibration mounts Use horizontally restrained type Components Do not use components that will be damaged by earthquake conditions Protect systems against the adverse effects of components such as mercury switches that although not damaged by earthquake may malfunction NATSPEC 27 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements 3 13 FINISHES TO BUILDING SERVICES General General If exposed to view including in plant rooms paint new building services and equipment Surfaces painted or finished off site Conform to the Metals and prefinishes worksection Exceptions Do not paint chromium or nickel plating anodised aluminium GRP stainless steel non metallic flexible materials and normally lubricated machined surfaces Surfaces with
86. compatible with the spray apply an alkali resistant sealer which is compatible with the paint Stable gaps and joints wider than 15 mm Bridge with an appropriate supporting material before applying the spray Unstable gaps and joints Provide a control joint in the spray with metal lath support on either side of the joint Protection of areas not to be coated General Prevent damage from spillage overspray contamination and fallout Sequence General Apply coatings after installation of supports fixings and other attachments but before installation of items which may obstruct the application Fixing reinforcement and support Encapsulated substrates If no support needed wrap and overlap reinforcement at joints and wire tie together Spraying General Provide full cohesion in the coating External coatings During setting Prevent exposure to rapid drying wind driven rain running water freezing conditions structural movement vibration or impact Detailing Provide water shedding Weather seal at the coating substrate interface with UV stable mastic sealant or weather shields Thickness measurements Acceptance criteria Conform to the following Thickness 2 85 specified thickness Deficient area lt 1 m and no other deficient area within 3 m of this deficient area Thickness 2 75 specified thickness Deficient area lt 0 2 m and no other deficient area within 1 m of this deficient area NATSPEC 186
87. complete with installation accessories Timber trim Hardwood AS 2796 1 Cypress pine AS 1810 Softwood To AS 4785 1 Grade To AS 4785 2 NATSPEC 257 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0511b Lining NATSPEC 258 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0551 Joinery 0551 JOINERY 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Fabricate and install joinery items to substrates undamaged plumb level straight and free of distortion and to the Tolerances table Tolerances table Property Tolerance criteria Plumb and level 1 mm in 800 mm Offsets in flush adjoining surfaces lt 0 5 mm Offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces 2mm Alignment of adjoining doors 0 5 mm Difference in scribe thickness for joinery items 2mm centred between walls Doors centred in openings zero Joints in finished surfaces zero 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following Openings prepared to receive assemblies Site erected assemblies on completion of erection before covering up by cladding and encasing Surfaces prepared for and immediately before site applied finishes Completion of installation 1 4 STANDARDS General Access for maintenan
88. displacement by tying at intersections with either wire ties or clips Bend the ends of wire ties away from nearby faces of formwork or unformed faces to prevent the ties projecting into the concrete cover Beams Tie stirrups to bars in each corner of each stirrup Fix other longitudinal bars to stirrups at 1 m maximum intervals Welding General If welding of reinforcement is proposed provide details NATSPEC 147 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0314b Concrete in situ 0314B CONCRETE IN SITU 1 GENERAL 11 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide concrete in situ as documented and as follows Conforming to the design details Satisfying the quality and inspection requirements 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Concrete formwork Concrete reinforcement Concrete finishes 13 STANDARDS General Concrete materials and construction To AS 3600 Specification and supply of concrete AS 1379 Concrete structures for retaining liquids To AS 3735 1 4 INTERPRETATION General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Ambient temperature The air temperature at the time of mixing and placing of concrete Average ambient temperature Average value of the daily maximum and minimum ambient temperatures over the relevant period at a site Batch A quantity of concrete
89. either by cross cutting or by cutting rectangular or circular openings Cutting holes in concrete floors Protect the carpet and remove concrete particles and dust on completion Replace the cut carpet over the opening without any signs of fraying or other damage and fix with a peel up adhesive or resew NATSPEC 305 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0652b Carpets 3 3 STAIRS Installation General To AS NZS 2455 1 clause 3 10 Concrete stairs Fixing Adhesive method Laying method Apply the floor covering continuously to the treads and risers Timber stairs Closed rise types Tackless method with a gripper strip in each angle between treads and risers Open rise types Adhesive fixing Laying method Closed rise types Apply the floor covering continuously to the treads and risers Open rise types Wrap the carpet around the tread and neatly butt join beneath the nosing if a separate nosing is required or if not in the centre of the underside of the tread Stair nosing type Refer to finishes schedule 3 4 COMPLETION Warranties General Submit the manufacturers published product warranties Cleaning General Progressively clean the work Remove waste excess materials and adhesive Final cleaning When the installation is complete clean the carpet as necessary to remove extraneous matter marks and soiling and to lift the pile where appropriate Protection Provide fabri
90. elevated temperature and converts to an elastomeric material The membrane is reinforced with fibreglass or non woven polyester NWP APP bitumen Bitumen modified with Atactic meaning non crystalline or amorphous polypropylene wax to form a plastomeric sheet The membrane is reinforced with fibreglass or non woven polyester NWP Bond breakers A system preventing a membrane bonding to the substrate bedding or lining Double detail joint A joint formed by turning up and bonding the horizontal membrane to a vertical substrate and adding an overflashing of membrane material bonded to the vertical substrate and folded over and bonded to the horizontal membrane In certain situations the double detail can be achieved by bonding an angle profile of membrane material to the junction prior to laying the membrane Elastomer A polymer having elastic properties similar to rubber Plasticised PVC Rigid PVC made flexible with plasticisers to form a plastic sheet membrane vinyl Polyurethane liquid applied solvent based formulations which moisture cure to form an elastic rubber membrane NATSPEC 202 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0411b Waterproofing external and tanking Seamless membranes Membranes applied in liquid or gel form and air cured to form a seamless film Slip sheet A sheet used to isolate the membrane system from the supporting substrate or from the topping or morta
91. finishes applied off site need not be re painted on site provided the corrosion resistance of the finish is not less than that of the respective finish documented Standard General Conform to the recommendations of AS NZS 2311 Sections 3 6 and 7 or AS NZS 2312 Sections 5 8 and 10 as applicable Powder coating Standard Aluminium for architectural applications To AS 3715 Other metals To AS 4506 Painting systems New unpainted interior surfaces To AS NZS 2311 Table 5 1 New unpainted exterior surfaces To AS NZS 2311 Table 5 2 Paint application Coats Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the substrate can occur Make sure each coat of paint or clear finish is uniform in colour gloss thickness and texture and free of runs sags blisters or other discontinuities Combinations Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system Protection Remove fixtures before starting to paint and refix in position undamaged when painting is complete Underground metal piping Corrosion protection Provide corrosion protection for the following Underground ferrous piping Underground non ferrous metal piping in corrosive environments Protection methods Select from the following Cathodic protection Sacrificial anodes or impressed current Incorporate a facility for periodic testing Conform to the recommendations of AS 2832 1 Continuous wrapping
92. imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly without causing deflection or distortion of finished surfaces Incompatible metals Separate using concealed layers of suitable materials in appropriate thicknesses Fasteners Performance Provide non galvanic corrosion fasteners NATSPEC 265 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0552b Metalwork fabricated Materials Provide fasteners in materials of mechanical strength and corrosion resistance at least equal to that of the lowest resistant metal joined To copper and copper alloys Provide copper or copper alloy fixing devices only To aluminium and aluminium alloys Provide aluminium alloy or non magnetic stainless steel fixing devices only To stainless steel Provide appropriate stainless steel materials only Fabrication Workshop Fabricate and pre assemble items in the workshop wherever practicable Edges and surfaces Keep clean neat and free from burrs and indentations Remove sharp edges without excessive radiusing Tube bends Form bends in tube without visibly deforming the cross section Colour finished work Match colours of sheets extrusions and heads of fasteners Thermal movement Accommodate thermal movement in joints and fastenings Fabrication tolerances Structural work generally 2 mm from design dimensions Joints General Fit joints to an accuracy appropriate to the class of work Finish visible joints made by weldi
93. in full lengths without splicing If solid or continuous excessive projections are removed f previously painted cracked or flaking paint is removed and the surface lightly sanded NATSPEC 36 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0181 Adhesives sealants and fasteners Contact adhesive Precautions Do not use if A substrate is polystyrene foam A PVC substrate may allow plasticiser migration The adhesive solvent can discolour the finished surface Dispersal of the adhesive solvent is impaired Two way method Immediately after application press firmly to transfer adhesive and then pull both surfaces apart Allow to tack off and then reposition and press firmly together Tap areas in contact with a hammer and padded block One way method Immediately after application bring substrates together and maintain maximum surface contact for 24 hours by clamps nails or screws as appropriate If highly stressed employ permanent mechanical fasteners High strength adhesive tape Preparation Non porous surfaces Clean with surface cleaning solvents such as isopropyl alcohol water wash down and allow to dry Porous surfaces Prime the surface with a contact adhesive compatible with the tape adhesive system Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer for application to the following Copper brass plasticized vinyl and hydrophilic surfaces such as glass and ceramics in a high humid
94. maximum intervals Upstands Flash projections above or through the roof with two part flashings consisting of a base flashing and a cover flashing with at least 100 mm vertical overlap Provide for independent movement between the roof and the projection Large penetrations To low pitch roofs extend the base flashing over the roofing ribs to the ridge to prevent ponding behind the penetrating element Wall abutments Provide overflashings where roofs abut walls stepped to the roof slope in masonry and planked cladding otherwise raking and as follows In masonry Build into the full width of the outer leaf Turn up within cavity sloping inward across the cavity and fixed to or built in to the inner leaf at least 75 mm above n concrete Turn 25 mm into joints or grooves wedge at 200 mm centres with compatible material and point up Fixing to masonry or concrete Step in courses to the roof slope Interleave with damp proof course if any Fixing to pipes Solder or seal with neutral cured silicone rubber and either of the following Secure with a clamping ring Provide a proprietary flexible clamping shoe with attached metal surround flashing Gutters General Prefabricate box gutters Form stop ends downpipe nozzles bends and returns Dress downpipe nozzles into outlets Provide overflows to prevent back flooding Gutter and sump support Provide framing and lining to support valley gutters box gutters and sumps L
95. or times Monolithic structural action If two or more adjoining sections of masonry including intersecting walls are constructed at different rates or times rake back or tie the intersections between those sections so that monolithic structural action is obtained in the completed work Joining to existing General Provide a control joint where joining to existing structures Do not tooth new masonry into existing work unless approved by a professional engineer Mortar joints Solid and cored units Lay on a full bed of mortar Fill perpends solid Cut mortar flush Face shell bedded hollow units Fill perpends solid Cut mortar flush Finish Conform to the following Externally Tool to give a dense water shedding finish Internally If wall is to be plastered do not rake more than 10 mm to give a key Thickness 10 mm Cutting Set out masonry with joints of uniform width and minimum cutting of masonry units Monolithic structural action Header units Except in stretcher bond facework provide brick and block header units to AS 3700 clause 4 11 2 Spacing 600 mm maximum Location Provide header units in the following locations Atengaged piers At engagement of diaphragms with the leaves in diaphragm walls Atintersections of flanges with shear walls Atintersections with supporting walls and buttresses Between leaves in solid masonry construction Rate of construction General Regulate the rate of con
96. other external cladding Underground structures after demolition above them Excavations remaining after removal of underground work Site after removal of demolished materials Services after reconnection or diversion 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Hazardous materials Audit Prepare a Hazardous substances management plan to AS 2601 clause 1 6 Include the following Asbestos or material containing asbestos Flammable or explosive liquids or gases Toxic infective or contaminated materials Radiation or radioactive materials Noxious or explosive chemicals Tanks or other containers which have been used for storage of explosive toxic infective or contaminated substances NATSPEC 62 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Records 0201b Demolition Dilapidation record Submit a copy of the dilapidation record for inspection Submit to each owner of each adjacent property a copy of the part of the record relating to that property and obtain their written agreement to the contents of the record before commencement of demolition Stockpiles Location Submit the locations for on site stockpiles for demolished materials for recycling in the works Coordinate with the locations of storage for other waste streams and prevent mixing or pollution Off site disposal Disposal location Submit the locations and evidence of compliance with the relevant authorities for the disposal of materi
97. payment purposes whether as extra over excavation of material other than rock or for adjustment of provisional measurements do not remove the rock until the commencing levels and the classes of rock have been determined 3 4 REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL General Extent Areas of cut or fill and areas occupied by structures pavements and embankments Maximum depth 200 mm Topsoil stockpiles General Stockpile site topsoil intended for re use and imported topsoil where necessary Stockpile heights Establish stockpiles to maximum height of 1 5 m Mark Identify stockpiles of different soil types Vegetation Do not burn off or remove plant growth which may occur during storage Protection Provide the following Drainage and erosion protection Do not allow traffic on stockpiles lf a stockpile is to remain for more than four weeks sow with temporary grass Protect the topsoil stockpiles from contamination by other excavated material weeds and building debris Remove Remove topsoil that is unsuitable for re use from the site to AS 3798 clause 6 1 8 3 5 EXCAVATION Extent Site surface Excavate over the site to give correct levels and profiles as the basis for structures pavements filling and landscaping Make allowance for compaction settlement or heaving Footings Excavate for footings pits wells and shafts to the required sizes and depths Confirm that the foundation conditions meet the design bearing capacity Rock Ge
98. placing the fresh concrete and coat with a neat cement slurry Expansion joints Joint filling Fill with jointing materials as documented Finish visible jointing material neatly flush with adjoining surfaces Preparation Before filling dry and clean the joint surfaces and prime NATSPEC 140 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Watertightness Apply the jointing material so that joints subject to ingress of water are made watertight Jointing materials Provide jointing materials compatible with each other and non staining to concrete in visible locations Bond breaking Provide back up materials for sealants including backing rods which do not adhere to the sealant Foamed materials in compressible fillers Closed cell or impregnated types not water absorbing Slip joints Requirement If concrete slabs are supported on masonry provide proprietary slip joints 3 9 SURFACE MODIFIERS General Application Apply to clean surfaces conforming to the manufacturer s recommendations 3 10 FORMED SURFACES General Surface finish Provide formed concrete finishes conforming to the Formed surface finishes schedule Damage Do not damage concrete works through premature removal of formwork Curing General If formwork is stripped before the minimum curing period for the concrete has elapsed continue curing the exposed faces as soon as the stripping is completed
99. practicable by pumping or other means of dewatering do not place under water Minimum cement content for the mix Increase by 25 Method If required submit proposals 3 7 CURING General Requirements Taking into account the average ambient temperature at site over the relevant period affecting the curing adopt procedures to make sure of the following Curing Cure continuously from completion of finishing until the total cumulative number of days or fractions of days during which the air temperature in contact with the concrete is above 10 C conforms to the following unless accelerated curing is adopted Fully enclosed internal surfaces Early age concrete 3 days Other concrete surfaces 7 days End of curing period Prevent rapid drying out at the end of the curing period Protection Maintain at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss during the curing period Curing method Refer to structural engineer s specification Curing compounds Application Provide a uniform continuous flexible coating without visible breaks or pinholes which remains unbroken at least for the required curing period after application Substrates Do not use wax based or chlorinated rubber based curing compounds on surfaces forming substrates to applied finishes concrete toppings and cement based render Self levelling toppings If used also as curing compounds conform to AS 3799 Visually important surfaces Ap
100. ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0451 AWS aluminium windows and doors 0451 AWS ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide AWS aluminium windows and doors as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Manufacturer s documents Manufacturer s and supplier s documents related to this worksection are Commercial AWS Commercial Design Specifiers Guide available at www awscommercial com au Residential Vantage Design Specifiers Guide to Aluminium Joinery available at www vantagealuminium com au 1 3 STANDARDS General Selection and installation To AS 2047 Building classification Car park is class 7a and townhouse class 2 Glazing Glass type and thickness To AS 1288 if no glass type or thickness is nominated Materials and installation To AS 1288 Quality requirements for cut to size and processed glass To AS NZS 4667 Terminology for work on glass To AS NZS 4668 1 4 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the abbreviations given in AS 4145 1 Appendix D and the following abbreviations apply AWA Australian Window Association Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 4145 1 Section 2 and the following definitions apply Aluminium joinery The collective term used for aluminium fram
101. rectangular pavers at the pavement restraint edge Testing authority Independent third party Registered testing authority 1 4 STANDARDS General Concrete and clay segmental pavers To AS NZS 4455 2 Slip resistance Classification To AS NZS 4586 for the classifications as documented Slip resistance measurement of completed pedestrian pavements To AS NZS 4663 1 5 TOLERANCES Tolerances General Conform to the following Levelness 8 mm Flatness 8 mm Abutments and lippage lt 2 mm 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Authority approvals Local authority Submit authority approvals for any paving products laying patterns alignment and drainage for footpaths or crossovers occurring on property covered under local authority planning Execution Base material Submit test results on quality grading and compaction Segmental pattern If it appears that minor variations to joint widths will obviate cutting submit proposals Segmental paving pattern Prepare a trial set out for each area Products Compliance certificate Submit compliance certificates for the pavers as documented Type tests Slip resistance to AS NZS 4586 for the wet pendulum test Slip resistance Verification of completed pavement to AS NZS 4663 NATSPEC 120 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0276 Segmental pavers sand bed 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SAND Bedding sand Quality Free of deleterious material such a
102. sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a specific gravity of not less than 1 5 gm cubic centimetre and of 10096 polyurethane mastic 3 EXECUTION 3 4 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY Conditions Commencement Do not commence lining work until such time as the building or zone in question is enclosed and weathertight and all wet trades have been completed Substrates or framing General Before fixing linings check and if necessary adjust the alignment of substrates or framing Battens General Fix at each crossing with structural framing members or direct to solid walls or ceilings Provide wall plugs in solid substrates Ceiling linings General Do not install until at least 14 days after the timber roof structure is fully loaded Accessories and trim General Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation Adhesives General Provide adhesives of types appropriate to their purpose and apply them so that they transmit the loads imposed without causing discolouration of finished surfaces 3 2 PLASTERBOARD LINING Supports General Install timber battens or proprietary cold formed galvanized steel furring channels as follows Where framing member spacing exceeds the recommended spacing Where direct fixing of the plasterboard is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the framing or substrate Where the lining is the substrate for tiled finishes Transverse walls Locate no
103. the object Extent Areas damaged by transport site welding site flame cutting site handling or erection Method To AS NZS 4680 clause 8 NATSPEC 176 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings 0345B STEEL PROTECTIVE PAINT COATINGS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide protective paint coatings that control corrosion to structural steelwork and steel products in the time to first scheduled maintenance as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS General Surface preparation and coating Conform to the recommendations of AS NZS 2312 Site testing of protective coatings Test methods To AS 3894 1 4 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply DFT Dry Film Thickness ITP Inspection and Test Plan um micron 10m Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS NZS 2310 and those below apply Coating contractor The protective coatings application contractor conducting the on or off site coating application works Coating manufacturer The supplier and or manufacturer of the protective coating materials used ITP A series of formal Inspection and Test Plans prepared by the coating contractor to reflect the specific i
104. the sealant if ambient conditions are outside the following Temperature lt 5 C or gt 40 Humidity To the manufacturer s recommendations Joint finish General Force the sealant into the joint and finish with a smooth slightly concave surface using a tool designed for the purpose Protection General Protect the joint from inclement weather during the setting or curing period of the material NATSPEC 37 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0181 Adhesives sealants and fasteners NATSPEC 38 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0182b Fire stopping 0182B FIRE STOPPING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide fire stopping as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 PRECEDENCE General Worksections and referenced documents The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this worksection The requirements of this worksection override conflicting requirements of its referenced documents The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements 1 4 STANDARDS General Service penetration fire stopping systems To BCA C3 15 Control joint fire stopping systems To AS 4072 1 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the f
105. the uppermost structural element of a pavement and on which the surfacing may be placed Discrepancy A difference between contract information about the site and conditions encountered on the site including but not limited to discrepancies concerning the following The nature or quantity of the material to be excavated or placed Existing site levels Services or other obstructions beneath the site surface Rock Monolithic material with volume greater than 0 5 m which cannot be removed until broken up by rippers or percussion tools Site topsoil Soil excavated from the site which contains organic matter supports plant life conforms generally to the fine to medium texture classification to AS 4419 loam silt clay loam and is free from Stones gt 25 mm diameter NATSPEC 74 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork Clay lumps 75 mm diameter Weeds and tree roots Sticks and rubbish Material toxic to plants Subbase The material laid on the subgrade below the base either for the purpose of making up additional pavement thickness required to prevent intrusion of the subgrade into the base or to provide a working platform Subgrade The trimmed or prepared portion of the formation on which the pavement or slab is constructed Generally taken to relate to the upper line of the formation Zone of influence A foundation zone bounded by planes extending dow
106. weathering stains and expose fresh timber Floating floor underlay General Provide the proprietary closed cell foam sheeting that is integral to the flooring system Sprung floor components Underlay Layered plywood panel system as nominated by the flooring system supplier Resilient pads Closed cell pads as spaced and nominated by the flooring system supplier Ventilated skirting Vermin proof as documented or as supplied by the flooring system supplier NATSPEC 308 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0654 Engineered panel flooring Accessories Ramped threshold gradients 1 in 8 maximum 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Storage General Deliver panel flooring to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its moisture content is not adversely affected Do not store on the substrate until the moisture content of the substrates is suitable for the installation of the floor Do not store in areas with wet plaster Substrates General Make sure substrates are as follows Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location and functioning of control joints If solid or continuous excessive projections are removed and voids and hollows are filled with a levelling compound compatible with the flooring including any adhesive Existing timber flooring substrates Remove cupping rough material and surface finishes by rough sanding Flatness Not great
107. with no abrupt variations greater than 1 mm over 250 mm Moisture content alignment of flooring and subfloor General Do not commence installation of flooring unless Concrete subfloor The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B and values in clause 2 4 2 c have been obtained Plywood underlays or timber flooring products The moisture content has been tested to AS NZS 1080 1 and values obtained as follows Air conditioned buildings 8 to 10 Intermittently heated buildings 10 to 12 596 Unheated buildings 12 to 15 Conformance Confirm that the moisture content of the timber flooring products as delivered matches the moisture content of the subfloor as measured on site If not allow for acclimatisation Acclimatisation General Acclimatise the flooring by stacking it in the in service conditions for a minimum period of two weeks with air circulation to all surfaces after the following construction operations are complete Air conditioning operational Lighting operational Site drainage and stormwater works are complete Space fully enclosed and secure Wet work complete and dry 3 2 SUPPORT FIXING UNDERLAY Battens for sheet underlay on concrete slabs Framing fixed direct Fix seasoned battens to the concrete slab in conformance with the Sheet underlay battens table so that their top surfaces are aligned Battens 70 x 35 mm seasoned timber Spacing of fast
108. with the retained samples Final surface preparation or coating application Limits If the following climatic substrate conditions are present do not apply coating The relative humidity is above 85 The substrate temperature is less than 3 C above the dewpoint The ambient air temperature is below 5 C or above 40 C The substrate temperature is below 10 C or above 45 C The surface to be coated is wet or damp Where the full prime coat application cannot be carried out before the specified cleanliness of the surface deteriorates For external or site applied coatings The weather is clearly deteriorating or unfavourable for application or curing High wind conditions The surface preparation standard has not been achieved The time between surface blast cleaning and the commencement of coating exceed 4 hours Visual tarnishing or black spots develop on the surface of the metal Exception Preliminary blast or other surface preparations may be performed in conditions that are outside the limits providing the final surface preparation and all coating applications are undertaken under the limit conditions Prior coating Before the spray application of each coating stripe coat by brush method all edges welds seams rivets bolts and boltholes including slots Prime the underlying surfaces of replacement bolting washers and nuts before installation Procedure Conform to the order shown in the PROTECTIVE PAINT C
109. 01 Adv Low Sealer Undercoat Sheen B7b Sheen B7b B10a Concrete Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0901 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 101 Adv Low eco choice B16 Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 1128 low VOC system Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 101 Adv Low Sealer Undercoat Sheen B7b Sheen B7b B16 MDF Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 1041 Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 101 Adv Low Sealer Undercoat Sheen B7b Sheen B7b B10a Brick and masonry Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 3284 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Low Wear 101 Adv Low eco choice B16 Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 1027 low VOC system Acrylic Block Filler B15 Wear 101 Adv Low Sheen B7b Wear 101 Adv Low Sheen B7b Low gloss latex mould resistant Interior NATSPEC 344 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5013 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp eco choice B16 Bathroom Low Bathroom Low Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Plas
110. 1 and over locks in code group 1 per 4 locks or part thereof 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Mounting height Locks and latches Centreline of the door knob or lever spindle above finished floor 1m Door stops Fixing Fix on the floor skirting or wall as appropriate to prevent the door or door furniture striking the wall or other surface Fasteners Materials Provide materials compatible with the item being fixed and of sufficient strength size and quality to perform their function Concealed fixings Provide a corrosion resistant finish to concealed fixings Exposed fixings Match exposed fixings to the material being fixed Security Locate exposed fixings to lock furniture on the inside faces of external doors and on the inside faces of internal doors to lockable rooms Support Provide appropriate back support for example lock stiles blocking wall noggings and backing plates for hardware fixings Hollow metal sections Provide backing plates drilled and tapped for screw fixing or provide rivet nuts with machine thread screws Do not use self tapping screws or blind rivets NATSPEC 233 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0455 Door hardware Floor springs General Form a recess in the floor slab for the floor spring box and grout the box in place so that the cover plate is flush with the finished floor Hinges Metal frames Fix hinges using metal thread screws
111. 181 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 Type 2 Internal decorative 75 um Alkyd zinc 50 um Alkyd MIO finish Nil phosphate containing conforming to MIO and Aluminium AS NZS 3750 12 pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 Type 2 External non decorative 75 um Alkyd zinc Nil Nil conforming to AS NZS 2312 ALK2 phosphate containing MIO and Aluminium pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 Type 2 External decorative conforming to AS NZS 2312 ALK6 75 um Alkyd zinc phosphate containing MIO and Aluminium pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 type 2 40 um Alkyd MIO finish conforming to AS NZS 3750 12 40 um Alkyd MIO finish conforming to AS NZS 3750 12 Micaceous Iron Oxide AS NZS 2312 Category C D and E table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy Nil Nil conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type2 Internal decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy 75 um Epoxy MIO Nil conforming to conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 AS NZS 3750 14 External non decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy 200 um High Build Nil conforming to AS NZS 2312 EHB4 conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 Epoxy MIO conforming to AS NZS 3750 14 External decorative conforming to AS NZS 2312 EHB6 75 um Zinc ric
112. 2 3 lt 6 minutes Strength of successive coats Make sure successive coats are no richer in binder than the coat to which they are applied Mixes table Cement render Mix type Substrate Upper and lower limits of proportions by volume Cement Lime Sand Single or multi CRS Dense and 1 0 3 coat systems smooth 1 0 5 4 5 with integral concrete and finishing masonry treatments Base coats in multi coat systems with cement or gypsum finishes CRM Regular clay or 1 0 5 4 5 concrete 1 1 6 masonry CRW Lightweight 1 1 6 concrete 1 2 9 masonry and other weak substrates Second coat CRF Cement render 1 1 6 Internal base coats 1 2 9 Second coat CRF Cement render 1 1 5 External base coats 1 2 6 NATSPEC 277 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Mix table Gypsum finish coat by volume 0611 Rendering and plastering Mix type Substrate Upper and lower limits of proportions by volume Gypsum Cement Lime putty Sand Gypsum GPF Cement 1 1 5 finish coats render base 1 2 coats Mix table Gypsum finish coat by weight Gypsum plaster kg Lime putty kg 17 25 34 50 51 75 Control joint products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for use with the plastering system and to accommodate the anticipated movement of the substrates and or the plaster Water General
113. 2 cc 1icccco noces dd 311 0656 Floor Sanding and finishing n eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene enne nennen nnn nnne nnn nnn 319 0657 Resin based seamless flooring ns 323 0671 DULUX panni csa nine tree tei RE A 328 0673 Powder COATINGS 361 0702 Mechanical design and install eene nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nnn nn 362 0802 Hydraulic design and install nennen nennen nennen nnn 363 0902 Electrical design and install enne nnne nnne nnne 364 NATSPEC 3 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES 0121 TRADE RATES 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL General Information General All rates exclude GST All Trade Item Rates allow for supply and installation unless noted otherwise The below schedule of general trade rates is provided for the purposes of the valuation of variations and are the specific rates or prices to be considered for additional work Where relevant the nominated rates allow for any proprietary specified products in the contract documents particular to that trade item Substitutions Refer to part General requirements of the specification 1 2 GENERAL TRADE RATES Trade Description Standard hr rate Out of hours hr rate 1 General labourer 45 00 67 50 2 Tradesperson 105 00 3 Bricklayer 105 00 4 Plasterer and renderer 105 00 5 Carpenter and joiner 105 00
114. 22 Timber Dressed timber PFMO056 Ferrous metals mild steel cast External mild steel iron commercial industrial preparation PFMO005 Ferrous metals mild steel cast Ferrous metals minor domestic iron PFMO009 Ferrous metals mild Steel cast Ferrous metals industrial power iron tool cleaning PFCO013 Fibre cement sheet 7 5 mm Fibre cement sheet 9 mm primed 6 9 mm Villaboard PFG016 Fibreglass Fibreglass surface PFP021 Fibrous plaster set plaster Fibrous plaster PBC030 Bituminous coatings Flintkote Bituminous coatings PGCO015 Glass reinforced concrete Glass reinforced concrete PHB045 Hardboard masonite Hardboard masonite PFMO069 Ferrous metals mild steel cast X Internal mild steel iron commercial industrial prep Class2 Abrasive Blast Clean PFEO71 James Hardie Preprimed Fibre James Hardie Preprimed Fibre Cement Eave and Soffit Lining Cement Eave amp Soffit Lining PLX034 Laminex Laminex PMD020 Medium density fibreboard Medium density fibreboard PFO036 Expanded polystyrene system Meshclad E I F S External Insulated Finishing System PNFO004 Non ferrous metals Non Ferrous Metal Surfaces aluminiums alloys brass bronze c Preparation opper PCO018 Concrete off form tilt up pre Off form tilt up pre cast cast PPLOO8 Plaster products Plaster products PCS063 Pre coated sheet steel Pre coated sheet steel Colorbond etc Colorbond etc PTOO058 Timber previously oiled stained Previously oiled stained ex
115. 221 b Site management 0e cdeeterssiertecceeueGecetactsezecseetdcercuesesdeedetedereetees 67 0222 Earthwork 2n iae eee Iac eee iTunes 74 0223 Servi e trenthiNg isss m 82 0224b Stormwater Site isnmnennennnnnnnnnennenennnnnenenennnnennnnennnennnennnnenennnneennnes 87 0241 Landscape walling and edging eene 88 0242b Landscape fences and barriers ss nennen nnne nnn nnn 91 0250b Landscape gardening eeeeeeeeeeeee esses essen eene nennen nennt AKAAKA Naina 94 0255b Landscape plant procurement ss esee enne nn nnne nnn nien nnn nnn 95 0256b Landscape establishment eee enne nnn nnne nnn nnn rnnt 96 Landscape furniture and fixtures ts snnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennneneennnnnnnnnes 97 0271 Pavement base and subbase ss nena nnn nnn nnmnnn ranae tnra inni 98 0272s Asphaltic ConCrete sde 104 0274b Concrete pavement uelis eiseeeeeeeeeen ases nannten ninth assa sinn ase sR nass Issa sns natn nn nnn 106 0275b Segmental pavers mortar bed snennnnennnnnnennennes 114 0276 Segmental pavers sand bed nennnennnenesnnnennes 119 0277 Pavement ancillarles 5 1 ecce erroe acere Lore use 125 EL aTe erp Ec 129 0310b Concrete combi
116. 275 AZ150 External Stainless 316 CRM Powder coated aluminium Corrosion resistance and durability table Atmospheric corrosivity category D and F to AS NZS 2312 Situation Metal lath beads and Minimum cement content mix embedded items type above damp proof course Internal Galvanize after fabrication CRW 300 g m Metallic coated sheet Z275 AZ150 External Stainless 316 CRS NATSPEC 276 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0611 Rendering and plastering Situation Metal lath beads and Minimum cement content mix embedded items type above damp proof course Powder coated aluminium 1 Avoid organic coating in Category F zones Curing products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for use with the plaster system Lime Limes for building To AS 1672 1 Lime putty General Prepare lime putty as follows Stand dry hydrate of lime to AS 1672 1 and water for 24 hours or more without drying out Stand quicklime and water for 14 days or more without drying out Metal lath Internal Expanded metal to AS 1397 coating class Z350 External Stainless steel or PVC Mixes General Select a mix ratio to suit the conditions of application in conformity with the Mixes table Measurement Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes Do not allow sand to bulk by absorption of water Plaster mixing Machine mix
117. 2870 2 3 TESTING General Test authority Concrete supplier or NATA registered laboratory Reports and records of test results To AS 1012 Retain results on site Assessment process of test results Standard To AS 1379 Method of assessment Project assessment Sampling Method of sampling AS 1012 1 Sampling locations To AS 1012 1 and the following NATSPEC 149 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0314b Concrete in situ Sample the concrete on site at the point of discharge from the agitator For compressive strength tests Spread the site sampling evenly throughout the pour Frequency of sampling To AS 1379 and the following For slump tests Take at least one sample from each batch For compressive strength tests Sample to the Project assessment strength grade sampling table Project assessment strength grade sampling table Number of batches for each Minimum number of samples type and grade of concrete per Columns and load bearing wall Other elements per day day elements per batch 1 1 2 5 6 10 11 20 BIO m 2 each additional 10 additional Making and curing of specimens General To AS 1012 8 1 and AS 1012 8 2 Specimens for compressive strength tests Make and cure at least two specimens from the sample of each grade Specimen size Nominally 200 x 100 mm diameter If aggregate size exceeds 20 mm nominal
118. 5 1 Fibre cement underlay Thickness 5 mm minimum Wet processed fibreboard hardboard underlay Standard To AS NZS 1859 4 Classification General purpose medium board manufactured specifically as flooring underlay Thickness 5 5 mm Soft underlay Standard To AS 4288 2 4 ADHESIVES AND TAPES Standard General To AS NZS 2455 1 Adhesives General Compatible with the floor covering material and suitable for bonding it to the subfloor Friction compound Suitable for holding tiles in position without permanent sticking Hot melt adhesive tapes General Commercial grade glass fibre and cotton thermoplastic adhesive coated tape 60 mm wide on a 90 mm wide metal foil base and backed with silicon coated release paper 2 5 STRIPS Preformed gripper strips General Commercial grade plywood carpet gripper strip with 3 rows of rust resistant angled pins of length appropriate to the carpet type Size minimum 38 mm wide x 7 mm thick Location At edges except where edge strips are used Provide double gripper strips to edges where recommended Edge strips Type Heavy duty edge strip appropriate to the floor covering type tackless or adhesive fixed capable where necessary of accommodating different levels of adjacent floor finishes Form Metal moulding or extrusion with vinyl inserts Location At exposed edges of the carpet and at junctions with differing floor finishes or finishes of a different thickness Where
119. 50 9 5 65 to 90 12 7 100 to 125 15 8 150 to 200 19 0 3 40 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ACCESS General Services and equipment Locate and arrange all services and equipment so that They comply with the relevant requirements of the appropriate Work Health and Safety regulations Failure of plant and equipment including leaks does not create a hazard for the building occupants Failure of plant and equipment including leaks cause a minimum or no damage to the building its finishes and contents including water sensitive equipment or finishes Instruments gauges and the like are located so they can be easily read Safe tray and an overflow pipe are provided to each tank hot water heater and storage vessel Piping Provide access and clearance at fittings which require maintenance or servicing including control valves and joints intended to permit pipe removal Arrange piping so that it does not interfere with the removal or servicing of associated equipment or valves or block access or ventilation openings Services and equipment are readily accessible for inspection and maintenance and arranged so that inspection and maintenance can be carried out in a safe and efficient manner Include the following Minimise inconvenience and disruption to building occupants or damage to the building structure or finishes Locate plant including high level tanks requiring regular inspection and maintenance so it is either safely and readily a
120. 672 1 Sand Fine aggregate with a low clay content and free from efflorescing salts selected for colour and grading Water Clean and free from any deleterious matter Admixtures To AS 3700 clause 1 1 4 2 4 Pigment To BS EN 12878 and as follows Quantity Less than 1096 of the mass of cement in the mix Proportions Conform to the Mortar mix table Mortar mix table 0331b Brick and block construction Mortar class Cement lime sand ratios by volume Water thickener to AS 3700 Clay Concrete Calcium silicate Masonry cement M3 1 0 4 1 0 4 n a Yes M4 1 0 3 n a n a Yes Cement GP GB M2 1 2 9 n a n a No M3 1 1 6 1 1 6 n a Optional M3 1 0 5 1 0 5 1 0 5 Yes M4 1 0 5 4 5 1 0 5 4 5 n a Optional M4 1 0 4 1 0 4 1 0 4 Yes M4 1 0 0 25 3 1 0 0 25 3 n a Optional Grout Standard To AS 3700 clause 11 7 Minimum characteristic compressive strength 12 MPa 2 3 BUILT IN COMPONENTS General Durability class of built in components To AS 3700 Table 5 1 Steel lintels Angles and flats To AS NZS 3679 1 Cold formed proprietary lintels Designed to AS NZS 4600 Corrosion protection To AS NZS 2699 3 Galvanizing Do not cut after galvanizing Reinforcement Standard To AS NZS 4671 Corrosion protection To AS 3700 clause 5 9 Minimum cover To AS 3700 Table 5 1 Wall ties Standard To AS NZS 2699 1 Corrosion protection To AS NZS 2699 1 Connectors and accessories
121. 7 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref cement render Primer B15 Gloss Rolana Finish B38a Gloss Rolana Finish B38a Semi gloss water based enamel Exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Fibre cement Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5037 products Acrylic Primer Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Undercoat B17A B8b B8b Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5038 veneers Acrylic Primer Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Undercoat B17A B8b B8b Concrete Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5039 Acrylic Primer Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Undercoat B17A B8b B8b Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5022 Acrylic Primer Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Undercoat B17A B8b B8b Brick and masonry Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5040 Acrylic Primer Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Sealer Undercoat B8b B8b B16 Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5041 Acrylic Block Filler Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B15 B8b B8b Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5023 incl HD Metal Primer Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acryl
122. 71 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0342 Light steel framing 1 6 TOLERANCES General Manufacturing and assembly tolerances To NASH 1 Standard Appendix D Installation tolerances for attachments to supporting structures walls trusses rafters ceiling joists and floor members To NASH 1 Standard Appendix D 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 COMPONENTS Cold formed steel framing Cold form sections from metallic coated steel to AS 1397 Corrosion protection To BCA 3 4 2 2 Framing members Cold formed steel framing For a proprietary system comply with NASH 1 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY Fabrication Length Cut members accurately to length so that they fit firmly against abutting members Service holes Form holes by drilling or punching Bushes Provide plastic bushes or grommets to site cut holes Swarf Remove swarf and other debris from cold formed steel framing immediately Site work Do not fabricate on site where welded connections are required Fastening Type Select from the following Bolting Self drilling self tapping screws Blind rivets Proprietary clinching system Structural adhesives Welding Welding Burning Avoid procedures that result in greater than localised burning of the sheets or framing members Prefabricated frames General Protect frames from damage or distortion during storage transport and erection Metal separation General In
123. 720 1 Table 4 11 3 EXECUTION 3 1 TRANSPORT AND DELIVERY General Handling and protection Do not distort or damage timber or timber products Moisture content Maintain the equilibrium moisture content of seasoned timber Appearance products Store under cover 3 2 STRUCTURAL TIMBER General Preservative treatment If holes are drilled in treated timber apply a saturation coating of preservative to the sides of the holes before inserting fixings Outdoor structures Sealing Seal the ends of members with wax emulsion or petroleum jelly immediately after sawing Anti splitting plates Plate the ends of members 250 x 75 mm or larger with pressed or hammer on galvanized nail plates equal to 5096 of the cross sectional area Bolt holes Treat bolt holes with a protective treatment before inserting the bolt Coating After completion of fabrication notching and machining coat joints holes and notches with a protective coating Heart Place the heart side of bracing members on the inside of joints Place the heart side of other members on the downside wherever possible Minimum bolts size M20 Minimum washers size 5 mm thick and 65 mm square or 75 mm diameter Bolt protection Coat bolts with a bituminous coating before insertion in the bolt hole Recessed fixing For fixings punched or sunk below the surface fill the recess with a suitable wood filler or mastic Finishing If a protective or decorative finish is required appl
124. 9 3 6 1 passing 13 2mm 77 93 77 93 78 92 78 92 sieve AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 9 5 mm 63 83 63 83 63 83 63 83 71 87 sieve AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 4 75 mm 44 64 44 64 44 64 44 64 47 70 sieve AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 2 36 mm 129 49 29 49 30 48 30 48 35 56 sieve AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 0 425 mm 13 23 13 23 13 21 13 21 14 32 sieve AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 0 075 mm 15 11 5 11 5 9 5 9 6 20 sieve AS 1289 3 1 1 Liquid limit max 30 max 30 max 35 max 35 max 25 AS 1289 3 3 1 Plasticity index All areas min 2 min 2 gt Areas with annual max 6 max 6 max 6 max 6 max 6 rainfall gt 500 mm Areas with annual max 10 max 10 max 10 max 10 max 10 NATSPEC 99 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0271 Pavement base and subbase Test method Description CRB20 1 CRB20 2 RCCB20 1 RCCB20 2 NGB20 rainfall 500 mm AS 1289 3 4 1 Linear shrinkage All areas min 0 7 min 0 7 Areas with annual rainfall 500 mm max 2 0 max 2 0 max 2 0 max 2 0 max 2 0 Areas with annual rainfall 500 mm max 4 0 max 4 0 max 4 0 max 4 0 max 4 0 Direct measurement Foreign materials in that fraction of RCCB retained on 4 75 mm sieve by mass High density brick etc max 2 0 max 2 0 Low density plaster etc max 0 5 max 0 5 Organic matter wood etc max O 1 max O 1 Asbestos and
125. AAMA 701 702 Weather bars General Provide a weather bar under hinged external doors locate under the centres of closed doors Type Refer to architectural drawings 3 EXECUTION 3 1 FRAMES General Frames Install the frames are as follows Plumb level straight and true Fixed or anchored to the building structure Isolated from any building loads including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening Frame fixing Brackets Metallic coated steel Width 2 25 mm Thickness 2 1 5 mm Depth of fixing for building into masonry Brackets 2 200 mm Expansion anchors 2 50 mm Plugs 2 50 mm Rods 2 60 mm Jamb fixing centres 600 mm Joints General Make accurately fitted joints where fasteners pins screws adhesives and pressure indentations are not visible on exposed surfaces Aluminium frames Building in to masonry Screw galvanized steel brackets twice to jambs and build in Fixing to masonry openings Build in seasoned timber plugs to masonry joints or use proprietary expansion anchors and screw twice through jambs at each fixing Fixing to stud frame openings Screw once to studs at each fixing NATSPEC 227 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0453b Doors and access panels Steel frames Building in to masonry Attach galvanized steel rods to jambs build in and grout up Fixing to masonry openings Build in hairpin anchors and install l
126. Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a B8a B8a Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Dulux SD 3423 NATSPEC 354 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Acrylic Blockfiller B15 Weathershield Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a Weathershield Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a Concrete blockwork Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 2957 High build 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 performance Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller coating system Finish B38a Finish B38a Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Dulux SD 3411 incl Zincalume Galvanised Iron Weathershield Weathershield Galvabond Primer B12A Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Zincanneal B8a B8a zincseal zinc primed steel HD Galvanized Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Dulux SD 3411 steel or zinc primed Galvanised Iron Weathershield Weathershield steel Primer B12A Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a B8a Shop primed or red Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Dulux SD 2158 oxide primed Metal Primer B11 Weathershield Weathershield ROZP ferrous Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic metal B8a B8a Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Dulux SD 5048 resistant types e g Water Based Stain Weathershield Weathershield FRP UPVC low VOC system B
127. Aluminium joinery General Install windows and glazed doors frames as follows Plumb level straight and true within acceptable building tolerances Fixed or anchored to the building structure in conformance with the wind action loading requirements Isolated from any building loads including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening Allow for thermal movement Weatherproofing Flashing and weatherings Install flashings weather bars drips storm moulds caulking and pointing so that water is prevented from penetrating the building between the window frame and the building NATSPEC 220 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0451 AWS aluminium windows and doors structure under the prevailing service conditions including normal structural movement of the building Fixing Fasteners and fastener spacing Conform to the following Commercial AWS Commercial Design Specifiers Guide available at www awscommercial com au Residential Vantage Design Specifiers Guide to Aluminium Joinery available at www vantagealuminium com au Fasteners Conceal fasteners Packing Pack behind fixing points with durable full width packing Joints General Make accurately fitted tight joints so that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pins screws adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces Sealants If priming is recommended prime surfaces in co
128. C 218 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0451 AWS aluminium windows and doors 2 3 GLASS IDENTIFICATION Safety glazing materials Identification Identify each piece or panel to AS 1288 Noise reducing glazed assemblies Labelling Label each panel with a legible non permanent mark self destroying when removed stating and certifying the Ry rating and identifying the testing authority Remove when directed Bullet resistant panels Marking To AS NZS 2343 2 4 INSECT SCREENS Aluminium framed screens General Provide proprietary aluminium screen sections with mesh fixing channel mitred staked and screwed at corners Provide an extended frame section where necessary to adapt to window opening gear Mesh Provide black aluminium mesh Bead the mesh into the frame channel with a continuous resilient gasket so that the mesh is taut and without distortion Fixed screens General Provide fixed screens to the window frames with a clipping device which permits removal for cleaning Hinged screens General Hinge at the top to give access to opening sash Roll up screens General Provide a proprietary retractable insect screen comprising aluminium frame with baked enamel finish fibreglass mesh beaded into the frame and a retraction system including tension spring nylon bearings positive self locking device and plastic sealing strip at sill Sliding screens General Provide a matching aluminiu
129. DULUX painting Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu Dulux PDS No AS NZS Standard x material 2311 PRN description Weatherproof Feast Watson Satinproof Feast Watson Flatproof Interior clear latex Intergrain Ultraclear DW0762 B19a AS 3730 27 varnish water Interior Satin low DW0761 based one pack VOC DW1491 Intergrain Ultraclear DW 1490 Interior Gloss low VOC Cabot s Cabothane Water Based gloss or satin low VOC Floor varnish Feast Watson DW0732 B20a AS 3730 27 solvent based Floorproof clear moisture cure Floor Varnish Intergrain Enviropro DW 1420 water based one Endure 1 Pack DW1419 pack matt satin or DW1418 gloss low VOC Floor varnish clear Feast Watson DW1312 B20b AS 3730 27 or tinted two pack EnviroMax gloss DW1190 semi gloss or low DW1038 sheen low VOC DW1421 Intergrain Enviropro DW 1422 Endure DW1423 2 Pack gloss satin or matt Exterior latex stain Intergrain DW0758 B22 AS 3730 16 semi transparent NaturalStain low VOC Fence stain latex Dulux DD0055 B22a AS 3730 16 paints opaque Weathershield DWO0660 Garden Shades Cabot s Timbercolour Exterior stain Cabot s Deck amp DW1579 B23 AS 3730 28 solvent borne Exterior Stain opaque Exterior stain Feast Watson DW1248 B23a NE solvent borne Woodshield DW1247 semi transparent Int Ext DW1579 Feast Watson Decking Stain Cabot s Deck amp Exterior S
130. Evaluation of formed surfaces General If evaluation of formed surface tolerance or colour is required complete the evaluation before surface treatment Surface repairs Method If surface repairs are required submit proposals Finishing methods General If soffits of concrete elements or faces of concrete columns are to have a finish other than an off form finish provide details of proposed procedures Blasted finishes Abrasive Blast the cured surface using hard sharp graded abrasive particles until the coarse aggregate is in uniform relief Light abrasive Blast the cured surface using hard sharp graded abrasive particles to provide a uniform matt finish without exposing the coarse aggregate Bush hammered finish Remove the minimum matrix using bush hammering to expose the coarse aggregate recessing the matrix no deeper than half the aggregate size to give a uniform texture Exposed aggregate finish Remove the vertical face formwork while the concrete is green Wet the surface and scrub using stiff fibre or wire brushes using clean water freely until the aggregate is uniformly exposed Do not use acid etching Rinse the surface with clean water Floated finishes Sand floated finish Remove the vertical face formwork while the concrete is green Wet the surface and rub using a wood float Rub fine sand into the surface until a uniform colour and texture are produced Grout floated finish Remove the vertical face f
131. Execution details Concrete Submit proposals for mixing placing finishing and curing concrete including the following Changes to the concrete mix Curing and protection methods Cutting or coring If cutting or coring of hardened concrete is proposed provide details Sawn joints Submit proposed methods timing and sequence of sawing joints Pre mixed supply delivery dockets For each batch submit a docket listing the information required by AS 1379 and the following information For special class performance concrete specified performance and type of cement binder For special class prescription concrete details of mix additives and type of cement binder Method of placement and climate conditions during pour The amount of water if any added at the site 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Polymeric film underlay Vapour barriers and damp proofing membranes To AS 2870 clause 5 3 8 Chemical admixtures Standard To AS 1478 1 Contents Free of chlorides fluorides and nitrates Curing compounds Standard To AS 3799 Coloured concrete Standard To AS 3610 1 2 2 CONCRETE Properties Concrete mix and supply Conform to the following Normal class To AS 1379 clause 1 5 3 Properties Conform to the Concrete properties schedule performance Cover Concrete cover generally To AS 3600 Concrete cover for structures for retaining liquids To AS 3735 Concrete cover for residential ground slabs and footings To AS
132. For properties described in the Adjoining properties to be recorded Schedule The owner will at their own cost prepare dilapidation records for all properties noted in the schedule The contractor can at its discretion prepare records for any other properties however any associated costs are to be borne by the contractor and a copy of the record must be submitted to the owner for acceptance prior to commencement of work on site Endorsed copies Submit one endorsed copy of each record Keep the other endorsed copy on site Purpose of submission Information only NATSPEC 13 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0142 Preliminaries ABIC SW 2008 Adjoining properties to be recorded schedule Title Owner Description 26 Tryon Road Lindfield Cromehurst School School buildings and playgrounds Tryon Road and surrounds Ku ring gai Council Public land Kochia Lane and surrounds Ku ring gai Council Public land 1 3 CONSTRUCTION PLANT Use of existing services General Existing services may be used as temporary services for the performance of the contract subject to conditions stated in the Existing services schedule Existing services schedule Service Conditions of use Power Associated costs to be borne by contractor Water Associated costs to be borne by contractor Protective clothing Protective clothing Make available protective clothing for the use of vis
133. General Submit labelled production run samples illustrating the range of colour pattern texture and pile yarn available in the required carpet types Sample size Submit the following Carpet Manufacturer s standard swatch Underlay Submit one labelled sample at least 600x600 mm 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL Critical radiant flux Standard to AS ISO 9239 1 Smoke development rate Standard To AS ISO 9239 1 Floor finishes in non sprinklered buildings 750 percent minutes 2 2 CARPET Tolerances Standard To AS NZS 1385 Batching General Carpet laid in a single area and of a single specified type quality colour and design must come from one manufacturing batch and dye lot Insect resistance Insecticide Provide carpets and underlays composed entirely of materials either inherently resistant to insect attack or treated against insect attack including by moth and carpet beetle by application of insecticide to the yarn during the dyeing or scouring process NATSPEC 303 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0652b Carpets Electrical resistance General Provide carpet which is within the range of surface resistance specified in AS 2834 clause 2 1 2 when tested to AS 4155 6 VOC limits Total VOC limit Generally 0 5 mg m Compliance To the Environmental Classification Scheme operated by the Carpet Institute of Australia 2 3 UNDERLAYS Standard General To AS NZS 245
134. In locating cores fixings and embedded items reposition but do not cut reinforcement and maintain cover to reinforcement Isolation Isolate embedded items to prevent water tracking to concrete providing minimum cover to reinforcement Tolerances General Maximum deviation from correct positions Anchor bolt groups for structural steel To AS 4100 Cores and embedded items generally 10 mm Other fixing bolts 3 mm 3 4 PLACING AND COMPACTION Placing Horizontal transport Use suitable conveyors clean chutes troughs hoppers or pipes Methods Avoid segregation and loss of concrete and minimise plastic settlement Maintain a nominally vertical and plastic concrete edge during placement Layers Place concrete in layers lt 300 mm thick Compact succeeding layer into previous layer before previous layer has taken initial set Compaction Methods Use immersion and screed vibrators accompanied by hand methods as appropriate to remove entrapped air and to fully compact the mix NATSPEC 151 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0314b Concrete in situ Vibrators Do not allow vibrators to contact set concrete reinforcement or items including pipes and conduits embedded in concrete Do not use vibrators to move concrete along the formwork Avoid causing segregation by over vibration Placing records General Keep on site and make available for inspection a log book recording each plac
135. Installation Excavate to lay logs at least half diameter into the ground Spike through logs with two 13 mm diameter galvanized mild steel rods per log penetrating a minimum of 500 mm into the NATSPEC 89 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0241 Landscape walling and edging subgrade Drive the rods flush with the upper surface of the log Butt the logs together to a close neat fit Select adjacent logs for similar diameter Sawn timber Installation Set edgings flush with adjoining surfaces Drive pegs into the ground at 1200 mm centres on the planting side of the edging and on both sides of joints between boards with peg tops 15 mm below top of edging Fix the pegs with galvanised nails two per fixing Curving Space the pegs to hold edging to a uniform curve Reduce edging thickness to 15 mm if required to enable it to be bent Sleeper Installation Spike through sleepers with two 13 mm diameter galvanized mild steel rods per sleeper penetrating a minimum of 500 mm into the subgrade Drive the rods flush with the upper surface of the sleeper Arris the upper exposed sleeper edges to produce a 15 mm wide face at 45 degrees to the edges Concrete Edging strip Place in a shallow trench between timber forms Wood float finish flush with the adjacent finished grass level Provide control joints filled with resilient bituminous material at 3 m maximum centres Concrete kerb Construction Fixed for
136. MENT 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to landscape designer s specification NATSPEC 95 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0256b Landscape establishment 0256B LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to landscape designer s specification NATSPEC 96 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Landscape furniture and fixtures LANDSCAPE FURNITURE AND FIXTURES 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide landscape furniture and fixtures as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Site locations or substrates prepared to receive furniture or fixtures before installation 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Subcontractors General Submit names and contact details of proposed suppliers and installers Installation General Submit the manufacturer s standard drawings and details showing methods of construction assembly and installation with dimensions and tolerances Preservative treatment CCA treated timber If proposed to be used submit details 2 EXECUTION 2 4 FIXING Erection Line and level Erect posts or poles vertically Erect furniture items level Provide a level area around benches and se
137. NG OUT Tile joints Joint widths Set out tiles to give uniform joint widths within the following limits Floors Dry pressed tiles 3 mm NATSPEC 297 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling Extruded tiles 6 mm Vitrified 3 to 5 mm Quarry tiles 6 to 12 mm Chemical resistant epoxy jointed tiling 5 to 6 mm Large and or irregular floor tiles 6 to 12 mm Mounted mosaics To match mounting pattern Walls Dry pressed tile 1 5 mm Extruded tile 6 mm Joint alignment Set out tiling with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plumb Joint position Set out tiles from the centre of the floor or wall to be tiled Margins General Provide whole or purpose made tiles at margins where practicable otherwise set out to give equal margins of cut tiles If margins less than half a tile width are unavoidable locate the cut tiles where they are least conspicuous Fixtures General If possible position tiles so that holes for fixtures and other penetrations occur at the intersection of horizontal and vertical joints or on the centre lines of tiles Continue tiling fully behind fixtures which are not built in to the tiling surface Before tiling ensure that fixtures interrupting the tile surfaces are accurately positioned in their designed or optimum locations relative to the tile layout 3 6 FALLS AND LEVELS Grading General Grade floor t
138. NING ELEMENTS General Fixing Provide for the fixing of adjoining building elements that are to be connected to or supported on the structural steel 1 6 INSPECTION Notice on site Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Anchor bolts in position before casting in Steelwork and column bases erected on site before grouting encasing site painting or cladding Reinforcement and formwork in place before any encasement Completed grouting encasement fire protection or site painting 1 7 SUBMISSIONS Origin of steel Requirement Only use steel of Australian origin Bolts Compliance Submit a manufacturer s compliance test certificate from an ILAC accredited testing organization confirming compliance with AS NZS 1252 Independent certification Provide a local NATA accredited laboratory independent compliance certificate based on appropriate testing and verification Shop drawings General Submit shop drawings showing the following information Marking plans Identification Steel type and grade Dimensions of items NATSPEC 167 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Required camber where applicable Connection details Orientation of members 0341b Structural steel Surface preparation methods and coating system if shop applied Breather holes for hollow sections with seal plates being hot dip galvanized Location o
139. OATING SYSTEMS Timing Conform to the minimum and maximum recoat intervals and curing times Detail Stripe coat all welds bolt holes corners and difficult to spray areas by brushing in with the prime coat and intermediate coat material before the full coating application Subsequent coats Ensure that before any subsequent coating layer is applied the surface condition of the preceding coat is complete and correct in all respects including its DFT achievement cleanliness freedom from defects Correction Correct any defect in a coating layer before the subsequent coating layer is applied Protection General Perform all painting under cover and or protected from rain condensation dew excessive wind overspray or wind blown dust Period Continue protection where any of these conditions exist before the coating has cured to a sufficient degree so as to be unaffected 3 5 COATING REPAIR Repair of coating damage Preparation Feather back by hand or machine sanding all leading edges of intact coating adjacent to the repair to remove any sharp edge Surface contamination Remove by dusting or blowing down before applying the first coat of paint Sequence Apply the repair coating in the same sequence and manner as the original coating Areas damaged without exposing the primer Wash with a proprietary detergent solution and rinse with fresh water followed by abrading and ensuring that edges of sound paint are feathered Then coat the
140. PTL Pty Limited 24 Tryon Road Lindfield Construction Issue Revision Date Amendment Approved by A 23 11 12 Issued for Information MA B 03 12 12 Issued for Tender CC MA 0 21 05 13 Approved for Construction MA McCullum Ashby Architects P O Box 54 Wahroonga NSW 2076 T 94874033 E murray mccullumashby com au ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Table of contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Table OF COMEM S iue eno ee nt nn ne uidi nn en 2 0121 Trade RAC sie seta coca 2 etic cae ide sauces dL s 4 0142 Preliminaries ABIC SW 2008 nn nnrrrssrrnneranneneeneenennenennnnmennenennnnnennnnenneneennens 13 0171b General requirements sense 17 0181 Adhesives Sealants and fasteners se 33 0192b Fire stopping 5 1r EEEE Eaa A ENE E EEA EAEAN RERE a 39 0183b Metals and prefinishes cccccseececeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeneeseeeeneeseeeeneeseeeeneeseseeneeseeesneeseseseeseeeseeeseeeenaes 42 0184 Termite management seen eneeseeeeneeseeeeneeseeeeneeseeesneesesesueesesesneeseeesnenseseenees 46 0185 Timber products finishes and treatment 48 0186 Building IT components 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee esses eese nennen nnne nn nnns nnnm anna nnn anne nnmnnn nennen 52 0193 Roof access safety Systems eene enne nnne nn nnn innen rinse tnr inset rinse nnnn 54 0194 RAVEN door seals and window seals eee nes 58 O20 1D Demo ithOn mE DS 62 0
141. PVC Based Stain B5 B5 Blocker B17A Plastics solvent Dulux Dulux Don t use Solvent Don t use Solvent N A sensitive types e g PrepLock Water Based Use Water Based Use Water polystyrene Based Stain Based Paints Based Paints Blocker B17A Car parking line marking Requirement Apply nominally 80 100 mm wide line marking for car parking spaces nominated on drawings Materials Paint System Dulux Roadmaster WB2 spray applied to manufacturers written recommendations Colour shall be white and shall not be subject to discolouration by the bitumen from the road surface Application Unless approved all paint shall be applied by a mechanical line marking sprayer The road surface shall be clean and dry at the time of painting Paint shall be applied at wet thickness in the range of 0 35 to 0 40 mm Bitumen shall be at least 30 days old before coating Standard To AS NZS 2890 1 NATSPEC 359 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting NATSPEC 360 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0673 Powder coatings 0673 POWDER COATINGS 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide powder coating systems to substrates as documented Selections As documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS Substrates
142. PrepLock DD1310 B30b based for oil stains Water Based Stain Blocker low VOC Chalk sealer Dulux Sealer DD0074 B31 NE surface conditioner Binder DA0442 Dulux Acraprime Solvent Based Primer Anti mould Intergrain TSS DW0768 B32 NE treatment or wash for timber Water repellent for Dulux AquaBan DD0002 B33 NE masonry Creosote stain No longer used N A B35 NE Paint remover Selleys Pollystrippa Poly B36a NE solvent borne Paint Stripper O NATSPEC 335 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu Dulux PDS No AS NZS Standard x material 2311 PRN description Paint remover Selleys Polystrippa Poly B36b NE chemical Renovators Choice Bituminous paints No longer used N A B37 NE High build Dulux Acratex Acratex B38a AS NZS 4548 1 membrane or Range AS NZS 4548 2 texture coatings for AS NZS 4548 3 masonry and AS NZS 4548 4 concrete exterior Texture finish latex Dulux Effects B38b NE coatings for Range interior masonry and plasterboard interior only Clear or colourless Intergrain DW1401 B39a NE coatings UltraClear Exterior DW1400 waterborne for gloss or satin timber exterior Note not suitable for decking Clear coatings Intergrain Ultraclear DWO0762 B39b NE waterborne for Interior gloss or DW0761 timber interior satin low VOC DW0677 Cabot s Crystal DW0678 Clear gloss or satin Cl
143. Primer B17a Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 brass copper tin amp BY amp B9 plate low VOC system Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5031 resistant types e g FRP UPVC low VOC system Water based Stain Blocker B17a Gloss Acrylic B42 amp B9 Gloss Acrylic B42 amp B9 NATSPEC 349 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Full gloss solvent borne Interior 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber and primed Dulux 1 Step Oil Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 0039 hardboard veneers Based Primer Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss Sealer Undercoat B5 B5 B17 MDF interior only Dulux 1 Step Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 1168 Acrylic Primer Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss Undercoat B17a B5 B5 Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 0381 incl HD Metal Primer Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss galvanized steel B12a Apply 2 B5 B5 zincalume coats Galvabond zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel Shop primed or red Spot Prime with Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 1930 oxide primed Quit Rust All Metal Enamel High Gloss Enamel High Gloss ROZP ferrous Primer B11 B5 B5 metal Non ferrous metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 1085 incl aluminium Etch
144. Provide cast concrete as documented and as follows Conforming to the design details Satisfying quality and inspection requirements Compatible with following finishes Design Formwork The design of the formwork other than profiled steel sheeting composite formwork is the contractor s responsibility 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS General Formwork design and construction formed surfaces To AS 3610 and AS 3610 1 Plywood formwork To AS 6669 Profiled steel sheeting including shear connectors To AS 2327 1 Specification and supply of concrete To AS 1379 Concrete materials and construction To AS 3600 Residential ground slabs and footings To AS 2870 Concrete structures for retaining liquids To AS 3735 Structural design To AS 3600 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Ambient temperature The air temperature at the time of mixing and placing of concrete Average ambient temperature Average value of the daily maximum and minimum ambient temperatures over the relevant period at a site Batch A quantity of concrete containing a fixed quantity of ingredients and produced in a discrete operation Concrete class Normal Concrete which is specified primarily by a standard compressive strength grade and otherwise conforming to AS 1379
145. REPARATION General Substrates Prepare substrates as follows Fill all cracks in substrates wider than 1 5 mm with a filler compatible with the membrane system Fill voids and hollows in concrete substrates with a concrete mix not stronger than the substrate Remove projections NATSPEC 203 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0411b Waterproofing external and tanking Remove deleterious and loose material Remove all traces of a concrete curing compound if used Leave the surface free of contaminants clean and dust free Moisture content Concrete substrates Cure for 21 days Moisture content Verify that the moisture content of the substrate is compatible with the water vapour transmission rate of the membrane system by testing to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B Test type select from the following Hygrometer test Seal a hygrometer to the substrate for 16 hours and measure the relative humidity of the air between the instrument and the slab Falls Verify that falls in substrates are 1 596 Joints and fillets External corners Round or arris edges Control joints Prepare all substrate joints to suit the membrane system Priming Compatibility If required prime the substrates with compatible primers for adhesion of membrane systems 3 2 APPLICATION Protection during installation Damage Protect membrane from damage during installation and for the period after install
146. S 2311 Paint Reference Number PRN The number in brackets against the individual product refers to the Paint Ref No PRN listed in the DuluxGroup Dulux paint type reference table See PRODUCTS and AS NZS 2311 Appendix D 4 2 Flat and matt latex Interior INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0001 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Flat Wear 101 Adv Flat eco choice B16 B6b B6b Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux White Dulux White SD0010 ceilings Sealer Undercoat Ceiling Paint eco Ceiling Paint eco low VOC system eco choice B16 choice B6c choice B6c Fibrous set plaster Dulux Sealer Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 2533 Binder solvent Wear 101 Adv Flat Wear 101 Adv Flat based B15 B6b B6b Fibrous set plaster Dulux Professional Dulux Professional Dulux Professional SD 2172 with glancing light Oil Based Matt Acrylic B6a Matt Acrylic B6a issues Undercoat B15 Fibre cement Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 3174 NATSPEC 343 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref products Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Flat
147. S 2858 Preservative treatment Timber type Provide only timbers with preservative treatment appropriate to the Hazard class Cut surfaces Provide supplementary preservative treatment to all cut and damaged surfaces CCA treated timber If proposed provide details 2 2 STEEL Steel tubes Posts rails stays To AS NZS 1163 Grade C 350 LO Wire Chainwire cable wire tie wire and barbed wire To AS 2423 23 CONCRETE General Standard To AS 1379 Exposure classification To AS 3600 Table 4 3 Grade Where there are cast in metal items Exposure classification A1 A2 N25 NATSPEC 88 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0241 Landscape walling and edging B1 N32 B2 C N40 Otherwise N20 2 4 SLEEPER WALLS Sleepers General To AS 3818 2 Hardwood Sound durability class or preservative treated hardwood railway sleepers Softwood Sound preservative treated softwood sleepers 2 5 EARTH REINFORCEMENT General Type Proprietary system of galvanized steel strips or steel mesh strips placed in layers with compacted selected fill and connected to precast concrete facing panels to form vertical retaining walls Provide the necessary accessories including levelling pad bearing pads and joint fillers or covers to keep the selected fill material out of the panel joints 2 6 GEOTEXTILES General Type Polymeric fabric formed from a plastic yarn composed of at least 85 by weight of propyle
148. TURE CONTROL General Moisture content Adjust the moisture content of fill during compaction within the range of 85 115 of the optimum moisture content determined by AS 1289 5 1 1 or AS 1289 5 2 1 as appropriate to achieve the required density 3 17 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FILL AND SUBGRADE Density General Other than rolled fill to AS 2870 clause 6 4 2 b Compact the subgrade and each layer of fill to the required depth and density as a systematic construction operation and to conform to the Compaction table Shape surfaces to provide drainage and prevent ponding NATSPEC 80 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork Compaction table Location Cohesive soils Cohesionless soils Minimum dry density ratio Minimum density standard compaction to index to AS 1289 5 6 1 AS 1289 5 4 1 Residential 95 70 Lot fill house sites Commercial 98 75 Fills to support minor loadings incl floor loadings 20 kPa and isolated pad or strip footings 100 kPa Pavements Fill to support pavements 95 70 Subgrade to 300 mm deep 98 75 Excavated and stripped ground surface After excavation and or stripping compact these surfaces in conformance with the Compaction table to a minimum depth of 150 mm Maximum rock and lump size in layer after compaction 2 3 compacted layer thickness Fill batter faces Either compact separately or overfill and cut back
149. VC extrusion External corners Preformed metal joining pieces Internal corners Scribe 2 2 FIBRE CEMENT PLANKS Fibre cement Standard To AS NZS 2908 2 Plank cladding General Provide a proprietary system of single faced fibre cement building planks Product Refer to architectural drawings Plank thickness 7 5 mm Joints and edges UPVC extrusion Corners Preformed metal joining pieces 2 3 FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING Fibre cement Standard To AS NZS 2908 2 Cladding eaves and soffit linings Type A Category 3 modulus of rupture 7 MPa Compressed cladding Type A Category 5 modulus of rupture 2 18 MPa Edges Square Sheet cladding General Provide a proprietary system of single faced fibre cement sheets Arrangement Set out in even panels with joints coinciding with framing NATSPEC 213 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0431b Cladding combined Sheet thickness 6 mm Joints corners and edges UPVC extrusion Eaves and soffit lining Sheets Single faced fibre cement Sheet thickness 4 5 mm Joints UPVC extrusion 2 4 COMPONENTS Flashings Standard To AS NZS 2904 3 EXECUTION 3 1 TOLERANCES Tolerances Requirement Conform to the Tolerances table Tolerances table Property Tolerance criteria Permitted deviation mm Spacing of supporting members 5 mm on the nominated support member spacing Vertical or horizontal misalignment at the
150. XECUTION 3 1 JOINTS General Joints and connections Use hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel fasteners or composite bolts nails or nailed metal connectors Timber to timber interfaces Provide a seal coating of preservative formulation and include inside bolt holes and the end grain of the timber Avoid Details that may trap water such as housed checked or birdsmouth joints NATSPEC 50 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0185 Timber products finishes and treatment Fasteners Follow manufacturer s instructions to prevent chemical treatments reacting with fasteners Fastener selection Hardwood cladding Bullet head and plain shank nails provided the cladding is painted and nails are punched and stopped Softwood cladding Flat head and plain shank nails provided cladding is painted CCA treated softwood cladding Galvanized deformed shank ring or annular flat head nails Unpainted cladding framing joints Do not use machine driven T head nails 3 2 SHRINKAGE RESTRAINT General Minimise moisture content changes Use finishes and end grain sealants Fasteners Align fasteners along member axis and use single fasteners at the joints Connections Use connections that allow for movement Avoid shrinkage restraint Use seasoned timber especially when timber elements are integrated with steel and or concrete construction Drill holes 10 oversize in unseasoned timber Reduce moveme
151. able width areas Include in situ concrete infill strips to make a straight area for paving and take up the variable width If there is a concrete base provide paving control joints Located over base control joints 10 mm wide and filled with bitumen impregnated fibreboard Laying around obstacles Public utility access pits and penetrations Adjust access covers as required before commencing paving Make sure water drains away from pits with lids and into surface inlet drainage structures Concrete surrounds Make sure the outside dimensions of the pit are square or rectangular and make a smooth connection with the laying pattern of the pavers The pit does not require to be centred Minimum thickness 100 mm Strength grade N32 Colour grey Precast access chamber Lay pavers to suit specific dimensions of authority access chambers Patterns around obstacles Lay up both sides of the feature from the main or original laying face NATSPEC 123 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0276 Segmental pavers sand bed Compaction of bedding Compaction Compact the sand bedding after laying paving units using a vibrating plate compactor and appropriate hand methods and continue until lipping between adjoining units is eliminated Progressive compaction Arrange the paving operations to enable the following Compactor proceeds progressively behind the laying face without undue dela
152. ace Void formers Protection Keep void formers dry until use place them on a firm level surface and place reinforcement and concrete with minimum delay 3 3 COMPLETION Formwork removal Extent Remove formwork other than profiled steel sheeting composite formwork and lost formwork including formwork in concealed locations NATSPEC 144 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0311b Concrete formwork Timing Do not disturb formwork until concrete is hardened enough to withstand formwork movements and removal without damage Stripping General To AS 3600 where it is more stringent than AS 3610 1 Vertical formwork To AS 3610 1 Appendix B Table B1 NATSPEC 145 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0312b Concrete reinforcement 0312B CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide concrete reinforcement as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Concrete in situ 1 3 STANDARDS General Concrete materials and construction To AS 3600 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Cores and embedments fixed in place Reinforcement fixed in place with formwork completed 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Execution details Reinforcement Submit the following General If changes are pro
153. aintenance and to allow coarse sediment to drop out of suspension before reaching sediment filter Binding Wire bound or with string tied bindings wrapped around the bale sides Bale installation Trench 100 mm deep trench the width of a bale and the length of the proposed sediment filter Placing Lengthwise in the trench with ends tightly abutting and corners lapped Fixing Drive two 50 x 50 mm wooden stakes or metal star pickets through each bale Ensure bales are packed closely and staked securely Eliminate gaps with loose straw wedged between tight Geotextile installation Geotextile selected to suit local soil conditions cut from a continuous roll to minimise joints Fixing Staple geotextile to top of straw bale and extend down the uphill face of the bale into the trench Stretch the geotextile and peg securely into the subgrade Joints 150 mm overlap at a support post with both ends fastened to the post Performance Retain soil found on site but with openings large enough to permit drainage and prevent clogging Backfilling Compacted excavated soil to ground level on downhill side of barrier and 100 mm above ground level on the uphill side of the bales against and over toe of the fabric 2 11 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS Disposal Spoil Remove cleared and grubbed material from the site and dispose of legally Burial Bury concrete and other inorganic fragments as follows Location Beyond built or paved areas
154. al Requirement Submit the screen manufacturer s recommendations for operation care and maintenance Warranties Screens Submit the manufacturer s published product warranties NATSPEC 239 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0457 External screens NATSPEC 240 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0461b Glazing 0461B GLAZING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide glazing as documented Design Certification Submit an engineers certificate confirming conformance to AS 1288 Performance Thermal qualities U value and Solar heat gain coefficient to Basix certificate 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS Glazing Glass type and thickness To AS 1288 if no glass type or thickness is nominated Materials and installation To AS 1288 Insulating Glass Units To AS NZS 4666 Quality requirements for cut to size and processed glass To AS NZS 4667 Roof glazing To AS 1288 Section 6 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL Heat soaking Requirement All toughened glass products Standard To EN 14179 1 Heat strengthening Requirement Heat strengthen all glass that requires extra strength and thermal resistance 2 2 GLASS Glass types and quality Standard To AS 1288 and AS NZS 4667 Glass and glazing materials Glass and glazing materials genera
155. al required to be removed from the site Recycling Delivery location Submit the name and address of the proposed recycling facility Certification Provide evidence of delivery to the nominated recycling facility 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Demolished material classes DEMOLISHED MATERIALS Ownership and implementation Comply with the Demolished material classes table Demolished material classes table Class Requirement Ownership Recovered items for re use in the works Recover without damage items identified in the Recovered items for re use in the works schedule Principal proprietor Recovered items for delivery to the principal Recover without damage items identified in the Recovered items for delivery to the principal schedule Principal proprietor Demolished material for recycling in the works Stockpile material identified in the Demolished material for recycling in the works schedule Contractor Demolished material for recycling off site Demolish and deliver for recycling material identified in the Demolished material for recycling off site schedule Contractor Dismantle for relocation as part of the works Dismantle without damage and store items identified in the Dismantle for relocation schedule Principal proprietor Demolished for removal Remove from the site demolished materials identified in the Demolish for removal schedule Do not burn or bury on site
156. als with reflective facing Test to AS NZS 1530 3 and the recommendations of clause A6 NATSPEC 249 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0471 Insulation and pliable membranes Pliable membranes Flammability index 5 when tested in conformance with AS 1530 2 Insulation Cellulosic fibre loose fill To AS NZS 4859 1 Section 5 Mineral wool blankets and cut pieces To AS NZS 4859 1 Section 8 Polyester To AS NZS 4859 1 Section 7 Polyisocyanurate rigid cellular sheets RC PIR To AS 1366 2 Polystyrene extruded rigid cellular sheets RC PS E To AS 1366 4 Polystyrene moulded rigid cellular sheets RC PS M To AS 1366 3 Polyurethane rigid cellular sheets RC PUR To AS 1366 1 Polyurethane sprayed To AS 1366 1 Table 2 Wet processed fibreboard including softboard To AS NZS 1859 4 Wool To AS NZS 4859 1 Section 6 Reflective thermal insulation To AS NZS 4859 1 Section 9 Certification Required Certification provider An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand JAS ANZ Pliable membranes Standard To AS NZS 4200 1 Vapour barrier Vapour barrier classification High Sarking membrane other than walls and gables Water barrier classification High Vapour permeable breathable membrane Vapour resistance when tested to AS NZS 4200 1 Fasteners and supports General Metallic coated steel Mesh support to roof insulat
157. ambient moisture content of the site If there is a mismatch allow for acclimatisation 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Product samples General Submit samples of each timber or synthetic decking type illustrating the range of variation in colour and figure in conformance with the Samples table Samples table Item Sample size Number Decking 600x600 1 NATSPEC 198 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0383 Sheet flooring and decking Verification Certificate Submit a supplier s certificate which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket verifying conformance to grading species and board size and noting the moisture content Inspection If neither branding nor certification is adopted submit a report by an independent inspecting authority verifying conformance 1 7 TOLERANCES Tolerances General Maximum deviation of the finished floor surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction 3 mm 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL General Conformance Conform to the Flooring and decking schedule Storage Timber decking Deliver to site and store on dry ground on level bearers 150 mm high block stacked banded and protected against the weather Plywood and particleboard sheet flooring Deliver to site and store on dry ground on level bearers 150 mm high stacked on flat and protected against the weather 2 2 DECKING Recycled timber decking Standard To FWPA PNO06 1039 Gradin
158. anagement plan EMP reports regularly to report the progress in relation to Performance against statutory requirements Performance against the EMP and the EMP policy ecologically sustainable development outcomes and targets Summary of monitoring inspection and audits Summary of reports required to meet the statutory requirements Summary of environmental emergencies incidents non compliance and complaints 25 TEMPORARY LANDSCAPE FENCING Fence dimensions Height 1200 mm Maximum post spacing 5000 mm Components sizes Corner and gate posts Hardwood or preservative treated softwood 250 mm diameter Intermediate posts Star picket Gate Provide a suitable hinged gate with a gate latch Wire Top intermediate and bottom rows of 3 2 mm plain galvanized steel wire Thread the top wire through pieces of plastic tube and through corner posts Removal Completion Remove the fence at the end of the planting establishment period 2 06 TREE PROTECTION Standard General Comply with the recommendations of those parts of AS 4970 which are referenced in this worksection NATSPEC 69 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0221b Site management General Warning sign Display a sign in a prominent position at each entrance to the site warning that trees and plantings are to be protected during the contract Remove on completion Lettering Road sign type sans serif letters 100 mm hi
159. and embedded fixings or submit proposed alternate materials Structural integrity Position Fix cores and embedded items to prevent movement during concrete placing In locating cores fixings and embedded items reposition but do not cut reinforcement and maintain cover to reinforcement Isolation Isolate embedded items to prevent water tracking to concrete providing minimum cover to reinforcement Tolerances General Maximum deviation from correct positions Anchor bolt groups for structural steel To AS 4100 Cores and embedded items generally 10 mm Other fixing bolts 3 mm 3 6 PLACING AND COMPACTION Placing Horizontal transport Use suitable conveyors clean chutes troughs hoppers or pipes Methods Avoid segregation and loss of concrete and minimise plastic settlement Maintain a nominally vertical and plastic concrete edge during placement Layers Place concrete in layers lt 300 mm thick Compact succeeding layer into previous layer before previous layer has taken initial set Compaction Methods Use immersion and screed vibrators accompanied by hand methods as appropriate to remove entrapped air and to fully compact the mix Vibrators Do not allow vibrators to contact set concrete reinforcement or items including pipes and conduits embedded in concrete Do not use vibrators to move concrete along the formwork Avoid causing segregation by over vibration NATSPEC 138 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps su
160. ansion joint Unplanned joints If placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer form a tied transverse construction joint within the middle third of the distance between planned joints but no closer than 1 5 m to the nearest planned joint If necessary remove placed concrete back to the required location NATSPEC 112 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement Expansion joints Expansion joints Provide formed full depth joints around structures and features which project through into or against the pavement and elsewhere as required Doweled expansion joints Cap dowels at one end with a compressible material Preparing joints Stripping time At least 12 hours Clean Immediately before installation of the sealer ensure that the joint space is dry clean and free from loose material Remove laitance curing compound and protrusions of hardened concrete from the sides and upper edges of the joint Joint sealing Sealant type Provide silicone sealant in conformance with manufacturer s recommendations Backing rod Compressible closed cell polyethylene foam with a bond breaking surface 3 9 SURFACE SEALERS General Sealer Refer to finishes schedule Sealer Apply surface sealer after the curing period and when concrete has dried to allow the sealer to penetrate into the concrete surface Curing sealer compound If using the sealer as a curing compound apply directly after
161. aqueous solvent cured materials Density Apply fire stopping material to uniform density Fire stopping exposed to view Finish surfaces to a uniform and level condition Cable separation Maintain Protection Protect adjacent surfaces from damage arising through installation of fire stopping Protect completed fire stopping from damage arising from other work Loose or damaged fire stopping material Remove and replace Penetrations by pipes and ducts Allow for thermal movement of the pipes and ducts Preventing displacement Reinforce or support fire stopping materials with non combustible materials when The unsupported span of the fire stopping materials 100 mm The fire stopping materials are non rigid unless shown to be satisfactory by test Large openings Provide fire stopping capable of supporting the same loads as the surrounding element or provide similar structural support around the opening Preparation Cleaning Clean substrates of dirt dust grease oil loose material and other matter which may affect bond of fire stop material Primer Clean and dry substrates for primers and sealants Restraint Install backing and or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage Remove temporary dams after material has cured NATSPEC 40 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0182b Fire stopping 3 2 SYSTEMS Fire stop mortars Ambient conditions Do not install below 5 C
162. areas Depressions 10 mm are filled with a latex modified cementitious product with feathering eliminated by scabbling the edges Cracks in substrates wider than 1 5 mm are filled with a filler compatible with the membrane System External corners Round or arris edges Moisture content Concrete substrates Cure for 21 days Moisture content Verify that the moisture content of the substrate is compatible with the water vapour transmission rate of the membrane system by testing to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B Test type Hygrometer test Seal a hygrometer to the substrate for 16 hours and measure the relative humidity of the air between the instrument and the slab Electrical resistance test Connect a resistance meter to the slab and read the moisture content Falls Substrate If the membrane is directly under the floor finish ensure the fall in the substrate conforms to the fall nominated for the finish Sheet substrate fastening Requirement Fasten or adequately fix to the supporting structure Control joints Finishes Align control joints in finishes and bedding with control joints or changes in materials in the substrate Water stop angles Requirement Provide water stop angles at door thresholds and shower enclosures to support the waterproof membrane at junctions between waterproofed and non waterproofed areas Sizing Size the vertical leg of the water stop angle to conform to the requirements of AS 3740
163. arking on completion Toughened glass Do not cut work or permanently mark after toughening Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non resilient materials Heat absorbing glass In locations exposed to direct sunlight provide wheel cut edges free from damage or blemishes with minimum feather Preglazing Window assemblies and glazed doors Supply inclusive of glazing shop preglazed Curtain walls Supply inclusive of glazing shop preglazed 3 3 COMPLETION Trade clean Method Clean with soft clean cloths and clean water finishing with a clean squeegee Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials Extent All frames and glass surfaces inside and out Warranties General Submit a warranty signed by the glazing subcontractor undertaking to repair or replace glass and glazing materials which within the warranty period become defective or prove unsuitable for the specified application provided that the manufacturers recommendations for the maintenance of the material have been followed during the warranty period Glass manufacturer s warranty An undertaking conditional only on compliance with the manufacturer s recommendation for installation and maintenance to supply replacement glass units to the site for replacement of defective units defined as follows IGU units Units in which the hermetic seal has failed as evidenced by intrusion of foreign matter or internal co
164. arth footings Base Place 100 mm of gravel in the footing base under posts Compaction Backfill with earth around posts compacting firmly by hand or machine in 150 mm deep layers Concrete footings In ground Place mass concrete around posts to protect posts from waterlogged conditions and finish with a weathered top falling 25 mm from the post to ground level On slabs Provide welded and drilled post base flanges for fixing with masonry anchors to the concrete 3 2 GATES Hardware Provide the following Drop bolt and ferrule to each leaf of double gates Latch to one leaf of double gates Provision for locking by padlock Hinges to ensure smooth operation and adjustment for future sagging Hand access General Where required provide hand holes to give access from outside to reach locking provision 3 3 FENCING Pine paling fence Maximum post spacing General 2400 mm For lap and cap 2700 mm Footing type Earth Footing size 250 mm diameter x 600 mm depth Hardwood paling fence Maximum post spacing 2700 mm Footing type Earth Footing size 250 mm diameter x 600 mm depth NATSPEC 92 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0242b Landscape fences and barriers Installation General Mortice posts taper splice rails and nail twice in mortices Set pickets and palings clear of the ground Picket fence Nail twice to each rail Plain paling fence Provide
165. as required NATSPEC 124 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0277 Pavement ancillaries 0277 PAVEMENT ANCILLARIES 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide channels kerbs and linemarking Selections Conform to EXECUTION 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Site management Earthwork Pavement base and subbase 1 3 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions of AS 1348 and those given below apply Absolute level tolerance Maximum deviation from design levels Relative level tolerance Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid on the surface Channels and kerbs Includes all forms of concrete gutters dish drains grated drains and mountable median and barrier kerbing 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Linemarking materials General Submit NATA Registered Laboratory Test Reports at least seven days before work is scheduled to commence on the properties of the materials including paint 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Concrete Standard To AS 1379 Grade N20 Pavement marking paint Standard To AS 4049 1 AS 4049 3 and AS 4049 4 2 2 VEHICLE BARRIERS Log barriers General Hazard class 4 to AS 1604 1 Size Diameter range 125 150 mm Precast concrete wheel stops Material Precast concrete units with predrilled holes located 300 mm fro
166. as soon as the wet sheen has disappeared from the surface Sponge Plaster laid on thinly with a trowel floated up with a wood float and lightly finished with a sponge Smooth dado finish Cement based plaster laid on with a trowel skimmed with a wood float and trowelled down Surface is trowelled to a smooth dense finish as the plaster stiffens and no water applied during trowelling Ornamental Patterned surfaces achieved by working the hardening plaster with a trowel or other tool Sprayed Textured surfaces achieved by projecting plaster onto a substrate using a purpose designed machine Also known as tyrolean Stippled Textured surfaces achieved by working the hardening plaster with a stiff brush NATSPEC 274 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0611 Rendering and plastering Thrown Rough surfaces achieved by throwing plaster onto a substrate or pebbles onto a plastic plaster base Plaster A mixture of binders aggregate and water which are applied to substrates in a plastic state and dry and cure to a hard surface which may subsequently be decorated Cement plaster Contains Portland cement as the principal binder Gypsum plaster Contains hydrated or anhydrous calcium sulfate as the principal binder Plastering system One or more coats of plaster and associated treatments comprising some or all of the following in sequence Base coat 1 or 2 Bonding treatment Finish coa
167. as the substrate joint whichever is greater Damp proof courses Do not continue plaster across damp proof courses Plastering on metal lath Provide control joints to divide the plastering area into rectangular panels of 10 m or less V joints Provide V joints cut right through the plaster to the substrate at the following locations Abutments with metal door frames Abutments with other finishes Junctions between different substrates NATSPEC 279 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0611 Rendering and plastering Cornices General Accurately cut and mitre corners Match and align ornament Do not make butt joints in the length of a cornice unless required or full lengths are not available Installation Butter edges mitres and joins for the full length of the cornice with adhesive Mechanical fixing If cornice projects across a ceiling 400 mm or more provide additional mechanical fixing Fixing centres s 600 mm Plaster thickness General Conform to the Plaster thickness table Plaster thickness table Substrate Cement render total thickness Gypsum lime plaster mm of single or multi coat work mm Dense concrete walls 15 max 3 max Dense concrete ceilings 9 max 3 max Brickwork and blockwork 12 min 3 max Lightweight concrete and blocks 12 min 3 max Metal lath measured from the 18 min 3 max face of the lath Temperature General If
168. ate samples into the works submit proposals Incorporate samples in the works which have been endorsed for inclusion Do not incorporate other samples Retention of samples Keep endorsed samples in good condition on site until the date of practical completion Shop drawings General Include dimensioned drawings showing details of the fabrication and installation of structural elements building components services and equipment including relationship to building structure and other services cable type and size and marking details Diagrammatic layouts Coordinate work shown diagrammatically in the contract documents and submit dimensioned set out drawings Services coordination Coordinate with other building and service elements Show adjusted positions on the shop drawings Space requirements Check space requirements of equipment and services indicated diagrammatically in the contract documents Checking Make sure that the drawings have been checked before submission Building work drawings for building services Submit detailed dimensioned drawings showing all Access doors and panels Conduits to be cast in slabs Holding down bolts and other anchorage and or fixings required complete with loads to be imposed on the structure during installation and operation Openings penetrations and block outs Sleeves Plinths kerbs and bases Required external openings 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 GENERAL Manufacturers
169. ation bulk insulation Product type Fibre batts Application Over ceiling lining Installation Fit tightly between framing members 3 5 COMPLETION Warranties Insulation and pliable membranes Submit the manufacturer s published product warranties NATSPEC 253 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0511b Lining 0511B LINING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide internal lining systems to the architectural drawings 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of substrate or framing before installation of linings 1 4 TOLERANCES Surface Flatness twist winding and bow lt 1 5 mm deviation from a 1 5 m straightedge placed in any position 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS Plasterboard Standard To AS NZS 2588 Fibre cement Standard To AS NZS 2908 2 Wall and ceiling linings Type B category 2 Minimum thickness 4 5 mm Plywood and blockboard Interior use To AS NZS 2270 Exterior use To AS NZS 2271 Visible surfaces with a clear finish Veneer quality A Other visible surfaces Veneer quality B Back face veneer Veneer quality C or D Presealed plywood Plywood pre sealed both sides and edges with a machine applied sealer Wet processed fibreboard including hardboard Standa
170. ation inspector Registered Height Safety Inspector 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Design Documentation Submit design documentation Product data sheets Installation Submit the manufacture s Installation Data Sheets Specification Manual NATSPEC 54 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0193 Roof access safety systems 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS Fall restraint systems Description Cable based systems positioned so that the user cannot reach a fall hazard when continuously connected to the system using a standard 2 m shock absorbing lanyard Adjustment of the Personnel Protective Equipment PPE is not required whilst connected to the system Demonstrators Use only manufacturer s representatives competent in connecting the appropriate travelling device to and from the cable Fall arrest systems Description Either cable based where the user is continuously attached to the system rope based series of anchor points or a single anchor point from which the users can attach themselves when working at height Whilst attached to these systems they are at risk of falling The system relies on a rescue plan being in place Ladder access Product Vertical systems comprising top intermediate and bottom anchor sets and 8 mm 1 x 19 grade 316 stainless steel cables Personal protective equipment PPE Harness Supply two full body harnesses with shock absorbing lanyards to AS NZS 1891 1 Cable attach
171. ation of surfaces painting and inspection maintain light levels such that the luminance photometric brightness of the surface is equal to the specified permanent artificial illumination conditions or 400 lux whichever is the greater Drying General Use a moisture meter to demonstrate that the moisture content of the substrate is at or below the recommended maximum level for the type of paint and the substrate material Paint application General Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the substrate can occur Apply subsequent coats after the manufacturer s recommended drying period has elapsed Painting conditions General Do not paint in dusty conditions or otherwise unsuitable weather as follows unless the paint is suitable and recommended for such conditions Relative humidity 2 85 Surface temperature lt 10 C or 35 C Priming before fixing General Apply one coat of wood primer 2 coats to end grain to the back of the following before fixing in position External fascia boards Timber door and window frames Bottoms of external doors Associated trims and glazing beads Timber board cladding NATSPEC 341 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Spraying General If the paint application is by spraying use conventional or airless equipment which does the following Sati
172. ation until the membrane achieves its service characteristics that resist damage Drains General Prevent moisture from tracking under the membranes at drainage locations Drains and cages Provide removable grates or cages to prevent blockage from debris If the finished surface is above the level of the membrane provide a slotted extension piece to bring the grate up to the level of the finished surface Overflows Apply a bond breaker to the perimeter of the overflow outlet at its junction with the surface to which the membrane will be fixed Turn the membranes into the overflow to prevent moisture from tracking behind the membrane Sheet joints Orientation of laps Lap sheets on the upslope side of the roof fall over sheets on the downslope side End laps generally Stagger end lap joints Bituminous sheet membranes Side laps 75 mm Endlaps 100 mm Method Heat welded Synthetic rubber membranes Factory vulcanized laps 40 mm Field side laps 50 mm for side laps Field end laps 100 mm for end laps Plasticised PVC Polyvinyl chloride membranes Factory welded laps 30 mm Field welded laps If used over insulation boards gt 100 mm Other instances 75 mm overlaps Curing of liquid applied systems General To the manufacturers instructions Control of movement General Provide control joints located over control joints in the substructure NATSPEC 204 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscri
173. ats where installed on slopes 2 2 COMPLETION Maintenance manual General Submit the manufacturers data as follows Recommendations for service use care and maintenance List of manufacturers and suppliers of replacement parts 3 SELECTIONS 3 1 FURNITURE Benches Type Refer to finishes schedule Planter boxes Type Refer to finishes schedule NATSPEC 97 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0271 Pavement base and subbase 0271 PAVEMENT BASE AND SUBBASE 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide base and subbase courses in conformance with the following documented requirements Tolerances Material properties tested by a geotechnical testing authority Minimum relative compaction Moisture content 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Earthwork 1 3 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply CBR California bearing ratio CRB Crushed rock base CRS Crushed rock subbase NGB Natural gravel base NGS Natural gravel subbase RCCB Recycled crushed concrete base RCCS Recycled crushed concrete subbase Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 1348 and the following apply Absolute level tolerance Maximum deviation from design leve
174. avity walls Product Rigid cellular insulation board Application To steel or timber framing Installation Horizontally with the tongue to the top edge pushed over prefixed wall ties and held firmly against the wall frame Keep boards clean and dry and free from mortar and grout Do not bridge the cavity Fixing Hex head screws at 450 mm centres Flashings Install flashings before installing insulation panels Prevent entry of water behind the insulation boards Full masonry cavity walls Product Rigid cellular insulation board Application To the inner masonry skin NATSPEC 251 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0471 Insulation and pliable membranes Installation Horizontally with the tongue to the top edge and firmly against the inner masonry skin Keep boards clean and dry and free from mortar and grout Do not bridge the cavity Fixing Proprietary plastic clips on pre installed wall ties Flashings Install flashings before installing insulation panels Prevent entry of water behind the insulation boards Full masonry walls internal face Product type Rigid cellular extruded sheets Preparation of substrates Conform to the following Remove any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion Hack off excessive projections and fill voids and hollows with plaster Tolerance 6 mm in 2400 mm Substrate correction Skim plaster Installation Apply boards horizontall
175. ay not require a very high standard of surface preparation Class 3 Not applicable Class 4 Subbase material for unbound flexible pavements Crushed rock Designation Unbound crushed rock materials are designated as follows CRB20 1 20 mm nominal sized class 1 crushed rock base CRB20 2 20 mm nominal sized class 2 crushed rock base CRS20 20 mm nominal sized crushed rock subbase CRS40 40 mm nominal sized crushed rock subbase Recycled crushed concrete Designation Recycled crushed concrete materials are designated as follows RCCB20 1 20 mm nominal sized class 1 recycled crushed concrete base RCCB20 2 20 mm nominal sized class 2 recycled crushed concrete base RCCS20 20 mm nominal sized recycled crushed concrete subbase Natural gravel Designation Unbound natural gravel materials are designated as follows NGB20 20 mm nominal sized natural gravel base NGS20 20 mm nominal sized natural gravel subbase NGS40 40 mm nominal sized natural gravel subbase Base material properties Base materials Conform to the Base material properties table Base material properties table Test method Description CRB20 1 CRB20 2 RCCB20 1 RCCB20 2 NGB20 AS 1289 3 6 1 Particle size distribution AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 26 5 mm 100 100 100 100 100 sieve AS 1289 3 6 1 passing 19 0 mm 195 100 95 100 95 100 95 100 93 100 sieve AS 128
176. bel Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 4856 low VOC system Acrylic Block Filler B15 Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Low Sheen B7b Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Low Sheen B7b Semi gloss latex Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0003 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv eco choice B16 Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b Fibrous set plaster Dulux Sealer Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0815 Binder solvent Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv based B15 Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b Fibre cement Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 0903 products Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv low VOC system eco choice B16 Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 3410 veneers Acrylic Primer Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b B17a NATSPEC 345 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Concrete Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 1065 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear 101 Adv Wear 101 Adv eco choice B16 Semi Gloss B8b Semi Gloss B8b Cement render Dulux 1 Step
177. bers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0411b Waterproofing external and tanking Fillets and bond breakers Adequately size to allow the membrane to accommodate movement Control joint covers Install after fixing hobs and membranes Bonded membranes Carry control joints in the substrate through to and into the surface finish Membrane terminations Membrane upturns Provide upturns above the maximum water level expected from the exposure conditions of rainfall intensity and wind Height 150 mm Anchoring Secure sheet membranes along the top edge Edge protection Protect edges of the membrane Waterproofing above terminations Waterproof the structure above the termination to prevent moisture entry behind the membrane using cavity flashings capping waterproof membranes or waterproof coatings Horizontal terminations Do not provide Use vertical terminations Membrane vertical penetrations Pipes balustrades ducts and vents Provide separate sleeves for all pipes ducts and vents and have them fixed to the substrate Membrane horizontal penetrations Sleeves Protect rigid PVC conduits and pipes with a sleeve of SBS bitumen in order to seal to the membrane without burning the PVC Do not use high density polyethylene HDPE polypropylene PP pipes or flexible PVC conduit Membrane at balcony doors and windows Requirement Install membrane before the fixing of door or window frames Membrane upturn Sheltered
178. ble for the door type size weight and swings required and the operating conditions including wind pressure Closers Hinged and pivot doors Fire rated doors Provide closers tested and certified for use as components of fire door assemblies Standard To AS 1905 1 2 7 ELECTRONIC CONTROL DEVICES General General Provide electric strikes electric locks drop bolts or similar devices to suit door construction and hardware Electromagnetic hold open devices To AS 1905 1 and AS 1670 1 Fail safe Connect door control devices in a fail safe mode to permit egress in the event of power failure Fail secure Connect door control devices in a fail secure mode to prevent egress in the event of power failure Authorised products Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment Glass doors Provide tumbler drop bolts or magnetic holders Double leaf doors solid frame Provide an electric strike or lock on the fixed leaf connected to the door frame by concealed flexible wiring Activation Activation device Provide keypads card readers or other activation devices and locate next to entry points External Provide weatherproof IP56 hoods or housings for external units Mounting height 1200 mm from floor level 2 8 KEYING Temporary construction keys and cylinders Requirement Provide one of the following Loan cylinder Install for construction locks and replace at practical completio
179. bly Notice of press ure Position Adjacent or within the cabinet or recess Message Boost pressure and test pressure in kilopascals Letter height minimum 25 mm Sign type Compliance AS 2419 1 clause 7 10 1 Fire brigade relay pumps Position At each pump location Message FIRE BRIGADE RELAY PUMP Letter height minimum 75 mm Sign type Compliance AS 2419 1 clause 7 7 Boosters in series with pumps Position Adjacent the pressure gauge Message WARNING THIS BOOSTER IS CONNECTED IN SERIES RELAY WITH THE FIXED ON SITE FIRE PUMPS WHICH MAY BE RUNNING THIS GAUGE SHOWS THE TRUE BOOST PRESSURE AT THE FIXED ON SITE PUMP DISCHARGE Letter height minimum 25 mm Sign type Compliance AS 2419 1 clause 7 6 Termite protection Position In or near meter box or similar Message Indicate The method of protection The date of installation The life expectancy of a chemical barrier as listed on the National Registration Authority label The installer s recommendation for inspections Sign type Laminated page s Compliance BCA 3 1 3 2 b BCA B1 4 i ii NATSPEC 271 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0581b Signs and display AS 3660 1 Appendix A Regulatory carpark signs Low clearance Position Entry to overhead obstruction where clearance is 3 m or less ca
180. bove floor 8 mm on 12 mm wide tape Other locations 2 3 mm Operable devices Mark to provide a ready means of identification Include the following Controls Indicators gauges meters Isolating switches Vapour barriers Do not penetrate vapour barriers 3 15 SOFTWARE General General Provide the software required for the operation and management of building services systems and equipment 3 16 WARRANTIES General General If a warranty is documented or if a manufacturer s standard warranty extends beyond the end of the defects liability period name the principal as warrantee Register with manufacturers as necessary Retain copies delivered with components and equipment Commencement Commence warranty periods at practical completion or at acceptance of installation if acceptance is not concurrent with practical completion Approval of installer If installation is not by manufacturer and product warranty is conditional on the manufacturer s approval of the installer submit the manufacturer s written approval of the installing firm NATSPEC 30 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements 3 17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS General General Submit operation and maintenance manuals for the whole of the work Authors and compilers Personnel experienced in the maintenance and operation of equipment and systems installed and with editorial ability Refe
181. bscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Placing records General Keep on site and make available for inspection a log book recording each placement of concrete including the following Date Specified grade and source of concrete Slump measurements The portion of work Volume placed Rain General During placement and before setting protect the surface from damage Time between adjacent placements General Conform to the Minimum time delay schedule Vertical elements General Limit the free fall of concrete to maximum of 2000 mm Placing in cold weather Cement Do not use high alumina cement Placing concrete Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete at 2 5 C Formwork and reinforcement Before and during placing maintain temperature at 2 5 C Severe weather If severe weather conditions are predicted use high early strength cement Temperature control Heat the concrete materials other than cement to the minimum temperature necessary to make sure the temperature of the placed concrete is within the limits specified Admixtures Do not use calcium chloride salts chemicals or other material in the mix to lower the freezing point of the concrete Frozen materials Do not allow frozen materials or materials containing ice to enter the mixer and keep free of frost and ice any formwork materials and equipment coming in contact with the concrete Maximum temperature
182. by a NATA accredited laboratory describing tests and giving results which demonstrate that the product conforms Concrete mixes Submit details for each grade and type of concrete including any proposed use of special purpose cement types Curing compounds If it is proposed to use a liquid membrane forming curing compound submit the following information Certified test results for water retention to AS 3799 Appendix B NATSPEC 132 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Evidence of compatibility with concrete and with applied finishes including toppings and render if any including methods of obtaining the required adhesion For visually important surfaces evidence that an acceptable final surface colour will be obtained Coloured concrete Using the same mix and method used in the works submit sample blocks of concrete before colouring with mineral oxides Number 4 Size nominal 300 x 300 x 50 mm Void formers Test void formers under laboratory conditions Place formers on damp sand and load with a mass of wet concrete at least equal to the mass of the beams or slabs to be supported Submit certified test results to verify conformance with the following requirements Deflection during placing and compaction of the concrete does not exceed beam or slab span 1000 Additional deflection between initial set and 7 days does not exceed span 400 Co
183. by a Registered testing authority Test methods Compaction control tests To AS 1289 5 4 1 or AS 1289 5 7 1 Field dry density AS 1289 5 3 2 or AS 1289 5 3 5 Standard maximum dry density AS 1289 5 1 1 Dry density ratio AS 1289 5 4 1 Density index AS 1289 5 6 1 3 5 SURFACE RESTORATION Subbase and base Material Provide crushed rock DGS20 or DGB20 material and configure in layers and depths to match existing and adjacent work Supply and installation To the Pavement base and subbase worksection Compaction Uniformly compact each layer of the subbase and base courses over the full area and depth within the trench to a relative compaction of 100 per cent when tested in conformance with AS 1289 5 4 1 Tests Test for compaction at a minimum frequency of 1 every second layer 50 m of restoration surface area Pathways and paved areas generally Materials Provide material consistent with the surface existing before commencement of the works NATSPEC 85 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0223 Service trenching Subbase 150 mm crushed stone DGB20 compacted to 100 percent relative compaction in conformance with AS 1289 5 4 1 Lippage at patches Match the surface level at any point along the patch s edge with the adjoining footpath surface within 5 mm Concrete surfaces Construction Conform to the following Prime coat the cut edges of the existing surfaces with
184. c coated reinforcement Minimum spacing Bars lt 60 diameters Mesh s 800 mm Supports over membranes Prevent damage to waterproofing membranes or vapour barriers If appropriate place a metal or plastic plate under each support Projecting reinforcement General If starter or other bars extend beyond reinforcement mats or cages through formwork or from cast concrete provide a plastic protective cap to each bar until it is incorporated into subsequent work Tying General Secure the reinforcement against displacement by tying at intersections with either wire ties or clips Bend the ends of wire ties away from nearby faces of formwork or unformed faces to prevent the ties projecting into the concrete cover Beams Tie stirrups to bars in each corner of each stirrup Fix other longitudinal bars to stirrups at 1 m maximum intervals Bundled bars Tie bundled bars in closest possible contact Provide tie wire of at least 2 5 mm diameter and spaced not more than 24 times the diameter of the smallest bar in the bundle Columns Secure longitudinal column reinforcement to all ties at every intersection Mats For bar reinforcement in the form of a mat secure each bar at alternate intersections Welding General If welding of reinforcement is proposed provide details 3 4 CONCRETE General General Provide concrete conforming to the Concrete properties schedule performance Elapsed delivery time General Make sure the ela
185. c drop sheets Do not use plastic sheeting If wheeled traffic is to follow carpet installation protect with hardboard sheets butted and fixed with adhesive tape NATSPEC 306 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0654 Engineered panel flooring 0654 ENGINEERED PANEL FLOORING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide floating flooring systems to substrates as documented and as follows Appropriately smooth and flat for the intended use Form the pattern required With the timber content of the panel at its equilibrium moisture content Selections As documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Acoustic underlay A resilient underlay providing acoustic isolation Equilibrium moisture content EMC For given conditions of humidity and temperature the moisture content which timber approaches at which it neither gains nor loses moisture while the conditions of its environment are maintained Feature Any natural variation or colour which affects timber appearance including gum resin veins borer marks checks and knots The grade will determine the level of feature present Flooring Continuously supported Flooring which is supported by and directly fixed to continuous supporti
186. cal movement between abutting elements Weakened plane joint A contraction joint created by forming a groove extending at least one quarter the depth of the section either by using a grooving tool by sawing or by inserting a premoulded strip Structural control joint A control joints contraction expansion and isolation in structural elements when used with applied material and finishes Substrate joint A joint in the substrate which includes construction joints and joints between different materials Sealant joint A joint filled with a flexible synthetic compound which adheres to surfaces within the joint to prevent the passage of dust moisture and gases Local government authority A body established for the purposes of local government by or under a law applying in a state or territory Low level interface Systems transfer information via terminals and voltage free contacts Manufacturer s recommendations Recommendations instructions requirements specifications and similar expressions provided in written or other form by the manufacturer and or supplier relating to the suitability use installation storage and or handling of a product Metallic coated Steel coated with zinc or aluminium zinc alloy as follows Metallic coated steel sheet To AS 1397 Metal thicknesses specified are base metal thicknesses Ferrous open sections zinc coated by an in line process To AS NZS 4791 Ferrous hollow sectio
187. case Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed Compliance BCA Spec D1 12 Exit signs Class 2 in lieu of illuminated exit sig ns Position On above or adjacent every door in BCA clause E4 5 NATSPEC 269 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0581b Signs and display Message EXIT Letter height minimum 25 mm Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed Compliance BCA E4 5 and BCA E4 7 Fire exit offence notice NSW Position Adjacent door providing access to but not within a fire exit stair passage or ramp Message OFFENCE RELATING TO FIRE EXITS It is an offence under the Environmental Planning and Assessment Act 1979 a to place anything in or near this fire exit that may obstruct persons moving to and from the exit Or b to interfere with or obstruct the operation of any fire doors or c to remove damage or otherwise interfere with this notice Letter height minimum 8 mm title 2 5 mm rest Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed Compliance Environmental Planning and Assessment Regulation 2000 clause 183 Fire exit offence notice ACT Position Adjacent door providing access to but not within a fire exit stair passage or ramp Message OFFENCES RELATING TO FIRE STAIRS Under the Emergencies Act 2004 it is an offence to
188. cation of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant f ambient shade temperature is gt 35 C protect from wind and sun using an evaporative retarder until curing is commenced Immediately after finishing either cover exposed surfaces using an impervious membrane or hessian kept wet until curing begins or apply a curing compound Water curing General Select a method of ponding or continuously sprinkling to prevent damage to the concrete surface during the required curing period 3 6 JOINTS Construction joints Location Do not relocate or eliminate construction joints or make construction joints not documented If emergency construction joints are made necessary by unforeseen interruptions to the concrete pour submit a report on the action taken Finish Butt join the surfaces of adjoining pours In visually important surfaces make the joint straight and true and free from blemishes impermissible for its surface finish class Preparation Roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface Remove loose or soft material free water foreign matter and laitance Dampen the surface just before placing the fresh concrete and coat with a neat cement slurry Expansion joints Joint filling Fill with jointing materials as documented Finish visible jointing material neatly flush with adjoining surfaces Preparation Before filling dry and clean the joint surfaces and prime Watertightness Apply the jointing material so that join
189. ccessible from floor level or provide permanent access platforms and ladders Conform to the relevant requirements of AS 1470 AS 1657 AS NZS 1892 1 AS 2865 and AS NZS 3666 1 for relevant requirements n false ceilings locate items of equipment that require inspection and maintenance above tiled parts If not possible provide access panels where located above set plaster or other inaccessible NATSPEC 26 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements ceilings Arrange services and plant locations to reduce the number of access panels Coordinate with other trades to use common access panels where feasible Modify manufacturer s standard equipment when necessary to provide the plant access in the contract documents 3 11 VIBRATION SUPPRESSION Standard Rotating and reciprocating machinery noise and vibration Vibration severity in Zone A to AS 2625 1 and AS 2625 4 General General Minimise the transmission of vibration from rotating or reciprocating equipment to other building elements Speeds General If no maximum speed is prescribed do not exceed 1500 r min for direct driven equipment Connections General Provide flexible connections to rotating machinery and assemblies containing rotating machinery Isolate pipes by incorporating sufficient flexibility into the pipework or by use of proprietary flexible pipe connections installed so that no stress is placed on pipes
190. ce Remove loose friable matter before filling surface discontinuities Set plaster surfaces Do not apply solvent borne paint or other impervious coatings if the moisture content at the surface tested with a moisture meter exceeds twelve per cent Preparation General Prepare substrates to the manufacturer s recommendations Surface preparation info table Duspec Info Sheet Substrate group Substrate title PALO47 Aluminium for powdercoat Aluminium for powdercoat PAS028 Asbestos Asbestos PACO02 Autoclaved aerated concrete Autoclaved aerated concrete PBKO019 Brick and blockwork Brick blockwork masonry PCE007 Cement render premixed render Cement render premixed render PCT040 Ceramic tiles Ceramic tiles un glazed PCCO050 Compressed fibre cement CFC sheet Hardiflex Hardiplank sheeting CFC Express wall Villaboard NATSPEC 339 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Duspec Info Sheet Substrate group Substrate title PCB031 Chip board Chip board PCF010 Concrete floors paths Concrete floors paths acid etch PCF033 Concrete floors paths Concrete floors paths commercial and industrial PCK032 Cork Cork floor tiles PTLO17 Decorative tiles Concrete tiles slate tiles terracotta tiles ceramic tiles terrazzo tiles PTIO
191. ce To AS 1657 Tactile indicators To AS NZS 1428 4 1 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 JOINERY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS Visible work Clear finished timber and veneer Ensure all visible surfaces are free of branding crayon or chalk marks and of blemishes caused by handling Joinery timber Hardwood To AS 2796 3 Seasoned cypress pine To AS 1810 Softwood To AS 4785 3 NATSPEC 259 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0551 Joinery Finished sizes For milled timbers actual dimensions which are at least the required dimensions except for dimensions qualified by a term such as nominal or out of to which industry standards for finished sizes apply Plywood Interior use generally To AS NZS 2270 Interior use exposed to moisture To AS NZS 2271 Visible surface with a clear finish Veneer quality A Other visible surfaces Veneer quality C or D Non structural glued laminated timber Standard AS 5067 Wet processed fibreboard including hardboard Standard To AS NZS 1859 4 Particleboard Standard To AS NZS 1859 1 Melamine overlaid particleboard Particleboard overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine Dry processed fibreboard including medium density fibreboard Standard To AS NZS 1859 2 Melamine overlaid medium density fibreboard Medium density fibreboard STD MDF overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine Decorative overlaid wood panels Standard To AS NZS 1859 3 Ce
192. ce manuals Referenced documents If referenced documents or technical worksections require that log books or records be submitted include this material in the maintenance records Service visits Record comments on the functioning of the systems work carried out items requiring corrective action adjustments made and name of service operator Obtain the signature of the principal s designated representative Site control General Report to the principal s designated representative on arriving at and before leaving the site 3 20 POST CONSTRUCTION MANDATORY INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE General General For the duration of the defects liability period provide inspections and maintenance of safety measures required by the following The Building Code of Australia AS 1851 Other statutory requirements applicable to the work Records Provide mandatory records Certification Certify that mandatory inspections and maintenance have been carried out and that the respective items conform to statutory requirements Submit certification Annual inspection Provide an annual inspection and maintenance immediately prior to the end of the defects liability period NATSPEC 32 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0181 Adhesives sealants and fasteners 0181 ADHESIVES SEALANTS AND FASTENERS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Fitness for purpose Provide adhesives sealants and fasteners ca
193. cement slurry Lay and compact concrete so that the edges are flush and the centre is cambered 10 mm above the adjoining existing surfaces Material 25 MPa concrete Surface finish and pattern Match existing adjoining work Minimum thickness 75 mm or the adjacent pavement thickness whichever is thicker Reinforcement and dowels If required provide steel reinforcement with dowels into the adjacent concrete Expansion joints 15 mm thick preformed jointing material of bituminous fibreboard placed where new concrete abuts existing concrete and in line with joints in existing concrete Control joints Form control joints strictly in line with the control joints in existing concrete Around electricity supply poles Terminate the concrete paving 200 mm from the pole and fill the resulting space with cold mix asphalt Curing Cure by keeping continuously wet for 7 days Asphalt footpaths Materials and installation To the Asphaltic concrete or Sprayed bituminous surfacing worksections as appropriate Thickness Match the adjoining footpath Finish Compact to a smooth even surface Segmental paving units Materials and installation To Segmental pavers sand bed or Segmental pavers mortar bed as appropriate and as follows Laying Re lay to match the pattern and surface levels of the existing paving Damaged paving units Replace paving units which are unsuitable for relaying with new units of the same mater
194. certification and or test results in conformance with the specified level of responsibility to AS 3798 Materials Imported fill Submit certification or test results by a GTA registered laboratory which establish the compliance of imported fill with the contract including the source Execution details Report Submit a time based schedule noting the methods and equipment proposed for the groundworks including the following Dewatering and groundwater control and disposal of surface water Excavation methods stages clearances batters and temporary supports Stockpiles and borrow pits Placing and compaction methods and stages NATSPEC 75 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork Geotechnical site investigations Provide a geotechnical report supporting the procedures proposed for excavation Disposal location Submit the locations and evidence of compliance with the relevant authorities for the disposal of material required to be removed from site Temporary shoring Provide a proposal for any temporary shoring or underpinning required including the progressive removal Proof rolling Submit method and equipment for proof rolling Certified records of measurement Submit a certified copy of the agreed records of measurement Construction records Submit the following to AS 3798 clause 3 4 and Appendix B Geotechnical site visit record and Earthworks summary report or dai
195. cessive penetration of coating system Prevent edge bonding by the coating system Staining Treatment to alter the colour of the timber surface 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Before surface preparation of timber Completion of finish sanding After application of clear finishing coat 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Execution details General Submit statement of proposed methods for applying coating systems Materials Product conformity Submit evidence of conformity to the requirements of Appendix Uniform Paint Standard to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Medicines and Poisons SUSMP NATSPEC 319 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0656 Floor sanding and finishing 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 ABRASIVES Grades General Select abrasives in conformance with the Abrasives table Abrasives table Floor hardness Basic sanding Finish sanding Sanding between finish coats of coating system Initial cuts Final sand Hard F24 to F30 F40 to F60 F80 to F120 F150 or finer Mild F36 to F40 F60 to F80 F100 to F120 F150 or finer Soft F60 to F80 F80 to F100 if F120 F150 or finer necessary Scratching If scratching persists during the final sanding re sand with a finer grade of abrasive 2 2 FINISH Filler General Non oil based and compatible with the coating system Sealer General Refer to finishes schedule
196. ck Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 3356 sensitive types e g polystyrene Water based Stain Blocker B17a Semi Gloss Acrylic B8b Semi Gloss Acrylic B8b Full gloss water ba sed enamel Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 0990 Sealer Undercoat eco choice B16 Gloss Acrylic B42 amp B9 Gloss Acrylic B42 amp B9 NATSPEC 348 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard MR Dulux Professional Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 4853 grade EnvirO2 Water Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Based Sealer Binder B15b Fibrous set plaster Dulux Sealer Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2548 Binder solvent Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 based B15 amp B9 amp B9 Fibre cement Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5027 products Sealer Undercoat Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 eco choice B16 amp B9 amp B9 Timber and Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2291 veneers Sealer Undercoat Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 low VOC system eco choice B17a amp B9 amp B9 Concrete Dulu
197. commendations of those parts of AS NZS 2311 which are referenced in this worksection 1 5 MANUFACTURER S DOCUMENTS Technical manuals Product Guide www dulux com au specifier product product selector Duspec Product Data Sheets MSDS paint system selection www dulux com au specifier duspec 1 6 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply ASU Acrylic sealer undercoat multipurpose combo product DFT Dry film thickness PDS Product data sheet PRN Paint reference number PSU Primer sealer undercoat multipurpose combo product WFT Wet film thickness Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS NZS 2310 and the following apply Adhesion The sum total of forces of attachment between a dry film and its substrate Finish coat The final coat of a coating system Gloss The optical property of a surface characterised by its ability to reflect light specularly NATSPEC 328 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Gloss unit Numerical value for the amount of specular reflection relative to that of a standard surface under the same geometric conditions Levels of gloss finish When the specular direction is 60 degrees a surface with the following specular gloss reading are defined by AS 1580 and as follows Full gloss finish between 50 and 85 glos
198. containing a fixed quantity of ingredients and produced in a discrete operation Concrete class Normal Concrete which is specified primarily by a standard compressive strength grade and otherwise conforming to with AS 1379 clause 1 5 3 Early age strength A mean compressive strength at 7 days exceeding the values shown in AS 1379 Table 1 2 Green concrete Concrete which has set but not appreciably hardened Production assessment An assessment procedure for concrete specified by strength grade carried out by the supplier on concrete produced by a specific supplying plant and based on the statistical assessment of standard compressive strength tests on concrete Sample A portion of the material used in the works or to take such a sample Specimen A portion of a sample which is submitted for testing Weather Cold Ambient shade temperature 10 C Hot Ambient shade temperature gt 30 C 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Base or subgrade before covering Membrane or film underlay installed on the base or subgrade NATSPEC 148 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0314b Concrete in situ Completed formwork and reinforcement cores fixings and embedded items fixed in place Surfaces or elements to be concealed in the final work before covering Commencement of concrete placing 1 6 SUBMISSIONS
199. covers to prevent water penetration Provide covers to protect existing plant equipment and materials intended for re use Dust protection General Provide dust proof screens bulkheads and covers to protect existing finishes and the immediate environment from dust and debris Security General If a wall or roof is opened for alterations and additions provide security against unauthorised entry to the building Temporary screens General Fill the whole of designated temporary openings or other spaces using dustproof and weatherproof temporary screens fixed securely to the existing structure and installed to shed water to avoid damage to retained existing elements or adjacent structures and contents Type Timber framed screens sheeted with 12 mm plywood and painted Seal the junctions between the screens and the openings Temporary access General If required provide a substantial temporary doorset fitted with a rim deadlock and remove on completion of demolition Exposed surfaces General Where necessary protect and weatherproof the surfaces of adjacent structures exposed by demolition Existing services Location Before commencing demolition locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the demolition operations Utility services Contact DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG to identify location of underground utility services pipes and cables Excavation Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existin
200. cts Association of Australia Quality Control and Product Certification Scheme Compressed fibre cement sheeting Standard To AS NZS 2908 2 Category 5 Type B 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL Subfloors General Ensure support members are in full lengths without splicing Flatness lt 3 mm deviation of the substrate under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction with no abrupt variations greater than 1 mm over 250 mm Timber decking on steel joists General Screw fix seasoned battens to the steel joists so that their top surfaces are aligned Batten size Minimum 35 mm thick Spacing of fasteners lt 600 mm 3 2 FIXING SHEET FLOORING Particleboard flooring Installation To AS 1860 2 Plywood flooring Installation To AS 1684 2 AS 1684 3 or AS 1684 4 as appropriate Compressed fibre cement flooring Installation Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the joists Stagger the end joints and locate centrally over joists Apply adhesive to edges of sheets and firmly butt join together Minimum number of spans across support 2 Fixing Pre drill screw holes with 1 mm clearance over screw diameter and countersink Fix with corrosion resistant countersunk screws Spacing of fasteners Sheet edge and intermediate lt 450 mm Corners and sheet edges At least 12 mm from sheet edges and 50 mm from corners Wet area flooring Stop screw heads with sealant 3 3 FIXING DECKING Timber decking Installatio
201. ctspec 0551 Joinery Fixing Spray adhesives to flat surfaces and double stick contact adhesive method to curved surfaces Splashbacks Glass 6 mm toughened colourback glass with a factory applied opaque coating to the back Standard To AS NZS 2208 Stainless steel Grade 304 fine linished finish 2 2 VENEERS Timber veneer Veneer quality To AS NZS 2270 Grades minimum requirement Select grade veneer quality A for visible surfaces to have clear finish or to have no coated finish General purpose grade veneer quality B for other visible surfaces Requirement Provide veneers slip matched and flitch batched and falling within the visual range of the approved samples Vinyl veneer Type Proprietary unbacked vinyl fabric factory bonded to the designated surface 2 3 JOINERY ITEMS General Refer to documents as follows Drawings Joinery units and their location indicative construction details scribes and trims materials dimensions and thicknesses and finishes Drawings Confirm on site all dimensions noted after the completion of partitions Finishes schedules or drawings Finishes selections Specification Joinery hardware fittings and systems 2 4 JOINERY ASSEMBLIES Standard General To AS NZS 4386 1 Plinths Material Select from the following Exterior general purpose plywood High moisture resistant particleboard High moisture resistant medium density fibreboard Thickness 16 mm
202. d submit proposals Stripping single storey suspended work If the requirements of AS 3610 1 cannot be met give notice NATSPEC 131 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Surface repair method If required submit details of the proposed method before commencing repairs Concrete Submit proposals for mixing placing finishing and curing concrete including the following Changes to the concrete mix Curing and protection methods Curing period for low pressure steam curing if proposed Cutting or displacing reinforcement or cutting hardened concrete Handling placing compaction and finishing methods and equipment including pumping Placing under water Sequence and times for concrete placement and construction joint locations and relocations Site storage mixing and transport methods and equipment if applicable Temperature control methods Cutting or coring If cutting or coring of hardened concrete is proposed provide details Loading If proposed construction systems loads and procedures including propping and re shoring differ from submitted design documentation submit details Sequence of concrete placement If sequential placement of slab segments is proposed provide details Sawn joints Submit proposed methods timing and sequence of sawing joints Reinforcement Submit the following General If changes are proposed to rein
203. d to provide evenly distributed coverage of gt 90 after laying Pattern of distribution of adhesive As illustrated in AS 3958 1 Verify by examining one paver in ten as work proceeds NATSPEC 117 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0275b Segmental pavers mortar bed 3 6 CONTROL OF MOVEMENT General General Provide control joints as follows Location Over structural control joints Atinternal corners Close to external corners in large paved areas Around the perimeter at abutments At junctions between different substrates To divide large paved areas into bays maximum 5 m wide maximum area 16 ti At abutments with the building structural frame and over supporting walls or beams where flexing of the substrate is anticipated Depth of joint Right through to the substrate Sealant width 6 25 mm Depth of elastomeric sealant One half the joint width or 6 mm whichever is the greater Control joint types Divider strip A proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwiched between plates with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying Set flush with the finished surface Proprietary slide plate divider strip An arrangement of interlocking metal plates grouted into pockets formed in the concrete joint edges Sealant Two pack self levelling flexible mould resistant one part silicone or polyurethane sealant applied over a backing rod Finish flush with
204. d as follows NATSPEC 291 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0621 Waterproofing wet areas Line framed enclosures for insert baths Form an upstand on the inside edge of the enclosure opening to receive the bath with an angle or compressible foam rod Waterproof walls abutting the enclosure the top of the plinth and the interior and exterior of the enclosure After tiling the walls outside of the enclosure and plinth top install the bath with its downturn edge lip outside the upstand formed on the edge of the opening and seal the lip to the tiles Taps and spouts Requirement Waterproof penetrations for taps and spouts with proprietary flange systems or a sealant Provision for servicing Install taps in a manner that allows tap washers or ceramic discs to be serviced without damaging the waterproofing seal Recessed soap holders Construction Support all faces of the recess and line with the same sheet material as the adjacent wall Fall base of recess towards the shower area Flash all junctions and waterproof all surfaces Membrane horizontal penetrations Sleeves Provide a flexible flange for all penetrations bonded to the penetration and to the membrane Membrane vertical penetrations Pipes ducts and vents Provide separate sleeves for all pipes ducts and vents and have fixed to the substrate Curing of liquid applied systems General To the manufacturers instructio
205. de of the following Prefabricated units before installation Fabricated items before priming or water repellent treatment Bolts after final tightening Timber work after erection but before it is covered 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Certification General Submit certification by a professional engineer of the design documentation and erected work to AS 1684 and AS 1720 1 Include the following Reactions Provide location and magnitude of reactions to be accommodated by the support structure Floor and wall and roof frame member sizes A schedule of proposed member sizes certified as meeting stated project requirements for span spacings loadings and deflections Species and stress grade Moisture content at time of manufacture Preservative treatment if any Shop drawings General Submit shop detail drawings certified by a professional engineer stating that the design has been carried out to AS 1684 and AS 1720 1 requirements for the configurations and loadings Include the following Prefabricated roof trusses Marking plans Truss plan layout Elevations with the arrangement of members allowing for the accommodation of in roof services and the size and section type of each member Camber of all elements The method of assembly connection lifting holding down and bracing Prefabricated wall frames NATSPEC 193 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0382 Light t
206. double sided adhesive tape for temporary support and affix directly to the backing 2 4 SHOWER SCREENS Type General Proprietary system comprising frames of extruded aluminium stainless steel or PVC assembled around safety glass to form fixed panels and sliding hinged or pivoted doors Shower screen systems General Conform to the finishes schedule 2 5 GLASS BALUSTRADES Glass balustrade systems General Conform to the Selections 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GLASS PROCESSING General Processing Perform required processes on glass including cutting obscuring silvering and bending Form necessary holes including for fixings equipment access openings and speaking holes Process exposed glass edges to a finish not inferior to ground arrised 3 2 INSTALLATION General General Install the glass so that Each piece is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials Building movements are not transferred to the glass Temporary marking Use a method which does not harm the glass Remove marking on completion Toughened glass Do not cut work or permanently mark after toughening Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non resilient materials Frameless installations Join the vertical edges of adjacent glass panels with silicone jointing c
207. drawer front Rout for drawer bottoms Drawer bottoms Material PVC film laminated hardboard Thickness 3 mm Drawer and door hardware Hinge types Concealed metal hinges with the following features Adjustable for height side and depth location of door Self closing action Hold open function Nickel plated Piano hinges Chrome plated steel extending full height of doors Slides Metal runners and plastic rollers with the following features 30 kg loading capacity Closure retention White thermoset powder coating or nickel plated Full height doors Flaps and pull out shelves 2 5 WORKING SURFACES Laminated benchtops Finish High pressure decorative laminated sheet Exposed edges Extend laminate over shaped nosing finishing gt 50 mm back on underside Splay outside corners at 45 Balance underside Extend laminate to the undersides of benchtops Installation Scribe to walls Fix to carcass at least twice per 600 mm length of benchtop Joint sealing Fill joint with sealant matching finish and clamp with proprietary mechanical connectors 3 EXECUTION 3 1 JOINERY General Joints Provide materials in single lengths whenever possible If joints are necessary make them over supports Framing Frame and trim where necessary for openings including those required by other trades Accessories and trim General Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation NATSPEC 262
208. ds the joint width Fire rated control joints General If a control joint occurs in an element of construction required to have a fire resistance rating construct the control joint with fire stopping materials which maintain the fire resistance rating of the element Fire stopping To AS 4072 1 3 9 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK DUCT RISERS Location General Build a one piece corrosion resistant metal tray to the masonry duct risers at roof level Material complete delete Installation General Cut an opening for the riser Turn tray edges up 25 mm around the opening 13 mm clear of the walls Externally turn the tray up 100 mm under the stepped flashing and down 100 mm over the apron flashing Lap and solder joints Weepholes General Provide 2 weepholes through the masonry duct riser walls on opposite sides immediately above the tray 3 10 BRICKWORK BED JOINT REINFORCEMENT Location General Locate as follows In 2 bed joints below and above head and sill flashings to openings In 2 bed joints below and above openings n third bed joint above bottom of wall In second bed joint below top of wall Maximum vertical intervals 500 mm Installation General Lap 450 mm at splices Fold and bend at corners so that the longitudinal wires are continuous Stop 50 mm short of control joints Extend 450 mm beyond each side of openings Reinforcement Material Galvanized welded wire mesh Width Equal to the width of the lea
209. due to end reaction Inertia bases General If necessary to achieve the required level of vibration isolation provide inertia bases having appropriate mass and conforming as follows Construction Steel or steel framed reinforced concrete Position foundation bolts for equipment before pouring concrete Supports Support on vibration isolation mountings using height saving support brackets Vibration isolation mountings General Except for external equipment that is not connected to the structure of any building support rotating or reciprocating equipment on mountings as follows For static deflections 15 mm Single or double deflection neoprene in shear mountings incorporating steel top and base plates and a tapped hole for bolting to equipment For static deflections 2 15 mm Spring mountings Selection Provide mountings selected to achieve 95 isolation efficiency at the normal operating speeds of the equipment Installation Set and adjust vibration isolation mounting supports to give clearance for free movement of the supports Spring mountings Provide freestanding laterally stable springs as follows Clearances 2 12 mm between springs and other members such as bolts and housing High frequency isolation 5 mm neoprene acoustic isolation pads between baseplate and support Levelling Provide bolts and lock nuts Minimum travel to solid 2 150 of the designated minimum static deflection Ratio of mean
210. during removal and deliver to the locations scheduled Refrigeration systems General Undertake demolition work on refrigeration systems in conformance with AS NZS 1677 2 Appendix F The recommendations of SAA HB 40 1 and SAA HB 40 2 Re used components General Clean re used components and test for compliance with current Australian Standards before returning to service Provide results of compliance tests 3 5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Identified hazardous materials Register Hazardous materials have been identified as present on site and a Hazardous materials register has been prepared Hazardous materials removal Standard To AS 2601 clause 1 6 2 3 6 COMPLETION Notice of completion General Give at least 7 working days notice of completion of demolition so that adjacent structures may be inspected following completion of demolition Making good Make good any damage arising out of demolition work Obtain written acceptance from the owner of each adjoining property of completeness and standard of making good Temporary support General Clear away at completion of demolition 4 SELECTIONS 4 4 DEMOLITION Recovered items for re use in the works schedule Item Location for re use Nil N A NATSPEC 65 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Recovered items for delivery to the principal schedule 0201b Demolition Item Deliver to Front door knob
211. e cavity and under the sill in the inner leaf or the frame Over lintels to openings Full width of outer leaf immediately above the lintel continuous across cavity turned 30 mm into the inner leaf 2 courses above for brick and 1 course above for block or turned up against the inner frame and fasten to it Extend at least 150 mm beyond the lintels Extend at least 50 mm beyond the lintels At abutments with structural frames or supports Vertical flash in the cavity using 150 mm wide material wedged and grouted into a groove in the frame opposite the cavity At jambs Vertically flash jamb extending 75 mm into the cavity interleaved with the sill and head flashing at each end Fix to jambs Atroof abutments with cavity walls Cavity flash immediately above the roof and over flash the roof apron flashing Installation General Sandwich flashings between mortar except on lintels or shelf angles Bed flashings sills and copings in one operation to maximise adhesion Laps If required lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at joints Step as necessary but not exceeding 2 courses per step for brickwork and 1 course per step for blockwork Lap sealing Seal with a bituminous adhesive and sealing compound Pointing Point up joints around flashings filling voids Weepholes Location Provide weepholes to external leaves of cavity walls in the course immediately above flashings and cavity fill and at the b
212. e inform in writing to the contract administrator High level interface Systems transfer information in a digital format using an open system interface Hot dip galvanized Zinc coated to AS NZS 4680 after fabrication with coating thickness and mass to AS NZS 4680 Table 1 P IP IP code IP rating and similar expression have the same meaning as IP Code in AS 60529 Joints Construction joint A joint with continuous reinforcement provided to suit construction sequence NATSPEC 18 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Control joint An unreinforced joint between or within discrete elements of construction which allows for relative movement of the elements Contraction joint An opening control joint with a bond breaking coating separating the joint surfaces to allow independent and controlled contraction of different parts or components induced by shrinkage temperature changes or other causes It may include unbound dowels to assist vertical deflection control Expansion joint A closing control joint with the joint surfaces separated by a compressible filler to allow axial movement due to thermal expansion or contraction with changes in temperature or creep It may include unbound dowels to assist vertical deflection control Isolation joint A joint between elements of a structure designed to isolate structural movement while permitting horizontal and or verti
213. e authority of a recognised certification program applicable to the product Locate the brand on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works Joinery doors General Provide joinery doors as documented Flush doors General Provide flush doors of balanced construction Cellular core and intermediate rail core flush doors Provide a subframe of 25 mm minimum width timber around openings for louvres and glazing Provide additional material to take hardware fastenings and grooves NATSPEC 225 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0453b Doors and access panels Solid core Solid flush doors as follows Flush door with blockboard Core plate of timber strips laid edge to edge fully bonded to each other and to facings each side of no less than two sheets of timber veneer Flush doors with particleboard Core plate of particleboard fully bonded to facings each side of no less than two sheets of timber veneer Medium density fibreboard doors Single thickness of moisture resistant general purpose medium density fibreboard with the same surface finish to both sides for internal use Smoke doors Solid core 2 35 mm thick Construction Adhesives Internal To AS NZS 2270 External To AS NZS 2271 Door thickness General 35 mm External doors and doors over 900 mm wide 40 mm Cut outs If openings are required in flush doors e g for louvres or glazing do not make cut
214. e building undamaged Grouting Pack dry mix M4 mortar between underpinning and existing structure at the completion of each panel of underpinning 3 4 CAVITY WORK Cavity clearance General Keep cavities clear at all times Cavity fill General Fill the cavity to 1 course above adjacent finished ground level with mortar Fall the top surface towards the outer leaf Cavity width General Provide minimum cavity widths in conformance with the following Masonry walls 50 mm Masonry veneer walls 40 mm between the masonry leaf and the load bearing frame and 25 mm minimum between the masonry leaf and sheet bracing Openings Care Do not close the cavity at the jambs of external openings Wall ties connectors and accessories Protection Install to prevent water passing across the cavity 3 5 DAMP PROOF COURSES Location General Provide damp proof courses as follows Timber floors In the first course below the level of the underside of ground floor timbers in internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls Cavity walls built off slabs on ground In the bottom course of the outer leaf continuous horizontally across the cavity and up the inner face bedded in mortar turned 30 mm into the inner leaf 1 course above Masonry veneer construction In the bottom course of the outer leaf continuous horizontally across the cavity Fasten to the inner frame 75 mm above floor level Walls adjoining infill floor slabs on memb
215. e door stops and other fixtures and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation 3 2 LAYING CARPET Standard General To AS NZS 2455 1 Setting out General Lay the carpet in continuous lengths without cross joins in the body of the area If unavoidable cross joins occur at doorways locate the joins directly below the closed doors Joints in underlay Make sure joints in underlay do not coincide with carpet joints Do not carry underlay over carpet grippers or edge strips Partition layout Confirm that permanent partitions have been installed before starting carpet laying Fixing underfelt To timber floors Secure underfelt with staples at 100 mm centres at edges and joints in parallel lines 600 mm apart To concrete floors Glue continuously at edges and joints with a 100 mm wide strip to each piece and at 600 mm centres both ways with 150 mm diameter patches Seaming methods Woven carpet Machine or hand sew Do not provide glued taped seams Tufted carpet Seam with hot melt adhesive tape Carpet installation Gripper system To AS NZS 2455 1 clause 3 5 Direct stick system To AS NZS 2455 1 clause 3 6 Double bond system To AS NZS 2455 1 clause 3 7 Pre applied underlay adhesive system To AS NZS 2455 1 clause 3 8 Hook and loop system To AS NZS 2455 1 clause 3 9 Cutting laid carpet Method Make penetrations through laid carpet are necessary for electrical telephone or other outlets cut the carpet
216. e plaster through the apertures of expanded metal lath and wings of beads Finishing treatments Plain Bag Rub the finish coat when set firm Carborundum stone Rub the finish coat when set hard with a carborundum stone to achieve a finish free from sand Foam float Float finish coat on application with a wood or plastic float to an even surface and finish with a foam float to achieve a fine sand textured finish Steel trowel Steel trowel finish coat to a smooth dense surface which is not glass like and is free from shrinkage cracks and crazing Wood or plastic float Float the finish coat on application to an even surface with a wood or plastic float Incidental work General Return plaster into reveals beads sills recesses and niches Plaster faces ends and soffits of projections in the substrate such as string courses sills pilasters and corbels Run neatly finished throating on soffits of external projections Trim around openings Plaster exposed internal surfaces of built in cupboards Joining up General If joining up is required make sure joints are imperceptible in the finished work after decoration Control joints General Provide joints in the finish to coincide with control joints in the substrate Make sure that the joint in the substrate is not bridged during plastering Size Depth Extend the joint right through the plaster and reinforcement to the substrate Width 3 mm or the same width
217. e sealed for broardcast into labour intensive non slip the resin NATSPEC 324 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0657 Resin based seamless flooring Finish type Typical use Typical resins Coats Aggregates Thickness properties System Synthetic Public spaces Polyester or 1 trowel applied Decorative 4 8 mm after terrazzo e g Malls epoxy marble mixed grinding Foyers into the resin System Seamless flake Public spaces Epoxy base 4 or more Decorative vinyl 700 900 um flooring coat flake 4 paint flakes moisture cure or Glass beads two pack may be added polyurethane for non slip top coats properties Seamless flake Schools Epoxy base 2 or more Decorative vinyl 700 900 um flooring low hospitals coat flake and paint flakes VOC two 100 solid Glass beads epoxy top coat may be added with light for non slip blockers properties 3 EXECUTION 3 1 General SUBCONTRACTORS General Use specialist applicators recommended by the materials manufacturers 3 2 Substrates PREPARATION General Ensure substrates conform to the Substrate tolerance table and are clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location and functioning of control joints Substrate tolerance table Property Length of straight edge laid in Max deviation under the any direction straight edge Flatness Class A 3m 3 mm Smo
218. e with the manufacturer s recommendations and all safety warnings Wash with fresh potable water and remove all soluble salts in conformance with AS 3894 6 Methods A and D Grind all sharp edges with a power tool to a minimum radius of 2 mm Power tool clean welds to AS 1627 2 Class 2 to remove roughness Remove filings preferably by vacuum or compressed air Abrasive blast clean all steel surfaces to be painted in conformance with AS 1627 4 to visual standard AS 1627 9 Class 2 5 equivalent to ISO 8501 1 Sa 2 5 Very Thorough Blast Cleaning Use a non metallic medium that will generate a surface profile of 35 to 65 microns as tested to AS 3894 5 Method A Commence application within 4 hours of abrasive blast cleaning or before surface becomes contaminated otherwise repeat abrasive blasting step Stripe coat welds bolts boltholes and all edges with primer before application of full primer coat nominated in the PROTECTIVE PAINT COATING SYSTEMS Before application ensure that the surface is free of contaminants including oil grease dirt dust salt and any other deleterious materials that will interfere with coating performance Treatment of on site welding On site welding If on site welding is performed adopt the following procedures Remove weld spatter Power tool clean welds to AS 1627 2 Class 2 to remove roughness Remove filings preferably by vacuum or compressed air Prime welds immediately with the n
219. ealants as required Sealing compound polyurethane polysulphide acrylic Single component Type II Class A Multi component To ASTM C920 Sealing compound silicone Single component Class A Multi component To ASTM C920 Sealing compound butyl To ASTM C1311 Glazing compounds To AAMA 800 coded 802 3 Types or Il or 805 2 as applicable Narrow joint seam sealer To AAMA 800 Products coded 803 3 Exterior perimeter sealing compound To AAMA 800 Non drying sealant To AAMA 800 Expanded cellular glazing tape To AAMA 800 Very high bond pressure sensitive tapes To ASTM D897 ASTM D1002 ASTM D3330M ASTM D3652M ASTM D3654M or ASTM D3715M Pile weather strips Standard To AAMA 701 702 Materials Polypropylene or equivalent pile and backing low friction silicone treated ultra violet stabilised Finned type A pile weather seal with a central polypropylene fin bonded into the centre of the backing rod and raised above the pile level Extruded gaskets and seals Type Non cellular solid elastopressive seals Material Rubber products neoprene ethylene propylene diene monomer EPDM or silicone rubber To BS 4255 1 Flexible polyvinyl chloride PVC To BS 2571 E type compounds colour fastness grade B Priming Compatibility Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials Control joints Depth of elastomeric sealant One half the joint width or 6 mm w
220. ear or colourless Intergrain Enviropro DW 1420 B39c AS 3730 27 coatings Endure DW1419 waterborne for 1 Pack matt satin DW1418 timber interior or gloss DW 1421 floors low VOC DW 1422 Intergrain Enviropro DW 1423 Endure DW1312 2 Pack gloss satin DW1190 or matt DW 1038 Feast Watson EnviroMax 2 Pack gloss semi gloss or low sheen Sanding sealer Cabot s Universal DWO0688 B40 NE Sanding Sealer DW0744 Feast Watson Sanding Sealer Semi gloss latex Dulux Aquanamel DD1281 B41 NE interior trim alt Semi Gloss low B8b VOC Gloss or full gloss Dulux Aquanamel DD1282 B42 NE latex interior trim Gloss low VOC Penetrating Tung Feast Watson DW0734 B43a NE Oil type varnish for Floorseal DW0733 timber floors Feast Watson interior China Wood Oil Penetrating Tung Intergrain Nature s DW0769 B43b NE NATSPEC 336 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu Dulux PDS No AS NZS Standard x material 2311 PRN description Oil type varnish for Timber Oil DW1577 timber floors Feast Watson DW1285 exterior Decking Oil Intergrain ULTRADECK low VOC Gloss pigmented Dulux Luxathane R DD1137 B44 AS NZS 3750 6 polyurethane Dulux Weathermax Dl1156 HBR Powder coatings Dulux Powdercoat B45a AS 3715 for non ferrous Range metals Powder coatings Dulux Powdercoat B45b AS 4506 for ferrous metals Range www duluxpowder
221. easingly fine abrasives If hard surfaces show excessive scratching apply an initial cut at 90 to the grain direction Boundary areas Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area using disc sanding Inaccessible areas Hand scrape to produce the same surface condition as the main sanded area Water based coating system Sand with a final grade of paper of minimum F220 screen back Cleaning General After each sanding operation remove all dust by all of the following Removal from cracks by hand Vacuum cleaning Tack rag cleaning 3 3 COATING SYSTEM General Finish Provide coating system as follows Consistent film thickness Consistent level of gloss Wet paint warning General Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until the coating system has cured and hardened Application General Apply the coating system in conformance with the manufacturer s recommendations Maintain a wet edge throughout the whole area NATSPEC 321 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0656 Floor sanding and finishing Sanding General Fine sand between coats only within the depth of the finish and remove dust Timber floor coating system Coating If edge bonding of strip flooring is known to occur apply a sealer compatible with the final coat Final coats 2 coats of water based polyurethane applied with a continuous wet edge and to the manufacturer s recommendations
222. ed B15 Bathroom Semi Bathroom Semi Gloss B8b Gloss B8b Fibre cement Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD4512 products Sealer Undercoat Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp low VOC system eco choice B16 Bathroom Semi Bathroom Semi Gloss B8b Gloss B8b Concrete Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 4522 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp eco choice B15 Bathroom Semi Bathroom Semi Gloss B8b Gloss B8b Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5015 low VOC system Acrylic Primer Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp Sealer Undercoat Bathroom Semi Bathroom Semi B17a Gloss B8b Gloss B8b MDF Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5016 Acrylic Primer Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp Sealer Undercoat Bathroom Semi Bathroom Semi B17a Gloss B8b Gloss B8b Brick and masonry Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5017 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat eco choice B16 Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Semi Gloss B8b Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Semi Gloss B8b NATSPEC Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5019 low VOC system Acrylic Block Filler B15 Wear Kitc
223. ed and glazed windows and doors U value Total U Value as defined by BCA and determined in conformance with NFRC 100 SHGC Solar heat gain coefficient as defined by BCA and determined in conformance with NFRC 200 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Fabricated aluminium joinery assemblies delivered to the site before installation Commencement of aluminium joinery installation 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Samples Submit samples of aluminium joinery as follows NATSPEC 217 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0451 AWS aluminium windows and doors Accessory and hardware items documented descriptively or by performance i e not specified as proprietary items including locks latches handles catches sash operators anchor brackets and attachments masonry anchors and weather seals pile or extruded Sealant compatibility Compatibility statements Submit statements from all parties to the installation that certify the compatibility of sealants and glazing systems to all substrates Subcontractors General Submit names and contact details of proposed subcontractors endorsed by AWS Architectural Window Systems Pty Ltd Type test reports General Submit type test reports verifying conformance to AS 2047 and the Aluminium joinery performance schedule Opacified glass General Submit a statement by the manufacturer certifying that the propo
224. ed wood found on the outer layer of the tree Lyctid susceptible timbers Do not provide untreated timbers containing Lyctid susceptible sapwood Preservative treatment Glued laminated timber products To AS NZS 1604 5 Table A1 Laminated veneer lumber LVL To AS NZS 1604 4 Table A1 Plywood To AS NZS 1604 3 Table A1 Reconstituted wood based products To AS NZS 1604 2 Table A1 Sawn and round timber To AS 1604 1 Table D1 Untreated sapwood If used place to the outside of joints or in locations exposed to higher levels of ventilation Moisture content Test To AS NZS 1080 1 Protection Protect timber and timber products stored on site from moisture and weather For milled prefinished prefabricated and similar elements which are to be protected in the final structure provide temporary weather protection until the permanent covering is in place Subfloor ventilation To BCA F1 12 or BCA 3 4 1 2 as applicable Termite treatment Requirement To the Termite management worksection 24 FINISHING Surface finish Hardwood To AS 2796 1 Table B1 Softwood To AS 4785 1 Table B1 Surface coating Painting To the Painting worksection and as follows Application To the manufacturer s specification 2 5 RECYCLED TIMBER General Type of species To be confirmed Source To be confirmed Application Internal feature wall Grit blasted or re machined Remove all nails and screws Classification Visually graded 3 E
225. edge strips occur at doorways locate the junctions directly below the closed door 3 EXECUTION 3 4 SUBSTRATE Substrates General Ensure substrates conform to the Substrate tolerance table and are as follows To AS NZS 2455 1 or AS NZS 2455 2 as appropriate NATSPEC 304 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0652b Carpets Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location and functioning of control joints Substrate tolerance table Property Length of straight edge laid in Max deviation under the any direction straight edge Flatness 3m 6 mm Smoothness 150 mm 1mm Concrete substrate correction Remove projections and fill voids and hollows with a levelling compound compatible with the adhesive Timber substrate correction Remove projections If conformance to the Substrate tolerance table cannot be achieved fix an underlay in brick pattern with joints avoiding substrate joints Moisture content Do not commence installation unless Concrete The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B and the values in AS NZS 2455 1 clause 2 4 2 c have been obtained Plywood The moisture content of battens joists or plywood substrate has been tested to AS NZS 1080 1 and values obtained as follows Air conditioned buildings 8 to 1096 Intermittently heated buildings 10 to 12 596 Fixtures Remov
226. edule 2 3 COMPONENTS Metal components generally Corrosion protection As nominated in the General requirements worksection Corrosion category As nominated in the Adhesives sealants and fasteners worksections Expanded metal lath Conformance To BCA Spec A2 3 Annexure to Table 1 clause 1 6 Aperture 6 20 mm Self furring expanded metal lath Aperture 6 20 mm Ribs V shaped at 100 150 mm intervals NATSPEC 185 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0346 Structural fire protection systems Steel wire mesh Finish Galvanized Welded rectangular mesh Keying 10 25 mm aperture Wire diameter 0 7 1 6 mm Twisted hexagonal mesh Conformance To AS 2423 Mesh size Nominally 25 32 mm Fixings Screws Deep threaded self tapping screws preferably with ribbed heads Staples Steel wire staples Adhesive cement Fixing cement nominated by the board manufacturer as being part of the complete protection system as tested 3 EXECUTION 3 4 SPRAYED FIRE RESISTING PRODUCTS Applicators General Must be licensed by the coating manufacturer to install the coating Surface preparation Sprayed to contour Immediately before applying the coating remove materials which will impair adhesion to the substrate including mill scale dirt grime oil grease dust loose rust non compatible primers and paint Compatibility If paint on the steel sections is not
227. edure Existing floor in good condition Finish sanding only New floors and existing floors in poor condition Foruse as flooring substrate Basic sanding only Foruse as finished surface Basic sanding and finish sanding Basic sanding general General Remove irregularities caused by cupping or mismatching of the flooring materials with a drum type sanding machine and coarse abrasives Basic sanding strip flooring General First cut at 45 to the length of the boards second cut at 90 to the first cut and third cut parallel to the length of the boards Boundary areas Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area using disc sanding Inaccessible areas Hand scrape to produce an even plane surface Stopping and filling General Select a colour to produce an average match with the final coated timber in tone colour and texture Minor cracks Fill and stop punched nails with a putty knife Deeper holes Fill in layers 6 mm allowing each fill to dry Make sure cavities are filled slightly above the surface without air pockets Porous timber Flood fill with the cloth application of water based filler diluted to a creamy consistency Finish sanding general General Provide a clear finished surface free of scratch marks when observed under the design light level when standing Finish sanding strip flooring General After basic sanding cut twice parallel to the length of the boards using incr
228. eets in a stretcher bond or at 45 degrees to the floor board direction Nail fixing 100 mm from edges and 550 mm centres along grain and 500 mm centres across grain Underlay control joints Provide joint widths as follows Against vertical building elements 10 mm Between underlay sheets 6 mm Between tongue and groove sheets Hand pressure assembly Underlay fixed on joists Installation Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the supports so that their top surfaces are aligned Stagger the end joints and locate them centrally over joists If sheets are not tongue and grooved provide noggings or trimmer joists to support the edges Fixing centres Maximum 300 mm on each support Particleboard and plywood underlay Timber joists Adhesive and nail fix Steel joists Fix with countersunk screws 3 5 FLOOR FIXING Room environment General During fixing and stabilising operate the heating system of radiant heated or air conditioned rooms at 1 5 C above normal maximum temperature Adhesive Strip flooring Use a urethane elastomer adhesive in addition to nails as follows Continuously supported flooring 4 mm beads at 300 mm spacing at right angles to run of flooring Intermittently supported flooring 6 mm bead along each joist or batten Parquet and strip flooring fixed by direct adhesion Spread adhesive over subfloor in conformance with manufacturer s recommendations Nailing General Ensure the boa
229. eir intended use Warranty period As defined by the manufacturer Material Performance Warranty Submit an alternative performance warranty as follows Terms Submit the performance criteria as defined by the manufacturer Measure As defined by the manufacturer Warranty period As defined by the manufacturer Timing Before the application of the paint system 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 GENERAL Product substitution Other paint Conform to SUBMISSIONS Substitutions in the General requirements worksection 2 2 PAINTS Combinations General Dulux paint products and coating systems have been selected and specified for this project Any unauthorised product substitution will void the Warranties Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system Clear timber finish systems Provide only the combinations of putty stain and sealer recommended by the manufacturer of the top coats Deliver CE Deliver paints to the site in the original manufacturer s labelled and unopened containers Tinting General Provide only products which are colour tinted by the manufacturer or supplier Toxic ingredients General Comply with the requirements of Appendix Uniform Paint Standard to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Medicines and Poisons SUSMP Standards Paint types Conform to the Australian Standard as referenced in the OCP Dulux paint type reference table DuluxGroup Dulux paint type reference table legend
230. ement after fabrication when corrosion protection has been applied Conformance To AS 4100 clause 14 4 3 2 WELDING General Standard To AS NZS 1554 1 Weld category Weld categories not shown on the drawings Category GP Weld type Weld type not shown on the drawings Submit proposals for weld type and electrodes 3 3 BOLTING General Standards To AS 1110 1 AS 1111 1 and AS NZS 1252 Anchor bolts General Provide each anchor bolt with 2 nuts and 2 oversize washers and provide sufficient thread to permit the levelling nut and washer to be set below the base plate Galvanizing Galvanize all components Hexagonal bolts To AS 1111 1 Hexagonal nuts To AS 1112 3 Plain washers To AS 1237 1 Set out Set out bolt groups using templates and subjected to survey check Lock nuts General Provide lock nuts for bolts in moving parts or parts subject to vibration and for vertical bolts in tension Tensioning of bolting categories 8 8 TB and 8 8 TF Method Use part turn of nut or load indicating washers 3 4 SURFACE PREPARATION AND TREATMENT General General Conform to the Steel protective paint coatings and or Steel hot dip galvanized coatings worksections as appropriate General Coat structural steelwork not encased in concrete Standards To AS 1627 4 and AS NZS 2312 Section 1 Surface preparation Class 1 blast NATSPEC 169 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0341b Struc
231. ement of concrete including the following Date Specified grade and source of concrete Slump measurements The portion of work Volume placed Rain General During placement and before setting protect the surface from damage Time between adjacent placements General Conform to the Minimum time delay schedule Vertical elements General Limit the free fall of concrete to maximum of 2000 mm Placing in cold weather Cement Do not use high alumina cement Placing concrete Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete at 2 5 C Formwork and reinforcement Before and during placing maintain temperature at 2 5 C Severe weather If severe weather conditions are predicted use high early strength cement Temperature control Heat the concrete materials other than cement to the minimum temperature necessary to make sure the temperature of the placed concrete is within the limits specified Admixtures Do not use calcium chloride salts chemicals or other material in the mix to lower the freezing point of the concrete Frozen materials Do not allow frozen materials or materials containing ice to enter the mixer and keep free of frost and ice any formwork materials and equipment coming in contact with the concrete Maximum temperature of water 60 C when placed in the mixer Concrete Prevent concrete from freezing without using salts or chemicals Placing in hot weather Handling Prevent prematu
232. eneral Fix to support structures plumb to within H 200 where H is the height at the apex Support Support trusses on bottom chord at two points only unless designed for additional support Vertical movement Over internal walls provide at least 10 mm vertical clearance and use bracing methods which allow for vertical movements Holding down and bracing Provide details demonstrating capability to resist lateral and uplift forces Certification Obtain certification from a professional engineer for the erected trusses 3 6 ROOF TRIM Fascia valley gutter and barge boards Requirement Supply and fix fascia valley gutter and barge boards in conformance with the manufacturer s requirements 3 7 COMPLETION Cleaning General On completion of framing remove debris from any gaps between members NATSPEC 174 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0344b Steel hot dip galvanized coatings 0344B STEEL HOT DIP GALVANIZED COATINGS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide hot dip galvanized coatings that controls atmospheric corrosion to structural steelwork or steel products in the time to first maintenance 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS General Coating To AS NZS 4680 Coating on fasteners To AS 1214 Durability To AS 2309 and AS NZS 2312 Metal finishing Steel preparati
233. eners lt 900 mm Framing fixed on resilient pads Fix seasoned battens on resilient pads to the concrete slab in conformance with the Sheet underlay battens table so that their top surfaces are aligned Pad spacing 400 mm centres Vapour barrier under battens 200 um high impact resistant polyethylene film Lap 300 mm seal the laps with pressure sensitive tape and return up the vertical surfaces and trim at the level of the flooring Sheet underlay battens table Plywood stress grade Plywood thickness mm Batten spacing mm F14 12 5 450 F11 18 5 600 F14 17 600 3 3 SUPPORT FIXING STRIP FLOORING Battens for strip flooring on concrete slabs General Make sure support members are in full lengths without splicing Framing fixed direct Fix seasoned battens to the concrete slab in conformance with the Strip flooring battens table so that their top surfaces are aligned Battens 70 x 35 mm seasoned timber Spacing of fasteners lt 900 mm Framing fixed on resilient pads Fix seasoned battens on resilient pads to the concrete slab in conformance with the Strip flooring battens table so that their top surfaces are aligned Pad spacing 400 mm centres NATSPEC 314 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring Vapour barrier under battens 200 um high impact resistant polyethylene film Lap 300 mm seal the laps with pressure sen
234. entilation appropriate for moisture curing Acoustic underlay General Resilient underlay fixed with compatible adhesive Critical radiant flux Standard to AS ISO 9239 1 Flooring system Conform to the values of critical radiant flux as documented Smoke development rate Standard To AS ISO 9239 1 Floor finishes in non sprinklered buildings 750 percent minutes maximum 2 2 SHEET UNDERLAY Plywood Standard To AS NZS 2269 0 Plywood formaldehyde emission class to AS NZS 2269 0 Class E1 NATSPEC 312 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring Grading Surface grade CD Bond Type A to AS NZS 2754 1 Int Particleboard Particleboard To AS NZS 1860 1 Class 1 Particleboard formaldehyde emission class to AS NZS 1860 1 Class E1 2 3 STRIP AND PARQUET FLOORING Recycled timber Standard To FWPA PNO6 1039 Grading To Section 5 New hardwood Standard Generally To AS 2796 1 Grading To AS 2796 2 clause 1 7 New softwood Standard Seasoned cypress pine To AS 1810 Grade 1 Softwood pinus ssp To AS 4785 2 Grade Appearance Softwood other To AS 4785 2 Grade Select Identification General Identify timber using branding or certification Branding Brand timber under the authority of a recognised product certification or accreditation program applicable to the product Locate the brand mark on faces or edges w
235. epth of 200 mm before mound formation Under slabs paving and embankments General Compact the ground to achieve the densities specified in the Compaction schedule If necessary loosen the ground to a depth of gt 200 mm and adjust the moisture content before compaction to a density consistent with subsequent filling Rock ledges General Remove overhanging rock ledges 3 13 GEOTEXTILE General Material UV stabilised polymeric fabric formed from a plastic yarn composed of at least 85 by weight Identification and marking To AS 3705 NATSPEC 79 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork Preparation Trim the ground to a smooth surface free from cavities and projecting rocks Placing Lay the fabric flat but not stretched tight and secure it with anchor pins Overlap joints 300 mm minimum 3 14 PLACING FILL General Layers Place fill in near horizontal layers of uniform thickness deposited systematically across the fill area Extent Place and compact fill to the designated dimensions levels grades and cross sections so that the surface is always self draining Edges At junctions of fill and existing surfaces do not feather the edges Mix Place fill in a uniform mixture Previous fill Before placing subsequent fill layers ensure that previously accepted layers still conform to requirements including moisture content Protection Protect the works from damage due to c
236. er accelerator Do not use admixtures or combinations of admixtures without prior written approval NATSPEC 108 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement Dosage Vary the dosage of chemical admixture to account for air temperature and setting time in conformance with the manufacturer s recommendations Air entraining agent Adjust mix for workability allowing up to 5 air entrainment 2 7 CURING COMPOUNDS General Curing compounds To AS 3799 and AS 1160 Type 2 white pigmented or containing aluminium reflective pigments Covering with sheet materials To ASTM C171 white opaque or clear polyethylene film or white burlap polyethylene sheet or equivalent material 2 8 OTHER MATERIALS Tactile ground surface indicators Standard To AS 1428 4 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SUBGRADE Preparation Conformance Prepare subgrade in conformance with the Earthwork worksection Extent Prepare a uniform subgrade for the full pavement formation extending at least to the back of kerbs Reinstatement Ensure uniformity for backfilling of any utility trenches 3 2 SUBBASE Width Subbase width Extend the subbase at its full depth to at least the back of kerbs or other edge stops before their installation No integral kerbs Extend granular unbound subbase at least 300 mm beyond each side of the carriageway Unbound subbase materials and installation Conform to Pavement base and subbase worksec
237. er than 3 mm deviation of the surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction with no abrupt variations greater than 1 mm over 250 mm Moisture content General Do not commence installation of flooring unless Concrete substrate The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B and the values in clause 2 4 2 c have been obtained Plywood underlays or timber flooring products The moisture content has been tested to AS NZS 1080 1 and values obtained as follows Air conditioned buildings 8 to 10 Intermittently heated buildings 10 to 12 5 Unheated buildings 12 to 15 Conformance Confirm that the moisture content of the timber flooring products as delivered matches the moisture content of the subfloor as measured on site If not allow for acclimatisation Acclimatisation General Acclimatise the flooring by stacking it in the in service conditions for a minimum period of two weeks with air circulation to all surfaces after the following construction operations are complete Air conditioning operational Lighting operational Site drainage and stormwater works are complete Space fully enclosed and secure Wet work complete and dry vo barrier Lay 200 um high impact resistant polyethylene film Lap 300 mm seal the laps with pressure sensitive tape and return up the vertical surfaces and trim at the level of the flooring 3 2 LAYING Room environment General During fixi
238. er than profiled steel sheeting composite formwork submit certification by a professional engineer experienced in formwork design verifying conformance of the design Execution certification Submit certification by a professional engineer experienced in formwork design and construction verifying conformance of the completed formwork including the suitability of the formwork for the documented surface finish class Execution details Surface repair method If required submit details of the proposed method before commencing repairs 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS General Form linings facings and release agents Compatible with finishes applied to concrete NATSPEC 143 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0311b Concrete formwork Lost formwork Not to contain timber or chlorides and not to impair the structural performance of the concrete members Void formers Material capable of maintaining rigidity and shape until the concrete has set capable of withstanding construction loads and non collapsible on absorption of moisture Profiled steel sheeting composite formwork Material Hot dipped zinc coated sheet steel to AS 1397 Minimum steel grade G550 Corrosion protection Refer to structural engineer s specification Accessories Adopt material and corrosion protection to match the profiled steel sheeting Plywood formwork Material Plywood sheeting to AS 6669 Grade To meet the design dimensi
239. er to mechanical engineer s specification NATSPEC 362 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0802 Hyaraulic design and install 0802 HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND INSTALL 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to hydraulic engineer s specification NATSPEC 363 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0902 Electrical design and install 0902 ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to electrical engineer s specification NATSPEC 364 Tuesday 21 May 2013
240. eral Comply with the recommendations of those parts of AS 3958 1 which are referenced in this worksection Slip resistance Classification To AS NZS 4586 for the classifications noted in finishes schedule Slip resistance measurement of existing installations To AS NZS 4663 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Substrate immediately before tiling Trial set outs before execution 1 5 TOLERANCES Completed tiling Standard To AS 3958 1 clause 5 4 6 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Samples General Submit labelled samples of tiles including fittings accessories grout and sealants illustrating the range of variation in colour and finish Tests Type tests Submit results as follows Type test slip resistance of tiles to AS NZS 4586 Site tests Submit results as follows Site slip resistance test of completed surface to AS NZS 4663 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 MARKING Identification General Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer s original sealed containers legibly marked to show the following O NATSPEC 294 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling Manufacturer s identification Product brand name Product type Dimensions and quantity Product reference code and batch number Date of manufacture Material composition and characteristics such as volatility flash point light fastness col
241. eral Make butt joints true and flush For single layer construction provide 6 mm thick cover strip on the rear face of the joint For multi layer systems stagger the joints in the inner and outer layers at least 100 mm Access panels Sealing Seal joints to the manufacturer s or supplier s details 3 8 COMPLETION SUBMISSIONS Certification Compliance Submit a Certificate as evidence of compliance with BCA requirements for suitability of the completed fire protection system for the designated FRL NATSPEC 187 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0381 Structural timber 0381 STRUCTURAL TIMBER 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide structural timber that is integrated into the building construction Design Refer to structural engineer s drawings and specification 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Adhesives sealants and fasteners Termite management Timber products finishes and treatment 1 3 STANDARDS General Design To AS 1720 1 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 1720 1 apply 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Prefabricated items before priming or water repellent treatment Structural timberwork after erection but before being concealed
242. eral Make sure that the temperature of mixes substrates and reinforcement are at the time of application 2 5 C or lt 35 C Severe temperature If the ambient shade temperature is greater than 38 C do not mix topping 3 A CONTROL OF MOVEMENT General General Provide control joints to the Control joints schedule and as follows Location Over structural control joints To divide complex room plans into rectangles Around the perimeter of the floor At junctions between different substrates To divide large topping finished areas into bays At abutments with the building structural frame and over supporting walls or beams where flexing of the substrate is anticipated Control joints to divide topping into bays Provide joints using one of the following methods Formin situ using square edge steel forms and trowelling a 3 mm radius to edges NATSPEC 285 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0612b Cementitious toppings Form a groove extending at least one quarter the depth of the section either by using a grooving tool by sawing or by inserting a premoulded strip Install a control joint product Depth of joint Right through to the substrate Depth of elastomeric sealant One half the joint width or 6 mm whichever is the greater Topping joints Provide joints to divide toppings into bays as follows Formin situ using square edge steel forms and trowelling a 3 mm rad
243. eral Provide protection as follows Floors With used carpet taped at all joints Do not cover with sheet plastic Stair treads Full timber or plywood casing Spare flooring products General Supply an extra 5 of flooring products to be stored on site as spares NATSPEC 310 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring 0655 TIMBER FLOORING 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide timber flooring systems to subfloors as documented and as follows Appropriately secured Appropriately smooth and flat for the intended use Form the pattern as required Structurally adequate Suitable for the applied finish Atits equilibrium moisture content Selections As documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Acoustic underlay A resilient underlay providing acoustic isolation Equilibrium moisture content EMC For given conditions of humidity and temperature the moisture content which timber approaches at which it neither gains nor loses moisture while the conditions of its environment are maintained Feature Any natural variation or similar which affects timber appearance including gum resin veins borer marks checks and knots The grade will determi
244. eral Provide temporary protection for members until permanent covering is in place 3 2 FLOOR FRAMING Bearers and joists Levelling Level bearers and joists by checking or by packing for the full width of the member with dense corrosion resistant material which is secured in place Maximum thickness of packing 3 mm Spring Lay bearers and joists to allow for straightening under loading Joints Locate joints only over supports Minimum bearing of bearers 50 mm Minimum bearing of joists 30 mm Fixing Secure bearers and joists to supports to provide restraint against lateral movement Joist restraint Unseasoned timber If joist timber is unseasoned the span 2 3000 mm and there is no ceiling lining provide solid blocking between each joist in rows at 1800 mm centres Deep joists If the joist depth width ratio is 2 4 restrain joists at the ends of the joists over supports and at lt 1800 mm centres using either of following as appropriate Continuous trimming joists Solid blocking or herringbone strutting Trimmers or blocking dimensions Depth Joist depth less 25 mm Width 2 25 mm Herringbone strutting dimensions 2 38 x 38 mm Tolerance Floors 5 mm maximum deviation in 3 m measured under a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction 3 3 WALL FRAMING Additional support General Provide additional support in the form of noggings trimmers and studs for fixing lining claddin
245. eramic tiling Excessive projections are removed Voids and hollows 10 mm with abrupt edges are filled with a cement sand mix not stronger than the substrate or weaker than the bedding Depressions 10 mm are filled with a latex modified cementitious product with feathering eliminated by scabbling the edges Absorbent substrates If suction is excessive control it by dampening but avoid over wetting and do not apply mortar bedding to substrates showing surface moisture Dense concrete If not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key roughen by scabbling or the like to remove 3 mm of the surface and expose the aggregate then apply a bonding treatment Substrates with wet area membranes General Ensure substrates are as follows Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles Compatible with all components of the floor system 3 3 FIXING UNDERLAY Underlay fixed on joists Installation Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the supports Stagger the end joints and locate them centrally over joists If panels are not tongue and grooved provide noggings or trimmer joists to support the edges Fixing centres Maximum 300 mm on each support Fibre cement flooring Fix sheeting to the supports with adhesive and non corrosive countersunk screws Fill the screw holes with sealant before fixing After fixing stop the screw heads with the same sealant finished slightly bel
246. erproofing Roof terrace m 50 Waterproofing Amenities m 38 Fencing Type F 1 Lm 428 Fencing Type F 2 Lm 100 Fencing Type F 3 Lm 150 Fencing Type F 4 Lm 85 1 3 HYDRAULIC TRADE RATES General Information General All rates include all costs associated with the design supply installation testing commissioning materials workshop drawing alterations cartage freight tools plant scaffolding painting and defects liability associated with such works Please note E amp B z Excavation amp backfill Sewer Size Item Rate per metre 100 PVC U Sewer as specified 1m deep including E amp B 110 100 PVC U Sewer as specified 1 5m deep including E amp B 145 150 PVC U Sewer as specified 1m deep including E amp B 163 150 PVC U Sewer as specified 1 5m deep including E amp B 189 100 PVC U 45 bend 40 100 PVC U Sewer as specified Fixed from slab Structure 110 150 PVC U Sewer as specified Fixed from slab Structure 135 100 PVC U 90 bend 40 100 PVC U 45 Y junction 40 150 PVC U 45 bend 50 150 PVC U 90 bend 50 150 PVC U 45 Y junction 50 100 Clearout Brass 70 100 Tenancy Drainage Turn up 400 NATSPEC 5 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES Stormwa
247. es Temperature Do not install seamless flooring when the temperature in the laying area is outside the range recommended by the floor system supplier 3 4 JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES Junctions General Finish junctions flush with adjoining surfaces Where changes of floor finish occur at doorways locate the joint on the centreline of the closed door leaf Control joints Location Provide control joints in resin based seamless flooring as follows Over structural control joints At junctions between different substrates Flooring Where possible carry the seamless finish material over the edges of the control joint in the substrate Provide a sealant joint as follows Sealant width 6 25 mm Sealant depth One half the joint width or 6 mm whichever is the greater Sealant Two pack self levelling non hardening mould resistant polyurethane sealant applied over a backing rod Finish flush with the tile surface Trafficable floors Shore hardness 35 Backing rod Compressible closed cell polyethylene foam with a bond breaking surface 3 5 COMPLETION Protection General Keep traffic off finished work for 60 hours or as indicated by the applicator whichever is the greater Reinstatement Extent Repair or replace faulty or damaged work If the work cannot be repaired satisfactorily replace the whole area affected Warranty Warranty Cover materials and workmanship in the terms of the warranty in the form of in
248. es e g FRP UPVC low VOC system Water based Stain Blocker B17a Semi Gloss Acrylic B8b Semi Gloss Acrylic B8b Semi gloss solven t borne Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber and primed Dulux 1 Step Oil Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 0041 hardboard veneers Based Primer Enamel Semi Gloss Enamel Semi Gloss Sealer Undercoat B3 B3 solvent based B17 MDF Dulux 1 Step Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 1169 Acrylic Based Enamel Semi Gloss Enamel Semi Gloss Primer Sealer B3 B3 Undercoat B17a Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 1764 incl HD Metal Primer water Enamel Semi Gloss Enamel Semi Gloss galvanized steel based B12a B3 B3 zincalume Apply 2 coats Galvabond zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel Shop primed or red Spot Prime with Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 2171 oxide primed Dulux Quit Rust All Enamel Semi Gloss Enamel Semi Gloss ROZP ferrous Metal Primer B11 B3 B3 metal Non ferrous metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 3337 incl aluminium Metal Etch Primer Enamel Semi Gloss Enamel Semi Gloss brass copper tin B13 B3 B3 plate Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Super Dulux Super SD 3340 resistant types e g Water based Stain Enamel Semi Gloss Enamel Semi Gloss FRP UPVC Blocker B17a B3 B3 Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLo
249. ex Undercoat B10a Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic B7a B7a Weatherboard Dulux Dulux Dulux SD 2539 fibre cement board Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Weathershield Low cladding Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic Hardiboard B7a B7a B7a Fibre cement Dulux Dulux Dulux SD 1333 products Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic B7a B7a B7a Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Dulux SD 5033 veneers Acrylic Primer Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Undercoat B10a Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic B7a B7a Concrete OFC tilt Dulux Dulux Optional Dulux SD 0994 slab or pre cast Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic B7a B7a B7a Concrete OFC tilt Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 0770 slab or pre cast 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 High build Primer B15 Low Gloss Low Gloss performance RollerRoller Finish RollerRoller Finish coating system B38a B38a Cement render Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 4029 High build 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 performance Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller coating system Finish B38a Finish B38a Clay brick and Dulux Dulux Dulux SD 0312 masonry Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Weathershield Low Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic Sheen Acrylic B7a B7a B7a Concrete blockwork Berger
250. f less 15 mm cover from each exposed surface of the mortar joint 3 11 REINFORCED AND GROUTED BLOCKWORK Cleaning core holes General Provide purpose made cleanout blocks or machine cut a cleaning hole at the base of each grouted core Location Locate on the side of the wall which is to be rendered or otherwise concealed Cleaning Rod cores to dislodge mortar fins protruding from the blocks and mortar droppings from reinforcement Remove through the clean out blocks Grouting Commencement Do not commence until grout spaces have been cleaned out and the mortar joints have attained sufficient strength to resist blow outs Height of lift Limit the height of individual lifts in any pour to make sure that the grout can be thoroughly compacted to fill all voids Compaction Compact by vibration or by rodding Topping up On the completion of the last lift top up the grout after 10 min to 30 min and vibrate or rod to mix with the previous pour 3 12 LINTELS Location General Provide 1 lintel to each wall leaf in conformance with the Lintel schedule NATSPEC 165 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0331b Brick and block construction Installation General Do not cut on site Keep lintels 10 mm clear of heads of frames Steel lintels Pack mortar between any vertical component and supported masonry units For angles install the long leg vertical Minimum bearing each end Span lt 1000
251. f and preparation for site welds Temporary works such as lifting lugs support points temporary cleats and bracing which are required for transport and erection of the structural steelwork and the procedure for final removal Required fixings for adjoining building elements Materials and components Concrete or masonry anchors If masonry anchors other than as shown on the drawings are required or proposed for the support or fixing of structural steel submit evidence of the anchor capacity to carry the load Execution Splicing If splicing of structural members is intended submit proposals Distortions Submit proposals for preventing or minimising distortion or galvanized components welded components or welded and galvanized components and proposals for restoration to design shape 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 STEEL TYPE AND GRADE Material Steel members and sections Conform to the Steel grade minimum table and or the Steel grade schedule Steel grade minimum table Type of steel Grade Universal beams and columns parallel flange 300 channels large angles to AS NZS 3679 1 Flat small angles taper flange beams and 250 columns to AS NZS 3679 1 Welded sections to AS NZS 3679 2 300 Hot rolled plates floor plates and slabs to 250 AS NZS 3678 Hollow sections to AS NZS 1163 C250 C350 Circular sections less than 165 mm nominal C350 C450 outside diameter Sections other than the above Cold f
252. face formwork while the concrete is green Dampen the surface and spread a slurry using hessian pads or sponge rubber floats Remove surplus slurry and work until a uniform colour and texture are produced Smooth rubbed finish Remove the vertical face formwork while the concrete is green Wet the surface and rub using a carborundum or similar abrasive brick until a uniform colour and texture are produced 3 8 UNFORMED SURFACES General Finished levels Strike off screed and level slab surfaces to finished levels and the flatness tolerance class documented Surface repairs Method If surface repairs are required submit proposals Finishing methods primary finish Machine float finish After levelling consolidate the surface using a machine float Cutand fill and refloat immediately to a uniform smooth granular texture Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float NATSPEC 156 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0315b Concrete finishes Steel trowel finish After machine floating finish as follows Use power or hand steel trowels to produce a smooth surface relatively free from defects When the surface has hardened sufficiently re trowel to produce the final consolidated finish free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance Burnished finish Continue steel trowelling until the concrete surface attains a polished or glossy finish uniform in texture a
253. facings Slip formwork Provision for inspection Provide access below the moving formwork for surface treatment and inspection NATSPEC 136 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Profiled steel sheeting composite formwork Fixing If sheeting cannot be fixed to structural steel supports with puddle welds or with welded shear studs in composite construction provide details Steel linings Rust Clean off any rust and apply rust inhibiting agent prior to re use Visually important surfaces General For concrete of surface finish classes 1 2 or 3 set out the formwork to give a regular arrangement of panels joints bolt holes and similar visible elements in the formed surface Void formers Protection Keep void formers dry until use place them on a firm level surface and place reinforcement and concrete with minimum delay 3 8 REINFORCEMENT Dowels Fixing If a dowel has an unpainted half embed in the concrete placed first Tolerances Alignment 2 mm in 300 mm Location half the diameter of the dowel Grade 250 N Supports General Provide proprietary concrete metal or plastic supports to reinforcement in the form of chairs spacers stools hangers and ties as follows Adequate to withstand construction and traffic loads With a protective coating if they are ferrous metal located within the concrete cover zone or are used with galvanized or zin
254. fessional engineer for compliance with AS 1720 1 and the project performance criteria Materials Identification Certification Submit a supplier s certificate which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket verifying that the timber complies with the specification including moisture content Inspection Submit the inspection authority s certificate verifying that the timber complies with the specification Moisture content Submit records of moisture content Preservative treatment Confirmation of preservative retention Submit a test certificate from an independent testing authority confirming that the required retention has been achieved for every member Treatment record Submit a certified copy of the charge sheet CCA treated timber If proposed provide details of treatment 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TIMBER Structural timber Timber grading methods Hardwood To AS 1720 1 Table H2 3 strength group classification Softwood To AS 1720 1 Table H2 4 strength group classification F grades To AS 1720 1 Table H2 1 MGP grade To AS 1720 1 Table H3 1 Visually graded F grade To AS 2082 or AS 2858 Preservative treatment To the Timber products finishes and treatment worksection Termite treatment To the Termite management worksection Recycled timber Grit blasted or re machined Remove all nails and screws Identification Method Identify timber using branding certification or both Branding Brand struc
255. fficacy and status NATSPEC 47 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0185 Timber products finishes and treatment 0185 TIMBER PRODUCTS FINISHES AND TREATMENT 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide timber products with finishes and treatments including for durability and fire rating and carrying appropriate certification for the finishing applications Selections As documented 1 2 PRECEDENCE General Worksections and referenced documents The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this worksection The requirements of this worksection overrides conflicting requirements of its referenced documents The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements 1 3 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Termite management Painting 1 4 STANDARDS General Preservative treatment To the AS 1604 series 1 5 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS NZS 4491 and the following apply Designated bushfire prone area BCA definition Land which has been designated under power of legislation being subject or likely to be subject to bushfires Dry processed fibreboard MDF A panel material with a nominal thickness of 1 5 mm or greater manufactured from lignocellulos
256. finishing Concrete finishes Conform to Concrete finishes worksection Surface repairs Surface repair method If surface repairs are required submit proposals 3 10 COMPLETION Protection General Keep traffic including construction plant off the pavement entirely during curing and thereafter permit access only to necessary construction plant vehicles that conform to the predetermined load limits appropriate to the use of the concrete Reinstating adjacent surfaces General Reinstate surfaces next to new pavements and associated elements Where an existing flexible road pavement has been disturbed trim it back to a straight and undisturbed edge 250 300 mm from and parallel to the new concrete for the full depth of the slab Backfill with asphalt rammed solid using suitable rammers Traffic on pavement General Give notice before opening the pavement to traffic before the work is completed Provide protection NATSPEC 113 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0275b Segmental pavers mortar bed 0275B SEGMENTAL PAVERS MORTAR BED 1 GENERAL 1 34 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide external paving Consistent in colour and finish Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the installation Resistant to expected impacts in use Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions To direct all water flowing from supply points to drainage outlets
257. for cut to size and processed glass To AS NZS 4667 1 4 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply BMS Building Management Systems PVC Polyvinylchloride Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Screen Includes sunscreens trafficable sunscreens external louvres and blinds shutters awnings and pergolas fixed to building facades or openings to control sunlight and or provide privacy to screen plant and equipment or to provide an architectural feature It applies to fixed adjustable operable and automatically controlled types Louvres Horizontal Louvres that span between frames stiles mullions or vertical supports Vertical Louvres that span between frame heads and sills or horizontal supports Continuous Louvres that run continuously past and are supported by concealed framing or brackets Membrane A thin and flexible sheet of fabric material NATSPEC 236 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0457 External screens Shade cloth A knitted or woven fabric designed for external use with a weave designed to provide a specified amount of shade Tensioned membrane A thin cloth or sheet that is held in a predetermined 2 or 3 dimensional shape under permanent tension The shape and the tension are interrelated and designed to safely carry the permanent a
258. forcement shown on the drawings proposed details Damaged galvanizing If repair is required proposals to AS NZS 4680 Section 8 Mechanical splices If mechanical bar splices are proposed or required details and test certificates for each size and type of bar to be spliced Provision for concrete placement If spacing or cover of reinforcement does not conform to AS 3600 give notice Splicing If undocumented splicing is proposed proposed details Welding Give notice before welding reinforcement Pre mixed supply delivery dockets For each batch submit a docket listing the information required by AS 1379 and the following information For special class performance concrete Specified performance and type of cement binder For special class prescription concrete Details of mix additives and type of cement binder Method of placement and climate conditions during pour Name of concrete delivery supervisor Project assessment carried out each day The concrete element or part of the works for which the concrete was ordered and where it was placed The total amount of water added at the plant and the maximum amount permitted to be added at the site Materials Product conformity Submit current assessments of conformity as appropriate as follows Certificate of conformity by a JAS ANZ accredited third party Mark of conformity of a JAS ANZ accredited third party applied to the product Report
259. from more than one pack to distribute the colour range and grade features throughout the floor Installation Lay in straight and parallel lines with each board firmly butted to the next and firmly in contact with the subfloor Cramp sufficient only to bring the boards together and no more than 800 mm of flooring at any one time Fixing to softwood joists battens or underlay Apply adhesive in addition to nailing Strip flooring on sheet underlay On joists or battens Nail through underlay to joists or battens Direct fix to concrete slab Secrete nail only Set out Locate joints in boards so that they are evenly and symmetrically distributed and as follows General Staggered and at least 450 mm apart Butt joints Centrally on supports End matched joints Not in adjacent boards Minimum number of spans across supports 2 Sirip flooring fixed by direct adhesion Vapour barrier A liquid applied membrane compatible with the adhesive system Installation Lay in straight and parallel lines with each board firmly butted to the next and firmly bedded on the adhesive on the subfloor Temporarily or permanently hold floor boards in position with pins or nails Hold down in contact with the adhesive over night to achieve a complete cure If pins or nails are used to permanently position floor boards punch below the surface without bruising Fill holes to match the floor boards Parquet Vapour barrier under ad
260. g Trial set out Before execution Completed installation before the application of coated finishes 1 5 TOLERANCES Tolerances Maximum deviation of the finished floor surface 3 mm under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Product samples General Submit samples of each timber flooring type illustrating the range of variation in colour and figure in conformance with the Samples table Samples table Item Sample size Number Timber flooring 600x600 1 Verification Certificate Submit a supplier s certificate which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket verifying conformance to grading species and board size and noting moisture content Inspection If neither branding nor certification is adopted submit a report by an independent inspecting authority verifying conformance Tests Site tests Submit results of the Moisture content alignment of flooring and subfloor Fire hazard properties Submit evidence of conformance to PRODUCTS GENERAL Critical radiant flux and Smoke development rate 2 PRODUCTS 2 44 GENERAL Adhesive General Provide adhesives as documented and as follows Compatible with the subfloor and flooring to be adhered Alkali resisting Solvent and water content lt 40 Shear strength when cured average 2 1 47 MPa Elasticity Sufficient to withstand continuous expansion and contraction of boards Ventilation Provide adequate v
261. g To Section 5 New timber decking Standard Treated softwood to AS 4785 1 Section 4 Hardwood to AS 2796 1 Section 4 Grade to AS 2796 2 Select Durability Natural durability classification to AS 5604 Class 2 minimum Preservative treatment to AS 1604 1 Table D1 H3 minimum Identification Brand preservative treated decking timber to AS 1604 1 Arrises Chamfered or round ModWood Composite decking Standard In conformance with manufacturer s recommendations Compressed fibre cement Standard To AS NZS 2908 2 Category 5 Type A 2 3 SHEET FLOORING Plywood Standard To AS NZS 2269 0 Plywood formaldehyde emission class to AS NZS 2269 0 Class E4 Grading Surface grade CD Bond Type A to AS NZS 2754 1 Int Particleboard Particleboard To AS NZS 1860 1 Class 1 NATSPEC 199 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0383 Sheet flooring and decking Particleboard formaldehyde emission Class to AS NZS 1860 1 Class E4 Identification General Identify timber using branding or certification Branding Brand plywood and particleboard under the authority of a recognised product certification or accreditation program applicable to the product Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be concealed Provide certification from the recognised product certification or accreditation programs as appropriate Plywood and particleboard Engineered Wood Produ
262. g hardware accessories fixtures and fittings as required Maximum spacing of noggings 1350 mm centres Vermin barriers General Provide vermin barriers as follows Brick veneer barrier Close nail 10 mm galvanized steel wire mesh to the underside of the bottom plate of external stud walls extending across the cavity for building into brickwork Damp proof course General Provide damp proof courses under the bottom plate of stud walls built off slabs or masonry dwarf walls as follows to AS NZS 4200 1 External walls not masonry veneer Turn up at least 75 mm on the inside and tack Project 10 mm beyond the external slab edge or dwarf wall and turn down at 45 Walls of bathrooms shower rooms and laundries Turn up at least 150 mm on the wet side and tack to studs Installation Lay in long lengths Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at joints NATSPEC 196 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0382 Light timber framing Junctions Preserve continuity of damp proofing at junctions of damp proof courses sarkings and waterproof membranes Flashings Location Provide flashings to external openings to prevent the entry of moisture Form trays at the ends of sill flashings Masonry veneer construction Extend across cavities and build into brickwork 3 4 ROOF AND CEILING FRAMING Wall plates Fixing Fix timber wall plates to masonry with straps bolts or both
263. g and compaction of the plastic concrete start finishing operations to achieve the documented finish Finish Refer to finishes schedule Unformed surfaces General Strike off screed and level slab surfaces to finished levels to the tolerance class and finish noted in the Unformed surface finishes schedule Formed surfaces Damage Do not damage concrete works through premature removal of formwork Curing If forms are stripped when concrete is at an age less than the minimum curing period commence curing exposed faces as soon as the stripping is completed 3 7 CONCRETE CURING General Curing Commence curing as soon as possible after finishing and extend for a minimum period of 3 days End of curing period Prevent rapid drying out at the end of the curing period Protection Maintain at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss during the curing period Curing methods Covering sheet method Immediately after finishing operations cover concrete using damp hessian or cotton mats overlapped at least 150 mm and anchored against displacement by wind or other interference Keep the mats continuously damp until covered by the covering sheet material Repair tears immediately Moist curing method Immediately after finishing operations and once concrete has set sufficiently to be not damaged by the curing process keep the concrete surface continuously damp by ponding or spraying constantly with water fog or mist usi
264. g underground services Recovered items General Recover all components associated with the listed items that are essential for their re use Minimise damage during removal NATSPEC 64 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0201b Demolition 3 3 DEMOLITION BUILDING WORKS Dilapidation record Purpose Use the dilapidation record to assess the damage and making good arising out of demolition work Availability Keep the records of the investigations on site and available for inspection until the date of practical completion of the contract Encroachment General If encroachments from adjacent structures are encountered and are not documented give notice and obtain instructions Concrete slabs General Using a diamond saw neatly cut back or trim to new alignment with a clean true face existing concrete slabs to be partially demolished or penetrated Recycling If concrete crushing is proposed on site submit details of plant and environmental controls Explosives General Do not use explosives 3 4 DEMOLITION BUILDING SERVICES General General Decommission isolate demolish and remove from the site all existing redundant equipment including associated components that become redundant as a result of the demolition Breaking down Disassemble or cut up equipment where necessary to allow removal Recovered materials Recover all components associated with the listed items Minimise damage
265. ggings as follows Atleast 150 mm from the horizontal joint Ensure that noggings do not protrude beyond the face of studs NATSPEC 255 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0511b Lining Installation Gypsum plasterboard and fibre reinforced gypsum lining To AS NZS 2589 Multiple sheet layers Application Fire rated and acoustic rated walls Joints Fill and flush up all joints and fixings in each layer and caulk up perimeters and penetrations before commencing succeeding layers Stagger all sheet joints by minimum 200 mm Joints Flush joints Provide recessed edge sheets and finish flush using perforated paper reinforcing tape Butt joints Make joints over framing members or otherwise provide back blocking External corner joints Make joints over metallic coated steel corner beads Dry joints Provide square edged sheet and finish with a UPVC joining section Control joints Provide purpose made metallic coated control joint beads at not more than 12 m centres in walls and ceilings and to coincide with structural control joints Wet areas Install additional supports flashings trim and sealants as required Joints in tiled areas Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper tape in bedding compound 3 8 FIBRE CEMENT LINING Supports General Install timber battens or proprietary cold formed galvanized steel furring channels as follows Where framing member spacing exceed
266. gh to AS 4970 Appendix C Protection measures program Before commencement of earthworks Trees to be retained Extent All trees NOT marked for removal Tree protection Tree protection zone To AS 4970 Section 3 Tree protective measures To AS 4970 Section 4 Monitoring and certification To AS 4970 Section 5 Work near trees Harmful materials Keep the area within the dripline free of sheds and paths construction material and debris Do not place bulk materials and harmful materials under or near trees Do not place spoil from excavations against tree trunks Prevent wind blown materials such as cement from harming trees and plants Damage Prevent damage to tree bark Do not attach stays guys and the like to trees Work under trees Do not remove topsoil from or add topsoil to the area within the dripline of the trees Excavation If excavation is required near trees to be retained give notice and obtain instructions Open up excavations under tree canopies for as short a period as possible Hand methods Use hand methods to locate expose and cleanly remove the roots on the line of excavation If it is necessary to excavate within the drip line use hand methods such that root systems are preserved intact and undamaged Roots Do not cut tree roots exceeding 50 mm diameter Where it is necessary to cut tree roots use means such that the cutting does not unduly disturb the remaining root system Immediately after cutting water t
267. gs on slabs A further 21 days 3 2 PREPARATION Trial set out General Prepare a trial paving set out to each area as follows to Maximise the size of equal margins of cut pavers Locate control joints Note minor variations in joint widths to eliminate cut tiles at margins Ambient temperature General It the ambient temperature is lt 5 or gt 35 C do not lay pavers Substrates General Ensure substrates are as follows Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of pavers Excessive projections are hacked off and voids and hollows are filled with a cement sand mix not stronger than the substrate nor weaker than the bedding Absorbent substrates If suction is excessive control it by dampening but avoid over wetting and do not apply mortar bedding to substrates showing surface moisture Concrete If not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key roughen by scabbling or the like to remove 3 mm of the surface and expose the aggregate then apply a bonding treatment If there are particular requirements for substrate preparation specify them here or schedule them later Consider providing a positive fall in the substrate to alleviate efflorescence Fixtures General Before paving ensure that fixtures interrupting the surface are accurately positioned in their designed or optimum locations relative to the paving layout 3 3 PAVING GENERALLY Variations General If necessary
268. h epoxy conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 125 um Epoxy MIO conforming to AS NZS 3750 14 125 um Epoxy MIO conforming to AS NZS 3750 14 Epoxy Acrylic AS NZS 2312 Category A and B table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 75 um Epoxy zinc Nil Nil phosphate conforming to AS NZS 3750 13 Internal decorative 75 um Epoxy zinc 50 um Epoxy Acrylic Nil phosphate conforming to conforming to AS NZS 3750 13 AS NZS 3750 5 External non decorative 75 um Epoxy zinc 50 um Epoxy Acrylic Nil conforming to phosphate conforming to conforming to AS NZS 2312 ACC2 AS NZS 3750 13 AS NZS 3750 5 External decorative 75 um Epoxy zinc 50 um Epoxy Acrylic Nil conforming to phosphate conforming to conforming to AS NZS 2312 ACC2 AS NZS 3750 13 AS NZS 3750 5 Epoxy Acrylic AS NZS 2312 Category C D and E table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy Nil Nil conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 NATSPEC 182 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Internal decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy 50 um Epoxy Acrylic Nil conforming to conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 AS NZS 3750 5 External non decorative 75 um Zinc rich epoxy 200 um High Build Nil conforming to AS NZS 2312 EHB4 conforming
269. h other materials or plaster systems Joints in beads Provide dowels to maintain alignment Mechanical fixing to substrate 300 mm centres Bonding treatment General If bonding treatment is required throw a wet mix onto the substrate as follows Cement plaster 1 part cement to 2 parts sand Gypsum plaster 1 part gypsum to 2 parts sand Curing Keep continuously moist for 5 days or more and allow to dry before applying plaster coats Thickness From 2 3 6 mm NATSPEC 278 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0611 Rendering and plastering Lath Location Provide lath as follows Chases If chases or recesses are 50 mm wide or greater fix metal lath extending 75 mm or more beyond each side of the chase or recess Metal and other non porous substrates Fix metal lath to provide a key Installation Fix lath as follows General Run the long way of the mesh across supports with strands sloping downwards and inwards from the intended face of the plaster Fixing Mechanically fix at centres of 150 mm or less Laps Tie with 1 25 mm galvanized wire at centres of 150 mm or less Do not stop edges of sheets at corners but bend around On solid substrates Space the lath 5 mm or more clear of the substrate Support spacing lt 400 mm 3 2 APPLICATION Plastering Base coats Scratch comb each base coat in two directions when it has stiffened Metal lath Press th
270. hardwood or chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel by either of the following methods Applying an anti corrosion low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces Inserting a separation layer Tolerances Requirement Conform to the Tolerances table Tolerances table Property Tolerance criteria Permitted deviation mm Spacing of supporting members 5 mm on the nominated support member spacing Vertical or horizontal misalignment at the abutting ends of sheets lt 2mm Tops of supporting members in a plane parallel to the nominated roof slope lt 7mm smooth deviation per metre length of supporting member 3 2 SHEET METAL ROOFING Roof sheet installation Laying start location Centre of cranked ridge line where appropriate Eaves Treat ends of sheets as follows Generally Close off ribs at tops and bottoms of sheets by mechanical means or with purpose made fillers or end caps At gutters Project sheets 50 mm into gutters Swarf Remove swarf and other debris as soon as it is deposited Accessories Provide material with the same finish as roofing sheets NATSPEC 209 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0421 Roofing combined 3 3 BUILDING ELEMENTS Ridges and eaves Treat ends of sheets as follows Project sheets 50 mm into gutters Close off ribs at bottom of sheets using mechanical means or with pur
271. hat face should a compromise be unavoidable Perpends General If other than vertically aligned perpends in alternate courses are proposed provide details Sills and thresholds General Solidly bed sills and thresholds and lay them with the top surfaces draining away from the building Minimum size of cut unit Three quarters full width 3 3 SUBFLOOR WORK Access openings General In internal walls leave door width openings beneath doorways to give access to underfloor areas Air vent locations General Provide air vents to give adequate cross ventilation to the space under suspended ground floors Cavity walls Provide matching vents in the internal leaves located as near as practicable to the vents in the external leaves Location Below damp proof course to internal and external walls Air vent types Blockwork Select from the following Concrete framed Bronze wire mesh in concrete frame 390 x 190 mm Vent blocks Purpose made vent blocks Brickwork Select from the following Concrete framed Bronze wire mesh in concrete frames 470 x 160 mm Cut brick 2 cut bricks laid vertically and evenly spaced in a 230 mm wide x 2 course high opening backed with bronze wire mesh built in NATSPEC 162 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0331b Brick and block construction Terra cotta Perforated 230 x 160 mm Underpinning Requirement Install underpinning while maintaining th
272. he tree and apply a liquid rooting hormone to stimulate the growth of new roots Backfilling Backfill to excavations around tree roots with a mixture consisting of three parts by volume of topsoil and one part of well rotted compost with a neutral pH value free from weed growth and harmful materials Place the backfill layers each of 300 mm maximum depth compacted to a dry density similar to that of the original or surrounding soil Do not backfill around tree trunks to a height greater than 200 mm above the original ground surface Immediately after backfilling thoroughly water the root zone surrounding the tree Compacted ground Do not compact the ground or use skid steel vehicles under the tree dripline If compaction occurs give notice and obtain instructions Compaction protection Protect areas adjacent the tree dripline Submit proposals for an elevated platform to suit the proposed earthworks machinery Watering Water trees as necessary including where roots are exposed at ambient temperature 95 C Mulching Spread 100 mm thick organic mulch to the whole of the area covered by the drip line of all protected trees 2 7 EXISTING SERVICES Location Requirement Before commencing earthworks locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the earthworks operations including clearing excavating and trenching Utility services Contact DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG to identify location of underground utilit
273. hed article such as lumps blisters gritty areas uncoated spots acids and black spots dross and flux Silicon killed steels Dull grey is acceptable Friction type bolted connections Treat coated contact surfaces to achieve the required design slip factor without removing excessive coating thickness Contact surface preparation To GAA After fabrication hot dip galvanizing Chapter 4 Slip factor test To AS 4100 Appendix J Surplus zinc on fastener threads Remove Coating repair Rejection If uncoated surfaces or areas damaged by handling at the galvanizing plant exceed the limits specified for repair in AS NZS 4680 clause 8 reject the galvanizing Extent and methods To AS NZS 4680 clause 8 Preparation for paint finishes Coarse preparation Remove spikes and ensure edges are free from lumps and runs Light sweep blasting before painting Required Maximum zinc removal 10 um Abrasive grade range 150 180 um Abrasive type clean ilmenite or garnet Blasting angle to surface 45 maximum Blast pressure maximum 275 kPa Distance of nozzle from surface range 350 400 mm Nozzle type 10 13 mm minimum diameter venturi type 2 2 SITE WORK Site welding Grinding of edges Permitted Weld areas Reinstate coating to AS NZS 4680 clause 8 Site coating reinstatement Rejection If any item has damaged areas exceeding the limits specified for repair in AS NZS 4680 clause 8 1 reject
274. hed between plates with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying Set flush with the finished surface Proprietary slide plate divider strip An arrangement of interlocking metal plates grouted into pockets formed in the concrete joint edges Sealant One part self levelling non hardening mould resistant silicone or polyurethane sealant applied over a backing rod Finish flush with the finished surface Floors Trafficable shore hardness gt 35 Backing rod Compressible closed cell polyethylene foam with a bond breaking surface 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SUBSTRATES Drying and shrinkage General Before tiling allow at least the following times to elapse for initial drying out and shrinkage for these substrates Concrete slabs 42 days Concrete blockwork 28 days Toppings on slabs and rendering on brick or blockwork A further 21 days Rendering on swimming pool shell A further 28 days minimum 3 2 PREPARATION Standard Preparation To AS 3958 1 Section 4 Ambient temperature General If the ambient temperature is lt 5 or gt 35 C do not lay tiles Substrates without wet area membranes General Ensure substrates are as follows Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles If framed or discontinuous support members are in full lengths without splicing If solid or continuous NATSPEC 296 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b C
275. hen amp Bathroom Semi Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Semi Gloss B8b Gloss B8b Semi gloss water based enamel Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Plasterboard Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2591 Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic eco choice B16 B8b B8b Plasterboard MR Dulux Professional Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 4672 grade EnvirO2 Water Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Based Sealer B8b B8b Binder B15b Fibrous set plaster Dulux Sealer Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 3428 Binder solvent Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic based B15 B8b B8b Fibre cement Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SW 5020 products Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic eco choice B16 B8b B8b Timber and Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2295 veneers Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic low VOC system eco choice B17a B8b B8b Concrete Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5021 Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic eco choice B17a B8b B8b Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5022 Acrylic Primer Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic Sealer Undercoat B8b B8b B17a MDF Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2294 low VOC sy
276. hesive fixed flooring A liquid applied membrane compatible with the adhesive system Trial set out Prepare a trial block parquet or mosaic panel set out to each area to Maximise the size of equal margins of cut parquet tiles or panels Locate control joints Laying method To the manufacturer s flooring installation guide Performance Spread adhesive and lay boards to achieve the following Contact between block or panel and adhesive 75 Verify by lifting and examining 1 panel in 20 Clamp starting and finishing rows to prevent sideways movement Avoid clusters of end joints Make sure adhesive does not bleed through at joints Remove excess adhesive progressively before initial cure Hold down in contact with the adhesive over night to achieve a complete cure Minimise trimming of parquet blocks Avoid colour blocks If block parquet is fixed directly to strip flooring lay at 45 to joints between strip flooring If pins or nails are used as well as adhesive for block parquet punch below the surface without bruising Fill holes to match the blocks NATSPEC 317 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring 3 0 COMPLETION Protection General Provide protection as follows Floors With hardboard taped at all butt joints Do not cover with sheet plastic Stair treads Full timber or plywood casing Spare flooring products General Supply an e
277. hich will be concealed in the works Provide certification from the recognised product certification or accreditation programs as appropriate Flooring The Australia Timber Flooring Association s ATFA Accredited Timber Flooring Manufacturers Program Hardwoods Australian Timber Industry Certification Quality Scheme Milled radiata pine products Plantation Timber Certification Plywood and particleboard Engineered Wood Products Association of Australia Quality Control and Product Certification Scheme Sawn radiata pine boards Plantation Timber Certification 3 EXECUTION 3 4 PREPARATION Storage General Deliver timber flooring to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its moisture content is not adversely affected Do not store on the substrate until the moisture content of the substrate is suitable for the installation of the floor Do not store in areas of wet plaster Subfloor General Make sure subfloors are as follows Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location and functioning of control joints If solid or continuous remove excessive projections and fill voids and hollows with a levelling compound compatible with the flooring including any adhesive NATSPEC 313 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring Flatness Not greater than 3 mm deviation of the surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction
278. hichever is the greater Foamed materials in compressible fillers and backing rods Closed cell or impregnated types which do not absorb water Bond breaking Provide backing rods and other back up materials for sealants which do not adhere to the sealant NATSPEC 242 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0461b Glazing 2 4 GLASS IDENTIFICATION Safety glazing materials Identification Identify each piece or panel to AS 1288 Noise reducing glazed assemblies Identification Label each panel with a legible non permanent mark self destroying when removed stating and certifying the Ry rating and identifying the testing authority Remove when directed 3 EXECUTION 3 4 GLASS PROCESSING General Processing Perform required processes on glass including cutting obscuring silvering and bending Form necessary holes including for fixings equipment access openings and speaking holes Process exposed glass edges to a finish not inferior to ground arrised 3 2 INSTALLATION Glazing General Install the glass so that Each piece is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials Building movements are not transferred to the glass External glazing is watertight and airtight Temporary marking Use a method which does not harm the glass Remove m
279. hods such that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pressure indentations are visible on exposed faces Where heads of fasteners are unavoidably visible finish them to match the adjacent finished surface Protection Corrosion protection Provide protection against corrosion which may be caused in metals by products or processes normally employed on a building site or by normal atmospheric or other ambient conditions and by products including rainwater potable and non potable water airborne salt and airborne pollution Durability Provide materials resistant to exposure to weather and UV radiation so that their colour surface finish flexibility and water resistance are maintained Temporary measures Do not use adhesive tape film or paper or applied coatings liable to bond to the substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather as temporary measures to protect screen components during the course of the works If temporary measures are used remove all traces particularly from contact mating surfaces before joining up Operation Requirement Provide moving parts which operate freely and smoothly without vibration rattling binding or sticking and at correct tensions or operating forces Lubricate if appropriate 3 2 WELDING General Quality Provide finished welds descaled and free of surface and internal cracks slag inclusion and porosity Provide continuous welding unless permanently concealed Restrictions Do not weld as fo
280. hstand construction and traffic loads and maintain the concrete cover as documented With a protective coating if they are ferrous metal extending to the surface of the concrete or are used with galvanized or zinc coated reinforcement Minimum spacing Bars lt 60 diameters Fabric s 800 mm Supports over membranes Prevent damage to waterproofing membranes or vapour barriers If appropriate place a metal or plastic plate under each support Projecting reinforcement If starter or other bars project beyond reinforcement mats or cages through formwork or from cast concrete provide a plastic protective cap to each bar until it is incorporated into subsequent work Tying Secure the reinforcement against displacement by tying at intersections with either wire ties or clips Bend the ends of wire ties away from nearby faces of forms so that the ties do not project into the concrete cover Mats For bar reinforcement in the form of a mat secure each bar at alternate intersections Cores fixings and embedded items Position Fix cores and embedded items to prevent movement during concrete placing In locating cores fixings and embedded items reposition but do not cut reinforcement and maintain cover to reinforcement Isolation Isolate embedded items so that water cannot track to concrete providing minimum cover to reinforcement 3 5 CONCRETE PLACING AND COMPACTION Concrete placing General Place concrete uniformly
281. ial type size and colour as the existing Landscaped areas In topsoil areas Complete the backfilling with topsoil for at least the top 100 mm Lawn Re lay stockpiled turf If existing turf is no longer viable re sow the lawn over the trench and other disturbed areas Planted areas Overfill to allow for settlement NATSPEC 86 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0224b Stormwater site 0224B STORMWATER SITE 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to hydraulic engineering specification NATSPEC 87 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0241 Landscape walling and edging 0241 LANDSCAPE WALLING AND EDGING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide walling and edging as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so inspection may be made of the following Setting out before commencement of construction Geotextiles and subsurface drainage in place before backfilling 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TIMBER Hazard class General As defined in AS 1604 1 Hardwood General To AS 2796 1 Section 2 For structural purposes To AS 2082 Durability class To AS 1720 2 Softwood General To AS 4785 1 Section 2 Seasoned cypress pine To AS 1810 Section 2 For structural purposes To A
282. ibers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0184 Termite management Brickwork Description Bedding mortar incorporating a termiticide Application Brick bed and perpends as follows Cavity walls built off a concrete slab on ground Buildings with typical raft infill footing or formed void slab construction Permanent barrier in sub floor brickwork and brick piers Assessment criteria Standard To AS 3660 3 3 EXECUTION 3 1 NON CHEMICAL BARRIERS Concrete slab barrier Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 4 Termite cap and strip shields Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 5 Woven stainless steel mesh barriers Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 6 Graded stone particles barriers Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 7 3 2 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERS General Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 8 Non soil matrix barriers Installation In conformance with the manufacturer s recommendations 3 3 COMPLETION Termite barrier notice General Provide a durable notice permanently fixed in a prominent location to BCA B1 4 i ii or BCA 3 1 3 2 b and AS 3660 1 Appendix A Waste materials Progressive cleaning Make sure that no waste materials which could attract termites remain on the site Warranty Type Renewable Minimum period 10 years Certificate of installation General To AS 3660 1 Appendix A Completion inspection Report At the end of the defects liability period inspect the termite control systems and submit a report on their e
283. ic galvanized steel B12A B8b B8b Zincalume Galvabond Zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel low VOC system Shop primed or red Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 3556 oxide primed Metal Primer B11 Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic ROZP ferrous B8b B8b metal low VOC system Non ferrous metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5024 incl aluminium Etch Primer B17A Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic brass copper tin B8b B8b plate low VOC system Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5025 resistant types e g FRP UPVC low VOC system Water Based Stain Blocker B17A Semi Gloss Acrylic B8b Semi Gloss Acrylic B8b Gloss water based enamel Exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref O NATSPEC 357 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Fibre cement Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5036 products Acrylic Primer Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Sealer Undercoat amp B9 amp B9 B16 Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2213 veneers Acrylic Primer Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Sealer Undercoat a
284. ic low VOC Flat latex interior Dulux White Ceiling DD1403 B6c AS 3730 1 ceilings Paint eco choice low VOC Flat latex interior Dulux Professional DD1466 B6d AS 3730 1 ceilings tinted EnvirO2 Tintable colours Ceiling Flat low VOC Low gloss latex Dulux DD0053 B7a AS 3730 8 exterior Weathershield Low Sheen Acrylic low VOC Low gloss latex Dulux Wash amp DD1096 B7b AS 3730 3 interior Wear 101 Adv Low Sheen Acrylic low DD1516 VOC Dulux Wash amp Wear Kitchen amp Bathroom Low Sheen low VOC Mouldshield Anti Bacterial Semi gloss latex Dulux DD0037 B8a AS 3730 9 exterior Weathershield Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi gloss latex Dulux Wash amp DD1097 B8b AS 3730 2 interior Wear 101 Adv DD1521 Semi Gloss Acrylic low VOC Dulux Wash amp Wear Kitchen amp NATSPEC 331 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu Dulux PDS No AS NZS Standard x material 2311 PRN description Bathroom Low Sheen low VOC Mouldshield Anti Bacterial Gloss latex Dulux DD0054 B9a AS 3730 10 exterior Weathershield Gloss Acrylic Gloss latex interior Dulux Wash amp DD1098 B9b AS 3730 12 Wear 101 Adv DD1282 Gloss Acrylic low VOC Dulux Aquanamel Gloss low VOC Gloss water borne Dulux Aquanamel DD1282 B42 NE interior exterior trim Gloss low VOC alt B9a B9b Wood
285. ic fibres derived from wood or other materials with application of heat and or pressure the bond of which is derived from a synthetic adhesive added to the fibres and the panels are manufactured with a moisture content less than 20 Groups of timbers Terms employed for that purpose in relevant Australian standards High pressure decorative laminates HPDL Panels consisting of core layers impregnated with phenolic and or aminoplastic resins and a surface layer s impregnated with aminoplastic resins mainly melamine resins Sheets consisting of layers of fibrous sheet material e g paper impregnated with thermosetting resins and bonded together under heat and pressure lt 5 MPa with decorative face s National code National code of practice for the safe handling of timber preservatives and treated timber Particleboard Panel material manufactured under pressure and heat from particles of wood wood flakes chips shavings sawdust and similar and or lignocellulosic material in particle form flax shives hemp hurds bagasse fragments rice hulls wheat straw and similar with the addition of an adhesive NATSPEC 48 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0185 Timber products finishes and treatment Plywood types To AS NZS 4491 Softboard Insulation board Also known as Canite insulating board is available with a fine textured finish on one side or finished with 2 coats
286. ide additional support so as to avoid overstressing of members 3 8 WALL FRAMING Wall studs General Provide studs in single lengths without splices Place a stud under or within 40 mm from each structural load point from roof or ceiling except for openings Provide multiple studs at points of concentrated load Maximum stud spacing 600 mm Heads to openings General Provide lintels appropriate to load and span Additional support General Provide additional support in the form of noggings trimmers and studs for support and fixing of lining cladding hardware accessories fixtures and fittings Vermin barriers General Provide vermin barriers as follows Brick veneer barrier Close nail 10 mm steel wire mesh to the underside of the bottom plate of external stud walls extending across the cavity for building into brickwork Damp proof course General Provide damp proof courses under the bottom plate of stud walls built off slabs or masonry dwarf walls as follows External walls not masonry veneer Turn up at least 75 mm on the inside and tack Project 10 mm beyond the external slab edge or dwarf wall and turn down at 45 Walls of bathrooms shower rooms and laundries Turn up at least 150 mm on the wet side and tack to studs Installation Lay in long lengths Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at joints Junctions Preserve continuity of damp proofing at junctions of damp proof c
287. iling to even and correct falls to floor wastes and elsewhere as required Make level junctions with walls Where falls are not required lay level Fall general 1 100 minimum Fall in shower areas 1 60 minimum Change of finish Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish including carpet 3 7 BEDDING Standard Cement mortar To AS 3958 1 clause 5 5 Adhesive To AS 3958 1 clause 5 6 Preparation of tiles Adhesive bedding Fix tiles dry do not soak Mortar bedding Soak porous tiles in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has disappeared Terra cotta tiles Use pre sealed tiles or apply a breathable sealer and lay dry If a final sealed finish is selected use a compatible laying sealer Bedding General Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the tile the substrate the conditions of service and which leave the tile firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and adhered to the substrate Form falls integral with the substrate Thin adhesive beds General Provide only if the substrate deviation is less than 3 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge Cover the entire tile back with adhesive when the tile is bedded Thickness 1 5 3 mm Thick adhesive beds General Provide on substrates with deviations up to 6 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge and with tiles having deep keys or frogs Nominal thickness 6 mm NATSPEC 298 Tuesday 21 May 2013
288. ill rock depressions and over excavation of subsoil drains using coarse subsoil filter 3 9 SUPPORTING EXCAVATIONS Removal of supports General Remove temporary supports progressively as backfilling proceeds Voids General Guard against the formation of voids outside sheeting or sheet piling if used Fill and compact voids to a dry density similar to that of the surrounding material NATSPEC 78 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork 3 10 ADJACENT STRUCTURES Temporary supports General Provide supports to adjacent structures where necessary sufficient to prevent damage arising from the works Lateral supports Provide lateral support using shoring Vertical supports Provide vertical support where necessary using piling or underpinning or both Permanent supports General If permanent supports for adjacent structures are necessary and are not described give notice and obtain instructions Encroachments General If encroachments from adjacent structures are encountered and are not shown on the drawings give notice and obtain instructions 3 11 ROCK BOLTING General General Provide proprietary high strength steel bars or tubes anchored into holes drilled in the rock and tensioned against plates bearing on the rock face to provide temporary or permanent support for the rock face Schedule the installation to conform to systematic bolting or calculated relief as documented S
289. imber framing Wall plan showing all wall layouts Elevations showing the arrangement of members and the size and section type of each member The method of assembly connection lifting holding down and bracing Materials Identification Certification Submit a supplier s certificate which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket verifying that the timber complies with the specification including moisture content Inspection Submit the inspection authority s certificate verifying that the timber complies with the specification Moisture content Submit records of moisture content Preservative treatment Certificate Submit a test certificate from an independent testing authority confirming that the required preservative retention has been achieved CCA treated timber If proposed provide details of treatment 1 6 TOLERANCES General Walls Conform to the Walls tolerances table Walls tolerances table Property Permitted deviation mm Generally Verticality in 2000 mm 4 Generally Flatness in 2000 mm 3 Features Verticality in 2000 mm 2 Features Horizontality in 2000 mm 2 1 Flatness Measured under a straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface 2 Features Conspicuous horizontal or vertical lines including external corners parapets reveals heads sills 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TIMBER Identification Method Identify timber using branding certification or both
290. ine the whole area under the gutters and sumps NATSPEC 210 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0421 Roofing combined Valley gutters Profile to suit the valley boarding Turn back both edges 180 x 6 mm radius Nail or screw to the valley boarding at the top end to prevent the gutter creeping downwards Expansion joints Provide expansion joints in guttering longer than 30 m Downpipes General Prefabricate downpipes to the required section and shape where possible Connect heads to gutter outlets and if applicable connect feet to rainwater drains Access cover Provide a removable watertight access cover at the foot of each downpipe stack Downpipe support Provide supports and fixings for downpipes Internal downpipes Access Provide access openings as follows At each junction and bend Atthe foot of each stack At every second floor level Sound insulation Mineral fibre pipe insulation 50 mm thick spirally bound on with 1 5 mm wire at 150 mm pitch Building in If pipes are built into masonry or concrete spiral wrap the pipe and insulation if any with building paper 3 5 SKYLIGHTS Installation Fixing Per manufacturer s recommendations 3 6 ROOF VENTILATORS Installation Fixing Per manufacturer s recommendations 3 7 COMPLETION Warranties Roofing materials Submit the manufacturer s published product warranties Maintenance manual On completion Submit a ma
291. ing Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref primed steel Clear over stain on timber or veneers Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber and timber Cabot s Internal Cabot s Cabot s SW 1219 gloss veneer solvent Stain B18b amp Cabothane Cabothane Or based system Cabot s Universal Sanding Sealer B40 solvent based B19 Gloss or Satin solvent based B19 Gloss or Satin SW 1202 satin Timber and timber veneer low VOC water based system Cabot s Woodcraft Stain B18c Cabot s Cabothane Water Based B19a Gloss or Satin Cabot s Cabothane Water Based B19a Gloss or Satin SW 5000 Gloss level required Refer to finishes schedule Clear coat 2 pack polyurethane Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber Feast Watson Feast Watson Feast Watson SW 4102 low VOC water EnviroMax Gloss EnviroMax Gloss EnviroMax Gloss based system B20b B20b B20b Timber Feast Watson Feast Watson Feast Watson SW 1267 low VOC water EnviroMax Low EnviroMax Low EnviroMax Low based system Sheen B20b Sheen B20b Sheen B20b Timber Feast Watson Feast Watson Feast Watson SW 1265 low VOC water based system EnviroMax Semi Gloss B20b EnviroMax Semi Gloss B20b EnviroMax Semi G
292. ing Spacing of fasteners Sheet edge and intermediate 450 mm Corners and sheet edges At least 12 mm from sheet edges and 50 mm from corners Joints Provide butt joints 5 mm wide Insert compressible closed cell polyethylene foam backing rod and fill the joint with a flexible sealant ModWood Composite decking Installation To be in accordance with ModWood s specifications refer to web site and relevant building codes If using Kleva Klip please refer to Kleva Klip s fixing instructions www klevaklip com au As ModWood expands in heat and sun to avoid building stress into the boards and having possible lengthways shrinkage it is best to fix the boards when the ambient temperature is less than 25 C and when the boards are not sitting in full sun see coefficient of thermal linear expansion on our web site Storage amp Handling ModWood packs should be stored in a dry flat area under roof and off the ground Loose boards should be stored on its edge in a dry flat area under roof and off the ground Failure to keep packs dry in storage can lead to the growth of mould spores on boards When moving product ModWood should be carried on its edge Please note ModWood is a finished product take care NATSPEC 201 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0411b Waterproofing external and tanking 0411B WATERPROOFING EXTERNAL AND TANKING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Gene
293. ing 1 5 Polished pavers over 300 x 300 mm lt 1 5 mm with 5 not exceeding 2 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 ADHESIVES General Standard To AS 2358 or AS 4992 1 Type General Provide adhesives compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered Prohibited uses Do not provide the following combinations Organic PVC based adhesives and organic natural rubber latex adhesives in damp or wet conditions PVA polyvinyl acetate based adhesives in wet areas or externally 2 2 MORTAR Materials Cement To AS 3972 Type GP GL or GB White cement Iron salts content lt 1 Off white cement Iron salts content lt 2 5 Lime To AS 1672 1 Sand Fine aggregate with a low clay content selected for grading sharp and free from efflorescing salts Water To the recommendations of AS 3958 1 Measurement of volume Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes Do not allow sand to bulk by absorption of water Bedding mortar Proportioning Select proportions from the range 1 cement 3 sand 1 cement 4 sand to obtain satisfactory adhesion Provide minimum water Mixing To AS 3958 1 Gauging Site gauged by volume 2 3 GROUT Type Cement based proprietary grout Mix with water Fine sand may be added as a filler in wider joints Portland cement based grout Mix with fine sand Provide minimum water to achieve workability For joints lt 3 mm 1 cement 2 sand For joints 2 3 mm 1 cement 3 sand
294. ing is free of vermin NATSPEC 73 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork 0222 EARTHWORK 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement Provide earthworks to the dimensions and tolerances as documented Performance Selections As documented Design Geotechnical reports provided Refer documents for information only General The footing or pier depths shown on the drawings are provisional 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Site management 1 3 STANDARDS General Earthworks To AS 3798 General Conform to the recommendations of those parts of AS 3798 which are referenced in this worksection 1 4 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply GITA Geotechnical inspection and testing authority GTA Geotechnical testing authority Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 1348 AS 3798 and the following apply Description and classification of soils To AS 1726 Site classification To BCA 3 2 4 Bad ground Ground unsuitable for the purposes of the works including fill liable to subsidence ground containing cavities faults or fissures ground contaminated by harmful substances and ground which is or becomes soft wet or unstable Base Layer s of material forming
295. ining in situ clay Selected material zone Extent The section of trench within the zone if applicable Backfill material Selected material free from stones larger than 100 mm maximum dimension and the fraction passing a 19 mm Australian Standard sieve to have a 4 day soaked CBR value in conformance with AS 1289 6 1 2 and not less than that of the adjacent selected material zone Trees General Backfill at trees for a minimum 300 mm thickness around tree roots with a topsoil mixture placed and compacted in layers of 150 mm minimum depth to a dry density equal to that of the surrounding soil Backfill level Do not place backfill material above the original ground surface around tree trunks or over the root zone Watering Thoroughly water immediately after backfilling the tree root zone Compaction Control moisture within backfill To Fill moisture control in the Earthwork worksection Layers Compact all material in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness Compact each layer to the relative compaction specified before the next layer is commenced Compaction To Compaction requirements for fill and subgrade in the Earthwork worksection and AS 3798 Section 5 Frequency of testing To AS 3798 clause 8 7 Precautions If compacting adjacent to utility services use compaction methods which do not cause damage or misalignment Density tests Testing authority Have density tests of pipe bedding and backfilling carried out
296. inst tree trunks buildings fences or obstruct the free flow of water along gutters where stockpiling is permitted along the line of the trench excavation Disposal If stockpiling is not permitted dispose of excavated material off site Unsuitable material Disposal Remove unsuitable material from the bottom of the trench or at foundation level and dispose of off site Replace with backfill material to Backfill material Boring Subcontractor If under road boring is required in lieu of trenches engage a suitably qualified subcontractor to do the work 3 4 TRENCH BACKFILL General Timing Backfill service trenches as soon as possible after laying and bedding the service if possible on the same working day Marking services Underground marking tape to AS NZS 2648 1 NATSPEC 84 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0223 Service trenching Place fill To Placing fill in the Earthwork worksection Bedding haunch side and overlay zones Installation and material To the particular utility authority or utility service requirements Secure pipes against floatation Overlay zone thickness Maximum of 300 mm immediately over the utility service Topsoil areas Complete the backfilling with at least 100 mm of topsoil Material in reactive clay areas In sites classified M M D H1 H1 D H2 H2 D E or E D to AS 2870 re use excavated site material at a moisture content within 196 of that of the adjo
297. inus the design thickness of the wearing course Tolerances Conform to the Surface level tolerances table The tolerances apply to the finished level of each layer unless overridden by the requirements including tolerances for the finished level and thickness of the wearing course Surface level tolerances table Item Level tolerance Absolute Relative Subbase surface 10 mm 25 mm 10 mm Base surface 10 mm 5 mm 5 mm NATSPEC 102 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0271 Pavement base and subbase 3 4 SUBBASE AND BASE COMPACTION General Construction operation Compact each layer of fill to the required depth and density as a systematic construction operation and to conform to the Minimum relative compaction table Minimum relative compaction table Item description Minimum dry density ratio modified compaction to AS 1289 5 2 1 Subbase 95 Base 98 Unstable areas If unstable areas develop during rolling or are identified by proof rolling open up dry back and recompact to the requirements of this worksection If dry back is not possible remove for the full depth of layer dispose of and replace with fresh material Compaction requirements General Apply uniform compactive effort over the whole area to be compacted until the required density is achieved or until failure is acknowledged If failure acknowledged the subclause Rectificatio
298. ion Metallic coated steel wire netting To AS 2423 Section 4 Size 45 mm mesh x 1 mm diameter Welded safety mesh To AS NZS 4389 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL Bulk insulation Installation To AS 3999 and BCA J1 2 General Make sure fibre blankets or batts are firmly butted with no gaps except as follows Access openings and vents Do not obstruct Light fittings To AS NZS 3000 clause 4 5 Electrical cables To AS 3999 clause 2 6 Glass Wool and Rock Wool insulation Conform to the ICANZ Industry Code of Practice Marking Deliver mineral wool products to site in packaging labelled FBS 1 BIO SOLUBLE INSULATION Pliable membrane Installation To AS NZS 4200 2 3 2 FLOOR INSULATION Under suspended framed floors bulk insulation Product type Fibre batts NATSPEC 250 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0471 Insulation and pliable membranes Installation Fit tightly between framing members If support is not otherwise provided staple nylon twine to the framing and stretch tight Below concrete slab on ground Product type Rigid cellular extruded sheets Laying pattern Stretcher bond with edges tightly butted Damp proof membrane Lay over insulation Over concrete slab on ground Product type Rigid cellular extruded sheets Substrate preparation Make sure substrates are as follows Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles
299. ional Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a NATSPEC 355 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Concrete blockwork Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 2957 High build 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 performance Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller coating system Finish B38a Finish B38a Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Dulux SD 0391 incl Zincalume Galvanised Iron Weathershield Weathershield Galvabond Primer B12A Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel HD galvanised Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Dulux SD 0391 steel or zinc primed Galvanised Iron Weathershield Weathershield steel Primer Plus B12A Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Shop primed or red Dulux Luxaprime Dulux Dulux SI 1992 oxide primed Zinc Phosphate Weathershield Weathershield ROZP ferrous Primer solvent Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a metal based B11 Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Dulux SD 5051 resistant types e g Water Based Stain Weathershield Weathershield FRP UPVC low VOC system Blocker B17A Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Acrylic paint system for bagged masonry Exterior
300. is worksection the following abbreviations and definitions apply Ordering abbreviations C A Clear anodised 15 um for perimeter seals 25 um for threshold plates B A Bronze anodised 15 um for perimeter seals 25 um for threshold plates PE Painted Polyester Enamel finish special order and extra cost EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer TPE Thermo Plastic Elastomer 1 6 STANDARDS Seals general Quality management for manufacture To AS NZS ISO 9001 or equivalent certified standard Acoustic applications To AS 1191 or AS NZS ISO 717 1 Fire door assemblies To AS 1530 4 and AS 1905 1 Smoke door assemblies To BCA Spec C3 4 AS 1530 7 and AS 3959 for silicon flame retardant PVC and TPE weather seals with a Flammability Index lt 5 to AS 1530 2 providing BAL 40 Combined fire and smoke door assemblies To BCA Spec C3 4 AS 1530 4 AS 1905 1 AS 1530 7 and AS 3959 for weather seals providing BAL FZ Weather and energy saving seals for proprietary windows and door assemblies To AS 4420 4 AS 4420 5 and AS 2047 Door bottom and perimeter seals for external doors To AS 2047 Threshold plates To AS NZS 1428 1 NATSPEC 58 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0194 RAVEN door seals and window seals 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 GENERAL Product substitution Other door seals and window seals Conform to Substitutions in the General requirements worksection 2 2 MATERIALS Aluminium e
301. ischarge of the mix at the site conforms to the Elapsed delivery time table Do not discharge at ambient temperature below 10 C or above 30 C unless approved heating or cooling measures are taken to delivered concrete within the range 5 C to 35 C Elapsed delivery time table Concrete temperature at time of discharge C Maximum elapsed time minutes 10 24 120 24 27 90 27 30 60 30 32 45 Pre mixed supply Addition of water If adding water conform to AS 1379 clause 4 2 3 Transport method Prevent segregation loss of material and contamination of the environment and do not adversely affect placing or compaction Site mixed supply Emergencies If mixing by hand provide details Plant Mix concrete in plant located on the construction site 3 3 CORES FIXINGS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS Adjoining elements Fixings Provide fixings for adjoining elements including any temporary fixings that are required Protection General Grease threads Protect embedded items against damage Compatibility Make sure inserts fixings and embedded items are compatible with each other with the reinforcement and with the concrete mix to be used and surface finish requirements Corrosion If in external or exposed locations galvanize anchor bolts and embedded fixings or submit proposed alternate materials Structural integrity Position Fix cores and embedded items to prevent movement during concrete placing
302. ite cement Iron salts content lt 2 5 Lime To AS 1672 1 Sand Fine aggregate with a low clay content selected for grading sharp and free from efflorescing salts Measurement of volume Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes Do not allow sand to bulk by absorption of water NATSPEC 295 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling Bedding mortar Proportioning Select proportions from the range 1 3 1 4 cement sand by volume to obtain satisfactory adhesion Provide minimum water Terra cotta tiles Use proprietary polymer modified mortar Mixing To AS 3958 1 clause 2 15 Water General Clean and free from any deleterious matter 2 06 GROUT Type Cement based proprietary grout Mix with water Fine sand may be added as a filler in wider joints Terra cotta tiles Use proprietary polymer modified grout General purpose cement based grout Mix with fine sand Provide minimum water consistent with workability For joints lt 3 mm 1 cement 2 sand by volume Forjoints 2 3 mm 1 cement 3 sand by volume Pigments Pigments for coloured grout Provide colourfast fillers compatible with the grout material For cement based grouts provide lime proof natural or synthetic metallic oxides compatible with cement 2 7 CONTROL JOINTS Control joint materials Control joint strip proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwic
303. ith relevant floor level and door location number Packaging For rigid length seals provide recyclable cartons and recyclable polythene with fixings and fitting instructions NATSPEC 59 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0194 RAVEN door seals and window seals Off site installation to proprietary window and door assemblies Supply Raven TPE and Silicon rubber weather stripping on bulk reels Labelling Clearly identify the manufacturer and product content Door assemblies Modification Allow for rebates and grooves to suit the dimensions nominated in the RAVEN catalogue Fabricator or installer to conform to product and fitting instructions supplied before machining and assembly Fitting instructions Conform to the manufacturer s fitting instructions supplied with each product If a replacement copy of instructions is required contact tech advice raven com au Fixing Fasteners Unexposed applications Zinc plated self tapping fasteners supplied by RAVEN with each product External coastal exposure applications Substitute the standard fasteners supplied with equivalent stainless steel fasteners Backset Allow backset clearances as required for hinging latching and automatic closers Proprietary aluminium door window frames Select the options to suit door stop style Raven perimeter frame seals 4 SELECTIONS Refer to architectural drawings NATSPEC 60 Tuesday 21 May 2013
304. itions apply Terminology for work on glass To AS NZS 4668 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that the glass products may be inspected before they are installed 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Samples Submit samples each at least 200 x 200 mm showing specified visual properties and the range of variation if any for each of the following types of glass or glazing plastics Mirror glass Balustrade design Certification Submit a professional engineers certificate confirming conformance with AS NZS 1170 1 clause 3 6 Shop drawings Method of glazing including the following Rebate depth Edge restraint Clearances and tolerances Glazing gaskets and sealant beads Pocket fixing details for frameless glass balustrades Installation Glazing Submit statements from the fabricator certifying that the method of glazing the selection of sealant systems and conditions next to the glass comply with the following Will not be detrimental to the long term structural performance weathering capabilities and visual qualities of the glass Will not cause delamination or other impairment to laminated glass during the service life of the curtain wall system NATSPEC 245 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0467 Glass components Sealant compatibility Compatibility statements Submit statements from all parties to the installation that certify the compatibility of sealan
305. itors Safety helmets To AS NZS 1801 Type 1 Certification Required Certification provider An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand JAS ANZ Project signboards General Provide project specific signboards and as follows Locate in suitable position Maintain in good condition for duration of the work Remove on completion 1 4 BUILDING THE WORKS Surveys Setting out Set out the works as is required with the cost to be borne by the contractor Survey marks Definition The term survey mark means a survey peg bench mark reference mark signal alignment level mark or any other mark used or intended to be used for the purpose of setting out checking or measuring the work Care of survey marks Preserve and maintain the owner s survey marks in their true positions Safety Accidents Promptly notify the architect of the occurrence of the following Accidents involving death or personal injury Accidents involving loss of time Incidents with accident potential such as equipment failure slides cave ins and fire risk Accident reports Submit reports of accidents Purpose of submission Information only Contractor s representative General Must be accessible and fluent in English and technical terminology Subcontracting General Submit a complete list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers and fully inform them of relevant obligations Prog
306. ity environment Applied lamination pressure Make sure the tape experiences 100 kPa Application temperature Generally above 10 C consult the manufacturer Completion Do not apply loads to the assembly for 72 hours at 21 C 3 2 JOINT SEALING Joint preparation Cleaning Cut flush joint surface protrusions and make good Mechanically clean joint surfaces free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of the sealant Immediately before sealant application remove loose particles from the joint using oil free compressed air Bond breaking Install bond breaking backing material Taping Protect the surface on each side of the joint using 50 mm wide masking tape or equivalent means On completion of sealant application remove the tape and remove any stains or marks from adjacent surfaces Primer Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials Sealant joint proportions General weatherproofing joints width depth 1 1 for joint widths 12 mm 21 for joint widths 12 mm Sealant application General Apply the sealant to dry joint surfaces using a pneumatic applicator gun Make sure the sealant completely fills the joint to the required depth provides good contact with the full depth of the sides of the joint and traps no air in the joint Do not apply the sealant outside the recommended working time for the material or the primer Weather conditions Two pack polyurethanes Do not apply
307. ius to edges Form a groove extending at least one quarter the depth of the section either by using a grooving tool by sawing or by inserting a premoulded strip Install a control joint product Bay sizes Area 15 m Length to width ratio lt 1 1 5 3 5 JOINT ACCESSORIES Weather bars General Provide a corrosion resistant metal weather bar under hinged external doors Locate under the centres of closed doors Floor finish dividers General Finish cementitious toppings at junctions with differing floor finishes with a corrosion resistant metal dividing strip suitable fixed to the substrate with top edge flush to the finished floor If changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door 3 6 COMPLETION Curing General Prevent premature or uneven drying out and protect from the sun and wind Curing Use a curing product or as soon toppings have set sufficiently keep them moist by covering with polyethylene film for seven days Joint sealant General If required seal joints as follows Formed joints x 25 mm deep With filler and bond breaker Sawn joints Full depth of cut Protection General Protect finished work from damage during building operations Slip resistance Field test of completed surface To AS NZS 4663 NATSPEC 286 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0621 Waterproofing wet areas 0621 WATERPROOFING
308. ive notice so that inspection may be made of the following Evaluation of the off form finishes 1 6 TOLERANCES Surface quality Formed surfaces Conforming to the surface finish requirements of AS 3610 1 Table 3 3 2 for the surface class nominated in the Formed surface finishes schedule Flatness Unformed surfaces Conforming to the Flatness tolerance class table for the class of finish nominated using a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction Flatness tolerance class table Class Measurement Maximum deviation mm A 8 m straight edge 3 B 3 m straight edge 6 C 600 mm straight edge 6 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 MATERIALS Surface hardeners sealants and protectors Supply If documented provide proprietary products conforming to the manufacturer s recommendations NATSPEC 155 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0315b Concrete finishes 3 EXECUTION 3 4 SURFACE MODIFIERS General Application Apply to clean surfaces in conformance with the manufacturer s recommendations 3 2 FORMED SURFACES General Surface finish Provide formed concrete finishes conforming to the Formed surface finishes schedule Damage Do not damage concrete works through premature removal of formwork Curing General If formwork is stripped before the minimum curing period for the concrete has elapsed continue curing the exposed faces as soon as the stripping is completed
309. k and handle all coated items using fabric slings or padded chains Adopt soft packaging carpet strips or other deformable materials between all coated items Water ponding Stack coated items to prevent water ponding 3 8 SURFACE PREPARATION General Defects Remove all surface defects including cracks laminations deep pitting weld spatter slag burrs fins sharp edges and other defects before the preparation of the surface to be coated Temporary welds Grind flush temporary welds Site welding Where possible avoid site welding Porous skip or stitch welds Not acceptable Edges De burr and round all edges to a 2 mm radius NATSPEC 178 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings Surface contaminants Remove surface contaminants such as oil grease dirt and loose particles using an alkaline oil emulsifier degreaser to AS 1627 1 Surface preparation Prepare surfaces to the required finish to AS 1627 1 AS 1627 2 AS 1627 4 AS 1627 5 AS 1627 6 and AS 1627 9 Surface cleaning Remove spent abrasive from the surface by blowing with clean dry air and or by vacuum cleaning Bolts Provide washers at heads and nuts at replacement bolts Surface preparation for atmospheric steel General Conform to the following requirements Wash and degrease all surfaces to be coated in conformance with AS 1627 1 with a free rinsing alkaline detergent in conformanc
310. k worksection Excavation and Adjacent structures Trench widths General Keep trench widths to the minimum consistent with the laying and bedding of the relevant service and construction of access chambers and pits Trench depths General As required by the relevant service and its bedding method Adjacent to footings If excavation is necessary below the zone of influence of the underside of adjacent footings give notice and provide support for the footings as instructed Obstructions General Clear trenches of sharp projections Cut back roots encountered in trenches to at least 600 mm clear of services Remove other obstructions including stumps and boulders which may interfere with services or bedding Tree protection To AS 4970 Dewatering General Keep trenches free of water Place bedding material services and backfilling on firm ground free of surface water Pumping Provide pump out from adjacent sumps or install well points Adjacent subsidence Provide recharge points to isolate the dewatering zone Excess excavation General If trench excavation exceeds the correct depth reinstate to the correct depth and bearing value using compacted bedding material or sand stabilised with 1 part of cement to 20 parts of sand by volume Stockpiles Excavated material for backfill If required segregate the earth and rock material and stockpile for re use in backfilling operations Locations Do not stockpile excavated material aga
311. l Before practical completion clean throughout including interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces Clean debris from the site roofs gutters downpipes and drainage systems Remove waste and surplus materials Samples Remove non incorporated samples prototypes and sample panels Reinstatement General Before practical completion clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work and restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition Adjoining property Evaluation At practical completion for properties described in the Adjoining properties to be recorded schedule inspect the properties with the architect and owners and occupants of the properties recording any damage that has occurred since the pre commencement inspection Adjoining properties to be recorded schedule Title Owner Description 20 22 Tryon Road Lindfield Unknown Unit building 26 Tryon Road Lindfield Cromehurst School School buildings and playgrounds Tryon Road and surrounds Ku ring gai Council Public land Kochia Lane and surrounds Ku ring gai Council Public land Removal of plant General Within 10 working days after practical completion remove temporary works and construction plant no longer required Remove the balance before the end of the defects liability period 1 6 PAYMENT FOR THE WORKS Import costs Definition Import costs include costs attrib
312. l integrity of the supporting elements Suppl nid The design supply installation testing certification user manuals and training Delivery Deliver the fall protection assembly ready for installation as follows Clearly labelled to show the intended location In a separate dust and moisture proof package Including the necessary templates fixings and fixing instructions 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR Requirements Performance requirements To AS NZS 1891 2 Section 4 System acceptance criteria Access Make provision for three workers to access the system at any one time and provide access as follows Full extent of gutters Roof mounted plant and equipment Roof areas within 2 5 m of fall hazards not otherwise protected by parapets or guard rails Means of access Nominate permanent means of access as appropriate 1 4 STANDARDS General Standard To AS NZS 1891 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Shop fabricated or assembled items ready for delivery to the site Commencement of shop or site welding All equipment attachments with concealed fixings before they are covered Site erected assemblies on completion of erection before applying finishes Steel surfaces prepared for and immediately before site applied finishes Install
313. less flooring General Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer s original sealed containers legibly marked to show the following Manufacturer s identification Product brand name Product type Quantity Product reference code and batch number Date of manufacture Material composition and characteristics such as volatility flash point light fastness colour and pattern Handling and installation instructions 23 SEAMLESS FINISHES General description Finish type Typical use Typical resins Coats Aggregates Thickness Roller or spray General floor Epoxy or 2 None 300 500 applied coating Polyurethane dry um Spread and Non slip general Epoxy or 1 Primer 10r Proprietary 400 1500 sprinkle floor coating polyurethane more topcoats aggregates for dry um 1 or more layers non slip of aggregate properties Self levelling Smooth high Epoxy or 2 Primer 1 None 2 4mm self smoothing gloss finish polyurethane resin system system with a fine filler Trowel applied Chemical Epoxy or Resin system Mixed into the 4 8 mm coating resistant polyester Less glass or steel resin system coating for food common MMA trowel applied beverage and polyurethane Seal surface to chemical and vinyl esters facilitate handling storag cleaning e Slurry and As for trowel Epoxy MMA or 1 Surface may Mixed and 3 6mm broadcast applied less polyester b
314. llapse and loss of load carrying capacity occurs not more than 48 hours after flooding with water creating a void at least 60 of the original depth of the void former Reinforcement Submit type test reports to verify conformance for each reinforcement type as follows Strength and ductility To AS 3600 Table 3 2 1 Shop drawings Cores fixings and embedded items If the locations of these items are not shown or are shown diagrammatically submit shop drawings showing the proposed locations clearances and cover Indicate proposed repositioning of reinforcement Subcontractors Pre mixed supply Submit names and contact details of proposed pre mixed concrete suppliers and alternative source of supply in the event of breakdown of pre mixed or site mixed supply 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS General Stockpile If uniform consistent colour is required stockpile sand cement and aggregates for the project Aggregates Standard To AS 2758 1 Aggregate properties Conform to the Aggregate property schedule Special aggregates Stockpile special aggregates at the beginning of the project to minimise colour and other variations Cement Standard To AS 3972 Age Less than 6 months old Storage Store cement bags under cover and above ground Water Standard To AS 1379 Requirement Provide clean water free from oil acid alkali organic or vegetable matter and including not more than 500 mg l of chloride ions Polymeric fil
315. llows Onsite On finished surfaces Next to a finished surface or glass unless the adjacent surface is protected from damage 3 8 EMBEDDED FIXINGS General Fixing Fix screens to the building structure by one of the following methods and in conformance with the Fastener fixing schedule Fasteners cast into the concrete of the building structure Do not displace reinforcement when locating embedded items Chemical fixings expanding bolt sockets Bolting or welding to brackets or structural framing NATSPEC 238 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0457 External screens Submission If other methods of fixing e g preformed pockets or explosive tools are proposed submit details Standard for embedment For concrete To AS 3600 For masonry To AS 3700 Fixing brackets Requirement Provide fasteners and other methods of attachment of the screens to the structure with the following characteristics Three way adjustment to accommodate fabrication and construction tolerances Provision for building movements while fixing the screens in their correct positions Adequacy for structural design actions Protection Cast in items Prevent the entry of concrete slurry into bolt holes channels and other openings for the fasteners Fill the openings using an easily removed water repellent material before casting in Tolerance on placement Fasteners generally Maximum devia
316. lloy and temper designation 6063 0 For casting To AS 1874 Stainless steel Surface finish designation 4 general purpose polished Plastics PVC U sheet Semi rigid sheet Rigid cellular polystyrene To AS 1366 3 class VH for cut out shapes 3 EXECUTION 3 1 WORKMANSHIP Production General Form graphics items accurately with clean well defined edges or arises free from blemishes Engraving to two layer plastic laminate Lettering excavated to expose the lower laminate Engraved and filled Lettering precision excavated and filled colouring material Clean faces of all filling material Casting Produce shapes free of pits scale blow holes or other defects hand or machine finished if necessary Laser cut Individual vinyl letters with self adhesive backing Printed lettering Lettering and graphic images screen digitally printed on Film with self adhesive backing Acrylic sheet Aluminium plate NATSPEC 268 Tuesday 21 May 2013 0581b Signs and display ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Stainless steel plate Large format digital printing Lettering and graphic images screen printed film with self adhesive backing Signwriting Lettering and graphic images hand painted direct to the background by a tradesman with recognised qualifications and demonstrated experience Fabricated Three dimensional formed as follows Laser cutting from solid material and hand finished
317. lly Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere with performance under normal conditions of use Glazing plastics Free from surface abrasions and warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years against yellowing or other colour change loss of strength and impact resistance and general deterioration Safety glasses Standard To AS NZS 2208 Certification Required Certification provider An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand JAS ANZ Type Grade A to AS 1288 when used in curtain walls Insulating glass units IGUs Manufacture and installation To AS NZS 4666 NATSPEC 241 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0461b Glazing Glass thickness selection To AS 1288 2 3 GLAZING MATERIALS General Glazing materials including putty glazing compounds sealants gaskets glazing tapes spacing strips spacing tapes spacers setting blocks and compression wedges Appropriate for the conditions of application and the required performance Jointing materials Compatibility Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces Glazing tapes Standards To AAMA 800 Products coded 804 3 806 3 or 807 3 as applicable Elastomeric sealants General Provide elastomeric s
318. locker B17A Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a Semi Gloss Acrylic B8a Gloss latex exterior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Fibre cement Dulux Dulux Dulux Optional SD 2938 products Weathershield Weathershield Weathershield Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Timber and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Dulux SD 1524 veneers Acrylic Primer Weathershield Weathershield Undercoat B10A Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Concrete OFC tilt Dulux Dulux Dulux Optional SD 3096 slab or pre cast Weathershield Weathershield Weathershield Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Concrete OFC tilt Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 0770 slab or pre cast 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 High build Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller performance Finish B38a Finish B38a coating system Cement render Dulux AcraPrime Dulux AcraTex Dulux AcraTex SA 4029 High build 501 1 Water Based AcraShield 955 AcraShield 955 performance Primer B15 Low Gloss Roller Low Gloss Roller coating system Finish B38a Finish B38a Clay brick and Dulux 1 Step Dulux Dulux SD 1086 masonry Acrylic Primer Weathershield Weathershield Undercoat B15 Gloss Acrylic B9a Gloss Acrylic B9a Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Dulux SD 5050 Acrylic Blockfiller Weathershield Weathershield B15 Opt
319. loss B20b Clear coat single pack polyurethane Interior Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber and timber Intergrain Ultraclear Intergrain Ultraclear SW 3925 gloss veneer low VOC B39b Gloss or B39b Gloss or or water based Satin Apply Satin Apply SW 3927 satin system 10 8 m litre 10 8 m litre Timber and timber Feast Watson Feast Watson Optional SW 1244 veneer solvent based system Satinproof solvent based B19 Satinproof solvent based B19 Feast Watson Satinproof solvent based B19 Two pack gloss pigmented polyurethane Interior joinery Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber Dulux Luxepoxy 4 Dulux Luxathane R Dulux Luxathane R SD 1751 all shop applied White Primer B29B to 50 microns DFT B44 to 60 microns DFT B44 to 60 microns DFT Clear finishing oils for timber Interior NATSPEC 351 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref Timber Feast Watson Feast Watson SW 1257 Scandinavian Oil Scandinavian Oil Apply at 16 m litre Apply at 16 m litre Timber Feast Watson Feast Watson SW 1258 China Wood Oil China Wood Oil B43a Apply 12 B43a Apply
320. ls Base Layer s of material forming the uppermost structural element of a pavement and on which the surfacing may be placed Flexible pavement A pavement which obtains its load spreading properties from intergranular pressure mechanical interlock and cohesion between the particles of the pavement material Relative level tolerance Maximum deviation from a 3 m straight edge laid on the surface Subbase Material laid on the subgrade or selected material below the base either for the purpose of making up additional pavement thickness to prevent intrusion of the subgrade into the base or to provide a working platform 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 BASE AND SUBBASE MATERIAL Granular material Requirement Provide unbound granular materials including blends of two or more different materials which when compacted develop structural stability and are uniform in grading and physical characteristics Crushed rock and recycled material class Requirement Provide crushed rock and recycled material as documented from the following classes NATSPEC 98 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0271 Pavement base and subbase Class 1 Pavement base material with a minimum plasticity index for unbound pavements requiring a very high standard of surface preparation for a sprayed sealed or thin asphalt surfacing Class 2 Pavement base material with no minimum plasticity index for unbound pavements which m
321. luding framing fixing trim accessories and flashings Description Refer to architectural drawings Solar heat gain coefficient SHGC Refer to Basix certificate U value Refer to Basix certificate NATSPEC 208 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 2 5 ROOF VENTILATORS Description 0421 Roofing combined General A proprietary roof ventilator system including framing fixing trim accessories and flashings Product Refer to architectural drawings Finish Match adjacent roofing 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Protection General Keep the roofing and rainwater system free of debris and loose material during construction and leave them clean and unobstructed on completion Repair damage to the roofing and rainwater system Touch up If it is necessary to touch up minor damage to prepainted metal roofing do not overspray onto undamaged surfaces Thermal movement Requirement Provide for thermal movement in the roof installation and the structure including movement in joints and fastenings Pan type sheets Removal Capable of being de indexed and removed without damage Curved corrugated sheet General Form by rolling from material recommended for curving or bullnosing Minimise crimping or creasing across the face of the sheet Trim off crimped or creased edges and ends Metal separation Requirement Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals and between green
322. lush joints Provide recessed edge sheets and finish flush using perforated paper reinforcing tape External corner joints Make joints over metallic coated steel corner beads Dry joints Provide square edged sheet and finish with a UPVC joining section Control joints Provide control joints to coincide with structural control joints and as follows Walls lt 7 2 m centres Ceilings To divide into bays not larger than 10 8 x 7 2 m NATSPEC 256 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0511b Lining Soffit linings To divide into bays not larger than 4 2 x 4 2 m or 5 6 x 3 6 m Control joint beads Purpose made metallic coated Support Provide framing parallel to the joint on each side Do not fix the lining to abutting building surfaces Wet areas Provide additional supports flashings trim and sealants as required Joints in tiled areas Bed perforated paper tape in bedding compound Do not apply a topping coat Control joints 4 2 m centres and space to suit joints required in tiling Internal corners Reinforce with metallic coated steel angles In corners subject to continuous moisture flash over the angle and under the sheeting with continuous bitumen coated aluminium flashing 3 4 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES General General Provide trim such as beads mouldings and stops to make neat junctions between lining components finishes and adjacent surfaces Proprietary items Provide
323. ly Levelness Absolute level tolerance maximum deviation from design levels Ambient temperature The air temperature at the time of mixing and placing of concrete Average ambient temperature Average value of the maximum and minimum ambient temperatures over the relevant period at a site Concrete class Normal Concrete which is specified primarily by a standard compressive strength grade and otherwise in conformance with AS 1379 clause 1 5 3 Special Concrete which is specified to have certain properties or characteristics different from or additional to those of normal class concrete and otherwise in conformance with AS 1379 clause 1 5 4 If special class concrete is nominated for the project specify the relevant parameters Early age A mean compressive strength at 7 days exceeding the values shown in AS 1379 Table 1 2 Green concrete Concrete which has set but not appreciably hardened Flatness Relative level tolerance maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid on the surface Weather NATSPEC 106 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement Cold Ambient shade temperature 10 C Hot Ambient shade temperature gt 32 C 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Base or subgrade before covering Membrane or film underlay installed on the base or subgrade Concrete formwork reinforce
324. ly 300 x 150 mm diameter Testing Test methods To AS 1012 Acceptance criteria General To the Concrete properties schedule performance Early age compressive strength To the Control tests schedule Slump tests Assess slump for every batch Perform slump test on each strength sample Drying shrinkage at 56 days To AS 1012 13 Other tests To the Tests schedule Embedded pressure pipes General Complete leak tests before embedding pipes Liquid retaining structures Testing for liquid tightness To AS 3735 3 EXECUTION 3 4 POLYMERIC FILM UNDERLAY Location General Under slabs on ground including integral ground beams and footings provide a vapour barrier or in areas prone to rising damp or salt attack a damp proofing membrane Base preparation General According to base type as follows Concrete working base Remove projections above the plane surface and loose material Graded prepared subgrade Blind with sufficient sand to create a smooth surface free from hard projections Lightly wet the sand just before laying the underlay Installation Standard To AS 2870 clause 5 3 3 3 2 CONCRETE General General Provide concrete conforming to the Concrete properties schedule performance NATSPEC 150 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0314b Concrete in situ Elapsed delivery time General Make sure the elapsed time between the wetting of the mix and the d
325. ly geotechnical reports 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 FILL MATERIALS General Suitable material To AS 3798 clause 4 4 including inorganic non perishable material suitably graded and capable of compaction to the documented density Unsuitable materials Do not use unsuitable material for fill in conformance with AS 3798 clause 4 3 Sulphur content Do not provide filling with sulphur content exceeding 0 5 within 500 mm of cement bound elements for example concrete structures or masonry unless such elements are protected by impermeable membranes or equivalent means Re use of excavated material Only re use suitable material in conformance with AS 3798 clause 4 4 Stockpiles Segregate the earth and rock material and stockpile for re use in backfilling operations Locations Do not stockpile excavated material against tree trunks buildings fences or obstruct the free flow of water along gutters where stockpiling is permitted along the line of the trench excavation Disposal If stockpiling is not permitted under the contract dispose of excavated material off site to AS 3798 clause 6 1 8 2 2 BORROW OR IMPORTED FILL Borrow or imported material Only when no suitable excavated material is available Suitable material To AS 3798 clause 4 4 Borrow pits Location 3 m from any fence line boundary edge of excavation or embankment Strip and stockpile topsoil Provide erosion protection during winning operations of material and en
326. m extrusion or slip forms to AS 2876 Spade work Edges Define mass planting beds by cutting through soil with garden spade at approximately 70 to vertical Remove sods from garden beds and spread throughout grassed areas Finish Free from kinks in alignment with one curve grading evenly into the next and free of straight sections Brick Setting On a 1 1 6 mortar haunch Joints 3 mm struck flush Alignment Even and free from dips humps and bends Cleaning Wash off mortar progressively NATSPEC 90 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0242b Landscape fences and barriers 0242B LANDSCAPE FENCES AND BARRIERS 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide fences and barrier systems Complete for their function Conforming to the detail and location drawings Firmly fixed in position 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so inspection may be made of the following Boundary survey location if applicable Setout before construction Foundation conditions before placing concrete in footings 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TIMBER Hazard class General As defined in AS 1604 1 Posts and rails Hardwood Standard To AS 2082 Durability class To AS 1720 2 Softwood Standard To AS 2858 Pickets and palings Hardwood To AS 2796 1
327. m each end for fixing to ground surface Size 2000 x 150 x 100 mm high Steel tube bollards Type Bollards fabricated from heavy steel tube to minimum nominal size DN 100 to AS 1074 Seal free ends with fabricated end caps spot welded and ground smooth Finish Galvanize after fabrication NATSPEC 125 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0277 Pavement ancillaries 2 3 BICYCLE RACKS General Standards Layout and location to AS 2890 3 3 EXECUTION 3 4 LINEMARKING Setting out General Set out the work to ensure that all markings are placed as documented Surface preparation Surface Clean dry and free of any deposit which may impair adhesion of the paint finish Wet weather Do not apply pavement marking during wet weather or if rain is likely to fall during the process or paint drying time Scabbling Scabble the full area of concrete wearing surfaces to raised pavement markers and remove fine mortar material Provision for traffic Allow for traffic during application and protect pavement markings until the material has hardened sufficiently to carry traffic without damage Mixing of paint Mix all paint in its original container before use and produce a smooth uniform product consistent with the freshly manufactured product Application of paint Longitudinal lines Spray all longitudinal lines with a self propelled machine Spray concurrently the two sets of lines forming a one
328. m head guide sill runner and frame stile sections for screens not part of the window frame Hardware Nylon slide runners and finger pull handle Provide pile strip closers against sash where necessary to close gaps 2 5 ALUMINIUM JOINERY FINISHES Powder coatings Product Refer to architectural drawings Powder coat thickness 2 50 microns to 90 microns Anodised Thickness 20 microns 2 6 HARDWARE Hardware documented generically General Provide hardware of sufficient strength and quality to perform its function appropriate to the intended conditions of use compatible with associated hardware and fabricated with fixed parts firmly joined Locks and latches Standard To AS 4145 3 Window catches Provide 2 catches per sash to manually latched awning or hopper sashes over 1000 mm wide Sash balances Requirement Match the spring strength of the balances to the sash weight they support Sash operators Requirement Provide sash operators in conformance with SELECTIONS NATSPEC 219 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0451 AWS aluminium windows and doors 2 7 KEYING Contractor s keys Master key systems Do not use any key under a master key system Delivery of keys Number of keys Conform to the Number of keys table Identification Labelling Supply each key with a purpose made plastic or stamped metal label legibly marked to identify the key attached to the key by a metal ring
329. m underlay Vapour barriers and damp proofing membranes To AS 2870 clause 5 3 3 Chemical admixtures Standard To AS 1478 1 Contents Free of chlorides fluorides and nitrates Curing compounds Curing compounds To AS 3799 NATSPEC 133 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Coloured concrete Standard To AS 3610 1 2 2 CONCRETE Properties Concrete mix and supply Conform to the following Normal class To AS 1379 clause 1 5 3 Properties Conform to the Concrete properties schedule performance Cover Concrete cover generally To AS 3600 Concrete cover for structures for retaining liquids To AS 3735 Concrete cover for residential ground slabs and footings To AS 2870 2 3 TESTING General Test authority Concrete supplier or NATA registered laboratory Reports and records of test results To AS 1012 Retain results on site Assessment process of test results Standard To AS 1379 Method of assessment Project assessment Sampling Method of sampling AS 1012 1 Sampling locations To AS 1012 1 and the following Sample the concrete on site at the point of discharge from the agitator For compressive strength tests Spread the site sampling evenly throughout the pour Frequency of sampling To AS 1379 and the following For slump tests Take at least one sample from each batch For compressive strength tests Sample to the Project assessmen
330. mal insulation To AS NZS 4859 1 Pliable building membrane To AS NZS 4200 1 and equivalent to sarking type materials as defined in the BCA Fire hazard properties To BCA A2 4 Fibre batts Flexible insulation supplied as factory cut pieces and composed of mineral wool glass and rock fibre or polyester fibre FBS 1 fibre bio soluble mineral wool Insulation composed of bio soluble glass or rock fibres Vapour permeable breathable membrane A flexible membrane material normally used for secondary waterproofing that allows for the transmission of water vapour Breathable vapour permeable membrane A flexible membrane material normally used for secondary waterproofing that allows for the transmission of water vapour 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the pliable membrane and insulation before they are covered up or concealed 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Fire hazard properties General Submit evidence of conformance to INSULATION AND PLIABLE MEMBRANE MATERIALS Fire hazard properties Thermal properties General Submit evidence of conformance with AS NZS 4859 1 for documented thermal properties 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 INSULATION AND PLIABLE MEMBRANE MATERIALS Fire hazard properties Insulation Fire hazard indices for all materials when tested in conformance with AS NZS 1530 3 Spread of flame index lt 9 Smoke developed index lt 8 if spread of flame gt 5 Materi
331. medy deficiencies Acclimatisation General Acclimatise the joinery items by stacking it in the in service conditions with air circulation to all surfaces after the following construction operations are complete Air conditioning operational Lighting operational Site drainage and stormwater works are complete NATSPEC 263 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0551 Joinery Space fully enclosed and secure Wet work complete and dry Substrate General Damp clean and vacuum substrate surfaces that will be permanently concealed 3 3 TIMBER STAIRS Set out General Set out stair rod to give uniform risers and uniform treads respectively in each flight Fabrication Closed strings Trench for treads and risers Cut strings Profile for treads and risers Mitre riser ends Treads Arris nosings to a pencil round Return nosings at cut strings Groove for riser tongue in closed rise stair Set rise 19 mm back from nosing Top tread Flush with finished floor otherwise to match stair treads Provide similar tread section as nosing to floor edges around stairwell Risers Tongue to tread Mitre to string in cut string stairs Installation General Glue joints in internal work In closed rise stairs wedge treads and risers to strings Plant 2 glue blocks behind each tread to riser junction Trim floors to carry ends of stairs and around stair well Stair bolts to open rise close string stai
332. ment Storage PPE storage holdall supplied by the manufacture 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Standard Installation To AS NZS 1891 2 Contractor Installer Registered Installer approved by the manufacture 3 2 MAINTENANCE General Preventative and mandatory system maintenance By competent or Accredited Height Safety Inspector Certifier in conformance with AS NZS 1891 4 Section 9 and manufacturer s maintenance recertification recommendations Check list for all inspections To AS NZS 1891 2 Table 8 The installer competent person To AS NZS 1891 2 clause 1 3 1 Routine inspections Standard To AS NZS 1891 2 clause 9 2 Completion certificate Provide inspection testing and certification by an Accredited Installer and or Accredited Height Safety Inspector Upon completion of the installation Upon the expiry of the defects liability period or 12 months after completion of the installation whichever is the lesser and valid for a further 12 months period Note the date of the next system inspection and period of validity and display the certificate at the access points of the work area or on the individual system components where provision is made Inspection after a fall or other event Standard To AS NZS 1891 2 clause 9 3 Proof testing of drilled in anchorages Standard To AS NZS 1891 2 clause 9 4 NATSPEC 55 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0193 Roof access safety syste
333. ment and dowels in position Commencement of concrete placing Completion of concrete placing Evaluation of surface finish 1 6 TOLERANCES General Edges abutting gutters Within 5 mm of the level of the actual gutter edge Rigid pavement surface Absolute tolerance 10 mm 0 mm Relative tolerance 5 mm Joint locations in plan rigid pavement 15 mm 1 7 SUBMISSIONS Products Compliance certificate As an alternative to testing a product submit the manufacturer s certificate together with the results of recent tests undertaken by the manufacturer showing compliance with test criteria Aggregates Nominate the source for all aggregates proposed Reinforcement Submit the manufacturer s certificate of compliance with AS NZS 4671 or submit test certificates from an independent testing authority Liquid curing compounds Submit certified test results including the application rate and the efficiency index to AS 3799 Appendix B Curing by covering Submit details of the proposed covering material Repair materials Submit proposals for epoxy resin grout and elastomeric sealant Concrete Submit the concrete supply delivery dockets Subcontractors Submit names and contact details of proposed pre mixed concrete suppliers and alternative source of supply in the event of breakdown of pre mixed or site mixed supply Trial mix design report Six weeks before commencing production submit a report for each mix design c
334. mically resistant coating Thickness 200 um minimum Galvanizing To AS NZS 4680 as follows Sequence If fabrication is to occur after galvanizing submit proposals for galvanizing repair and coating of cut ends Zinc coating minimum 600 g m Tie wire General Annealed steel 1 25 mm diameter minimum External and corrosive applications Galvanized 2 6 MISCELLANEOUS Surface hardeners sealants and protectors Supply If documented provide proprietary products conforming to the manufacturer s recommendations NATSPEC 135 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Slip resistance treatment Slip resistance classification To AS NZS 4663 3 EXECUTION 3 4 POLYMERIC FILM UNDERLAY Location General Under slabs on ground including integral ground beams and footings provide a vapour barrier or in areas prone to rising damp or salt attack a damp proofing membrane Base preparation General According to base type as follows Concrete working base Remove projections above the plane surface and loose material Graded prepared subgrade Blind with sufficient sand to create a smooth surface free from hard projections Lightly wet the sand just before laying the underlay Installation Standard To AS 2870 clause 5 3 3 General Lay underlay over the base as follows Lap joints at least 200 mm and seal the laps and penetrations with waterproof adhesive
335. ministrator Contract administrator has the same meaning as architect or superintendent and is the person appointed by the owner or principal under the contract Default Specified value product or installation method which is to be provided unless otherwise documented Design life The period of time for which it is assumed in the design that an asset will be able to perform its intended purpose with only anticipated maintenance but no major repair or replacement being necessary Documented Documented as documented and similar terms mean contained in the contract documents Economic life The period of time from the acquisition of an asset to when the asset while still physically capable of fulfilling its function and with only anticipated maintenance ceases to be the lowest cost alternative for satisfying that function Electricity distributor Any person or organisation that provides electricity from an electricity distribution system to one or more electrical installations Includes distributor supply authority network operator local network service provider electricity retailer or electricity entity as may be appropriate in the relevant jurisdiction Geotechnical site investigation The process of evaluating the geotechnical characteristics of the site in the context of existing or proposed construction Give notice Give notice submit advise inform and similar expressions mean give notice submit advis
336. mite management 0184 TERMITE MANAGEMENT 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide termite management materials and systems to the whole of the works described in the contract Objective Achieve building protection Selections As documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARD General Termite barriers To AS 3660 1 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the completed termite barriers 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Tests Woven stainless steel barriers Provide certification that 725 Grade stainless steel has been used to the manufacturer s specification Chemical soil barriers Submit a Registered testing authority laboratory analysis certificate to AS 3660 1 Appendix E 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 NON CHEMICAL BARRIERS Concrete slab barrier Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 4 Termite cap and strip shields Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 5 Woven stainless steel mesh barriers Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 6 Grade 725 stainless steel Graded stone particles barriers Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 7 2 2 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERS General Standard To AS 3660 1 Section 8 Type testing To AS 3660 1 Appendix E 2 3 NON SOIL MATRIX BARRIERS Concrete slab barrier Description Composite membrane incorporating a termiticide NATSPEC 46 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscr
337. mm 100 mm Span 1000 mm lt 3000 mm 150 mm Span gt 3000 mm To structural drawings Propping Provide temporary props to lintels to prevent deflection or rotation Minimum propping period 7 days 3 13 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES Slip joints General Provide slip joints to top of all unreinforced masonry walls supporting concrete slabs and other concrete elements Protection Keep the slip joints in place and protect from displacement Flexible masonry ties General Provide stabilising ties at control joints and abutting structural elements including columns beams and slab soffits Locations and details To structural drawings 4 SELECTIONS 4 4 SCHEDULES Refer to architectural drawings NATSPEC 166 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0341b Structural steel 0341B STRUCTURAL STEEL 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide structural steelwork that is integrated into the building construction 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Steel hot dip galvanized coatings Steel protective paint coatings Structural fire protection systems 1 3 STANDARDS General Materials construction fabrication and erection To AS 4100 Cold formed steel To AS NZS 4600 1 4 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations ILAC International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation 1 5 ADJOI
338. mp B9 amp B9 B16 Concrete Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5042 Acrylic Primer Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Sealer Undercoat amp B9 amp B9 B16 Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2263 Acrylic Primer Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Sealer Undercoat amp B9 amp B9 B16 Brick and masonry Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2262 Acrylic Primer Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Sealer Undercoat amp B9 amp B9 B16 Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 1522 Acrylic Blockfiller Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 B15 amp B9 amp B9 Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2645 incl HD Galvanised Iron Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Galvanized steel Primer Plus B12A amp B9 amp B9 Zincalume Galvabond Zincanneal zincseal amp zinc primed steel Shop primed or red Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2987 oxide primed Metal Primer B11 Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 ROZP ferrous amp B9 amp B9 metal Non ferrous metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5043 incl aluminium Etch Primer B17A Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 brass copper tin amp B9 amp B9 plate Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5044
339. ms On going maintenance Certificate Submit the completion certificates and notify the proprietor of the requirement for continued interval testing NATSPEC 56 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0193 Roof access safety systems NATSPEC 57 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0194 RAVEN door seals and window seals 0194 RAVEN DOOR SEALS AND WINDOW SEALS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide RAVEN door seals and window seals as documented Handing Before supply verify on site the correct handing of hardware items Operation Make sure working parts are accurately fitted to smooth close bearings without binding or sticking free from rattle or excessive play lubricated where appropriate 1 2 COMPANY CONTACTS RAVEN technical contacts Website www raven com au Technical advice Email tech advice raven com au 1 3 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 4 MANUFACTURER S DOCUMENTS Technical manual Published product catalogue Visit www raven com au and click on the Raven Architectural door and window sealing systems link for product catalogue 112 CAD File downloads and product fitting instructions Ecospecifier certificate energy credits and Company AS NZS ISO 9001 certificate 1 5 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations and definitions General For the purposes of th
340. n NATSPEC 232 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0455 Door hardware Construction keyed master key cylinder Keep up to date records of keys issued including recipient s name company and contact details date issued and date returned Delivery of keys Great grandmaster grandmaster and master keys Arrange for the manufacturer or supplier to deliver direct to the principal Number of keys Conform to the Number of keys table Group keying Keying system Provide a group keying system in conformance with the Key codes schedule Keying control security system If cylinder or pin tumbler locks accept a group key e g master key maison key provide to those locks a proprietary keying control security system Stamping Stamp keys and lock cylinders to show the key codes and or door number as scheduled Identification Labelling Supply each key with a purpose made plastic or stamped metal label legibly marked to identify the key attached to the key by a metal ring Key material Lever locks Malleable cast iron or mild steel Pin tumbler locks Nickel alloy not brass Number of keys table Code Key type Minimum number of keys GGMK Great grandmaster keys 2 GMK Grandmaster keys 2 MK Master keys 2 per code group KD Locks keyed to differ 2 per lock KA Locks keyed alike 2 locks in code group 4 3 to 10 locks in code group 6 11 to 40 locks in code group 10 4
341. n Design by contractor If the contractor provides design use only appropriately qualified persons and conform to all statutory requirements Conflict with the documents If it is believed that a conflict exists between statutory requirements and the documents notify the contract administrator immediately and provide a recommendation to resolve the conflict Noise levels General Install systems in conformance with the documented equipment performance 1 2 PRECEDENCE General Worksections and referenced documents The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this worksection The requirements of the worksections override conflicting requirements of their referenced documents The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements 13 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s Demolition Service trenching Common requirements Requirement Conform to the following Adhesives sealants and fasteners Fire stopping Metals and prefinishes Termite management Timber products finishes and treatment Building IT components Cross referencing styles Within the text Worksection titles are indicated by talicised text Subsection titles are indicated by BOLD text Clause titles are indicated by Bold text 1 4 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Contractual relationships General Responsibilities a
342. n Lay in long lengths with the ends of each board firmly butted to the next and firmly in contact with the joists Stagger joints and make over joists Gap between edges of seasoned boards 4 mm Minimum number of spans across support 3 Nailing NATSPEC 200 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0383 Sheet flooring and decking General Make sure the boards are in contact with the joists at the time of nailing particularly where boards are machine nailed If nails are to be less than 10 mm from ends of boards pre drill nail holes 0 1 mm undersize Top nailing Double nail at each bearing with nails driven flush Offset nails at intermediate fixings or skew nail 10 in opposite directions Sealing Apply 1 coat of water repellent preservative and 1 coat of finish coat to top surface of joists and all surfaces of boards before fixing Compressed fibre cement decking Installation Lay the length of the sheets parallel or at right angles to the joists Locate end joints centrally over joists Provide noggings or trimmers joists cut between and fixed to joists to support the edges of sheets Minimum number of spans across support 2 Fixing Pre drill screw holes with 1 mm clearance over screw diameter and countersink Fix with corrosion resistant countersunk screws Apply sealant to screw hole and screw before fixing and stop screw head with sealant finished slightly below the surface after fix
343. n applies Equipment Use rollers appropriate to the materials and compaction requirements documented Moisture content General During spreading and compaction maintain material moisture content within the range of 2 to 1 from the optimum moisture content modified compaction Spraying Use water spraying equipment to distribute water uniformly in controlled quantities over uniform lane widths Dry back Allow material to dry back to 60 to 80 of the optimum moisture content prior to application of seal or wearing course Rectification General If a section of pavement material fails to meet the required density or moisture content after compaction remove the non conforming material dispose of off site or rectify for re use replace with fresh material and recompact Level corrections General Rectify incorrect levels as follows High areas Grade off Low areas Remove layers to a minimum depth of 75 mm lightly tyne and replace with new material and recompact 3 5 TESTING Compaction control tests Standard To AS 1289 5 4 1 and AS 1289 5 4 2 Frequency of compaction control tests General Not less than the following whichever requires the most tests 1 test per layer per 100 lineal metres for 2 lane roads 1 test per layer per 2000 m for carparks 3 tests per layer 3 tests per visit NATSPEC 103 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0272s Asphaltic concre
344. n of land The presence of a substance in on or under the land which is a designated hazardous material and or is at a concentration above that which is normally found in that locality such that there presents a risk of harm to human health or to the environment Green and organic waste Includes all food wastes vegetative wastes from land clearing and pruning operations biosolids produced from the treatment of liquid wastes garden wastes and forestry waste bark and saw dust and paper and cardboard products Environment The physical factors of the surroundings of human beings including the land waters atmosphere climate sound odours tastes the biological factors of animals and plants and the social factor of aesthetics Environmental audits A review of environment management practices in particular the evaluation of a site for environmental liability Environmental impact assessment A method for predicting environmental impacts of a proposed development including minimising identified impacts Environmental management plan EMP A plan describing the management of the environmental issues and considerations for the activity being undertaken This applies to the design construction and operation of the buildings and infrastructure Pollution incident An incident or set of circumstances during or as a consequence of which there is or is likely to be a leak spill or other escape of a substance as a result of which polluti
345. nc 50 um Silicone Enamel Nil conforming to phosphate containing conforming to AS NZS 2312 ALK4 MIO and Aluminium AS NZS 3750 22 pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 Type 2 NATSPEC 184 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0346 Structural fire protection systems 0346 STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide protection systems coatings to ensure structural elements conform to documented fire resistance levels 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS Structural fire protection systems Materials and components To BCA Spec A2 3 Coatings for fire protection of building elements Standard AS 3784 1 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definition FRL Fire resistance level in conformance with BCA A1 1 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SPRAYED FIRE RESISTING MATERIALS Base General Either perlite or vermiculite with gypsum as the hydraulic binding agent to form plaster Standard To BS EN 13055 1 Fillers General Either hydrated lime or limestone Decorative and protective surface finishes Compatibility Conform to AS 3784 1 clause 6 3 2 2 BOARD FIRE PROTECTION Grade and thickness FRL Provide grade and thickness to achieve the required FRL System Select from the following for building elements to achieve the required FRL or refer to a finishes sch
346. ncrete members Void formers Material capable of maintaining rigidity and shape until the concrete has set capable of withstanding construction loads and non collapsible on absorption of moisture Profiled steel sheeting composite formwork Material Hot dipped zinc coated sheet steel to AS 1397 Minimum steel grade G550 Accessories Adopt material and corrosion protection to match the profiled steel sheeting Plywood formwork Material Plywood sheeting to AS 6669 Grade To meet the design dimensions loading and surface quality specified to AS 3610 and AS 3610 1 Joints Seal the joints consistent with the surface finish class Tolerances To AS 3610 1 Section 3 2 5 REINFORCEMENT Steel reinforcement Standard To AS NZS 4671 Type Refer to structural engineer s specification Strength grade and ductility class Refer to structural engineer s specification Surface condition Free of loose mill scale rust oil grease mud or other material which would reduce the bond between the reinforcement and concrete Protective coating Corrosion protection To AS 3600 clause 4 10 3 General For concrete elements containing protective coated reinforcement provide the same coating type to all that element s reinforcement and embedded ferrous metal items including tie wires stools spacers stirrups plates and ferrules and protect other embedded metals with a suitable coating Epoxy coating High build high solids che
347. nd duties of the principal contractor and contract administrator are not altered by requirements in the documents referenced in this specification NATSPEC 17 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Current editions General Use referenced documents which are the editions with amendments current 3 months before the closing date for tenders except where other editions or amendments are required by statutory authorities 1 5 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this specification the following abbreviations apply AS Australian Standard BCA National Construction Code Series Volume One Building Code of Australia Class 2 to 9 Buildings EMC Electromagnetic compatibility MSDS Material safety data sheets NATA National Association of Testing Authorities NCC National Construction Code NZS New Zealand Standard PCA National Construction Code Series Volume 3 Plumbing Code of Australia PVC Polyvinyl Chloride VOC Volatile organic compound Definitions General For the purposes of this specification the following definitions apply Attendance Attendance provide attendance and similar expressions mean give assistance for examination and testing Contractor Contractor has the same meaning as builder and is the person or organisation bound to carry out and complete the work under the contract Contract ad
348. nd imposed loads such as those resulting from wind actions in a predictable manner 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Completion of installation 2 PRODUCTS 2 44 MATERIALS GENERALLY Structural steel Design and materials To AS 4100 Welding To the AS NZS 1554 series Galvanizing To AS NZS 4680 Cables Requirement Preload cables by cyclic loading to achieve a uniform modulus of elasticity and a linear stress strain relationship within the working range Use a swaging system to achieve a breaking strength of terminals not lower than the minimum design strength of the cable system Materials Stainless steel Grade 316 or galvanized steel Fabric Supply Supply fabric by a single manufacturer as part of a single batch Inspection Check each roll of material for flatness faults in the woven fabric and the coatings where present by visual inspection in directional sunlight at a distance of 4 m and by passing the membrane over a uniformly illuminated surface Stitching Use UV stabilised polyester thread with a minimum tensile strength of 180 N Use lock type stitching with a twin needle machine Perimeter reinforcing Reinforce the perimeter of each with UV stabilised polyester coated with PVC and incorporating pockets for the tension cables 2 2 FINISHES Surface preparation Standard To AS 1627 Anodised Standard To AS 1231 Thickness z 15 microns
349. nd testing of recovered items NATSPEC 229 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0455 Door hardware Key control System New works Submit details of the proprietary key control security system proposed by the lock manufacturer for locks required to accept a group key master grandmaster Alterations and additions Submit details to extend the existing key control security system for locks required to accept a group key Subcontractors Automatic door operators Submit names and contact details of proposed supplier and installer Pressure floor mat Submit names and contact details of proposed supplier and installer Record documents Door hardware schedule Submit an amended schedule prepared by the door hardware supplier showing changes to the contract door hardware schedule caused as follows By the approval of a hardware sample By the acceptance of an equivalent to a specified proprietary item By a contract variation to a door hardware requirement Keys Key codes Submit the lock manufacturer s record of the key coding system showing each lock type number and type of key supplied key number for re ordering and name of supplier Keys For locks keyed to differ and locks keyed alike verify quantities against key records and deliver to the contract administrator at practical completion 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 LOCKS AND LATCHES Standard General To AS 4145 2 Padlocks Standard T
350. ndensation at temperature above 2 C Coated glass units including coated SIG units Units in which the metallic coating shows evidence of manufacturing defects including but not necessarily limited to cracking or peeling as determined in conformance with ASTM C1048 Toughened glass warranty The manufacturer s warranty certifying that toughened glass supplied for use in curtain walls has been subjected to a heat soaking process which has converted at least 9596 of the nickel sulphide content to the stable beta phase NATSPEC 243 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0461b Glazing Maintenance manual Requirement Submit manufacturers published recommendations for service use Cleaning Requirement Replace damaged glass and leave the work clean polished free from defects and in good condition NATSPEC 244 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0467 Glass components 0467 GLASS COMPONENTS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide glass components in conformance with the architectural drawings 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS General Materials and installation To AS 1288 Quality requirements for cut to size and processed glass To AS NZS 4667 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following defin
351. ndows Operation Ensure that opening windows function correctly after painting Door Leafs General Paint all surfaces of door leaf Drying Leave doors fixed open to allow drying Do not allow door hardware accessories or the like to damage the door during the drying process Exclusions Exclude the following surfaces from paint systems unless specifically requested Flexible duct connections rubber hoses and mountings and other non metallic flexible fittings Wire rope and machined surfaces Metals plated or specially finished for appearance bronze brass copper and stainless steel except as specified in the Pipe identification clause of the Services worksections Aluminium frames Prefinished aluminium frames to windows and doors and trim Metal floor duct covers Raised access floors Floors Fair faced brickwork blockwork stonework artificial stone and exposed aggregates Sprayed vermiculite Floors paving roads unless otherwise specified Timber roof structure Concealed timber roof structure Timber ceiling and eaves lining Exterior timber sheeting Exterior timber stairs and decking Plastic finishes generally NATSPEC 342 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Inside of service ducts heat exchangers pipes and valves Shower seats store shelving work benches Those parts of timber fixtures such as insides of cupboard
352. ne ethylene amide or vinyledenechloride and containing stabilisers or inhibitors to make the filaments resistant to deterioration due to ultraviolet light Identification and marking To AS 3705 Protection General Provide heavy duty protective covering Store clear of the ground and out of direct sunlight During installation do not expose the filter fabric to sunlight for more than 14 days 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL Set out General Set out the positions of walls and edging and mark the positions of furniture Clearing Extent Except for trees or shrubs to be retained clear vegetation within 1 m of the landscape walls Grub out stumps and roots of removed trees or shrubs and trim the grass to ground level but do not remove the topsoil Excavation Extent Excavate for foundations and footings 3 2 SLEEPER WALLS Construction Wall Erect sleeper posts at 2 m centres buried one third Brace at half height of wall with sleepers returned into embankment spiked to posts Lay sleepers in stretcher bond behind the verticals and securely spike together at joints and at 2 m centres Back with geotextile and place a 100 mm draining layer of coarse sand or fine gravel between the fabric and backfill Backing Backfill to ground level with compacted fine crushed rock or gravels 3 3 EARTH REINFORCEMENT Construction Construction Construct walls in conformance with the manufacturer s written requirements 3 4 EDGING Log edges
353. ne the level of feature present Flooring Continuously supported Flooring which is supported by and directly fixed to a continuous supporting surface including concrete slabs and sheet flooring or underlay subfloors Fitted Flooring fitted between the walls of each room i e not platform floors Intermittently supported Flooring which is supported by and spans across beams joists or battens Strip flooring Flooring made from machined timber with tongues and grooves along the length of the strips Moisture content timber The percentage by mass of water present in the timber Parquet Timber mosaic parquet panels or wood block parquet bonded to a subfloor either directly or over an underlay Wood block parquet Rectangular blocks of timber with length a multiple of width e g 260 x 65 mm laid individually to produce a pattern Mosaic parquet panels Pre assembled timber finger modules held together to form tiles or panels Subfloor The structure that supports the flooring e g concrete slabs timber joists or battens sheet flooring or underlay and light steel joists Underlay A non structural layer of sheet material or an in situ levelling material on the subfloor to provide a smooth and level surface NATSPEC 311 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the followin
354. ned sine 130 0311b Concrete formwork n enun sutdecacecencedscaeasuccessecaecddaeeatuecteada 143 0312b Concrete reinforcement ssssnsnennnnneennnsnenennsneennnnenenennes 146 03145 Concr te in StU pm 148 0315b Concrete finishes e rr aa a a aee aa a r aa aara aae Aaaa e ea aeaea Aaaa EEaren 155 OS18S SMOG e a ANAA E R E E T A 158 0331b Brick and block construction ss nnnnnsnnensnennnnnnnns 159 0341b Structural Stee liae RS Tnt et uaa 167 0342 Light Steel framing 1225 50 nn ieri c creuser reiner 171 0344b Steel hot dip galvanized coatings seeeeeeeeeseeeee sienne nennen nnne nn nnnn nn 175 0345b Steel protective paint coatings 1esieeseeeeeseieeeeeeeseeeene nenne nnne nnn nn nnn nnne nnn nnn 177 0346 Structural fire protection systems nent 185 rasa icis ge tiinn 188 0382 Light timber framing 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeee seen seen seen nennen nnne nnne nnne nn innen inse nn nnmnnn neni nana 193 NATSPEC 2 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec Table of contents 0383 Sheet flooring and decking nent 198 0411b Waterproofing external and tanking sens 202 0421 Roofing combined nenennsnnenssnnnennsnnenennnnnenennnnnnenns 207 0431b Cladding combined ss 213 0451 AWS aluminium windows and door
355. neral Do not use explosives Existing footings Requirement If excavation is required within the zone of influence of an existing footing use methods including temporary shoring or underpinning which maintain the support of the footing and make sure that the structure and finishes supported by the footing are not damaged NATSPEC 77 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork Existing services Location Before commencing earthworks locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the earthworks operations including clearing excavating and trenching Utility services Contact DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG to identify location of underground utility services pipes and cables Excavation Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services Proof rolling Extent Proof roll excavations for pavements filling and non spanning slabs on ground to determine the presence of any bad ground Proof rolling method and equipment To AS 3798 clause 5 5 Outcome If excessive settlement rebound or heaving is encountered provide test pits or trenching to determine the extent of bad ground Disposal of excess excavated material General Remove excess excavated material from site not required or unsuitable for fill Standard To AS 3798 clause 6 1 8 3 6 SUBGRADES AFFECTED BY MOISTURE General General If the subgrade is unable to support constructi
356. ng Selections As documented Design Coordination Determine local authority requirements initially as they may affect levels including transition zones for the remainder of the works Considerations include Drainage Adjacent structures Trees BCA regulations 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Earthwork Stormwater site Pavement base and subbase Concrete combined 1 3 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply AGPT Austroads Guide to Pavement Technology CBR California Bearing Ratio CMAA Concrete Masonry Association of Australia CBPI Clay Brick and Paver Institute also known as Think Brick Australia Manual 1 Clay paving design and construction Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply Base One or more layers of material usually constituting the uppermost structural element of a pavement and on which the surfacing may be placed which may be composed of fine crushed rock natural gravel broken stone stabilised material asphalt or concrete NATSPEC 119 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0276 Segmental pavers sand bed Clay pavers Manufactured from clay shale or argillaceous materials which may be mixed with additives Clay paver
357. ng brazing or soldering using grinding buffing or other methods appropriate to the class of work before further treatment Self finished metals Free of surface colour variations after jointing Joints Fit accurately to a fine hairline Marking General Provide suitable and sufficient marks or other means for identifying each member of site erected assemblies and for their correct setting out location erection and connection Mark bolted connections to show the bolting category Do not mark stainless steel by notching Splicing General Provide structural members in single lengths 3 2 WELDING AND BRAZING General Quality Provide finished welds which are free of surface and internal cracks slag inclusion and porosity Site welds Avoid site welding wherever possible If required locate site welds in positions for down hand welding Butt weld quality level Not inferior to the appropriate level recommended in AS 1665 Appendix A Brazing General Ensure brazed joints have sufficient lap to provide a mechanically sound joint Do not used butt joints relying on the filler metal fillet only 3 3 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION Welding stainless steel Certification of welders To AS 1796 Riveting General Riveting may be used only to join stainless steel sheet or strip less than 1 mm thick Drill not punch the rivet hole and drive the rivet cold On completion clean and passivate the riveted assembly Soldering General
358. ng and stabilising operate the heating system of radiant heated or air conditioned rooms at 1 5 C above normal maximum temperature Trial set out General Prepare a trial panel set out to each area as follows to Maximise the size of equal margins of cut panels Locate control joints Laying instructions Performance for adhesive fixing Spread adhesive and lay boards to achieve the following NATSPEC 309 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0654 Engineered panel flooring Contact between panel and adhesive 75 Verify by lifting and examining 1 panel in 20 Clamp starting and finishing rows to prevent sideways movement Avoid clusters of end joints Make sure adhesive does not bleed through at joints Remove excess adhesive progressively before initial cure Hold down in contact with the adhesive over night to achieve a complete cure If pins or nails are used as well as adhesive for panels punch below the surface without bruising Fill holes to match the panels Control joints General Provide control joints as follows Against vertical building elements 12 mm wide cork filled To divide floors into maximum dimensions of 6 m 4 mm wide silicone sealant filled Room environment General During fixing and stabilising operate the heating system of radiant heated or air conditioned rooms at 1 5 C above normal maximum temperature 3 3 COMPLETION Protection Gen
359. ng certificates for type tests showing the observations and results of tests and conformance or non conformance with requirements Site tests Use instruments calibrated by authorities accredited by a Registered testing authority 2 3 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS Consistency General For each material or product use the same manufacturer or source and provide consistent type size quality and appearance Corrosion resistance General Conform to the following atmospheric corrosivity category as defined in AS NZS 2312 Galvanizing Severe conditions Galvanize mild steel components including fasteners to AS 1214 or AS NZS 4680 as appropriate if Exposed to weather Embedded in masonry Exposed to or in air spaces behind the external leaf of masonry walls In contact with chemically treated timber other than copper chrome arsenate CCA 3 EXECUTION 3 1 OFF SITE DISPOSAL Removal of material General Dispose of building waste material off site to the requirements of the relevant authorities 3 2 WALL CHASING Holes and chases General If holes and chases are required in masonry walls provide proposals to demonstrate that the structural integrity of the wall is maintained Do not chase walls nominated as fire or acoustic rated Parallel chases or recesses on opposite faces of a wall Not closer than 600 mm to each other Chasing of blockwork Only in core filled hollow blocks or in solid blocks which are not designated as st
360. ng instructions General Submit floor product manufacturer s detailed laying instructions Tests On site tests Submit results of the Moisture content alignment of flooring and subfloor Fire hazard properties Submit evidence of conformance to PRODUCTS GENERAL Critical radiant flux and Smoke development rate 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 GENERAL Moisture protection Vapour barrier Polyethylene film minimum 200 um thick laid over the concrete substrate turned up behind the skirting and lapped and taped Adhesive General Provide adhesives as documented and as follows Compatible with the substrate and flooring to be adhered Alkali resisting Solvent and water content lt 40 Shear strength when cured average 2 1 47 MPa Elasticity Sufficient to withstand continuous expansion and contraction of boards Will not break down under service Ventilation Provide adequate ventilation appropriate for moisture curing Acoustic underlay General Resilient underlay fixed with compatible adhesive Critical radiant flux Standard To AS ISO 9239 1 Flooring system Conform to the values of critical radiant flux as documented Smoke development rate Standard To AS ISO 9239 1 Floor finishes in non sprinklered buildings 750 percent minutes 2 2 PRODUCTS Flooring panels General Provide the proprietary flooring system nominated in the Engineered panel floor schedule Recycled timber Re sawn and finished to eliminate
361. ng suitable spraying equipment Continue wetting for the curing period Self levelling toppings If used also for curing confirm compliance with AS 3799 Coloured concrete Do not cure with plastic sheeting damp sand or wet hessian Use only chemical curing compounds compatible with the sealer or simply use a sealer It must then comply with the requirements of a chemical compound sealer Curing compound Application Provide a uniform continuous flexible coating to AS 3799 without visible breaks or pinholes Ensure coating remains unbroken at least for the required curing period after application Respray defective areas within 30 minutes Respray within 3 hours after heavy rain 3 8 JOINTS General General Construct expansion contraction and construction joints straight and plumb Make transverse joints normal to longitudinal joints Extend transverse expansion and contraction joints continuously from edge to edge of the pavement through interconnected slabs Joint layout Install joints as required Contraction joints Installation Construct transverse and longitudinal contraction joints by early age power sawing or by placing an insert in the fresh concrete Construction joints Installation Place header board on the subbase or subgrade at right angles to the pavement centre line Planned location Terminate each day s placing operation at a transverse construction joint located to coincide with a planned contraction or exp
362. ng surfaces including concrete slabs and sheet flooring or underlay subfloors Sprung floor A floating floor engineered to absorb shocks usually fixed on resilient pads Engineered floor panels Manufactured flooring with wearing and decorative surfaces of timber or plastic laminated to supporting layers of plywood usually with tongues and grooves along the lengths of the boards Floating floor Any manufactured flooring panel system not fixed to the substrate Moisture content Timber The percentage by mass of water present in the timber Substrate The surface to which a material or product is applied Underlay A non structural layer of sheet material or an in situ levelling material on the subfloor to provide a smooth and level surface 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Substrate Immediately before flooring Trial set out Before execution 1 5 TOLERANCES Tolerances Maximum deviation of the finished floor surface 3 mm under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction NATSPEC 307 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0654 Engineered panel flooring 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Product samples General Submit samples of each timber flooring product illustrating the range of variation in colour and figure in conformance with the Samples table Samples table Item Sample size Number Timber flooring 600x600 1 Layi
363. nges Provide continuous waterproofing under the channel and terminate the membrane at a floor waste with a recessed drainage flange Enclosed showers with hobs General Construct from masonry concrete or corrosion resistant metal Fix securely to the floor seal against walls and make flush all gaps joints and intersections before applying the membrane NATSPEC 290 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0621 Waterproofing wet areas Autoclaved aerated concrete hobs Do not use for external membrane systems Prime before applying the membrane Internal membranes Extend membrane over the hob and into the room at least 50 mm External membranes hob located inside membrane tray Dress membrane up outside of hob and finish at the underside of tiles capping the top of the hob Enclosed showers with step downs Levels Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3 5 and as follows Finish the highest level of the shower area at a level at least 15 mm below the finished floor level outside the shower Extend the membrane at least 10 mm above the maximum retained water level in the area outside the shower or 150 mm above the finished floor level of the shower area whichever is the greater With framed shower screens Terminate the membrane directly below the floor tiles below the shower screen sill mounted on the upper level of the step down Support and adhere the membrane to a water stop angle fixed securely to the up
364. ngs to AS 1562 1 for resistance to concentrated load and to wind pressure Metal roofing in cyclonic regions AS NZS 1170 2 Roof sheeting and fastenings to AS 1562 1 clause 5 6 Fibre cement roofing Type test the roof sheeting and fixings to AS NZS 1562 2 for resistance to wind forces Internal downpipes Submit results of site tests to each stack hydrostatically in stages 2 storeys high for two hours Remedy defects and retest if necessary 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 COMPONENTS Fasteners Finish Prefinish exposed fasteners with an oven baked polymer coating to match the roofing material Fastenings to timber battens Provide fastenings just long enough to penetrate the thickness of the batten without piercing the underside Profiled fillers Type Purpose made closed cell polyethylene foam profiled to match the roofing profile Location Provide profiled fillers under flashings to the following Ridges Eaves Lapped joints in roof sheeting Safety mesh Standard To AS NZS 4389 2 2 SHEET METAL ROOFING Standards Design and installation To AS 1562 1 NATSPEC 207 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0421 Roofing combined Prepainted and organic film metal laminate products To AS NZS 2728 Roofing product Refer to architectural drawings 2 3 ROOF PLUMBING General Standard To AS NZS 3500 3 General Provide the flashings cappings gutters rainwater heads outlets and downpi
365. ns Curing Allow membrane to fully cure before tiling Overlaying finishes on membranes Requirement Protect waterproof membranes with compatible water resistant surface materials that do not cause damage to the membrane Suitable materials Conform to AS 3740 Bonded or partially bonded systems If the topping or bedding mortar is required to be bonded to the membrane provide sufficient control joints in the topping or bedding mortar to reduce the movement over the membrane 3 8 FLOOD TEST General Application Perform a flood test before the installation of surface finishes Moisture measurement method Conform to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B Set up Measure the wall floor junction of adjacent spaces and the floor soffit below for dryness Record the result for each area Dam the doorway s and seal floor wastes and drainage outlets to allow 50 mm water level Fill space with clean water and leave overnight Evaluation Make a visual inspection of the wall floor junction of adjacent spaces and of the floor soffit below for obvious water or moisture Test the same areas for dryness and compare the results to the measurements taken prior to flooding Compliance Evidence of water from the visual test Failure No visual evidence of water Proceed with moisture measurements Test results indicating an increase in moisture before and after flooding Failure Records Submit records of all flood tests
366. ns zinc coated by a continuous or specialised process To AS NZS 4792 Network Utility Operator A person who undertakes the piped distribution of drinking water or natural gas for supply or is the operator of a sewerage system or a stormwater system Obtain Obtain seek and similar expressions mean obtain seek in writing from the contract administrator Practical completion or Defects free completion The requirements for these stages of completion are defined in the relevant building contract for the project Pipe Includes pipe and tube Principal Principal has the same meaning as owner client and proprietor and is the party to whom the contractor is legally bound to construct the works Professional engineer As defined by the BCA Proprietary Proprietary means identifiable by naming manufacturer supplier installer trade name brand name catalogue or reference number Provide Provide and similar expressions mean supply and install and include development of the design beyond that documented Readily accessible To AS NZS 3000 Record drawings Record drawings has the same meaning as as installed drawings as built drawings and work as executed drawings Registered testing authority Anorganisation registered by the National Association of Testing Authorities NATA to test in the relevant field or Anorganisation outside Australia registered by an authority recognised by NATA through a mu
367. nsisting of rolled angle sections or sections fabricated from metal sheet bent to the radius or angle of the corner Fitting close to adjoining surface finishes Solidly grouted up at the back as necessary to eliminate voids Securely fixed by a method which does not cause distortion in the guard surface and consists of either concealed built in lugs or flush countersunk head fixings into masonry anchors 3 7 COMPLETION Maintenance manual General Submit manufacturer s published recommendations for service use Cleaning Temporary coatings On or before completion of the works or before joining up to other surfaces remove all traces of temporary coatings used as a means of protection NATSPEC 267 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0581b Signs and display 0581B SIGNS AND DISPLAY 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide signage systems as documented and as follows Appropriately secured Located within a clear line of vision To contrast with the background With clean well defined edges or arises and free from blemishes 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS Signs Safety signs design and use To AS 1319 Signs and graphics for disabled access AS NZS 1428 1 and AS 1428 2 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Materials standards Aluminium Plate for engraving A
368. nspection and testing that will be carried out on the surface preparation coating application and the record keeping tasks to be undertaken MSDS The formal Material Safety Data Sheet prepared in conformance with Worksafe Australia s requirements and distributed by the coating manufacturer to provide information on the safe handling storage personal protective equipment requirements use and disposal of a coating product 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Detailing of structural steelwork General If design and fabrication features of the items to be coated may lead to difficulties advise before commencing surface preparation Maintenance paint coating systems Existing systems Itemise areas of corrosion damage and other degradation Recoating systems Supply coating systems for maintenance painting of previously coated items and structural elements including surface preparation Warranties General Submit details of the proposed warranty terms form and period If separate warranties are offered by the manufacturer and the applicator ensure they are interlocking NATSPEC 177 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings 1 6 SAMPLES Painting and coating colour General Submit a sample of the finished product for each different coating system Size of each sample 400 x 400 mm Retention Retain half of each sample for comparison during coating application 2 PRODUCTS
369. nt and shrinkage If timber is unseasoned use species with similar shrinkage values Vertical movement For unseasoned framing provide adequate clearance at the top of masonry veneer and face fixed members to reduce vertical movement 3 3 FINISHING Ploughing General Back plough boards liable to warp e g if exposed externally on one face Make the width depth and distribution of ploughs appropriate to the dimensions of the board and degree of exposure Painting Edges Chamfer edges of work to receive paint or similar coatings Priming For woodwork to be painted prime hidden surfaces before assembly Working with treated timber Safety Handle preservative treated timber to the National code NATSPEC 51 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0186 Building IT components 0186 BUILDING IT COMPONENTS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to electrical engineer s specification NATSPEC 52 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0186 Building IT components NATSPEC 53 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0193 Roof access safety systems 0193 ROOF ACCESS SAFETY SYSTEMS 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide the fall protection system in conformance with SELECTIONS Outcomes Maintain the waterproofing integrity of roofing and cladding without damage or distortion Maintain the structura
370. ntact with jointing materials Apply a neutral cure sealant to powder coated surfaces Operation General Make sure moving parts operate freely and smoothly without binding or sticking at correct tensions or operating forces and are lubricated Protection Protective coverings Retain proprietary temporary protection measures during installation and remove as follows Contact mating surfaces before joining up Exposed surfaces Upon completion In situ touch up Polyester or fluoropolymer coatings Contact supplier for approval to apply touch up products otherwise replace damaged material Trim General Provide mouldings architraves reveal linings and other internal trim using materials and finishes matching the window frames Install to make neat and clean junctions between frames and the adjoining building surfaces 3 2 HARDWARE Fasteners Materials Use materials compatible with the item being fixed and of sufficient strength size and quality to perform their function Concealed fixings Provide a corrosion resistant finish Exposed fixings Match exposed fixings to the material being fixed Support Provide appropriate back support for example lock stiles blocking wall noggings and backing plates for hardware fixings Hollow metal sections Provide backing plates drilled and tapped for screw fixing or provide rivet nuts with machine thread screws Do not use self tapping screws or pop rivets Proprietar
371. ntraction joints 20 mm deep every 5 m Timing Carry out concrete edge restraints before bedding course Allow concrete edge restraints to be harden before vibration of the surface course Brick Setting On a 1 1 6 cement lime sand mortar haunch Joints 3 mm struck flush Alignment Even and free from dips humps and bends Cleaning Wash off mortar progressively 3 4 BEDDING COURSE General Preparation Remove all loose material from the prepared base Geotextile Position Place fabric between the base course and the bedding sand Bedding sand Spreading Screed uncompacted sand over prepared base uniformly to achieve a 30 mm thick layer Maintain sand at a uniform loose density and moisture content Bedding course drainage If water ponding occurs at edge restraint drain bedding course to existing subsurface drain or drainage pit using geotextile and 20 mm diameter PVC pipe Trial section Moisture content Prepare a trial section to establish the moisture content limits which will allow paver system compaction to be achieved 3 5 LAYING PAVING General Pattern Lay paving units on the screeded sand bedding to the nominated pattern shown on the drawings Joints 2 5 mm gap Cut courses 50 mm minimum plan dimension On footpaths and other linear elements use at least two cut courses and maintain symmetry Control Control alignment and laying pattern by stringlines or chalked stringlines every 5 m intervals Vari
372. nual of recommendations from the roof manufacturer or supplier for the maintenance of the roofing system including frequency of inspection and recommended methods of access inspection cleaning repair and replacement Spare tiles Number Provide one spare matching tile for every hundred tiles on the roof Provide spare accessories in the same ratio Location Stack spares within the roof space Designated locations On or next to lines of supporting walls NATSPEC 211 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0421 Roofing combined NATSPEC 212 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0431b Cladding combined 0431B CLADDING COMBINED 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide lightweight external wall cladding and associated work which is as follows Satisfies the product performance requirements 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give sufficient notice so that the framing sarking vapour barrier and insulation may be inspected before they are covered up or concealed 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 HARDBOARD PLANKS Wet processed fibreboard including hardboard Standard To AS NZS 1859 4 Plank cladding Type A proprietary system of hardboard planks Product Refer to architectural drawings Plank thickness 9 5 mm Joints and edges P
373. nward and outward from the bottom edge of a footing slab or pavement and defining the extent of foundation material having influence on the stability or support of the footings slab or pavement 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following tems to be measured as listed in Records of measurement Areas to be cleared and or stripped of topsoil Areas stripped of topsoil Excavation completed to contract levels or founding material Proof roll subgrade before placing fill Filling completed to contract levels Stockpiled topsoil before spreading 1 6 TOLERANCES General Finish Finish the surface to the required level grade and shape within the following tolerances Under building slabs and load bearing elements 0 25 mm Pavement subgrades 0 40 mm Batters No steeper than the slope shown on the drawings Ensure flatter slopes do not impact on boundaries or required clearances to buildings pavements or landscaping Other ground surfaces 50 mm provided the area remains free draining and matches adjacent construction where required Provide smoothness as normally produced by a scraper blade 1 7 SUBMISSIONS Design Calculations Submit calculations by a professional engineer to show that proposed excavations and temporary supports including where applicable supports for adjacent structures will be stable and safe Tests Compaction Submit
374. o AS 4145 4 Lock and latch classification Rating systems To AS 4145 1 Section 3 Performance requirements To AS 4145 2 Section 3 2 2 HINGES Butt hinge sizes Size for door types Conform to tables as follows Timber doors in timber or metal frames Hinge table A Aluminium framed doors in aluminium frames Hinge table B Cupboard doors Not included in hinge tables Measurement Length I is the dimension along the knuckles not including hinge tips if any and width w is the dimension across both hinge leaves when opened flat Butt hinge materials Timber doors in timber or steel frames Material Grade 304 stainless steel Aluminium framed doors in aluminium frames Material Aluminium Doors fitted with closers Provide low friction ball bearing hinges Fire doors To AS 1905 1 Power transfer hinges Make sure they do not assume any load and are installed with other compatible hinges Lift off doors If toilet cubicles require lift off doors provide Lift Off hinges detail the door panel with clearance at the head and provide appropriate handles for lifting NATSPEC 230 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0455 Door hardware 2 3 HINGE TABLES Solid core doors Application Provide hinges to solid core doors to Hinges table A The table can be used to determine the quantity of hinges required for the nominated door leaf sizes and weights only For door leaf sizes n
375. o accommodate the projected movement under the conditions of service Refurbishment Use sealants that can be safely removed and prepared for refurbishment Fasteners Provide fasteners accredited for the particular use capable of transmitting imposed loads and maintaining the rigidity of the assembly 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 ADHESIVES Standards Mastic adhesive To AS 2329 Polymer emulsion adhesive for timber To AS 2754 2 not inferior to Type 3 High strength adhesive tape General description A foam of cross linked polyethylene or closed cell acrylic coated both sides with a high performance acrylic adhesive system encased in release liners of paper or polyester NATSPEC 33 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0181 Adhesives sealants and fasteners Product classification Make sure product suitability for the following substrates Firm high strength foam tapes for high energy surfaces including most bare metals such as stainless steel and aluminium Conformable high strength foam for medium energy surfaces including many plastics and paints and bare metals Conformable high strength foam for lower energy surfaces including many plastics most paints and powder coatings and bare metals Thickness Select the tape to make sure a mismatch between surfaces does not exceed half the tape thickness under the applied lamination pressure 2 2 SEALANTS Standards General To ISO 11600 Exte
376. o construction load physical and thermal shocks and excessive vibrations particularly during the curing period Surface protection Protect finished concrete surfaces and applied finishes from damage NATSPEC 142 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0311b Concrete formwork 0311B CONCRETE FORMWORK 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide formwork as documented and as follows Construct formwork to provide cast concrete with the documented dimensions location profile shape and finish Allow for dimensional changes deflections and cambers resulting from the following Imposed actions Concrete shrinkage and creep Temperature changes Design General The design of formwork other than profiled steel sheeting composite formwork is the contractor s responsibility 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Concrete finishes 1 3 STANDARDS General Formwork design and construction To AS 3610 and AS 3610 1 Plywood formwork To AS 6669 Profiled steel sheeting including shear connectors To AS 2327 1 Concrete materials and construction To AS 3600 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Completed formwork before placing concrete Used formwork after cleaning and before re use 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Certification Design certification For oth
377. oard cores Solid core door A flush door with a solid core continuous between stiles and rails or edge strips and fully bonded to the faces Joinery door A door leaf with either stiles and rails or stiles rails and muntins framed together A joinery door may also incorporate glazing bars Louvred door A joinery door with spaces filled in with louvre blades Panelled door A joinery door with spaces filled in with panels including glass 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Type tests General Submit type test certification conforming to the following standards to verify conformance with the Doorsets performance schedule Fire and smoke doors To AS 1905 1 and BCA Spec C3 4 Weighted sound reduction index Ry To AS NZS ISO 717 1 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 FRAMES Aluminium frames General Assembled from aluminium sections including accessories such as buffers pile strips strike plates fixing ties or brackets and cavity flashing with provision for fixing documented hardware Threshold If the frame includes a threshold member provide a self draining section with anti skid surface NATSPEC 224 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0453b Doors and access panels Steel frames General Continuously welded from metallic coated steel sheet sections including accessories such as buffers strike plates spreaders mortar guards switch boxes fixing ties or brackets and cavity flashing with provision for fixing d
378. ociation of Steel Housing Standard 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of steel framing erected on site before lining or cladding 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Design General Where the structural drawings define performance criteria submit independent design documentation and certification from a professional engineer including for the erected work Reactions Provide location and magnitude of reactions to be accommodated by the support structure Floor and wall frame member sizes Submit a schedule of proposed member sizes certified as meeting stated project and AS NZS 4600 requirements for span spacings and loadings Shop drawings General Submit shop detail drawings certified by a professional engineer stating that the design has been carried out in accordance with documented project and AS NZS 4600 requirements for the configurations and loadings Roof trusses Prepare drawings to show Ona plan the truss layout On elevations the arrangement of members allowing for the accommodation of in roof services and the size and section type of each member The method of assembly connection holding down and bracing Wall frames If wall framing is to be pre fabricated prepare drawings to show On plan the wall layout On elevations the arrangement of members and the size and section type of each member The method of assembly connection holding down and bracing NATSPEC 1
379. ocking bars or use proprietary expansion anchors and screw twice through jambs at each fixing Fixing to stud frame openings Attach galvanized steel brackets to jambs and screw twice to studs at each fixing Timber frames Building in to masonry Screw galvanized steel brackets twice to jambs and build in Fixing to masonry openings Build in seasoned timber plugs to masonry joints or use proprietary expansion anchors and screw twice through jambs at each fixing Fixing to stud frame openings Back screw twice to jambs at each fixing Fixing to thresholds Dowel external door frames to thresholds other than timber with 10 mm diameter brass dowels 100 mm long Heads of fasteners Conceal if possible otherwise sink the head below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish Finishing Trim Provide mouldings architraves reveal linings and other internal trim using materials and finishes matching the door frames to make neat and clean junctions between the frame and the adjoining building surfaces Seals General Provide the fixings rebates grooves and clearances required for installation and operation of the seals Allow seals unwound from coils to settle before use Weatherproofing Flashings and weatherings Install flashings weather bars drips storm moulds caulking and pointing to prevent water from penetrating the building between the door frame and the building structure under the
380. ocumented hardware and electronic security assemblies and prefinished with a protective coating Finish Grind the welds smooth cold galvanize the welded joints and shop prime Hardware and accessories Provide 4 mm backplates and lugs for fixing hardware including hinges and closers Screw fix the hinges into tapped holes in the backplates Base metal thickness General 2 1 1 mm Fire rated doorsets 2 1 5 mm Security doorsets 2 1 6 mm Metallic coated steel sheet To AS 1397 Coating class interior ZF 100 Timber frames Hardwood To AS 2796 1 Grade Select Softwood To AS 4785 1 Grade Select Joints Morticed head and through tenons Trenched head Bare faced tenons on jambs Full let in jambs 2 2 DOORS General Doors Proprietary products manufactured for interior or exterior applications and for the finish required Materials Standards Conform to the following Decorative laminated sheets To AS NZS 2924 1 Wet processed fibreboard including hardboard To AS NZS 1859 4 Dry processed fibreboard including medium density fibreboard To AS NZS 1859 2 Particleboard To AS NZS 1859 1 Plywood and blockboard for interior use To AS NZS 2270 Plywood and blockboard for exterior use To AS NZS 2271 Seasoned cypress pine To AS 1810 Timber hardwood To AS 2796 1 Timber softwood To AS 4785 1 Certification Panel doors Provide panels branded under th
381. odes schedule Key codes schedule Door no Door Room Level Lock Cylinder Cam Key head colour Comments stamping name Area type type type Key no Qty NATSPEC 234 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0455 Door hardware NATSPEC 235 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0457 External screens 0457 EXTERNAL SCREENS 1 GENERAL 1 34 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide external screens that are Plumb level straight and true within the building tolerances of the structural system Undamaged and free of surface defects or distortions Fixed or fastened to the building structure Able to resist wind and other actions without vibration or permanent distortion Selections As documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARDS General Aluminium framed sunscreens awnings and shutters Stress analysis of members To AS NZS 1664 1 or AS NZS 1664 2 Horizontal screen loadings To AS NZS 1170 1 Table 3 2 Electrically operated external louvres and blinds Drive motors To AS NZS 60335 2 97 Access for maintenance To AS 1657 Glazing Glass type and thickness To AS 1288 if no glass type or thickness is nominated Other glazing materials To AS 1288 Installation To AS 1288 Quality requirements
382. of matt white casein kaolin paint The reverse side is natural finish with a heavier texture Standard trade common names To AS NZS 1148 Wet processed fibreboard hardboard A panel material with a minimum nominal thickness of 1 5 mm manufactured from lignocellulosic fibres derived from wood or other materials with application of heat and or pressure the bond of which is derived from felting of the fibres and the panels are manufactured with forming moisture content greater than 20 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Products Rainforest species Submit source certification Pressure preservative treatment For timber required to be pressure treated submit a certificate or other evidence showing that the timber has been treated Technical data Treated timber Submit Material safety data sheets for preservative treated timber to the National code 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 CERTIFICATION Preservative treatment branding Requirement Branding details of preservative treatment as follows Treatment number Preservative code number Hazard class Timber certification Recognised product certification programs Pine framing Plantation Timber Certification Hardwoods Australian Timber Industry Certification ATIC Quality Scheme Glued laminated timber Glued Laminated Timber Association of Australia GLTAA Product Certification System Laminated veneer lumber Engineered Wood Products Association of Australasia EWPAA Quality Con
383. of the floor At junctions between different substrates To divide large tiled areas into bays At abutments with the building structural frame and over supporting walls or beams where flexing of the substrate is anticipated Wall location Over structural control joints At junctions with different substrate materials when the tiling is continuous At vertical corners in shower compartments Depth of joint Right through to the substrate Sealant width 6 25 mm Depth of elastomeric sealant One half the joint width or 6 mm whichever is the greater 3 9 GROUTED AND SEALANT JOINTS Grouted joints General Commence grouting as soon as practicable after bedding has set Clean out joints as necessary before grouting Face grouting Fill the joints solid and tool flush Clean off surplus grout Wash down when the grout has set When grout is dry polish the surface with a clean cloth Edges of tiles Grout exposed edge joints Epoxy grouted joints Ensure that tile edge surfaces are free of extraneous matter such as cement films or wax before grouting Mosaic tiles Grouting mosaics If paper faced mosaics are to be bedded in cement mortar pre grout the sheeted mosaics from the back before fixing After fixing rub grout into the surface of the joints to fill any voids NATSPEC 299 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling left from pre grouting Clean off sur
384. of water 60 C when placed in the mixer Concrete Prevent concrete from freezing without using salts or chemicals Placing in hot weather Handling Prevent premature stiffening of the fresh mix and reduce water absorption and evaporation losses Mix transport place and compact the concrete conforming to the Elapsed delivery time table Placing concrete Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete conforming to the Hot weather placing table Evaporation control barriers Erect barriers to protect freshly placed concrete from drying winds Formwork and reinforcement Before and during placing maintain temperature at lt 35 C Temperature control Select one or more of the following methods of maintaining the specified temperature of the placed concrete at 35 C Cool the concrete using liquid nitrogen injection before placing Cover horizontal transport containers Spray the coarse aggregate using cold water before mixing Usechilled mixing water Hot weather placing table Concrete element Temperature limit Normal concrete in footings beams columns 35 C walls and slabs Concrete in sections 2 1 m in all dimensions 27 C except for concrete of strength 40 MPa or greater in sections exceeding 600 mm in thickness NATSPEC 139 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Placing under water Condition If placing in the dry is
385. ollowing Service penetrations completed and ready for fire stopping Finished fire stopping before being concealed 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS General Shelf life Use materials that have not exceeded their shelf life Toxic materials Free of asbestos and lead and free of nor requiring the use of toxic solvents Toxicity in fire Non toxic Fire stop mortars Type Re enterable cement based compound mixed with water Non shrinking moisture resistant Insoluble in water after setting Formulated compound of incombustible fibres Material Formulated compound mixed with mineral fibres non shrinking moisture resistant Insoluble in water after setting Fibre stuffing Material Mineral fibre stuffing insulation dry and free of other contaminants Standard AS NZS 4859 1 Section 8 Fire stop sealants Material Elastomeric sealant Soft permanently flexible non sag non shrinking moisture resistant Capable of providing a smoke tight gas tight and waterproof seal when properly installed Insoluble in water after setting NATSPEC 39 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0182b Fire stopping Fire stop foams Material Single component compound of reactive foam ingredients non shrinking moisture resistant Insoluble in water after setting Fire stop putty Material Single component mouldable permanently flexible non shrinking moisture resistant intumescent compound which expand
386. ominated primer before contamination can reoccur Ensure that the primer overlaps the sound adjacent coating by between 25 mm and 50 mm Apply intermediate and topcoats over the primed welds to match the surrounding coating system overlapping the sound adjacent coating by between 25 mm and 50 mm Preparing galvanized and aluminium surfaces Remove grease oil and other solvent soluble contaminants by wiping with mineral turpentine or white spirit Finally wipe with a clean solvent Allow to dry and proceed with the next operation immediately Abrade surfaces to a medium coarse type finish to provide an adhesion key Preparing zinc primed surfaces If present remove zinc salts from zinc primers Remove grease oil and other solvent soluble contaminants by wiping with mineral turpentine or white spirit Finally wipe with a clean solvent Allow to dry and proceed with the next operation immediately Shop priming Dust off and apply a coat of primer according to the technical specification Site coating General High pressure fresh water wash down all surfaces Lightly sand down primer intermediate coats which have been shop applied before site application of next coat 3 4 COATING APPLICATION General General Conform to the Product Data Sheets NATSPEC 179 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings Painting and coating colour Verify all project finish colours
387. ompaction operations Where necessary limit the size of compaction equipment or compact by hand Commence compacting each layer at the structure and proceed away from it Protective covering Do not disturb or damage the protective covering of membranes during backfilling Placing at structures General Place and compact fill in layers simultaneously on both sides of structures culverts and pipelines to avoid differential loading Carefully place first layers of fill over the top of structures Concrete Do not place fill against concrete retaining walls until the concrete has been in place for 28 days unless the structure is supported by struts 3 15 PLACING TOPSOIL Stockpiled topsoil Cultivation Rip to a depth of 100 mm or to the depth of rippable subgrade if less Cultivate around services and tree roots by hand Trim to allow for the required topsoil depth Herbicide Apply before placing topsoil Placing Spread and grade evenly Disposal of excess topsoil On site Dispose of surplus topsoil remaining on site by spreading evenly over the areas already placed Off site Remove excess topsoil from the site and dispose of legally Compaction Lightly compact topsoil so that the finished surface is smooth free from lumps of soil at the required level ready for cultivation and planting Edges Finish topsoil flush with abutting kerbs mowing strips and paved surfaces Feather edges into adjoining undisturbed ground 3 16 FILL MOIS
388. ompound NATSPEC 247 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0467 Glass components 3 3 FIXING MIRRORS Vinyl backed Grade A Safety mirrors and solid backed annealed glass mirrors Screw fixing Fix direct to wall plugs with dome headed chromium plated screws in each corner and at 900 mm maximum centres around perimeter Provide polyethylene sleeves and washers to prevent contact between screw and glass Do not over tension the screws Frame fixing Proprietary aluminium frames to mirror perimeter corners mitred If unbacked bed glass edges in a continuous resilient gasket Attach the frame to the substrate with concealed screw fixings Seal the frame to the substrate with paintable sealant which will not react with the mirror coating Do not allow the sealant to contact the mirror back Bead fixing Rebated timber beads to mirror perimeter corners mitred If unbacked bed glass edges in a continuous resilient gasket Screw fix the beads to the substrate Clip fixing Fix direct to wall plugs with chromium plated fixed clip and spring clip fixings at 900 mm maximum centres around perimeter If unbacked provide polyethylene or cork washers to prevent contact between clips and mirror back 3 4 GLAZED SHOWER SCREENS Water shedding Requirement Provide an assembly which sheds water to the inside without retaining it on the frame surfaces Seal the edge of the frame to adjoining surfaces with a resilient strip
389. on equipment or it is not possible to compact the overlying pavement only because of a high moisture content perform one or more of the following Allow the subgrade to dry until it will support equipment and allow compaction Scarify the subgrade to a depth of 150 mm work as necessary to accelerate drying and recompact when the moisture content is satisfactory Excavate the wet material and remove to spoil and backfill excavated areas 3 7 BEARING SURFACES General General Provide even plane bearing surfaces for loadbearing elements including footings Step to accommodate level changes Make the steps to the appropriate courses if supporting masonry Deterioration General If the bearing surface deteriorates because of water or other cause excavate further to a sound surface before placing the loadbearing element 3 8 REINSTATEMENT OF EXCAVATION General Fill adjacent structures and trenches To AS 3798 clause 6 2 6 Zone of influence Within the zone of influence of footings beams or other structural elements use concrete of strength equal to the structural element minimum 15 MPa Ensure that remedial concrete does not create differential bearing conditions Below slabs or pavements Provide selected fill compacted to the specified density Cut subgrades Where the over excavation is less than 100 mm do not backfill Make good by increasing the thickness of the layer above Rock depressions and subsoil drains Backf
390. on has occurred is occurring or is likely to occur Weed An invasive plant that degrades our natural areas reduces the sustainability or affects the health of people and animals 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Emergency response Emergency response personnel Provide staff member s names and contact details Weed management personnel Requirement Submit details of the following NATSPEC 67 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0221b Site management Subcontractors who will treat weed infestations Chemical handlers qualifications date and spray type 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Enclosures to trees to be retained 2 EXECUTION 2 4 GENERAL Community liaison General Notify residents about new or changed construction activities which will affect access to or disrupt the use of their properties Notice 5 working days unless the work is of an urgent nature with safety implications Notification content The nature of the work The reason for it being undertaken The expected duration Changes to traffic arrangements and property access The 24 hour contact number of the responsible representative Legislative requirements Conditions of Development Approval relevant to environment controls DA0274 1 1 Complaints Report Within 1 working day of receiving a complaint about any environmental issue including
391. on methods To AS 1627 Coating mass thickness minimum To AS NZS 4680 Threaded fasteners coating mass thickness minimum To AS 1214 Table 2 2 EXECUTION 2 4 GENERAL Care Dimensional change If design and fabrication features of items to be galvanized are likely to lead to dimensional change or distortion identify these and submit proposals for its minimisation Embrittlement Take due care to avoid embrittlement of susceptible steels Mechanical properties Avoid mechanical damage Ensure that mechanical properties of the base metal do not change Surface preparation Surface contaminants and coatings generally Chemical clean then acid pickle Chemical cleaning To AS 1627 1 Acid pickling To AS 1627 5 Inhibitor Required Post treatment General Passivate Drilling after completion of hot dip galvanizing Repair Prime drill hole surfaces to AS NZS 4680 clause 8 before the surfaces begin to corrode Coating Threaded fasteners To AS 1214 Structural sections Cold worked items Except for hollow sections anneal to 650 C before galvanizing Hollow sections Provide seal plates with breather holes Surface finish Standard To AS NZS 4680 clause 7 NATSPEC 175 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0344b Steel hot dip galvanized coatings Coating quality Continuous adherent smooth or evenly textured and uniform free from defects detrimental to the end use of the finis
392. ons General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Subfloor The structure that supports the sheet flooring and decking Moisture content The percentage by mass of water present in the timber Equilibrium moisture content EMC For given conditions of humidity and temperature the moisture content which timber approaches at which it neither gains nor loses moisture while the conditions of its environment are maintained Flooring Fitted Flooring fitted between the walls of each room i e not platform floors Intermittently supported Flooring which is supported by and spans across beams or joists Continuously supported Flooring which is supported by and directly fixed to a continuous supporting surface Platform Flooring laid over the whole of the joisted floor structure before the erection of external and internal wall frames Decking Intermittently supported external flooring with drainage gaps between boards Joints Butt Floor boards cross cut square with plain ends for joining over supports End matched Floor boards tongue and grooved at the ends to allow joining between supports 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Subfloor before laying sheet flooring fibre cement flooring or decking 15 TESTS Product moisture content General Confirm that the moisture content of the timber decking as delivered matches the
393. ons loading and surface quality specified to AS 3610 1 Joints Seal the joints consistent with the surface finish class Tolerances To AS 3610 1 Section 3 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Cleaning General Before placing concrete remove free water dust debris and stains from the formwork and the formed space 3 2 CONSTRUCTION General General Conform to the Concrete finishes worksection Bolt holes Removable bolts Remove tie bolts without causing damage to the concrete Corners Work above ground Fillet at re entrant angles and chamfer at corners Face of bevel 25 mm Embedments General Fix embedments through formwork to prevent movement or loss of slurry or concrete during concrete placement Openings General In vertical formwork provide openings or removable panels for inspection and cleaning at the base of columns walls and deep beams Access For thin walls and columns provide access panels for placing concrete Profiled steel sheeting composite formwork Fixing If sheeting cannot be fixed to structural steel supports with puddle welds or with welded shear studs in composite construction provide details Steel linings Rust Clean off any rust and apply rust inhibiting agent before re use Visually important surfaces General For concrete of surface finish classes 1 2 or 3 set out the formwork to give a regular arrangement of panels joints bolt holes and similar visible elements in the formed surf
394. ontaining the information required in AS 1012 2 the individual and combined aggregate particle size distribution and the records and reports for the tests 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 REINFORCEMENT General Steel reinforcement Steel bars or mesh to AS NZS 4671 Ductility class L or N Identification Supply reinforcement which is readily identifiable as to grade and origin Reinforcement and joint requirements Refer to structural engineer Surface condition Free of loose mill scale rust oil grease mud or other material which would reduce the bond between the reinforcement and concrete Accessories Bar chairs Use plastic tipped wire bar chairs NATSPEC 107 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement Tie wire Galvanized annealed steel 1 25 mm diameter minimum Dowels General Provide each dowel in one piece straight cut accurately to length with ends square and free from burrs Standard To AS NZS 4671 Grade 250R steel bars 450 mm long End tolerances Ensure that deformation of an end from its true circular shape does not exceed 1 mm nor extend more than 1 mm from the end Tie bars Type Deformed bar 12 mm diameter grade 500N 1 m long 2 2 AGGREGATE Characteristics Standards AS 2758 1 Quality Provide at least 4096 by mass of the total aggregates in the concrete mix of quartz sand aggregate having a nominal size of 5 mm and containing at least 70 quartz
395. ooding Failure Records Submit records of all flood tests 3 4 COMPLETION Protection General Keep traffic off membrane surfaces until bonding has set or for 24 hours after laying whichever period is the longer Reinstatement Repair or replace faulty or damaged work If the work cannot be repaired satisfactorily replace the whole area affected Warranty Waterproofing Cover materials and workmanship in the terms of the warranty in the form of interlocking warranties from the supplier and the applicator Form Against failure of materials and execution under normal environment and use conditions Minimum period 7 years NATSPEC 206 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0421 Roofing combined 0421 ROOFING COMBINED 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide a roofing system and associated work as documented and which satisfies the product performance requirements as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of Roof supports Those parts of the roofing sarking vapour barrier insulation and roof plumbing installation which will be covered up or concealed 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Tests General Submit results of type tests as follows Metal roofing general tests Roof sheeting and fasteni
396. ormed purlins and girts to AS 1397 G550 Z350 or Z450 G450 Z350 or Z450 2 2 BOLTS Bolts nuts and washers General Hot dip galvanized corrosion free and in serviceable condition 3 EXECUTION 3 1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION General Substitution If substitution of members is proposed provide details NATSPEC 168 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0341b Structural steel Beam camber General If beam members have a natural camber within the straightness tolerance fabricate and erect them with the camber up Straightening Care If correcting distorted members conform to the submitted procedures and avoid damage Work exposed to view Welds Grind smooth but do not reduce the weld below its nominal size Shearing flame cutting and chipping Perform carefully and accurately Corners and edges Grind fair those corners and edges which are sharp marred or roughened Site work General Other than work shown on the shop drawings as site work do not fabricate modify or weld structural steel on site Identification marks General Provide marks or other means of identifying each member compatible with the finish for the setting out location erection and connection of the steelwork in conformance with the marking plans Monorail beams Identify and mark rated capacity in conformance with AS 1418 18 clause 5 12 6 Tolerances Measurement Tolerances are to be checked by measur
397. ormwork while the concrete is green Dampen the surface and spread a slurry using hessian pads or sponge rubber floats Remove surplus slurry and work until a uniform colour and texture are produced Smooth rubbed finish Remove the vertical face formwork while the concrete is green Wet the surface and rub using a carborundum or similar abrasive brick until a uniform colour and texture are produced NATSPEC 141 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined 3 11 UNFORMED SURFACES General Finished levels Strike off screed and level slab surfaces to finished levels to and the flatness tolerance class documented Surface repairs Method If surface repairs are required submit proposals Finishing methods primary finish Machine float finish After levelling consolidate the surface using a machine float Cut and fill and refloat immediately to a uniform smooth granular texture Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float Steel trowel finish After machine floating finish as follows Use power or hand steel trowels to produce a smooth surface relatively free from defects When the surface has hardened sufficiently re trowel to produce the final consolidated finish free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance Burnished finish Continue steel trowelling until the concrete surface attains a polished or glossy finish uniform in text
398. orne 40 um waterborne Nil inorganic zinc Acrylic conforming to conforming to AS NZS 3750 16 AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC lt 75 g L VOC 15 g L External non decorative 75 um waterborne Nil Nil conforming to AS NZS 2312 IZS2 inorganic zinc conforming to AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC lt 15 g L External decorative 75 um waterborne 50 um waterborne epoxy 40 um waterborne NATSPEC 183 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0345b Steel protective paint coatings Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat exceeding AS NZS 2312 IZS2 inorganic zinc conforming to conforming to AS NZS 3750 13 Acrylic conforming to AS NZS 3750 16 AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC lt 20 g L VOC lt 75 g L VOC lt 15 g L Industrial silicone enamel AS NZS 2312 Category A and B table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 75 um Alkyd zinc Nil Nil phosphate containing MIO and Aluminium pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 Type 2 Internal decorative 75 um Alkyd zinc 50 um Silicone Enamel Nil phosphate containing conforming to MIO and Aluminium AS NZS 3750 22 pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 Type 2 External non decorative 75 um Alkyd zinc Nil Nil conforming to phosphate containing AS NZS 2312 ALK2 MIO and Aluminium pigment conforming to AS NZS 3750 19 Type 2 External decorative 75 um Alkyd zi
399. ot provide mortar after initial set has occurred Sandstone flagging Sub grade Compact to 95 of the maximum dry density when tested to AS 1289 Mortar bed thickness Minimum 50 mm to maximum 60 mm Laying pattern Random with smaller stones filling the gaps to produce roughly uniform joint widths Lay flags and fill joints in one operation Stone setts dry bed Description Lay and tamp setts on to a dry sand and cement mix compact and moisten as follows Bed 1 cement to 3 sand screeded to the level required to allow setts to be firmly tamped Select the top side of the sett for surface uniformity and tap into the mix to the pre compaction position Compact with a hand ram or mechanical compactor Water spray the surface and allow the bedding to harden Grout joints 3 5 ADHESIVE BEDDING Preparation of pavers Adhesive bedding Fix pavers dry Bedding General Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the paver the substrate the conditions of service and which leave the paver firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and adhered to the substrate Form falls integral with the substrate Thick adhesive beds General Provide on substrates with deviations up to 6 mm when tested with a 2 m straight edge and with tiles having deep keys or frogs Nominal thickness 6 mm Adhesive bedding application General Apply adhesive by notched trowel to walls and floors and direct to pavers if require
400. ot specified or with applied finishes use the weight of the door to determine the quantity of hinges required For door leafs over 80 kg nominate pivot hinges The size of the hinge is determined by the door leaf thickness 35 43 mm thick door 100 x 75 mm butt hinges with a minimum thickness of 2 5 mm 44 55 mm thick door 100 x 100 mm butt hinges with a minimum thickness of 2 5 mm 55 mm thick door Refer to the door by door hardware schedule Hinge pin The symbol refers to the pin type Supply fixed pins to doors opening out or designated as a security doors Wide throw If necessary provide wide throw hinges to achieve the required door swings in the presence of obstacles such as nibs deep reveals and architraves Hinge table A Nominal door leaf size Door leaf weight kg approx Number of hinges H x W x T mm 2040 x 400 x 35 s 19 2 2040 x 600 x 35 s 29 2 2040 x 720 x 35 lt 35 3 2040 x 820 x 35 lt 39 3 2040 x 920 x 35 lt 44 3 2040 x 1020 x 35 lt 49 4 2040 x 720 x 40 lt 37 3 2040 x 820 x 40 lt 42 3 2040 x 920 x 40 lt 48 3 2040 x 1020 x 40 lt 52 4 2040 x 720 x 50 lt 45 3 2040 x 820 x 50 lt 50 3 2040 x 920 x 50 lt 57 3 2040 x 1020 x 50 lt 68 4 2400 x 720 x 40 lt 50 4 2400 x 820 x 40 lt 52 4 2400 x 920 x 40 s 55 4 2400 x 1020 x 40 lt 60 4 2400 x 1220 x 50 s 72 5 2040 x 920 x 70 lt 88 Nominate pivot hinges
401. ot to require bonding to the substrate lay a double slip sheet over the membrane to separate it from the topping or bedding mortar Paint coatings If maintenance pathways are indicated by a paving paint use a paving paint which is compatible with the membrane 3 3 FLOOD TEST General Application Perform a flood test before the installation of surface finishes NATSPEC 205 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0411b Waterproofing external and tanking Set up Measure for dryness the wall floor junction of adjacent spaces to the slab soffit below using electrical resistance testing to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B Record the result for each area Dam the access openings and seal drainage outlets to allow 50 mm water level but no higher than 25 mm below the weir level of the perimeter flashings Provide temporary overflows of the same capacity as the roof outlets to maintain the flood level Fill space with clean water and leave overnight Evaluation Make a visual inspection of the wall floor junction of adjacent spaces and of the slab soffit below for obvious water or moisture Test the same areas for dryness using a moisture meter and compare the results to the measurements taken before flooding Conformance Evidence of water from the visual test Failure No visual evidence of water Proceed with the moisture meter test Increase in test results before and after fl
402. oth full and cut by hand between the trench set out lines and neatly stack on wooden pallets Concrete edging Break out remove and dispose of off site Concrete subbase If present sawcut along the trench set out lines Grass Method Neatly cut grass turf between trench set out lines into 300 mm squares If the grass is suitable for re use take up and store the turf and water during the storage period otherwise remove and dispose of it off site Small plants shrubs and trees Storage If required for re planting take up small plants and store Wrap the root ball in a hessian or plastic bag with drain holes and water during the storage period Unsuitable vegetation Remove and dispose of off site NATSPEC 83 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0223 Service trenching 3 3 EXCAVATING Site preparation As found site conditions To Geotechnical in the Earthwork worksection Records of measurement If Records of measurement are required to Records of measurement in the Earthwork worksection Remove topsoil To Removal of topsoil in the Earthwork worksection Excavation General Excavate for underground services in conformance with the following To required lines and levels with uniform grades Straight between access chambers inspection points and junctions With stable sides To a width tolerance of 50 mm unless constrained by adjacent structures Excavation To the Earthwor
403. othness 150 mm 1 mm Projections 50 mm 0 5 mm Cleaning concrete surfaces Mechanically remove the following surface treatments Sealers and hardeners Curing compounds Concrete substrate correction Remove projections and fill voids and hollows with a reinforced mortar or a polymer modified cementitious self smoothing and levelling compound recommended by the finish manufacturer as compatible with the seamless flooring system Moisture content Do not commence installation unless Concrete The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS NZS 2455 1 Appendix B and the values in clause 2 4 2 c have been obtained Substrate preparation Roller or spray applied spread and sprinkle and flake flooring systems High pressure water blasting and or acid etching Diamond grinding Self levelling trowel applied slurry and broadcast and synthetic terrazzo Shot blasting Scarifying NATSPEC 325 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0657 Resin based seamless flooring Diamond grinding Fixtures Remove door stops and other fixtures and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation 3 3 APPLICATION Proprietary floor systems Standard To the product technical data sheets Working environment General Do not start work before the building is enclosed wet work is complete and dry and good lighting is available Protect adjoining surfac
404. ottoms of unfilled cavities Form Open perpends Maximum spacing 1200 mm 3 7 WALL TIES Location General Space wall ties in conformance with AS 3700 clause 4 10 or AS 4773 2 as appropriate and at the following locations Not more than 600 mm in each direction Adjacent to vertical lateral supports Adjacent to control joints Around openings Installation Fixing of masonry veneer ties To timber frames Screw fix to outer face of timber frames with AS 3566 fixings To concrete Masonry anchors To steel frames Screw fix to outer face of steel studs with AS 3566 fixings 3 8 CONTROL JOINTS General Location and spacing Provide contraction joints expansion joints or articulation joints to AS 3700 clause 4 8 Control joint filling Filler material Provide compatible sealant and bond breaking backing materials which are non staining to brickwork and blockwork Do not use bituminous materials with absorbent masonry units Bond breaking materials Non adhesive to sealant or faced with a non adhering material Foamed materials Closed cell or impregnated not water absorbing Installation Clean the joints thoroughly and insert an easily compressible backing material before sealing NATSPEC 164 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0331b Brick and block construction Sealant depth Fill the joints with a gun applied flexible sealant for a depth of at least two thir
405. our and pattern Handling and installation instructions 22 UNDERLAY Acoustic underlay General Provide proprietary product recommended by the manufacturer as being intrinsic to and compatible with the tiling system 2 3 TILES AND ACCESSORIES Tiles Standard To AS 4662 Tactile ground surface indicators To AS NZS 1428 4 1 Coves nosings and skirtings Provide matching stop end and internal and external angle tiles moulded for that purpose Exposed edges Purpose made border tiles with the exposed edge whether round square or cushion glazed to match the tile face If such tiles are not available mitre tiles on external corners Accessories General Provide tile accessories to the as required which match the composition colour and finish of the surrounding tiles 2 4 ADHESIVES General Standard To AS 2358 and AS 4992 1 Type General Provide adhesives to the finishes schedule and compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered Prohibited uses Do not provide the following combinations Cement based adhesives on wood metal painted or glazed surfaces gypsum based plaster Organic solvent based adhesives on painted surfaces Organic PVC based adhesives and organic natural rubber latex adhesives in damp or wet conditions PVA polyvinyl acetate based adhesives in wet areas or externally 2 5 MORTAR Materials Cement type to AS 3972 GP White cement Iron salts content lt 1 Off wh
406. ourses sarking and waterproof membranes Flashings Location Provide flashings to external openings sufficient to prevent the entry of moisture Form trays at the ends of sill flashings Masonry veneer construction Extend across cavities and build into brickwork 3 4 ROOF FRAMING Beam framing General Construct framing for flat or pitched roofs where the ceiling follows the roof line consisting of rafters or purlins supporting both ceiling and roof covering Antiponding Requirement Fix appropriate members to the tops of framing at the rear of fascias to prevent sagging of and ponding on the sarking Additional support Provide a frame member behind every joint in fibre cement or plasterboard sheeting or lining NATSPEC 173 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0342 Light steel framing Battens Requirement Supply and fix battens suitable for span spacing and roofing 3 5 TRUSSES Fabrication Assembly Factory assemble trusses Supports for in roof services General If walkways mechanical plant or other services are to be supported within the roof space provide support Water container and heater Where a water container or heater is located in the roof space provide a support platform to AS NZS 3500 4 clause 5 5 Marking General Permanently mark each truss to show Project identification Manufacturer Tag or number Location Support points Installation G
407. outs closer than the width of the stiles at the edges of the doors Edge strips Minimum thickness 10 mm Increase overall thickness to greater than 15 mm to accommodate the full depth of the rebate in rebated doors Apply to the external edges of door after the facings are bonded to the door framing core and finish flush with outside surface of the facings Louvre grilles Construct by inserting the louvre blades into a louvre frame and fix the frame into the door Double doors General Bevel square edged doors as necessary to prevent binding between the leaves Rebated meeting stiles If not double acting doors provide rebated meeting stiles or fix equivalent metal T stop to one leaf Form rebates to suit standard rebated hardware Tolerance Squareness The difference between the lengths of diagonals of a door lt 3 mm Twist The difference between perpendicular measurements taken from diagonal corners lt 3 mm Nominal size mm Height 2 2 Width 0 2 2 3 DOORSETS Cavity sliding doors General Proprietary product comprising steel and timber frame construction with rigid steel top base and rear supporting members and incorporating the overhead door track ball race type wheel carriages guides stops split jamb linings and removable pelmet Duct access panels General Proprietary products comprising metal faced doors side hung to steel door frames including hardware and accessories such as hinges and lock
408. over the width of the slab or lane and so that the face is generally vertical and normal to the direction of placing Hand spread concrete using shovels not rakes Remove Any water ponding on the ground Placing sequence Commence from one corner usually the lowest point and proceed continuously out from that point Weather Do not place concrete in temperatures above 30 C or below 10 C without adequate precautions Compaction Thickness 100 mm or less Compaction through placing screeding and finishing processes If required use a hand held vibrating screed at the surface Do not use immersion vibrators Thickness gt 100 mm and downturns Use an immersion vibrator Placing records General Keep on site and make available for inspection a log book recording each placement of concrete including the following Date of concrete placement Delivery dockets noting the specified grade and source of concrete Slump measurements to AS 1012 3 1 The portion of work Volume placed Rain General During placement and before setting do not expose concrete to rain Protection Protect surface from damage by covering until hardened 3 6 CONCRETE PRIMARY FINISH General Finishing Do not commence finishing until all bleed water has evaporated from the surface NATSPEC 111 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement Commence Immediately after placement and spreadin
409. ow the sheet surface Particleboard and plywood flooring Fix sheeting to the supports with adhesive and nail Membranes If sheet flooring is the substrate for a wet area membrane fix with stainless steel countersunk head screws 3 4 TILING GENERALLY Sequence General Fix wall tiles before floor tiles Cutting and laying Cutting Cut tiles neatly to fit around fixtures and fittings and at margins where necessary Drill holes without damaging tile faces Cut recesses for fittings such as soap holders Rub edges smooth without chipping Laying Return tiles into sills reveals and openings Butt up to returns frames fittings and other finishes Strike and point up beds where exposed Remove tile spacers before grouting Variations General Distribute variations in hue colour or pattern uniformly by mixing tiles or tile batches before laying Protection Floor tiles Keep traffic off floor tiles until the bedding has set and attained its working strength Cleaning Keep the work clean as it proceeds and protect finished work from damage Floor finish dividers General Finish tiled floors at junctions with differing floor finishes with a corrosion resistant metal dividing strip fixed to the substrate If changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door Bath ventilation General Ventilate the space below fully enclosed baths with at least 2 vermin proofed ventilating tiles 3 5 SETTI
410. pable of transmitting imposed loads sufficient to make sure the rigidity of the assembly or integrity of the joint Finished surface Provide adhesives and sealants that will not cause discolouration Compatibility Do not use sealants or adhesives that are incompatible with the products to which they are applied Sealant replacement Use sealants that can be safely removed without compromising the application of the replacement sealant for future refurbishment Selections Conform to the SELECTIONS 1 2 PRECEDENCE General Worksections and referenced documents The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this worksection The requirements of this worksection overrides conflicting requirements of its referenced documents The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements 1 3 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 4 PERFORMANCE Adhesives and sealants General Provide adhesives and sealants capable of transmitting imposed loads sufficient to make sure the rigidity of the assembly or integrity of the joint and which will not cause discolouration of finished surfaces Compatibility Do not use sealants or adhesives that are incompatible with the products to which they are applied Movement Where an adhered or sealed joint may be subject to movement select a system accredited t
411. pe Il Class A Multi component To ASTM C920 Sealing compound silicone Single component Class A Multi component To ASTM C920 Sealing compound butyl To ASTM C1311 Glazing compounds To AAMA 800 coded 802 3 Types or Il or 805 2 as applicable Narrow joint seam sealer To AAMA 800 Products coded 803 3 Exterior perimeter sealing compound To AAMA 800 Non drying sealant To AAMA 800 Expanded cellular glazing tape To AAMA 800 Very high bond pressure sensitive tapes To ASTM D897 ASTM D1002 ASTM D3330M ASTM D3652M ASTM D3654M or ASTM D3715M NATSPEC 246 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0467 Glass components 2 3 MIRRORS Reflective surface Type Silver layer deposited on the glass or glazing plastic Protective coatings Copper free coating at least 5 um thick and 2 coats of mirror backing and edge sealing paint having a total dry film thickness of at least 50 um Venetian silvered mirror one way vision glass 15 mm wide silvered strips alternating with 3 mm wide clear strips Safety mirror Type to AS 1288 Vinyl backed Grade A safety mirror Safety compliance To AS NZS 2208 Solid backed annealed glass mirrors Backing 9 mm waterproof plywood Adhesive fixing to backing Non acidic silicone adhesive at the rate recommended by the manufacturer Installation to backing Clean the back of the glass panel and apply walnuts of adhesive together with
412. penetrates building elements provide metal or PVC sleeves formed from pipe sections as follows Movement Arrange to permit normal pipe or conduit movement Diameter for non fire rated building elements Sufficient to provide an annular space around the pipe or pipe insulation of at least 12 mm Prime paint ferrous surfaces Terminations If cover plates are fitted Flush with the finished building surface In fire rated and acoustic rated building elements 50 mm beyond finished building surface In floors draining to floor wastes 50 mm above finished floor Elsewhere 5 mm beyond finished building surface Termite management To AS 3660 1 Thickness Metal 1 mm PVC 2 3 mm Sleeves for cables For penetrations of cables not enclosed in conduit through ground floor slabs beams and external walls provide sleeves formed from PVC pipe sections 3 7 CONCRETE PLINTHS Construction General Provide concrete plinths as documented General Provide plinths under all equipment located on concrete floor slabs as follows Concrete Grade N20 Finish Steel float flush with the surround Reinforcement Single layer of F62 fabric Surround Provide galvanized steel surround at least 75 mm high and 1 6 mm thick Fix to the floor with masonry anchors Fill with concrete 3 8 SUPPORT AND STRUCTURE General Requirement Provide incidental supports and structures to suit the services 3 9 PIPE SUPPORTS Support systems General
413. per level substrate With frameless shower screens Install the shower screen with the inside face flush with the step down Terminate the membrane outside the shower screen at least 1500 mm from the shower rose outlet on the wall Support and adhere the membrane to a water stop angle fixed securely to the substrate Finish membrane flush with the underside of tiles Enclosed hobless showers with framed shower screens Requirement Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3 6 and as follows Turn the membrane up against a water stop angle fixed securely to the substrate directly below the shower screen sill Size the angle so that the vertical leg finishes at least 5 mm above the level of the tiles Support and adhere the membrane to the angle and finish it flush with the top of the vertical leg Enclosed hobless showers with trench drain located below screen With framed or frameless shower screens Install a water stop angle where the outer edge of the trench drain to the perimeter of the shower will be installed Size the angle so that the vertical leg finishes at the underside of the tiles Support and adhere the membrane over the water stop angle and terminate the membrane at floor wastes as described in Drainage connections Install the trench drain with the shower screen located vertically above it Unenclosed showers Requirement Extend membrane at least 1500 mm into the room from the shower rose outlet on the wall Preformed shower bases
414. pes necessary to complete the roof system Materials Metal rainwater goods To AS NZS 2179 1 PVC rainwater goods and accessories To AS NZS 3500 3 Flashings and cappings Standard To AS NZS 2904 Material and colour Match roof sheeting Rib notching Match roof sheeting Ridge and barge cappings Material and colour Match roof sheeting Eaves gutters Material and colour Match roof sheeting Matching fascia barge If the selected eaves gutter is a proprietary high front pattern forming part of a combined system of gutter fascia and barge provide the matching proprietary fascias and barge cappings to roof verges and edges Box gutters Refer to hydraulic and architectural drawings Downpipes Refer to hydraulic and architectural drawings Internal downpipes Refer to hydraulic and architectural drawings Rainheads Refer to hydraulic and architectural drawings Vents Refer to hydraulic drawings Gratings Gratings Provide removable gratings over rainwater heads and sumps Leaf screens Refer to hydraulic and architectural drawings Location To the extent of all gutters and rainwater heads 2 4 SKYLIGHTS Standard General To AS 4285 Skylights rooflights in bushfire prone areas To AS 3959 clause 5 6 5 AS 3959 clause 6 6 5 AS 3959 clause 7 6 5 AS 3959 clause 8 6 5 or AS 3959 clause 9 6 3 as applicable to the site s Bushfire Attack Level BAL Description General A proprietary skylight system inc
415. plus grout When grout has set wash down If necessary use a proprietary cement remover Sealant joints General Provide joints filled with sealant and finished flush with the tile surface as follows Where tiling is cut around sanitary fixtures Atall vertical and horizontal corners of walls Around fixtures interrupting the tile surface for example pipes brackets bolts and nibs At junctions with elements such as window and door frames and built in cupboards Material Anti fungal modified silicone Width 5 mm Depth Equal to the tile thickness 3 10 JOINT ACCESSORIES Floor finish dividers General Finish tiled floors at junctions with differing floor finishes with a corrosion resistant metal dividing strip suitably fixed to the substrate with top edge flush with the finished floor Where changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door Stepping Less than 5 mm Adjustments If the floor finish divider was installed by the wet area waterproof membrane applicator check that the height is sufficient for the topping and tile thickness Adjust as required with a matching flat bar adhesive fixed to the divider angle Weather bars General Provide a corrosion resistant metal weather bar under hinged external doors Locate under the centres of closed doors 3 11 COMPLETION Spare tiles General Supply spare matching tiles and accessories of each type for future replacement purpo
416. ply curing compounds to produce uniform colour on adjacent surfaces Hot weather curing Curing compounds If curing compounds are proposed provide details Protection Select a protection method from the following If the concrete temperature gt 25 C or if not protected against drying winds protect the concrete using a fog spray application of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant f ambient shade temperature is gt 35 C protect from wind and sun using an evaporative retarder until curing is commenced Immediately after finishing either cover exposed surfaces using an impervious membrane or hessian kept wet until curing begins or apply a curing compound Water curing General Select a method of ponding or continuously sprinkling to prevent damage to the concrete surface during the required curing period 3 8 JOINTS Construction joints Location Do not relocate or eliminate construction joints or make construction joints not documented If emergency construction joints are made necessary by unforeseen interruptions to the concrete pour submit a report on the action taken Finish Butt join the surfaces of adjoining pours In visually important surfaces make the joint straight and true and free from blemishes impermissible for its surface finish class Preparation Roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface Remove loose or soft material free water foreign matter and laitance Dampen the surface just before
417. pollution submit a written report detailing the complaint and action taken Register Keep a register of all environmental complaints and action taken Cultural heritage Training Ensure that all personnel working on site have received training relating to their responsibilities regarding cultural heritage and are made aware of any sites areas which must be avoided Mark up such sites areas on a site map and make available to all relevant personnel during the works Notice Give notice if any item is encountered which is suspected to be an artefact of heritage value or any relic or material suspected of being of Aboriginal or early settlement origin Action Stop construction work that might affect the item and protect the item from damage or disturbance 2 2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION Air quality control General Protect adjoining owners residents and the public against dust dirt and water nuisance and injury Use dust screens and watering to reduce the dust nuisance Lighting of fires Prohibition Do not light fires Noise control and vibration Monitoring Measure vibration levels of the peak particle velocity to AS 2187 2 Limits Do not exceed the vibration or airblast overpressure recommended in AS 2187 2 Appendix J Vegetation and fauna Wild life protected All native Trees to be removed Inspect to establish if nesting native fauna are present If present give notice Pruning To AS 4373 Water quality Wash out Ensure tha
418. port piping so that it remains free from vibration whilst permitting necessary movements Minimise the number of joints Embedded pipes Do not embed pipes that operate under pressure in concrete or surfacing material General If pipes that operate under pressure are to be embedded in concrete or surfacing material conform to AS 2896 clause 4 3 3 3 Pressure test and rectify leaks before the concrete is poured Valve groupings If possible locate valves in groups Pressure testing precautions Isolate items not rated for the test pressure Restrain pipes and equipment to prevent movement during pressure testing NATSPEC 24 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Differential movement General If the geotechnical site investigation report predicts differential movements between buildings and the ground in which pipes or conduits are buried provide control joints in the pipes or conduits as follows Arrangement Arrange pipes and conduits to minimise the number of control joints Magnitude Accommodate the predicted movements 3 6 BUILDING PENETRATIONS Penetrations Fire rated building elements Seal penetrations with a system conforming to AS 4072 1 Non fire rated building elements Seal penetrations around conduits and sleeves Seal around cables within sleeves If the building element is acoustically rated maintain the rating Sleeves General If piping or conduit
419. pose made fillers or end caps Turn pans of sheets up at tops and down into gutters by mechanical means Provide pre cut notched eaves flashing and bird proofing where necessary Close off ridges with purpose made ridge fillers of closed cell polyethylene foam Ridge and barge Capping Finish off along ridge and verge lines with purpose made ridge capping or barge rolls Sprung curved ridge General Lay the roofing sheets in single lengths from eaves to eaves by naturally curving the sheets over the ridge Ridge Seal side laps at the ridge and extend the sealant to the point where the roof pitch equals the recommended pitch of the roofing profile End laps General If end laps are unavoidable and the sheet profile is not suitable for interlocking or contact end laps construct a stepped type lap 3 4 ROOF PLUMBING Jointing sheet metal rainwater goods Butt joints Make joints over a backing strip of the same material Soldered joints Do not solder aluminium or aluminium zinc coated steel Sealing Seal fasteners and mechanically fastened joints Fill the holes of blind rivets with silicone sealant Flashings Installation Flash roof junctions upstands abutments and projections through the roof Preform to required shapes if possible Notch scribe flute or dress down as necessary to follow the profile of adjacent surfaces Mitre angles and lap joints 150 mm in running lengths Provide matching expansion joints at 6 m
420. posed to reinforcement shown on the drawings proposed details Damaged galvanizing If repair is required proposals to AS NZS 4680 Section 8 Mechanical splices If mechanical bar splices are proposed or required details and test certificates for each size and type of bar to be spliced Provision for concrete placement If spacing or cover of reinforcement does not conform to AS 3600 give notice Splicing If undocumented splicing is proposed proposed details Welding Give notice before welding reinforcement 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Steel reinforcement Standard To AS NZS 4671 Type Refer to structural engineer s specification Strength grade and ductility class Refer to structural engineer s specification Surface condition Free of loose mill scale rust oil grease mud or other material which would reduce the bond between the reinforcement and concrete Protective coating Corrosion protection To AS 3600 clause 4 10 3 General For concrete elements containing protective coated reinforcement provide the same coating type to all that element s reinforcement and embedded ferrous metal items including tie wires stools spacers stirrups plates and ferrules and protect other embedded metals with a suitable coating Epoxy coating Provide a high build high solids chemically resistant coating NATSPEC 146 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0312b Concrete reinfo
421. ppearance and free of trowel marks and defects Wood float finish After machine floating use wood or plastic hand floats to produce the final consolidated finish free of float marks and uniform in texture and appearance Broom finish After machine floating and steel trowelling use a broom or hessian belt drawn across the surface to produce a coarse even textured transverse scored surface Scored or scratch finish After screeding use a stiff brush or rake drawn across the surface before final set to produce a coarse scored texture Sponge finish After machine floating and steel trowelling use a damp sponge to wipe the surface to produce an even textured sand finish NATSPEC 157 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0318s Shotcrete 0318S SHOTCRETE 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General If used provide shotcrete that ls readily sprayed into corners and around reinforcement and built in items without segregation or vertical slumping or sag Is not porous cracked or honeycombed Has acceptable plastic shrinkage cracking Can be readily worked to the required finish 1 2 STANDARDS General Materials and construction To AS 3600 Concrete To AS 1379 Concrete structures for retaining liquids To AS 3735 Curing compounds To AS 3799 NATSPEC 158 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0331b Brick and block construction 0331B BRICK
422. ppropriate for the finishing system and substrate and sand smooth Clear finish Provide filler tinted to match the substrate Clear timber finish systems Prepare the surface so that its attributes will show through the clear finish without blemishes by methods which may involve the following Removal of bruises Removal of discolourations including staining by oil grease and nailheads Bleaching where necessary to match the timber colour sample Puttying Fine sanding last abrasive no coarser than 220 grit to show no scratches across the grain Iron and steel Remove weld spatter slag burrs or any other objectionable surface irregularities and radius all edges to a minimum of 2 mm Degrease by solvent or alkaline cleaning Iron and steel blast cleaning To AS 1627 9 and to the class specified in the specified protective treatment Provide a surface roughness or profile appropriate for the specified treatment Where steelwork to be abrasive cleaned includes irregular shapes allow for special equipment to achieve required abrasive cleaning Structural steel All exposed fixings including bolts screws and the like are to be painted to match adjacent steelwork paint system Concrete and masonry Before application to very smooth concrete brick or masonry either acid etch mechanically grind or abrasive track blast the surface as appropriate to provide a suitable key for the subsequently applied coating and to remove laitan
423. prevailing service conditions including normal structural movement of the building 3 2 DOORS Priming General Prime timber door leaves on top and bottom edges before installation 3 3 DOORSETS Security screen doorsets Standard To AS 5040 3 4 COMPLETION Operation General Ensure moving parts operate freely and smoothly without binding or sticking at correct tensions or operating forces and that they are lubricated where appropriate Protection Temporary coating On or before the date for practical completion or before joining up to other surfaces remove all traces of temporary coatings used as a means of protection NATSPEC 228 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0455 Door hardware 0455 DOOR HARDWARE 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide door hardware as documented Handing Before supply verify on site the correct handing of hardware items Hardware specified generically Provide hardware of sufficient strength and quality to perform its function appropriate to the intended conditions of use suitable for use with associated hardware and fabricated with fixed parts firmly joined Operation Make sure working parts are accurately fitted to smooth close bearings without binding or sticking free from rattle or excessive play lubricated where appropriate Supply Delivery Deliver door hardware items ready for installation in individual complete sets fo
424. primer Dulux 1 Step Oil DD1227 B10 AS 3730 13 solvent borne Based Primer Sealer Undercoat Wood primer latex Dulux 1 Step DD1192 B10A AS 3730 17 Acrylic Primer Sealer Undercoat Metal primer for Dulux Quit Rust DI1051 B11 AS 3730 21 steel solvent Cold Galv Primer D11136 borne Dulux Luxaprime Zinc Phosphate Primer Metal primer latex Dulux Quit Rust All DD1453 Bila AS 3730 15 Metal water based low VOC Metal primer for Dulux Quit Rust All DD1453 Bi2a AS 3730 15 zinc coated Metal water based surfaces latex low VOC Etch primer for non Dulux Quit Rust DD0153 B13 AS 3730 17 ferrous metals Etch Primer Zinc rich organic Dulux Zinc Rich 1P DI0541 B14 AS 3730 9 binder primer for Primer steel Concrete and Dulux Sealer DD0074 B15 AS 3730 22 masonry sealer Binder DA0442 Dulux Acratex Acraprime 501 2 Clear low viscosity Dulux AquaTread DD1187 B15a NE paint for concrete Concrete Sealer DI1118 low VOC Dulux DureSeal Acrylic Dust Sealer Moisture resistant Dulux EnvirO2 DD1449 B15b NE plasterboard sealer Water Based binder Sealer Binder low VOC Concrete and Dulux Acrylic DD1402 B16 NATSPEC 332 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu x material description Dulux PDS No AS NZS 2311 PRN Standard masonry latex wallboard sealer sealer undercoat Sealer Undercoat eco choice low VOC Dulux 1 Step Acrylic Primer
425. proofing membranes and roof coverings If penetrating membranes provide a waterproof seal between the membrane and the penetrating component Certification General Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets all requirements of the contract documents Execution details General Before starting the installation of building services submit the following Embedded services Proposed method for embedding services in concrete walls or floors or chasing into concrete or masonry walls Fixing of services Typical details of locations types and methods of fixing services to the building structure Inaccessible services If services will be enclosed and not accessible after completion submit proposals for location of service runs and fittings Inspection and testing General Submit an inspection and testing plan which is consistent with the construction program Include particulars of test stages and procedures Test reports Submit written reports on nominated tests Materials and components Product certification If products must conform to product certification schemes submit evidence of conformance Product data For proprietary equipment submit the manufacturer s product data as follows Technical specifications and drawings Type test reports Performance and rating tables Recommendations for installation and maintenance Substitutions Identified proprietary items Identification of a p
426. ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0194 RAVEN door seals and window seals NATSPEC 61 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0201b Demolition 0201B DEMOLITION 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Carry out demolition as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARD General Demolition To AS 2601 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Demolition The complete or partial dismantling of a building or structure by pre planned and controlled methods or procedures Dilapidation record The photographic or video and written record made before commencement of demolition work of the condition of the portion of the existing building being retained adjacent buildings and other relevant structures or facilities Dismantle The reduction of an item to its components in a manner to allow re assembly Recover The disconnection and removal of an item in a manner to allow re installation 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Services before disconnection or diversion Trees as documented to be retained before commencement of demolition Contents of building before commencement of demolition Structure after stripping and removal of roof coverings and
427. psed time between the wetting of the mix and the discharge of the mix at the site conforms to the Elapsed delivery time table Do not discharge at ambient temperature NATSPEC 137 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined below 10 C or above 30 C unless approved heating or cooling measures are taken to delivered concrete within the range 5 C to 35 C Elapsed delivery time table Concrete temperature at time of discharge C Maximum elapsed time minutes 10 24 120 24 27 90 27 30 60 30 32 45 Pre mixed supply Addition of water If adding water conform to AS 1379 clause 4 2 3 Transport method Prevent segregation loss of material and contamination of the environment and do not adversely affect placing or compaction Site mixed supply Emergencies If mixing by hand provide details Plant Mix concrete in a plant located on the construction site 3 5 CORES FIXINGS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS Adjoining elements Fixings Provide fixings for adjoining elements including any temporary fixings that are required Protection General Grease threads Protect embedded items against damage Compatibility Make sure inserts fixings and embedded items are compatible with each other with the reinforcement and with the concrete mix to be used and surface finish requirements Corrosion If in external or exposed locations galvanize anchor bolts
428. r Two pack epoxy primer to AS NZS 3750 13 Top coats 2 coats to AS NZS 3750 22 Equipment paint system Description Brush or spray application using paint as follows Full gloss enamel finish coats oil and petrol resistant To AS NZS 3750 22 two coats Prime coat to metal surfaces generally To AS NZS 3750 19 or AS NZS 3750 20 Prime coat to zinc coated steel To AS 3730 15 or AS NZS 3750 16 Undercoat To AS NZS 3750 21 Prepainted metal products Standard To AS NZS 2728 Product type as noted in AS NZS 2728 Not lower than the type appropriate to the field of application Stoving enamel Application Spray or dip Two pack liquid coating Application Spray Finish Full gloss Primer Two pack epoxy primer to AS NZS 3750 13 Topcoat nternal use Proprietary polyurethane or epoxy acrylic system External use Proprietary polyurethane system 3 6 COMPLETION Damage General If prefinishes are damaged including damage caused by unauthorised site cutting or drilling remove and replace the damaged item Repair General If a repair is required to metallic coated sheet or electrogalvanizing on inline galvanized steel products clean the affected area and apply a two pack organic primer to AS NZS 3750 9 O NATSPEC 44 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0183b Metals and prefinishes NATSPEC 45 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0184 Ter
429. r and light van use only 4 6 m all other cases Message LOW CLEARANCE 2 2 m Letter height minimum As prescribed AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 a Sign type AS 1742 2 W4 8 Compliance AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 Regulatory carpark signs Stop and Give Way Position As required for traffic control Message Graphic nominated AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 b Sign type AS 1742 2 R1 1 R1 2 Compliance AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 Regulatory carpark signs Speed limit Position As required for traffic control Message Graphic nominated AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 c Sign type AS 1742 2 R4 1 Compliance AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 Regulatory carpark signs Road hump warning Position As required for traffic control Message Graphic nominated AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 d Sign type AS 1742 2 W5 10 Compliance AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 Regulatory carpark signs Steep descent warning Position As required for traffic control Message Graphic nominated AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 e Sign type AS 1742 2 W5 12 Compliance AS NZS 2890 1 clause 4 3 4 Regulatory carpark signs Disabled persons par king facilities Position Designated car space Message Graphic nominated AS NZS 2890 1 clause 3 1 figure 3 1 Sign type Pavement marking paint Compliance AS NZS 2890 6 clause 3 1 Non accessible pedestrian entrance Posi
430. r bedding The most common material is polyethylene sheeting Substrate The surface to which a material or product is applied 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made as follows Substrate preparation completed Secondary layers preparation completed Before membranes are covered up or concealed Underflashings complete before installation of overflashings After flood testing 1 6 SUBMISSIONS Execution records Placing records Photographically record the application of membranes and label with the following information Date Portion of work Substrate preparation Weather during application and curing Protection provided from traffic and weather 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 MEMBRANES Membrane systems Requirement Provide a proprietary membrane systems certified as suitable for the intended external waterproofing by the following 2 2 ACCESSORIES Internal roof outlets General Proprietary funnel shaped sump cast into the roof slab set flush with membrane with a flat removable grating and provision e g clamp ring for sealing the membrane into the base of the outlet Conirol joint covers Corners crossovers tees and bends Factory mitred welded and provided with 500 mm legs End closures Factory folded and sealed to match joint cover profile 2 3 THERMAL INSULATION 2 4 DRAINAGE CELL PANELS General Refer to architectural drawings 3 EXECUTION 3 1 P
431. r each door as follows Clearly labelled to show the intended location In aseparate dust and moisture proof package Including the necessary templates fixings and fixing instructions Replacement items Door hardware Match items being replaced with existing unless documented otherwise Upgrade hinges as necessary to conform to Hinges table A and Hinges table B 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the abbreviations given in AS 4145 1 Appendix D apply Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the general definitions given in AS 4145 1 Section 2 apply Lock function For the purposes of this worksection the general definitions given in AS 4145 1 Appendix E apply 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Door by door schedule General Submit a door by door hardware schedule Information sources This worksection and the contract drawings Refurbishment and alteration work Reuse of recovered hardware Submit a proposal describing the standard of cleaning repair and testing of recovered items and the location where each is to be reused Samples Generic items Submit samples of hardware items offered as meeting the description of items not specified as proprietary items Refurbished items Submit samples of hardware items offered as meeting the standard of cleaning repair a
432. r of the following 2 weeks before the date for practical completion Commencement of training on services equipment Date for final submission Within 2 weeks after practical completion 3 18 CLEANING Final cleaning General Before practical completion clean throughout including all exterior and interior surfaces except those totally and permanently concealed from view Labels Remove all labels not required for maintenance 3 19 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OF SERVICES General General During the maintenance period carry out periodic inspections and maintenance work as recommended by manufacturers of supplied equipment and promptly rectify faults Emergencies Attend emergency calls promptly Annual maintenance Carry out recommended annual maintenance procedures before the end of the maintenance period Maintenance period The greater of the defects liability period and the period nominated in the Maintenance requirements schedule Maintenance program General Submit details of maintenance procedures and program relating to installed plant and equipment 6 weeks before the date for practical completion Indicate dates of service visits State contact telephone numbers of service operators and describe arrangements for emergency calls NATSPEC 31 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Maintenance records General Record in binders provided with operation and maintenan
433. r or precured joint Camber Orientation Install cambered members with the camber up Protection from weather Duration Provide temporary protection for glued laminated timber members until permanent covering is in place Exposed applications Paint glued products or otherwise protect them with a moisture excluding envelope Long span applications Provide adhesive with non creep permanent characteristics applied under rigid control procedures 2 4 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER General Standard To AS NZS 4357 0 Branding To AS NZS 4357 0 clause 1 8 Veneer quality To AS NZS 2269 0 Bond Type A to AS NZS 2754 1 Int Preservative treatment To the Timber products finishes and treatment worksection 2 5 FINGER JOINTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER General Standard To AS 5068 2 6 FASTENERS Materials Conformance To the fasteners requirements in the Adhesives sealants and fasteners worksection NATSPEC 190 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0381 Structural timber Fastener type Metal fasteners Select fastener as appropriate for the documented atmospheric category and the life of the structure Fastener configuration If timber elements experience tension perpendicular to the grain use the appropriate fastener configuration Bolts Thread Provide thread length at least four times the bolt diameter Holes Drill bolt holes 2 mm larger than the bolt diameter Washers Standard To AS 1
434. ral Provide roof and deck waterproofing systems to substrates as documented which are Waterproof under five minutes duration rainfall intensity which has an average recurrence interval of 100 years Graded to falls to dispose of stormwater without ponding above the depth of lapped seams Able to accommodate anticipated building movements Able to accommodate its own shrinkage over the warranty life of the roofing system 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements The General requirements worksection contains umbrella requirements for all building and services worksections 1 3 STANDARDS Membrane materials Standard To AS 4654 1 Membrane design and installation Standard To AS 4654 2 Stormwater drainage Standard To AS NZS 3500 3 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 4654 1 and AS 4654 2 and the following apply Acrylic liquid applied Water based formulations which air dry to form plastic membranes Bitumen A viscous material from the distillation of crude oil comprising complex hydrocarbons which is soluble in carbon disulphide softens when it is heated is waterproof and has good powers of adhesion It is produced as a refined by product of oil SBS bitumen Bitumen modified with Styrene Butadiene Styrene a thermoplastic rubber that undergoes a phase inversion at
435. ram of work Construction program Show the following NATSPEC 14 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0142 Preliminaries ABIC SW 2008 Sequence of work Allowance for holidays Activity inter relationships External dependencies including provision of access document approvals and work by others Periods within which various stages or parts of the work are to be executed Time scale Working days Updated program Identify changes since the previous issue and show the estimated percentage of completion for each item of work Program chart Display in the contractor s site office an up to date bar chart and network diagram based on the construction program Site meetings General Hold and attend site meetings throughout the contract and arrange for the attendance of appropriate subcontractors the architect and appropriate consultants Frequency Not less than weekly from breaking of ground to practical completion of the project Otherwise as required Minutes Meeting minutes shall be kept and distributed by the architect Purpose of submission Review Contacts At the first site meeting submit names and telephone numbers of responsible persons who may be contacted after hours during the course of the contract Purpose of submission Information only Items supplied by owner General Refer to the building contract 1 5 COMPLETION OF THE WORKS Final cleaning Genera
436. ranes In the course above the underside of the slab in internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls Project 40 mm and dress down over the membrane turned up against the wall Height Not less than 150mm above the adjacent finished ground level 75mm above the finished paved or concrete area 50mm above the finished paved or concreted area and protected from the direct effect of the weather Installation General Lay in long lengths Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at joints Step as necessary but not exceeding 2 courses per step for brickwork and 1 course per step for blockwork Sandwich damp proof courses between mortar Junctions Preserve continuity of damp proofing at junctions of damp proof courses and waterproof membranes Lap sealing Seal with a bituminous adhesive and sealing compound 3 6 FLASHINGS Location General Provide flashings as follows Floors Full width of outer leaf immediately above slab or shelf angle continuous across cavity and up the inner face bedded in mortar turned 30 mm into the inner leaf 2 courses above for brick and NATSPEC 163 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0331b Brick and block construction 1 course above for block If the slab supports the outer skin and is not rebated bed the flashing in a suitable sealant Under sills 30 mm into the outer leaf bed joint 1 course below the sill extending up across th
437. rcement Thickness 200 um minimum Galvanizing To AS NZS 4680 as follows Sequence If fabrication is to occur after galvanizing submit proposals for galvanizing repair and coating of cut ends Zinc coating minimum 600 g m Tie wire General Annealed steel 1 25 mm diameter minimum External and corrosive applications Galvanized 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CONSTRUCTION Dowels Fixing If a dowel has an unpainted half embed in the concrete placed first Tolerances Alignment 2 mm in 300 mm Location half the diameter of the dowel Grade 250 N Supports General Provide proprietary concrete metal or plastic supports to reinforcement in the form of chairs spacers stools hangers and ties as follows Adequate to withstand construction and traffic loads With a protective coating if they are ferrous metal located within the concrete cover zone or are used with galvanized or zinc coated reinforcement Minimum spacing Bars lt 60 diameters Mesh lt 800 mm Supports over membranes Prevent damage to waterproofing membranes or vapour barriers If appropriate place a metal or plastic plate under each support Projecting reinforcement General If starter or other bars extend beyond reinforcement mats or cages through formwork or from cast concrete provide a plastic protective cap to each bar until it is incorporated into subsequent work Tying General Secure the reinforcement against
438. rd To AS NZS 1859 4 Interior use generally General purpose Interior use heavy duty Tempered MR Interior moisture area Tempered MR Veneered hardboard General purpose with a timber face veneer bonded to one side Wet processed fibreboard including softboard To AS NZS 1859 4 Dry processed fibreboard including medium density fibreboard Standard To AS NZS 1859 2 Melamine overlaid medium density fibreboard Medium density fibreboard STD MDF overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine NATSPEC 254 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0511b Lining Decorative overlaid wood panels Standard To AS NZS 1859 3 Certification General Brand panels under the authority of a recognised certification program applicable to the product Locate the brand on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works High pressure decorative laminate sheet Standard To AS NZS 2924 1 Coated steel Standard To AS 1397 Coating class interior Z275 Coating class exterior Z450 Fasteners Steel nails Hot dip galvanized Adhesives For wallboards Gunnable synthetic rubber resin based mastic contact adhesive formulated for bonding flooring and wallboards to a variety of substrates Sealants Fire rated sealant Non hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a fire rating equal to that of the partition it seals Acoustic sealant Non hardening
439. rd sharp graded abrasive particles Coloured applied finish Apply a proprietary liquid or dry shake material to a steel trowel finished surface in conformance with the manufacturer s written requirements Stamped and coloured pattern paved finish A complete proprietary finishing system Burnished finish Continue steel trowelling until the concrete surface attains a polished or glossy appearance Exposed aggregate After steel trowelling grind the cured surface of the concrete to expose coarse aggregate Surface finishes General Provide surface finishes in conformance with the finishes schedule Slip resistant treatment Surface treatment Apply silicon carbide granules after floating and before the topping surface has set and trowel into the surface so that the granules remain exposed Application rate 1 kg m evenly distributed Slip resistant treatment to stair treads Slip resistance treatment Form two grooves and fill with a silicon carbide two part resin Dimensions 10 mm deep 15 mm wide length width of tread less 100 mm Position First groove Centre 35 mm from tread nose Second groove Centre 60 mm from step nose Surface colouring General Apply the colouring product after floating and before the topping surface has set and trowel into the surface so that it is even in colour Surface treatment General Apply the surface treatment after floating and before the topping surface has set Temperature Gen
440. rds are in contact with the subfloor at the time of nailing particularly where boards are machine nailed Skew nail in a uniform pattern If nails are to be less than 12 mm from ends of boards pre drill nail holes 0 1 mm undersize Secret nailing Do not use boards of more than 85 mm cover width and use one nail or staple skewed at 45 Do not cramp more than one board at a time Sinking Punch nails 3 mm below finished surfaces and fill the sinking flush with a material tinted to match the flooring which is compatible with the floor finish Top nailing For boards more than 65 mm cover width use two nails skewed 10 degrees in opposite directions Do not cramp more than 800 mm width of boards at one time Control joints Perimeters Provide 10 mm wide joints against vertical building elements Strip flooring NATSPEC 316 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring Floors less than 6 x 6 m Partially cramp strip flooring to allow a 1 mm gap every 600 mm or 1 5 mm every metre Floors greater than 6 x 6 m Additionally divide floors into maximum dimensions of 6 m with joints 4 mm wide filled with a flexible sealant compatible with the applied finish Parquet flooring If joints are required in conspicuous locations cut a 4 mm wide joint to the full depth of the parquet at maximum spacing of 6 m and fill with clear silicone sealant Strip flooring General Blend floor boards
441. re of the following Curing Cure continuously from completion of finishing until the total cumulative number of days or fractions of days during which the air temperature in contact with the concrete is above 10 C conforms to the following unless accelerated curing is adopted Fully enclosed internal surfaces Early age concrete 3 days Other concrete surfaces 7 days End of curing period Prevent rapid drying out at the end of the curing period Protection Maintain at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss during the curing period Curing method Refer to structural engineer s specification Curing compounds Application Provide a uniform continuous flexible coating without visible breaks or pinholes which remains unbroken at least for the required curing period after application Substrates Do not use wax based or chlorinated rubber based curing compounds on surfaces forming substrates to applied finishes concrete toppings and cement based render Self levelling toppings If used also as curing compounds conform to AS 3799 Visually important surfaces Apply curing compounds to produce uniform colour on adjacent surfaces Hot weather curing Curing compounds If curing compounds are proposed provide details Protection Select a protection method from the following lf the concrete temperature gt 25 C or if not protected against drying winds protect the concrete using a fog spray appli
442. re stiffening of the fresh mix and reduce water absorption and evaporation losses Mix transport place and compact the concrete conforming to the Elapsed delivery time table Placing concrete Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete conforming to the Hot weather placing table Evaporation control barriers Erect barriers to protect freshly placed concrete from drying winds Formwork and reinforcement Before and during placing maintain temperature at lt 35 C Temperature control Select one or more of the following methods of maintaining the specified temperature of the placed concrete at lt 35 C Cool the concrete using liquid nitrogen injection before placing Cover horizontal transport containers Spray the coarse aggregate using cold water before mixing Use chilled mixing water Hot weather placing table Concrete element Temperature limit Normal concrete in footings beams columns 35 C walls and slabs Concrete in sections 2 1 m in all dimensions 27 C except for concrete of strength 40 MPa or greater NATSPEC 152 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0314b Concrete in situ Concrete element Temperature limit in sections exceeding 600 mm in thickness 3 5 CURING General Requirements Taking into account the average ambient temperature at site over the relevant period affecting the curing adopt procedures to make su
443. renced documents If referenced documents or technical worksections require that manuals be submitted include corresponding material in the operation and maintenance manuals Subdivision By installation or system depending on project size Format electronic copies Printing Povide material that can be legibly printed on A4 size paper Scope Provide the same material as documented for hardcopy in electronic format Quantity and format Conform to Submissions electronic copies Format hard copy General A4 size loose leaf in commercial quality 4 ring binders with hard covers each indexed divided and titled Include the following features Cover Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL to spine Identify title of project volume number volume subject matter and date of issue Dividers Durable divider for each separate element with typed description of system and major equipment components Clearly print short titles under laminated plastic tabs Drawings Fold drawings to A4 size with title visible insert in plastic sleeves one per drawing and accommodate them in the binders Pagination Number pages Ring size 50 mm maximum with compressor bars Text Manufacturers printed data including associated diagrams or typewritten single sided on bond paper in clear concise English Number of copies 3 Date for submission Date for draft submission The earlie
444. required level Relative level tolerance 5 mm maximum departure of top surface from a 3 m straightedge Horizontal tolerance 10 mm maximum departure of face from a plane surface Verticality 3 mm departure from vertical Staking Stake forms in position using at least 3 steel stakes per form not more than 1 5 m apart Lock joints between form sections to prevent movement Release agent Before placing reinforcement apply a release agent compatible with the contact surfaces to the interior of the formwork except where the concrete is to receive an applied finish for which there is no compatible release agent Clean the reinforcement to remove all traces of release agent Re use Clean and recoat the forms each time before placing concrete Keyways Form the keyways of keyed construction joints using steel form strips accurately located at the mid depth of the slab and securely fastened flush against the formwork face Reinforcement Tolerances in fabrication and fixing To AS 3600 Locate reinforcement Place reinforcement in the top half of the pavement Minimum cover to reinforcement 30 mm NATSPEC 110 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement Splicing mesh Overlap a minimum of 2 crosswires Supports Provide proprietary concrete metal or plastic supports to reinforcement in the form of chairs spacers stools hangers and ties as follows To wit
445. rete pavers To CMAA MA56 Material requirements To AS NZS 4455 2 Tables 2 2 A and Table 2 2 B when tested as follows Characteristic breaking load and flexural strength To AS NZS 4456 5 Dimensional deviations To AS NZS 4456 3 NATSPEC 121 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0276 Segmental pavers sand bed Abrasion resistance To AS NZS 4456 9 Proprietary product Conform to the Selections schedule 2 4 CLAY SEGMENTAL PAVERS Properties Specification To the AS NZS 4455 2 or CMAA MA57 Characteristic breaking load and flexural strength To AS NZS 4456 5 Dimensional deviations To AS NZS 4456 3 Abrasion resistance To AS NZS 4456 9 Proprietary product Conform to the Selections schedule 2 5 OTHER MATERIALS Tactile ground surface indicators Standard To AS NZS 1428 4 1 2 6 EDGE RESTRAINT Concrete Properties To the Concrete combined worksection Compressive strength 32 MPa Sleepers Hardwood Sound hardwood railway sleepers to AS 3818 2 Softwood Sound preservative treated softwood sleepers Preservative treatment General Hazard class 4 to AS 1604 1 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SUBGRADE Preparation Extent Prepare the subgrade to the required profile and extend to the rear face of the proposed edge restraints or to the face of existing abutting structures Subgrade preparation To the Earthwork worksection Drainage of subgrade Subgrade drainage
446. rimary finish Machine float finish After levelling consolidate the surface using a machine float Cutand fill and refloat immediately to a uniform smooth granular texture Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float Steel trowel finish After machine floating finish as follows Produce a smooth surface relatively free from defects When the surface has hardened sufficiently use steel hand trowels to produce the final consolidated finish free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance Wood float finish After machine floating produce the final consolidated finish free of float marks and uniform in texture and appearance using wood or plastic hand floats NATSPEC 284 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0612b Cementitious toppings Broom finish After machine floating draw a broom or hessian belt across the surface to produce a coarse even textured slip resistant transverse scored surface Scored or scratch finish After screeding give the surface a coarse scored texture using a stiff brush or rake drawn across the surface before final set Sponge finish After machine floating obtain an even textured sand finish by wiping the surface using a damp sponge Finishing methods supplementary finish Abrasive blast After steel trowelling abrasive blast the cured surface to provide texture or to form patterns without exposing the coarse aggregate using fine ha
447. ring agent is not used keep the plaster moist as follows Base coats and single coat systems Keep continuously moist for 2 days and allow to dry for 5 days before applying further plaster coats Finish coats Keep continuously moist for 2 days NATSPEC 281 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0612b Cementitious toppings 0612B CEMENTITIOUS TOPPINGS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide cementitious toppings in conformance with architectural drawings and as follows If floating without edge curl If bonded without drummy areas Without obvious shrinkage cracks 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 TOLERANCES General Thickness Deviation from the stated thickness Thickness 15 mm 2 mm Thickness 2 15 30 mm 5 mm Thickness 2 30 mm 10 mm Flatness deviation Measured under a 3000 mm straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface Class A 3 mm Class B 2 3 lt 5 mm 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PRODUCTS Admixtures Standard To AS 1478 1 Aggregates Standard To AS 2758 1 Coarse aggregate Nominal single size lt 1 3 topping thickness Fine aggregate Fine sharp well graded sand with a low clay content and free from efflorescing salts Bonding products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for bonding cement based toppings to concrete
448. rnal masonry joints General Provide sealant and bond breaking backing materials compatible with each other and the substrate and which are non staining to masonry Do not use bituminous materials with absorbent masonry units Bond breaking backing Bond breaking materials Non adhesive to sealant or faced with a non adhering material Foamed materials Closed cell or impregnated not water absorbing Fire rated control joints General Provide sealant materials that maintain the nominated fire resisting rating Fire stopping To AS 4072 1 Light weight building element joints Joints subject to rapid changes of movement Provide sealants that accommodate the movement and are compatible with the contact materials Floor control joints General Provide trafficable sealants for that are compatible with the contact materials Bond breaking backing Bond breaking materials Non adhesive to sealant or faced with a non adhering material Foamed materials Closed cell or impregnated not water absorbing 2 3 FASTENERS General Masonry anchors Proprietary expansion or chemical type Plain washers To AS 1237 1 Provide washers to the heads and nuts of bolts and the nuts of coach bolts Plugs Proprietary purpose made plastic Powder actuated fasteners To AS NZS 1873 4 Stainless steel fasteners To ASTM A240 A240M Steel nails To AS 2334 Length At least 2 5 x the thickness of the member being secured and at least
449. rojectspec 0451 AWS aluminium windows and doors NATSPEC 223 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0453b Doors and access panels 0453B DOORS AND ACCESS PANELS 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide doors frames doorsets security screen doors and fire doorsets as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Door hardware 1 3 INTERPRETATION General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Balanced construction Flush door construction where the facings on one side of the core are nominally equal in thickness grain direction properties and arrangement to those on the other side of the core such that uniformly distributed changes in moisture content will not cause warpage Door frame Includes jamb linings Doorset An assembly comprising a door or doors and supporting frame guides and tracks including the hardware and accessories necessary for operation Fire doorset A doorset which retains its integrity provides insulation and limits if required the transmittance of radiation in a fire Smoke doorset A doorset which restricts the passage of smoke Flush door A door leaf with two plane faces which entirely cover and conceal its structure It includes doors with intermediate rail cellular blockboard medium density fibreboard MDF and particleb
450. roprietary item does not necessarily imply exclusive preference for the item so identified but indicates the necessary properties of the item Alternatives If alternatives to the documented products methods or systems are proposed submit sufficient information to permit evaluation of the proposed alternatives including the following Evidence that the performance is equal to or greater than that specified Evidence of conformity to a cited standard Samples NATSPEC 21 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Essential technical information in English Reasons for the proposed substitutions Statement of the extent of revisions to the contract documents Statement of the extent of revisions to the construction program Statement of cost implications including costs outside the contract Statement of consequent alterations to other parts of the works Availability If the documented products or systems are unavailable within the time constraints of the construction program submit evidence Criteria If the substitution is for any reason other than unavailability submit evidence that the substitution ls of net enhanced value to the principal ls consistent with the contract documents and is as effective as the identified item detail or method Samples Submission Submit nominated samples Incorporation of samples If it is intended to incorpor
451. rovide a proprietary product manufactured for use with the wall system Bonding products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for bonding cement based plaster to solid substrates Cement Standard To AS 3972 Type GP Colouring products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for colouring cement plaster Integral pigment proportion lt 5 by mass of cement Cornice cement General Provide a proprietary product manufactured for use with the cornice Corrosion resistance and durability Compliance Conform to the Corrosion resistance and durability table s or provide proprietary products with metallic and or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance and as follows Galvanize To AS NZS 4680 Corrosion resistance and durability table Atmospheric corrosivity category A and B to AS NZS 2312 Situation Metal lath beads and Minimum cement content mix embedded items type above damp proof course Internal Galvanize after fabrication CRW 300 g m Metallic coated sheet Z275 AZ150 External Galvanize after fabrication CRW 300 g m Stainless 316 Powder coated aluminium CRM Corrosion resistance and durability table Atmospheric corrosivity category C to AS NZS 2312 Situation Metal lath beads and Minimum cement content mix embedded items type above damp proof course Internal Galvanize after fabrication CRM 300 g m Metallic coated sheet Z
452. rs 8 mm diameter mild steel one at each end and one at centre of flight transversely between strings Draw strings tight against ends of treads Fascia Of depth sufficient to overlap 19 mm below ceiling fixed to floor joists hard up under nosing Trim Provide beads and mouldings as necessary including a scotia or similar planted under the tread nosing against the risers and cut strings a bead between wall strings and wall and a bead behind the fascia over the ceiling finish 3 4 TIMBER BALUSTRADES General General Provide a balustrade to the stair and landing consisting of newels handrail balusters and associated mouldings Newels General Halve and bolt to strings Turn tops to detail Handrails General On edge Bullnose arrises 13 mm radius Stub tenon to newels Balusters General At 100 mm centres Stub tenon to handrail at top and to tread or floor at bottom 3 5 COMPLETION Maintenance manual General Submit manufacturer s published recommendations for service use Protection Timber treads Provide full timber or plywood casing Cleaning Temporary coatings On or before completion of the works or before joining up to other surfaces remove all traces of temporary coatings used as a means of protection General Remove all dust marks and rubbish from all surfaces and internal spaces Clean and polish all self finished surfaces such as anodised and powdercoated metals sanitaryware glass tiles and laminate
453. rtification General Brand panels under the authority of a recognised certification program applicable to the product Locate the brand on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works High pressure decorative laminate sheets Standard To AS NZS 2924 1 Class Definition Typical applications CG S or F Compact general purpose High performance self supporting vertical or horizontal surfaces HD S or F Horizontal heavy duty High performance horizontal surfaces HG S or P Horizontal general purpose General horizontal surfaces and high performance vertical surfaces VG S or P Vertical general purpose General vertical surfaces and light duty horizontal surfaces VL S Vertical light duty Light duty vertical surfaces Thickness minimum For horizontal surfaces fixed to a continuous substrate 1 2 mm For vertical surfaces fixed to a continuous substrate 0 8 mm For post formed laminate fixed to a continuous substrate 0 8 mm For vertical surfaces fixed intermittently e g to studs 3 0 mm For edge strips 0 4 mm Stone facings General Provide stone or engineered stone slabs within the visual range of the approved samples Repair mud veins or lines of separation that are integral to the selected pattern with resin fillers and back lining Vinyl and linoleum Material Desktop grade sheeting NATSPEC 260 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 proje
454. ructural and to the Concrete blockwork chasing table Concrete blockwork chasing table Block thickness mm Depth of chase maximum mm 190 35 140 25 90 20 NATSPEC 23 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements 3 3 FIXING General Suitability If equipment is not suitable for fixing to non structural building elements fix directly to structure and trim around penetrations in non structural elements Fasteners General Use proprietary fasteners capable of transmitting the loads imposed and sufficient for the rigidity of the assembly 3 4 SERVICES CONNECTIONS Connections General Connect to network distributor services or service points Excavate to locate and expose connection points Reinstate the surfaces and facilities that have been disturbed Network distributors requirements General If the network distributor elects to perform or supply part of the works make the necessary arrangements Install equipment supplied but not installed by the authorities 3 5 SERVICES INSTALLATION General Fixing If non structural building elements are not suitable for fixing services to fix directly to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non structural elements Installation Install equipment and services plumb fix securely and organise reticulated services neatly Allow for movement in both structure and services Concealment Unle
455. s NATSPEC 264 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0552b Metalwork fabricated 0552B METALWORK FABRICATED 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide metal fixtures that are Undamaged plumb level and straight Free of surface defects or distortions 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Steel surfaces prepared for and immediately before site applied finishes 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Tests Stainless steel Before fabrication commences submit satisfactory evidence that relevant procedure test plates have passed the tests specified in AS NZS 1554 6 Materials Stainless steel For each batch of stainless steel supplied to the works submit the certificate of compliance or test certificate specified in the applicable standard 1 5 STANDARDS General Access for maintenance To AS 1657 Tactile indicators To AS NZS 1428 4 1 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS Metals and components Performance Provide metals in sections of strength and stiffness suited to their required function finish and method of fabrication 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY Aluminium structures Standard To AS NZS 1664 1 or AS NZS 1664 2 Metals Performance Provide metals so that they transmit the loads
456. s The contract administrator may direct that completion tests be carried out after the date for practical completion Tolerance The permitted difference between the upper limit and the lower limit of dimension value or quantity Verification Provision of evidence or proof that a performance requirement has been met or a default exists 1 6 INSPECTION Notice Concealment If notice of inspection is required in respect of parts of the works that are to be concealed advise when the inspection can be made before concealment Tests Give notice of the time and place of documented tests Minimum notice for inspections to be made and for witnessing of tests Conform to the Notices schedule Light level requirements to AS NZS 1680 2 4 Attendance General Provide attendance for documented inspections and tests 1 7 SUBMISSIONS General Submit to Architect Default timing Make submissions at least 5 working days before ordering products for or starting installation of the respective portion of the works Program Allow in the construction program for at least the following times for response to submissions Shop drawings 5 working days Samples and prototypes 5 working days Manufacturers or suppliers recommendations 5 working days Product data 5 working days Product design substitution or modification 10 working days Proposed products schedules If major products are not specified as proprietary items submi
457. s not visible when doors are closed unless otherwise specified Insides of bathroom cabinets are not excluded and shall be painted Self finished surface such as glass and plastic laminates Door hardware including hinges 4 SELECTIONS 4 1 Paint system schedules Requirement Apply paint systems to the Interior painting schedule and the Exterior painting schedule PAINTING SCHEDULES GENERALLY 0671 DULUX painting General Apply the paint system nominated for each substrate to the referenced manufacturer s Product Data Sheets PDS and Spec Sheets and include The number and order of coats The paint type for each coat Additional coats Apply if necessary to prepare porous or reactive substrates with prime or seal coats consistent with the manufacturer s recommendations achieve the total film thickness or texture specified or achieve a satisfactory opacity in the specified or required colour Painting systems Standards The scheduled DuluxGroup Dulux paint systems override AS NZS 2311 as follows New unpainted interior surfaces To AS NZS 2311 Table 5 1 New unpainted exterior surfaces To AS NZS 2311 Table 5 2 Specialised painting systems To AS NZS 2311 clause 5 2 for the following final coats High build textured or membrane finishes B38 to AS NZS 2311 2 pack gloss pigmented polyurethane B44 to AS NZS 2311 2 pack epoxy B29 to AS NZS 2311 2 pack water based epoxy B29A to AS NZ
458. s against key records and deliver to the contract administrator at practical completion Key codes Submit the lock manufacturer s record of the key coding system showing each lock type number and type of key supplied key number for re ordering and name of supplier Maintenance manual Window and door assemblies Submit the window and glazed door manufacturer s published instructions for operation care and maintenance Hardware Submit the manufacturer s published recommendations for use care and maintenance Warranty Aluminium joinery excluding hardware Form Against failure of materials and execution under normal environment and use conditions Period 7 years conditional on compliance with the AWA Code of Conduct Powdercoating Dulux Duralloy Film integrity 7 years Colour integrity 7 years Interpon D 610 Film integrity 7 years Colour integrity 10 years Hardware supplied by Vantage Refer to architectural drawings Hardware supplied separately Refer to architectural drawings 4 COMMERCIAL SELECTIONS AWS PRODUCTS General Refer to architectural drawings 4 1 KEYING Key codes schedule Window no KD KA group code All windows in townhouse 1 N A W1 All windows in townhouse 2 N A W2 All windows in townhouse 3 N A W3 All windows in townhouse 4 N A W4 All windows in townhouse 5 N A W5 NATSPEC 222 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 p
459. s follows Resistant to impacts expected in use Free of irregularities Consistent in texture and finish Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the application As a suitable substrate for the nominated final finish Selections Conform to the architectural drawings and finishes schedule 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply CRF Cement render finish CRM Cement render medium CRS Cement render stronger CRW Cement render weaker GPF Gypsum plaster finish Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Plastering The process of coating the framing or solid surfaces of a building with a plastic material which hardens and then may be decorated or remain self finished Substrate The surface to which a material or product is applied Base coat A plaster coat applied before the application of the finish coat Bonding treatment A treatment of a substrate which improves adhesion of a plaster system Finish coat The final coat of a coating system Finishing treatment The treatment applied to a finish coat which may include processes and results as follows Wood float Plaster laid on with a trowel and finished with a dry wood float
460. s in ineinmnnrnnnmnennnnnnnnnnnnnneneneenee 217 0453b Doors and access panels eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nenne enne nenne nnne nnne tenni nnne nn nnn 224 0455 Door hardware 5 ecrire I scat ect cece teed nece edie tots ted e ied 229 0457 External Screens cncL rie Lire eres nn entente 236 0461b Glazing 1 leac re oe Sed eue a neri deos taedio iiec ee eee 241 0467 Glass components 1 leere Ier eI ndr rete cre nee rare cerae certes etuer Det een anei aisan 245 0471 Insulation and pliable membranes ss nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nnne nn 249 BARDEM E 254 uLtaPJugc 259 0552b Metalwork fabricated ss nnne nnne nnn inuenta nnne 265 0581b Signs and display anea en einne eor Erns ee ede seen nennen nn nn anna auanei ka NEk aee anaE Rusa 268 0611 Rendering and plastering nennennsnnennnennnnnnnnns 274 0612b Cementitious toppings r ae ea aeaee aara eaen paepe aaa aa p eae oaa aaan de aa aada apaa arados 282 0621 Waterproofing wet areas nnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnennnnnennnnnnenns 287 06310 Ceramic tiling ecient ee ead 294 O652D Carpets i rent T E 303 0654 Engineered panel flooring nnennsnnennsnnennnsnnnnnns 307 0655 Timber flooring 2 12
461. s may have square bevelled chamfered rounded or rumbled edges They are generally rectangular in shape with the length twice the width plus 2 mm Concrete segmental pavers Units of not more than 0 10 m in gross plan area manufactured from concrete with top and bottom faces parallel with or without chamfered edges and identified by the following shape types Shape Type A Dentated chamfered units which key into each other on four sides are capable of being laid in herringbone bond and by plan geometry when interlocked resist the spread of joints parallel to both the longitudinal and transverse axes of the units Shape Type B Dentated units which key into each other on two sides are not usually laid in herringbone bond and by plan geometry when keyed together resist the spread of joints parallel to the longitudinal axes of the units and rely on dimensional accuracy and accuracy of laying to interlock on the other faces Shape Type C Units which do not key together rely on dimensional accuracy and accuracy of laying to develop interlock Density ratio Percentage of the maximum density at optimum moisture content as determined by AS 1289 5 2 1 Flatness Relative level tolerance maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid on the surface Levelness Absolute level tolerance maximum deviation from design levels Lippage Height deviation between adjacent pavers Soldier course A course of whole or trimmed
462. s on exposure to surface heat gain forming a high volume thermally insulating char that closes gaps and voids resists the turbulence of a severe fire Capable of being placed by hand to form an immediate fire seal Insoluble in water after setting 2 2 COMPONENTS Fire stop collars Material Mechanical device with incombustible intumescent fillers covered with sheet steel jacket Airtight and watertight Fire stop pillows Material Formed self contained compressible flexible mineral fibre in cloth bags rated to permit frequent changes in service Accessories Permanent dam material Non combustible Installation accessories Provide clips collars fasteners temporary stops and dams and other devices required to position support and contain fire stopping and accessories 3 EXECUTION 3 4 EXECUTION GENERALLY General Extent Fire stop and smoke stop interruptions to fire rated assemblies materials and components including penetrations through fire rated elements breaks within fire rated elements e g expansion joints and junctions between fire rated elements The Fire stopping systems schedule is not necessarily comprehensive Sequence Fire stop after services have been installed through penetrations and properly spaced and supported after sleeving where appropriate and after removal of temporary lines but before restricting access to the penetrations including before dry lining Ventilation Supply ventilation for non
463. s soluble salts which may cause efflorescence Grading To the Bedding sand grading table when tested in conformance with AS 1141 11 1 Fines Do not use single sized gap graded or excessive fine material Cement Do not use cement bound material Moisture content Ensure uniform moisture content between 4 8 96 Bedding sand grading table Sieve aperture Percentage passing by mass 9 52 mm 100 4 75 mm 95 100 2 36 mm 80 100 1 18 mm 50 85 600 um 25 60 300 um 10 30 150 um 5 15 75 um 0 10 Joint filling sand General Well graded sand and free of deleterious material such as soluble salts which may cause efflorescence Grading To the Joint filling sand grading table when tested in conformance with AS 1141 11 1 Joint filling sand grading table Sieve aperture Percentage passing 2 36 mm 100 1 18 mm 90 100 600 um 60 90 300 um 30 60 150 um 15 30 75 pm 5 10 Moisture content Use dry sand Materials Do not use cement 22 GEOTEXTILE MATERIALS General Standard To AS 3705 Type complete delete Quality Free of any flaws stabilised against UV radiation rot proof chemically stable low water absorbency Filaments must resist delamination and maintain their relative dimensional stability 23 CONCRETE SEGMENTAL PAVERS Properties Classification To CMAA MA57 CMAA T45 and CMAA T46 Permeable interlocking conc
464. s surfacing Segmental pavers mortar bed Segmental pavers sand bed 1 3 STANDARDS General Earthworks To AS 3798 1 4 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply CBR value California Bearing Ratio value 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages Service trenches excavated before laying the service Services laid in trenches and ready for backfilling 1 6 TOLERANCES General Earthworks To Tolerances in the Earthwork worksection 1 7 SUBMISSIONS General Extent Submit a plan of trench works noting the location and type of service Notice Advise proposed duration of open excavation Construction Submit details of proposed equipment and method of excavation Stability If shuttering and or bracing of the sides of a trench is required for safety and stability provide proposals Geotechnical data Provide a geotechnical report supporting the procedures proposed for trenching and or boring Hazards Identify OH amp S hazards that may be encountered with deep trenches including toxic gases and liquids NATSPEC 82 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0223 Service trenching Boring Submit proposals for the following Limits on length Existence of other services and method of protection Pressure grouting to voids The effec
465. s the recommended spacing Where direct fixing of the fibre cement is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the framing or substrate Where the lining is the substrate for tiled finishes Installation General Run sheets across the framing members In flush jointed applications stagger end joints ina brick pattern and locate them on framing members away from the corners of large openings Provide supports at edges and joints Timber framed construction Nail only or combined with adhesive Steel framed construction Screw only or combined with adhesive Wall framing Do not fix to top and bottom plates or noggings In tiled areas Provide an extra row of noggings immediately above wall to floor flashings Fix sheet at 150 mm centres to each stud and around the perimeter of the sheet Masonry wall construction Fix using adhesive direct to masonry but do not fix direct to masonry as a substrate for tiled finish Fix to furring channels using screw or screw and adhesive Ceilings Fix using screw or screw and adhesive to ceiling furring members Do not fix sheets to the bottom chords of trusses Wet areas Do not use adhesive fixing alone Multiple sheet layers Application Fire rated and acoustic rated walls Joints Fill and flush up all joints and fixings in each layer and caulk up perimeters and penetrations before commencing succeeding layers Stagger all sheet joints by minimum 200 mm Joints F
466. s to match the grain and colour Hygiene requirements To all food handling areas and voids at the backs of units to all areas seal all carcass junctions with walls and floors and to cable entries with silicone beads for vermin proofing Apply water resistant sealants around all plumbing fixtures and ensure the sealants are fit for purpose Benchtops Installation Fix to carcass at least twice per 600 mm length of benchtop Joint sealing Fill joints with sealant matching the finish colour and clamp with proprietary mechanical connectors Edge sealing Seal to walls and carcasses with a sealant which matches the finish colour Splash backs Glass Fix with non acidic silicone adhesive Apply at the rate recommended by the manufacturer Installation Clean the back of the glass panel and apply wallnuts of adhesive together with double sided adhesive tape for temporary support and affix directly to the substrate Labelling General Permanently mark each unit of furniture with the manufacturer s name on an interior surface 3 2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE General General Deliver joinery units to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its moisture content is not adversely affected Do not store in areas of wet plaster Keep storage to a minimum by delivering items only when required for installation Concealed surfaces Prime surfaces concealed by substrates Deficiencies Examine joinery units for completeness and re
467. s units Semi gloss between 20 and 50 gloss units Low gloss between 5 and 20 gloss units also known as low sheen Flat finish 5 gloss units also known as matt Opacity The ability of a paint to obliterate the colour difference of a substrate Paint A product in liquid form which when applied to a surface forms a dry film having protective decorative or other specific technical properties Primer prime coat The first coat of a painting system that helps bind subsequent coats to the substrate and which may inhibit its deterioration Sealer A product used to seal substrates to prevent Materials from bleeding through to the surface Reaction of the substrate with incompatible top coats Undue absorption of the following coat into the substrate Sheen Gloss which is observed on an apparently matt surface at glancing angles of incidence Substrate The surface to which the coating material is applied or is to be applied Undercoat An intermediate coat formulated to prepare a primed surface or other prepared surface for the finishing coat 1 7 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice that ensures the timely inspection of the following Painting stages Completion of surface preparation After application of final coat Clear finishing stages Before surface preparation of timber Completion of surface preparation After application of final coat 1 8 SUBMISSIONS Clear finish coated samples General S
468. sed method of opacifying the glass will not be detrimental to the glass or detract in any way from the glass product warranty 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL Product substitution Other aluminium windows and doors Conform to SUBMISSIONS Substitutions in the General requirements worksection Standards Flashings To AS NZS 2904 Extrusions To AS NZS 1866 2 2 GLASS Glass types and quality Standard To AS NZS 4667 Glazing plastics General Free from surface abrasions and warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years against yellowing or other colour change loss of strength and impact resistance and general deterioration Safety glazing materials Standard To AS NZS 2208 Safety glasses Standard To AS NZS 2208 Certification Required Certification provider An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand JAS ANZ Type Grade A when used in curtain walls Heat soaking Requirement All toughened glass products Ceramic coated glass Description Heat strengthened or toughened glass with a coloured ceramic coating fused to and made an integral part of the surface To ASTM C1048 Condition B Opacified glass Description Glass with an opacifier permanently bonded to the inner face Unacceptable blemishes in heat treated flat glass including tinted and coated glass Standard To AS NZS 4667 Insulating glass units IGU s Selection and installation To AS NZS 4666 NATSPE
469. services Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to roadways and footpaths drains and watercourses and other existing services in use on or adjacent to the site Provide temporary services whilst repairs are carried out Property Rectify immediately any interference or damage to property which is to remain on or adjacent to the site including adjoining property encroaching onto the site and trees Existing services General Attend to existing services as follows If the service is to be continued repair divert or relocate Submit proposals If the service crosses the line of a required trench or will lose support when the trench is excavated provide permanent support for the existing service Submit proposals If the service is to be abandoned remove redundant parts and make safe Proposals Submit proposals for action to be taken with respect to existing services before starting this work Minimise the number and duration of interruptions Purpose of submission For review Adjoining property Notice At least 10 working days before commencing work submit to owners and occupants of adjoining property written notice of intention to commence work and an outline description of the type and extent of work Revealed encroachments If the works reveal unknown encroachments of adjoining property on to the site or of existing site structures on to adjoining property immediately seek instructions Dilapidation Records
470. ses Store the spare materials on site Quantity At least 196 of the quantity installed Cleaning General Clean tiled surfaces using an appropriate tile cleaning agent and polish Operation and maintenance manuals General Submit a manual describing care and maintenance of the tiling including procedures for maintaining the slip resistance grading stating the expected life of the slip resistance grade NATSPEC 300 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling NATSPEC 301 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0631b Ceramic tiling NATSPEC 302 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0652b Carpets 0652B CARPETS 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Lay carpet to substrates as follows and or to the finishes schedule Toremain secured for the warranty life of the carpet Toremain consistently smooth for the warranty life of the carpet To form the pattern required 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Subfloor prepared to receive the carpet installation Fixings edge strips and underlay installed ready to lay carpet Completed carpet after cleaning and before covering for protection 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Samples
471. sfactorily atomises the paint being applied Does not require the paint to be thinned beyond the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer Does not introduce oil water or other contaminants into the applied paint Paint with known health hazards Provide personal protection masking ventilation and screening facilities generally to the standards set out for spray booths AS NZS 4114 1 and AS NZS 4114 2 Sanding Clear finishes Sand the sealer using the finest possible abrasive no coarser than 320 grit and avoid cutting through the colour Take special care with round surfaces and edges Repair of galvanizing General For galvanized surfaces which have been subsequently welded power tool grind to remove all rust and weld splatter Remove all surface contaminants then immediately prime the affected area Primer Organic zinc rich coating for the protection of steel is Dulux Zincannode 202 AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 Tinting General Tint each coat of an opaque coating system so that each has a noticeably different tint from the preceding coat where possible except for top coats in systems with more than one top coat Services General If not embedded paint new services and equipment including in plant rooms except chromium anodised aluminium GRP UPVC stainless steel non metallic flexible materials and normally lubricated machined surfaces Repaint proprietary items only if damaged Seek advice from the manufacturer Wi
472. sitive tape and return up the vertical surfaces and trim at the level of the flooring Battens for strip flooring on steel joists General Fix seasoned battens along the steel joists with countersunk screws so that their top surfaces are aligned Batten size Minimum 35 mm thick Spacing of fasteners 600 mm Strip flooring battens table Strip flooring Standard Flooring Batten spacing for flooring type timber thickness Butt jointed End matched average species density Cypress AS 1810 20 450 450 Hardwood density AS 2796 1 19 600 450 560 kg m or more 25 600 450 30 600 600 Hardwood density AS 2796 1 19 450 390 less than 560 kg m 25 600 450 30 600 600 Softwood density AS 4785 1 19 450 450 560 kg m or more 35 600 450 Softwood density AS 4785 1 19 450 390 less than 560 kg m 35 600 450 3 4 FIXING UNDERLAY Underlay batten fixed on concrete slabs General Fix underlay to the battens so that their top surfaces are aligned Installation Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the supports Stagger the end joints and locate them centrally over supports If sheets are not tongue and grooved provide noggings or trimmers to support the edges Orientation for parquet flooring Fix at 45 to the direction of the flooring pattern Fixing to battens Nailed only 150 mm along ends 300 mm on intermediate battens Glued nailed Continuous 10 mm gl
473. size Straight duct Bends with Transition Branch with mm per metre turning vanes largest size splitter 250x200 15 45 55 45 40 35 45 300x250 20 65 45 50 45 45 400x250 25 45 65 45 55 45 50 400x400 35 45 170 70 54 55 600x400 40 140 85 45 75 45 Flexible ductwork maximum length 5m Duct size mm Uninsulated with spigot amp butterfly damper 25mm insulated with spigot and butterfly damper 50mm insulated with spigot and butterfly damper NATSPEC Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0121 TRADE RATES 150 49 09 79 09 91 82 200 53 64 91 82 108 18 250 58 18 111 82 131 82 300 80 91 154 55 153 64 350 111 82 165 45 185 45 400 134 55 196 36 216 36 Air Terminals iriterminal size Unit rate including mm is plenum box IS 300x300 Louvred face 110 91 600x600 Louvred face 159 09 250x250 Egg crate 64 55 300x300 Egg crate 85 45 450x450 Egg crate 110 91 600x600 Egg crate 157 27 Refrigerant Pipework Nominal pipe Insulated pipe with bends size 9 mm amp fittings per metre 15 81 82 20 92 73 25 101 82 32 131 82 40 222 73 Labour and Materials General For variations not covered by above items List identification Rate Normal time 95 45
474. ss otherwise documented conceal all cables ducts trays and pipes except where installed in plant spaces ceiling spaces and riser cupboards If possible do not locate on external walls Lifting Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the manufacturer Suspended ground floors Keep all parts of services under suspended ground floors at least 150 mm clear of the ground surface Make sure services do not impede access Arrangement Arrange services so that services running together are parallel with each other and with adjacent building elements Dissimilar metals General Join dissimilar metals with fittings of electrolytically compatible material Temporary capping Pipe ends During construction protect open ends of pipe with metal or plastic covers or caps Piping General Install piping in straight lines at uniform grades without sags Arrange to prevent air locks Provide sufficient unions flanges and isolating valves to allow removal of piping and fittings for maintenance or replacement of plant Spacing Provide at least 25 mm clear between pipes and between pipes and building elements additional to insulation Changes of direction Provide long radius elbows or bends and sets where practicable and swept branch connections Provide elbows or short radius bends where pipes are led up or along walls and then through to fixtures Do not provide mitred fittings Vibration Arrange and sup
475. ss shower tray with wall upstands at least 50 mm higher than the hob upstands Set hob masonry on the inside of the tray upstands Water stop angles Material Rigid corrosion resistant angles compatible with the waterproof membrane system Bond breakers Requirement Compatible with the flexibility class of the membrane to be used Material Purpose made bond breaker tapes and closed cell foam backing rods or fillets of sealant Flashings Requirement Flexible waterproof flashings compatible with the waterproof membrane system Liquid membrane reinforcement Requirement Flexible fabric compatible with the waterproof membrane system Sealants Requirement Waterproof flexible mould resistant and compatible with host materials Adhesives Requirement Waterproof and compatible with host materials 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Substrates General Make sure substrates are as follows Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of membranes If walls are plastered remove loose sand If walls or floors are framed or discontinuous support members are in full lengths without splicing f floors are solid or continuous Excessive projections are removed Voids and hollows 10 mm with abrupt edges are filled with a cement sand mix not stronger than the substrate nor weaker than the bedding NATSPEC 288 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0621 Waterproofing wet
476. stall lagging to separate non ferrous service pipes and accessories from the framing Unseasoned or CCA treated timber General Do not fix in contact with framing without fully painting the timber and or the steel Earthing Permanent earthing Required Temporary earthing Provide temporary earthing during erection until the permanent earthing is installed Protection General Restore coatings which have been damaged by welding or other causes Thoroughly clean affected areas to base metal and coat with zinc rich organic primer Grommets Provide grommets to isolate piping and wiring from cold formed steel framing Swarf Remove swarf and other debris from cold formed steel framing immediately NATSPEC 172 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0342 Light steel framing Certification General For components for which independent design certification has been required provide independent certification for the erected components confirming compliance with the design intent 3 2 FLOOR FRAMING General General Construct framing in conformance with all required standards Tolerance Construct floors to a tolerance of 5 mm maximum deviation in 3 m measured under a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction Protection If floor framing is for ground floor construction ensure that it is protected from moisture Construction loads If construction loading exceeds design loading prov
477. steel frame Installing welded safety mesh To AS NZS 4389 Pliable membranes Sarking membrane Location Provide sarking under tile and shingle roofing Vapour barrier Installation Lay over the roof framing with sufficient sag to allow the bulk insulation to achieve its full thickness Overlap all edges 150 mm and seal all joints with pressure sensitive adhesive tape Metal roofs bulk insulation Product Fibre blankets or batts Installation Batts Fit tightly between framing members Blanket for sound insulation Install over the roof framing reflective thermal insulation if any and mesh support so that the blanket is in continuous contact with the underside of the metal roofing sheets Combined blanket and reflective insulation Lay facing reflective insulation face downwards over safety mesh Cathedral ceiling insulation metal roofing and roofing tiles Product type Rigid cellular extruded sheets Application Over ceiling lining that has been applied over rafters Installation Lay insulation boards with their long edges at right angles to the rafters and with the tongue pointing up the slope Start laying at eaves and progress towards the ridge Secure temporarily by occasional nailing to the rafters the permanent fixing is provided by the nails used to secure the counter battens to the rafters Cut boards and tightly fit to abutments and penetrations Seal gaps with polyurethane foam Ceiling insul
478. stem Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic eco choice B17a B8b B8b Brick and masonry Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5026 Sealer Undercoat Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic eco choice B16 B8b B8b Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5045 Acrylic Block Filler Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic B15 B8b B8b Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5023 incl HD Metal Primer water Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic galvanized steel based B12a B8b B8b zincalume Galvabond zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel low VOC system Shop primed or red Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 4576 oxide primed Metal Primer water Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic ROZP ferrous metal based B11a B8b B8b O NATSPEC 347 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Substrate 1st coat 2nd coat 3rd coat Manufacturer s Spec Sheet Ref low VOC system Non ferrous metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5024 incl aluminium Etch Primer B17a Semi Gloss Acrylic Semi Gloss Acrylic brass copper tin B8b B8b plate low VOC system Plastics solvent Dulux PrepLock Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5025 resistant typ
479. stopped penetrations and control joints Form To AS 4072 1 Figure B2 Schedule Submit a schedule of installed fire stopped penetrations and control joints Form To AS 4072 1 Figure B1 User manual For fire stopping systems which are intended to be modified in service submit user manual 3 4 MAINTENANCE Cleaning Remove spilled and excess fire stopping materials without damaging other work NATSPEC 41 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0183b Metals and prefinishes 0183B METALS AND PREFINISHES 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES Metals Performance Provide metals in sections of strength and stiffness suited to their required function finish and method of fabrication 1 2 PRECEDENCE General Worksections and referenced documents The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this worksection The requirements of this worksection override conflicting requirements of its referenced documents The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements 1 3 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 4 SUBMISSIONS Samples General Submit samples of the following Stainless steel One sample of every mill grade and finish process Anodising One sample of every colour and finishing option 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 METALS Coated steel Electrogalvani
480. struction to eliminate joint deformation slumping or instability NATSPEC 161 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0331b Brick and block construction Rods Set out Construct masonry to the following rods 75mm high units 7 courses to 600 mm 90 mm high units 6 courses to 600 mm 190 mm high units 3 courses to 600 mm Protection General Cover the top surface of brickwork and blockwork to prevent the entry of rainwater and contaminants Single leaf and solid walls Moisture protection to AS 3700 clause 4 7 4 Temporary support General If the final stability of the masonry is dependent on construction of structural elements after the brickwork and blockwork is completed provide proposals for temporary support or bracing 3 2 FACEWORK Cleaning General Clean progressively as the work proceeds to remove mortar smears stains and discolouration Do not erode joints if using pressure spraying Acid solution Do not use Colour mixing Distribution In facework distribute the colour range of units evenly to prevent colour concentrations and banding Below ground Facework Commence face brickwork at least 1 full course for blockwork or 2 full courses for brickwork below adjacent finished surface level Double face walls Selection Select face units for uniform width and double face qualities Preferred face Before starting obtain approval of the preferred wall face and favour t
481. substrates Cement Standard To AS 3972 Type SL Colouring products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for colouring cement toppings Integral pigment proportion 1096 by mass of cement Concrete Standard To AS 1379 Reinforced topping Class Normal Reinforced topping Conform to the Reinforced topping table Reinforced topping table NATSPEC 282 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0612b Cementitious toppings Exposure location Strength grade Cover to reinforcement Internal External gt 50 km N25 20 mm inland and non industrial and non tropical External 50 km inland and N32 30 mm tropical External near coastal 1km 50km External coastal lt 1 km but not in N40 35 mm the splash zone Reinforcement Standard To AS NZS 4671 Mesh sizes for joint spacing as follows SL 42 Up to 3 m internal 2 m external SL 62 Upto 6 m internal 4 m external Curing products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for use with cement based toppings and with the floor finish to be laid on the toppings Mixes General Provide topping as follows or select mix proportions to the Mixes table Air entrainment lt 3 Nominal coarse aggregate size lt 0 3 x topping thickness Slump 80 mm Standard strength grade N25 Water quantity The minimum necessary to achieve full compaction and prevent excessi
482. supports Preparation Before grouting steelwork to be supported by concrete masonry and the like set steelwork on packing or wedges Minimum compressive strength MPa Refer to structural engineer s specification Handling Care Handle members or components without overstressing or deforming them Protection Wrap or otherwise protect members or components to prevent damage to surface finishes during handling and erection 3 7 REPAIRS General General Repair finishes to make sure the full integrity of each phase and each coating 3 8 COMPLETION Temporary connections General Remove temporary cleats on completion and restore the surface NATSPEC 170 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0342 Light steel framing 0342 LIGHT STEEL FRAMING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide light steel floor wall and roof framing that is n conformance with the performance criteria documented Integrated into the building Suitable for the fixing to it of flooring linings cladding and roofing Independently designed and documented Independently certified by a professional engineer for the design and the erected framing 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 13 STANDARDS General Design materials and protection To AS NZS 4600 Residential and low rise steel framing To NASH 1 National Ass
483. sure drainage is maintained On completion of winning operations grade abrupt changes of slope respread topsoil and apply and maintain hydroseeded grassing 3 EXECUTION 3 4 SITE PREPARATION Erosion and sedimentation control Drainage erosion and sedimentation control To the Site management worksection 3 2 GEOTECHNICAL As found site conditions General If the following are encountered give notice immediately and obtain instructions before carrying out any further work in the affected area Bad ground Discrepancies NATSPEC 76 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0222 Earthwork Rock Springs seepages Topsoil gt 100 mm deep Inspection and testing Inspection and testing Conform to the following Level 1 GITA required to AS 3798 clause 8 2 Level 2 GTA required to AS 3798 clause 8 3 3 3 RECORDS OF MEASUREMENT Excavation and backfilling Agreed quantities If a schedule of rates applies provisional quantities are specified or there are variations to the contract levels or dimensions of excavations do not commence backfilling or place permanent works in the excavation until the following have been agreed and recorded Depths of excavations related to the datum Final plan dimensions of excavations Quantities of excavations in rock Method of measurement By registered surveyor unless otherwise agreed Rock Level and class If rock is measured for
484. t Finishing treatment Render rendering Plaster plastering usually single coat and usually cement lime sand 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so inspection may be made of the following Substrates immediately before applying base coats Finish treatments before decoration 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS Accessories Beads Provide metal proprietary sections manufactured to be fixed to substrates and or embedded in the plaster to form and protect plaster edges and junctions Lath Provide a proprietary product manufactured from raised expanded metal for use with plaster Mass unit area 2 1 84 kg m Material thickness 2 0 70 mm Mesh size 9 5 x 28 6 mm Metallic coatings For beads or lath in cement plaster To the Corrosion resistance and durability table Admixtures Plasticizers or workability agents Do not use in cement plasters Aggregates Sand Fine sharp well graded sand with a clay content between 196 and 596 and free from efflorescing salts Sand grading for base coat plaster To the Sand gradation table Sand gradation table Sieve size Percent passing Minimum Maximum 4 75 mm 100 100 2 36 mm 90 100 1 18 mm 60 90 600 um 35 70 300 um 10 30 150 um 0 5 75 um 0 3 NATSPEC 275 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0611 Rendering and plastering Plaster for autoclaved aerated concrete General P
485. t a schedule of those proposed for use within 3 weeks of site possession NATSPEC 20 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Identification General Identify the project contractor subcontractor or supplier manufacturer applicable product model number and options as appropriate and include pertinent contract document references Include service connection requirements and product certification Non compliance Identify proposals for non compliance with project requirements and characteristics which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work Errors General If a submission contains errors make a new or amended submission as appropriate indicating changes made since the previous submission Authorities Authorities approvals Submit documents showing approval by the authorities whose requirements apply to the work Correspondence Submit copies of correspondence and notes of meetings with authorities whose requirements apply to the work Building penetrations General If it is proposed to penetrate or fix to the following submit details of the methods proposed to maintain the required structural fire and other properties Structural building elements including external walls fire walls fire doors and access panels other tested and rated assemblies or elements floor slabs and beams Membrane elements including damp proof courses water
486. t of pressure grouting on other services ground heave and proposals for minimising such effects Access to properties outside the site Council permits Service interruptions including a plan for minimising unintended interruptions Off site disposal Disposal location Submit the locations and evidence of compliance with the relevant authorities for the disposal of material required to be removed from the site 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 FILL MATERIALS General Requirement Provide fill materials including borrow or imported fill to Fill materials and Borrow or imported fill in the Earthwork worksection 3 EXECUTION 3 4 EXISTING SERVICES Location Requirement Before commencing service trenching locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the service trenching operations Utility services Contact DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG to identify location of underground utility services pipes and cables Excavation General Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services 3 2 EXISTING SURFACES Concrete and asphalt pavements Method Sawcut trench set out lines for the full depths of the bound pavement layers except where the set out line is located along expansion joints Removal of concrete and asphalt Break out concrete or asphalt pavement material between the trench set out lines remove and dispose of off site Segmental paving units Removal Take up segmental paving units b
487. t strength grade sampling table Project assessment strength grade sampling table Number of batches for each Minimum number of samples type and grade of concrete per day Columns and load bearing wall Other elements per day elements per batch 1 1 2 5 6 10 11 20 l lolin 1 each additional 10 additional Making and curing of specimens General To AS 1012 8 1 and AS 1012 8 2 Specimens for compressive strength tests Make and cure at least two specimens from the sample of each grade Specimen size Nominally 200 x 100 mm diameter If aggregate size exceeds 20 mm nominally 300 x 150 mm diameter Testing Test methods To AS 1012 Acceptance criteria General To Concrete properties schedule performance Early age compressive strength To Control tests schedule NATSPEC 134 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined Slump tests Assess slump for every batch Perform slump test on each strength sample Drying shrinkage at 56 days To AS 1012 13 Embedded pressure pipes General Complete leak tests before embedding pipes Liquid retaining structures Testing for liquid tightness To AS 3735 2 4 FORMWORK General Linings facings and release agents Compatible with finishes applied to concrete Lost formwork Not to contain timber or chlorides and not to impair the structural performance of the co
488. t to drop out of suspension before reaching sediment filter Contours Locate fence line and posts along contours curving upstream at the sides to direct flow toward middle of the fence Installation Trench 100 mm wide x 200 mm deep along line of posts and upslope from barrier NATSPEC 71 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0221b Site management Posts 1200 mm long pre drilled steel star picket posts at 3000 mm centres driven 600 mm and fitted with plastic safety caps Wire mesh 2 14 gauge x lt 150 mm mesh spacing Fasten wire mesh to upslope side of posts with 25 mm long heavy duty wire staples and tie wire Extend wire mesh 150 mm into trench Filter Geotextile selected to suit local soil conditions cut from a continuous roll to minimise joints Fixing Wire ties to the uphill side of fence posts and extended 200 mm into the trench Do not staple onto trees Joints 150 mm overlap at a support post with both ends fastened to the post Performance Retain soil found on site but with openings large enough to permit drainage and prevent clogging Fence height 600 mm average Backfilling Backfill trench over toe of geotextile and compact soil Straw bale geotextile filters Description Sediment filter comprising straw bales and geotextile Location As required Slopes If filter is at toe of a slope place bales 1500 2000 mm away from slope to provide access for m
489. t wash out does not enter waterways or stormwater drains NATSPEC 68 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0221b Site management Cross connection Ensure that there are no cross connections between the stormwater and the public sewerage system Dewatering General Keep earthworks free of water Provide and maintain slopes crowns and drains on excavations and embankments to ensure free drainage Place construction including fill masonry concrete and services on ground from which free water has been removed Prevent water flow over freshly laid work Disposal Dispose of water off site 23 TRUCK CONTAMINATION Truck contamination precautions Covers Use tarpaulins to prevent the dropping of materials on public roads Washing Wash the underside of all vehicles leaving the site as follows Mud Do not carry mud on to adjacent paved streets or other areas Noxious plants If noxious plants as designated by the local authority are present on the site ensure seeds are not carried on to adjacent paved streets or other areas 2 4 MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL PLAN IMPLEMENTATION Implementation General Implement the following approved management and control plans Environmental management control plan Soil erosion and sediment control plan Air quality control plan Waste management plan Ground contamination plan Weed management plan Reporting General Compile the environment m
490. tain Paving paint for Berger Jet Dry DD0081 B24 AS 3730 29 concrete solvent Paving Paint range Paving paint for Berger Jet Dry DD1163 B24a NE concrete latex Aqua Tread Satin Roofing paint latex Dulux AcraTex 962 DA1471 B25 O NATSPEC 334 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Paint type DuluxGroup Dulu Dulux PDS No AS NZS Standard x material 2311 PRN description Solar reflectance COOLROOF with InfraCOOL Technology Intumescent paints Refer to 0346 N A B28 NE DULUX Intumescent coatings in structural fire protection coatings Epoxy paint two Dulux Luxepoxy T DI1142 B29 AS NZS 3750 1 pack solvent borne Enamel Finish DI1109 topcoats interior Dulux Durebild STE DI1116 only 2 Pak Epoxy high DI1115 build amp surface tolerant Dulux Duremax GPE Zinc Phosphate Dulux Duremax GPE Epoxy paint two Pool paints not N A B29 AS NZS 3750 1 pack solvent borne available from topcoats exterior amp Dulux pools Epoxy paint two Dulux Luxafloor DI1315 B29a NE pack water based ECO2 low VOC interior only High Build Dulux Weathermax DI1156 B29c NE Recoatable two HBR pack solvent borne gloss polyurethane Stain sealer Dulux PrepLock Oil DD1308 B30a NE solvent borne for Based Stain DD1309 water soluble stains Blocker low VOC Dulux Preplock Shellac Stain Blocker Stain sealer water Dulux
491. tallic coating thickness pm thickness pm Internal 2 Electroplated 12 Electroplated 12 zinc zinc External 4 Hot dip 50 Stainless galvanized steel 316 Corrosion resistance table Atmospheric corrosivity categories D and F to AS NZS 2312 Situation Self drilling Threaded fasteners and Powder actuated fasteners screws to anchors AS 3566 2 Class Material Minimum local Material Minimum local metallic coating grade metallic coating thickness pm thickness um Internal 3 Electroplated 30 Stainless steel zinc or 316 Hot dip galvanized External Stainless steel Stainless Stainless steel 316 steel 316 316 Avoid organic coating in Category F zones Finishes Electroplating Metric thread To AS 1897 Imperial thread To AS 4397 Galvanizing Threaded fasteners To AS 1214 Other fasteners To AS NZS 4680 Mild steel fasteners Galvanize if Embedded in masonry n external timbers NATSPEC 35 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0181 Adhesives sealants and fasteners n contact with chemically treated timber other than CCA treated timber Epoxy coated CCA Treated timber Nuts Hexagon chamfered thin nuts Grades A and B To AS 1112 4 Hexagon nuts Grade C To AS 1112 3 Hexagon nuts Style 1 Grades A and B To AS 1112 1 Hexagon nuts Style 2 Grades A and B To AS 1112 2 Screws Coach screws To AS NZS 1393
492. tandard To AS 4678 Protection General Protect permanent rock bolts by grouting the drilled hole with cement grout after tensioning the rock bolt Protect the bearing plate and the exposed portion of rock bolt and anchorage with a protective coating or by embedment in concrete 3 12 PREPARATION FOR FILLING Preparation Stripping Prepare the ground surface before placing fill including topsoil fill ground slabs or load bearing elements to AS 3798 clause 6 1 5 Remove materials which will inhibit or prevent satisfactory placement of fill layers loose material debris and organic matter Foundation preparation To AS 3798 clause 6 1 7 Compaction Compact the ground exposed after stripping or excavation to the minimum relative compaction in AS 3798 Section 5 and the Compaction table Scarify method Loosen exposed excavation by scarifying to a minimum or 150 mm moisture condition and compact to AS 3798 Section 5 and the Compaction table Impact roller compaction Use an approved impact roller or impact completion Slope preparation If fill is placed on a surface which slopes steeper than 4 H 1 V bench the surface to form a key for the fill As each layer of fill is placed cut the existing ground surface progressively to form a series of horizontal steps gt 1 m in width and gt 100 mm deep Recompact the excavated material as part of the filling Shape to provide free drainage Under earth mounds General Cultivate the ground to a d
493. tape Face the laps away from the direction of concrete pour Continue up vertical faces past the damp proof course where applicable and tape fix at the top Patch or seal punctures or tears before placing concrete Cut back as required after concrete has gained strength and formwork has been removed 3 2 FORMWORK General General Conform to the Formed surface finishes schedule Preparation Cleaning Before placing concrete remove free water dust debris and stains from the formwork and the formed space Bolt holes Removable bolts Remove tie bolts without causing damage to the concrete Cover Position formwork tie bolts left in the concrete so that the tie does not project to within 50 mm of finished surface Bold hole filling Provide material with durability and colour matching the concrete Recessed filling Fill or plug the hole to 6 mm below the surface Corners Work above ground Fillet at re entrant angles and chamfer at corners Face of bevel 25 mm Embedments General Fix embedments through formwork to prevent movement or loss of slurry or concrete during concrete placement Openings General In vertical formwork provide openings or removable panels for inspection and cleaning at the base of columns walls and deep beams Access For thin walls and columns provide access panels for placing concrete Release agents Application Before placing reinforcement apply a release agent to linings and
494. te 0272S ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide a finished surface which is as follows Free draining and evenly graded between level points Even and smooth riding Standards Hot mix asphalt Comply with the recommendations of AS 2150 NATSPEC 104 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0272s Asphaltic concrete NATSPEC 105 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement 0274B CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide finished surfaces that are Free draining and evenly graded between level points Even and smooth riding Performance Conformance Comply with the local authority in respect of the levels grades and the minimum details of thickness reinforcement and concrete strength for pavements within the kerb and gutter property boundaries Selections As documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Site management Earthwork Stormwater site Pavement base and subbase Pavement ancillaries Concrete finishes 1 3 STANDARDS Concrete Specification and supply To AS 1379 Materials and construction To AS 3600 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 1348 and the following app
495. ter Size Item Rate per metre 100 PVC U Stormwater as specified 1m deep including E amp B 110 100 PVC U Stormwater as specified 5m deep including E amp B 145 150 PVC U Stormwater as specified 1m deep including E amp B 163 150 PVC U Stormwater as specified 1 5m deep including E amp B 189 225 PVC U Stormwater as specified 1m deep including E amp B 190 225 PVC U Stormwater as specified 1 5m deep including E amp B 210 450mm x 450mm Stormwater pit with Grate 600 Riser for 450mm x 450mm Stormwater pit 420 600mm x 600mm Stormwater pit with Grate 800 Riser for 600mm x 600mm Stormwater pit 500 900mm x 900mm Stormwater pit with Grate 1000 Riser for 900mm x 900mm Stormwater pit 550 900mm x 600mm Stormwater pit with Grate 1000 Riser for 900mm x 600mm Stormwater pit 550 Downpipe Size Item Rate per metre 100 PVC U Downpipe as specified Fixed from slab Structure 60 100 PVC U 45 bend as specified Fixed from slab Structure 40 100 PVC U 90 bend as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 40 150 PVC U Downpipe as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 70 150 PVC U 45 bend as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 50 150 PVC U 90 bend as specified Fixed from Slab Structure 50 90 Colourbond 75 100 Colourbond 85 Cold Water above ground Size Item Rate per metre Cold Water above ground 15 Copper Type B as specified Fixed from Slab
496. terboard MR Dulux Professional Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 4611 grade EnvirO2 Water Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp low VOC system Based Sealer Bathroom Low Bathroom Low Binder B15 Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Fibrous set plaster Dulux Sealer Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5008 Binder solvent Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp based B15 Bathroom Low Bathroom Low Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Fibre cement Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 4543 products Sealer Undercoat Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp low VOC system eco choice B16 Bathroom Low Bathroom Low Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Concrete Dulux Sealer Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5009 Binder solvent Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp based B15 Bathroom Low Bathroom Low Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD5010 low VOC system Acrylic Primer Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp Sealer Undercoat Bathroom Low Bathroom Low B16 Sheen B7b Sheen B7b MDF Dulux 1 Step Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD5011 Acrylic Primer Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp Sealer Undercoat Bathroom Low Bathroom Low B10a Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Brick and masonry Dulux Acrylic Dulux Wash amp Dulux Wash amp SD 5018 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Wear Kitchen amp Wear Kitchen amp eco choice B16 Bathroom Low Bathroom Low Sheen B7b Sheen B7b Concrete blockwork Berger Gold La
497. terior timber PPP043 Previously painted masonry Previously painted masonry surface surface PEAO72 Pebblecrete exposed aggregate Pebblecrete exposed aggregate masonry masonry PPCO 11 Plastics Acrylic polycarbonate polystyrene polyurethane PVC PTIO26 Timber Plyboard marine PPMO68 Powder coated metals Powder coated metals for painting NATSPEC 340 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Duspec Info Sheet Substrate group Substrate title PPF073 Polyurethane foam Spray Previously painted spray Polyurethane Foam SPF polyurethane foam PRT038 Roof tiles Roof tiles clay PRTUS7 Roof tiles Roof tiles concrete PRT039 Roof tiles Roof tiles metal PTIO23 Timber Rough sawn timber PSB067 Sandstone and blockwork Sandstone brick blockwork PSLO35 Slate flooring Slate flooring PTI003 Timber Timber PTIO24 Timber Timber flooring PTIO25 Timber Timber joinery furniture PFC027 Fibre cement sheet 7 5 mm Fibre cement sheet 7 5 mm 9 9 mm Primed 6 9 mm with mm with recessed edges recessed edges PVRO061 Vermiculite Vermiculate PWP041 Wallpaper Wallpaper PZC012 Zinc coated steel galvanized iron Zinc coated steel galvanized steel galvanized steel PZS070 Zinc coated steel zincalume Zincanneal zincanneal zincseal 3 2 PAINTING Standard General To AS NZS 2311 Section 6 Light levels General During prepar
498. terlocking warranties from the supplier and the applicator Form Against failure of materials and execution under normal environment and use conditions Period As offered by the supplier Maintenance manual General Submit manufacturer s published use care and maintenance requirements NATSPEC 326 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0657 Resin based seamless flooring NATSPEC 327 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting 0671 DULUX PAINTING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide DuluxGroup Dulux coating systems to substrates as follows Consistent in colour gloss level texture and dry film thickness Free of runs sags blisters or other discontinuities Paint systems fully opaque Clear finishes at the level of transparency consistent with the product Fully adhered Resistant to environmental degradation within the manufacturer s stated life span Selections As documented 1 2 COMPANY CONTACTS DuluxGroup Dulux technical contacts Architects and Specifiers Hotline Paint Acratex Protective Coatings 13 23 77 Powder Coatings Technical Advice Hotline 13 24 99 Website www dulux com au contact us architects and specifiers 1 3 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 4 STANDARDS Painting General Comply with the re
499. th the drawings and the Pavement base and subbase worksection 3 3 VEHICLE BARRIERS Log barriers Installation Check out the posts to receive the rails Set each post 600 mm into the ground and surround with compacted fine crushed rock gravel or cement stabilised rammed earth Bolt rails to posts with M12 diameter galvanized bolts and washers with bolt heads and nuts recessed Precast concrete wheel stops Installation Drive 12 mm diameter galvanized steel rods 600 mm into the ground to finish 25 mm below the top of the wheel stop or bolt the stop to masonry anchors in concrete slabs Grout the holes flush to match the concrete finish Steel tube bollards Footing Encase in a concrete footing at least 600 mm deep x 250 mm diameter On slabs Weld on a 10 mm thick baseplate drilled for 4 bolts and bolt to masonry anchors Filling Fill the tube with 15 MPa concrete NATSPEC 127 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0277 Pavement ancillaries NATSPEC 128 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0301s Piling 0301S PILING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Refer to structural engineer s specification 1 2 STANDARD General Standard To AS 2159 NATSPEC 129 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0310b Concrete combined 0310B CONCRETE COMBINED 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General
500. the ambient temperature is 10 C or less or 30 C or more make sure that the temperature of mixes substrates and reinforcement at the time of application are between 5 C and 35 C 3 3 TOLERANCES General Tolerances Conform to the Tolerances table Tolerances table Description Alignment Tolerance Walls and other vertical Vertical 6 mm in 2400 mm structures Reveals sides Vertical 3 mm in 1800 mm Reveals head up to 1800 mm Horizontal 3 mm in 1800 mm Reveals head over 1800 mm Horizontal 5 mm max Reveals piers beams wall stop Square 3 mm max ends up to 300 mm Reveals piers beams wall stop Square 5 mm max ends over 300 mm Radius of corners Round Should not vary by more than 10 over the length of the arris 3 4 COMPLETION Cornices General Accurately cut and mitre corners Match and align ornament Unless required or full lengths are not available do not make butt joints in the length of a cornice Installation Butter edges mitres and joins for the full length of the cornice with adhesive Mechanical fixing If a cornice projects across a ceiling 400 mm or more provide additional mechanical fixing Fixing centres lt 600 mm NATSPEC 280 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0611 Rendering and plastering Curing General Prevent premature or uneven drying out and protect from the sun and wind Keeping moist If a proprietary cu
501. the name of the service Markers Place markers at ground level at each joint route junction change of direction termination and building entry point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100 m Marker bases 200 mm diameter x 200 mm deep minimum concrete Direction marking Show the direction of the cable and pipe run by means of direction arrows on the marker plate Indicate distance to the next marker Plates Brass aluminium or stainless steel with black filled engraved lettering minimum size 75 x 75 x 1 mm thick Plate fixing Waterproof adhesive and 4 brass or stainless steel countersunk screws Marker height Set the marker plate flush with paved surfaces and 25 mm above other surfaces Marker tape Where electric bricks or covers are not provided over underground wiring provide a 150 mm wide yellow or orange marker tape bearing the words WARNING electric cable buried below laid in the trench 150 mm below ground level Labels and notices Materials Select from the following Cast metal For indoor applications only engraved two colour laminated plastic Proprietary pre printed self adhesive flexible plastic labels with machine printed black lettering Stainless steel or brass 2 1 mm thick with black filled engraved lettering Emergency functions To AS 1319 NATSPEC 29 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Colours Generally to AS
502. the tile surface Floors Trafficable shore hardness 35 Backing rod Compressible closed cell polyethylene foam with a bond breaking surface 3 7 GROUTED AND SEALANT JOINTS Grouted joints General Commence grouting as soon as practicable after bedding has set and hardened sufficiently Clean out joints as necessary before grouting Face grouting Fill the joints solid and tool flush Clean off surplus grout Wash down when the grout has set When grout is dry polish the surface with a clean cloth 3 8 COMPLETION Cleaning Completion Clean progressively and leave pavements clean on completion NATSPEC 118 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0276 Segmental pavers sand bed 0276 SEGMENTAL PAVERS SAND BED 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide segmental paving surfaces for pavement footpath and landscape works that are as follows In conformance with the level tolerances specified Consistent in colour and finish Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the installation Able to direct all water flowing from supply points to drainage outlets without leakage to the substrate or adjacent areas Performance Conformance Conform to any local authority requirements in respect of the levels grades and paving details including shape colour and laying pattern for paving to footpaths driveways or the like covered under local council planni
503. tion Tolerance and friction reduction Tolerance Subbase finished surface level 0 mm to 10 mm to ensure full base layer is cast Friction reduction Provide 200 um thick polyethylene sheeting with 200 mm taped minimum laps and or a 20 mm thick layer of sand silt and clay material lt 5 directly beneath the concrete pavement 3 3 CONCRETE MIX Standard Concrete mix and supply To AS 3600 Section 17 and AS 1379 Properties Concrete pavement thickness Refer to structural engineer Concrete pavement strength Refer to structural engineer Workability Slump values to conform with the following Fixed form paving with manual operated vibration 50 60 mm For slip form with no side forms 30 50 mm Drying shrinkage Maximum 450 pe after 21 days of air drying Elapsed delivery time General Ensure that the elapsed time between the wetting of the mix and the discharge of the mix at the site is in conformance with the Elapsed delivery time table Do not discharge at ambient temperature below 10 C or above 30 C Elapsed delivery time table Concrete temperature at time of discharge C Maximum elapsed time hours NATSPEC 109 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0274b Concrete pavement Concrete temperature at time of discharge C Maximum elapsed time hours 10 24 2 00 24 27 1 50 27 30 1 00 30 32 0 75 Site mixed supply
504. tion At each non accessible pedestrian building entrance Message Signage incorporating the international symbol of access to direct a person to the location of the nearest accessible pedestrian entrance NATSPEC 272 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0581b Signs and display Letter height AS 1428 2 clause 17 Table 2 Symbol size AS 1428 2 clause 16 Table 1 Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed Compliance AS NZS 1428 1 BCA D3 6 Main switchboard main entry excluding Class 1 dwellings Position Each entry that may be used by emergency services or at fire indicator panel Message Indicate location of main switchboard Incorporate the term Main Switchboard into notice Letter height minimum Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed Compliance AS NZS 3000 clause 2 9 2 4 Main switchboard room or enclosure excluding Class 1 dwellings Position The room or enclosure containing the main switchboard Message MAIN SWITCHBOARD Letter height minimum Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed Compliance AS NZS 3000 clause 2 9 2 4 NATSPEC 273 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0611 Rendering and plastering 0611 RENDERING AND PLASTERING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide plaster finishes a
505. tion from correct position 13 mm Fastener channels embedded parallel or perpendicular to the edge of a concrete structural member Minimum length of embedded anchor 200 mm Minimum distance from the concrete edge to the nearest part of the anchor 100 mm 3 4 INSTALLATION Installation tolerance limits Alignment Maximum deviation of any member from its true alignment plumb level or line of slope 1 mm per metre of member length up to a maximum of 9 mm in a continuous run of members in one direction Maximum misalignment between adjoining members 1 mm Position Maximum deviation of any part from its true position 9 mm Marking Requirement Before the separate parts of the screens are delivered to the site provide suitable and sufficient marks or other means for identifying each part and for showing its correct location and orientation when installed Reference lines and marks Requirement Provide on each floor in agreed locations accurate perimeter offset reference lines plumb with corresponding lines on other floors and height benchmarks Cleaning Requirement During erection promptly remove foreign matter from the screens without damage to finishes Do not use abrasive cleaners or acid 3 5 COMPLETION Cleaning Method Clean all visible surfaces with soft clean cloths and clean water or approved cleanser finishing with a clean cloth Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials Maintenance manu
506. to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 Epoxy MIO conforming to AS NZS 3750 14 External decorative conforming to AS NZS 2312 ACC6 75 um Zinc rich epoxy conforming to AS NZS 3750 9 Type 2 200 um High Build Epoxy MIO conforming to AS NZS 3750 14 50 um Epoxy Acrylic conforming to AS NZS 3750 5 Steel protection and decoration for green buildings AS NZS 2312 Category A and B table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 50 um waterborne inorganic zinc conforming to AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC 15 g L Nil Nil Internal decorative 50 um waterborne inorganic zinc conforming to AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC 15 g L 40 um waterborne acrylic conforming to AS NZS 3750 16 VOC 75 g L Nil External non decorative conforming to AS NZS 2312 IZS2 75 um waterborne inorganic zinc conforming to AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC 15 g L Nil Nil External decorative exceeding AS NZS 2312 IZS2 75 um waterborne inorganic zinc conforming to AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC 15 g L 40 um waterborne Acrylic conforming to AS NZS 3750 16 VOC 75 g L Nil Steel protection and decoration for green buildings AS NZS 2312 Category C D and E table Location Primer Second Coat Third Coat Interior non decorative 50 um waterborne Nil Nil inorganic zinc conforming to AS NZS 3750 15 Type 3 VOC 15 g L Internal decorative 50 um waterb
507. to 20 microns Hot dip galvanizing Coating mass thickness minima To AS NZS 4680 Powder coating Standard for architectural coating applications To AS 3715 2 3 FIXED PANEL TYPE SCREENS General Requirement Provide weatherproof infill panel materials mounted in a metal perimeter frame or subframe which will Withstand imposed actions and wind actions for the location without failure or permanent distortion and without panel flutter Shed water without pooling NATSPEC 237 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0457 External screens Expansion joints Requirement Provide for expansion and contraction in continuous sections at spacings not exceeding the manufacturer s recommendations or 6 m whichever is the lesser Fixing Provide a fixing system appropriate to the panel material that will retain the panel without distortion or dislocation Framing materials Requirement Provide frames fabricated from solid or hollow metal sections Fix to fastener brackets or arms mounted on the face of the building and brace as necessary with stays including tensile elements such as wire cables and turnbuckles 3 EXECUTION 3 4 FABRICATION Aluminium fabrication and construction Standard To AS NZS 1664 1 or AS NZS 1664 2 Fasteners Requirement Provide fasteners of sufficient strength and quality to perform their required function Joints Requirement Make accurately fitted tight joints by met
508. to 4 75 mm Test any other fraction which is at risk of failing in the opinion of the Engineer 3 EXECUTION 3 4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION General Requirement Prepare the subgrade in conformance with the Earthwork worksection 3 2 PLACING BASE AND SUBBASE General Weak surfaces Do not place material on a surface that is weakened by moisture and is unable to support without damage the construction plant required to perform the works Spreading Spread material in uniform layers without segregation Moisture content Maintain wet mixed materials at the required moisture content before and during spreading Add water to dry mixed materials through fine sprays to the entire surface of the layer after spreading to bring the material to the required moisture content Compacted layer thickness 200 mm maximum and 100 mm minimum Provide layers of equal thickness in multilayer courses Joints General Plan spreading and delivery to minimise the number of joints Offset joints in successive layers by a minimum of 300 mm Start of shift Remix last 2 m of previous days work for continuity of compaction Final trimming General Trim and grade the base course to produce a tight even surface with no loose stones or slurry of fines 3 3 TOLERANCES Surface level General Provide a finished surface which is free draining and evenly graded between level points Base abutting gutters Within 5 mm of the level of the lip level of the gutter m
509. trol and Product Certification Scheme Finger jointed structural timber Plantation Timber Certification Inspection If neither branding nor certification is adopted have an independent inspecting authority inspect the timber Timber panel products Certification program Brand panels under the authority of a recognised certification program applicable to the product Locate the brand on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works Certification programs Plywood and block board Engineered Wood Products Association of Australia EWPAA Quality Control and Product Certification Scheme Wet processed fibreboard dry processed fibreboard particle board and decorative overlay wood panels Engineered Wood Products Association of Australia EWPAA Quality Control and Product Certification Scheme 2 2 FIRE RESISTANCE General Standard To AS 1720 4 NATSPEC 49 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0185 Timber products finishes and treatment 2 3 DURABILITY General General Provide timbers having natural durability appropriate to the conditions of use or preservative treated timber of equivalent durability Natural durability class To AS 5604 Obtain durability By chemical impregnation natural durability or both Timber quality Free of core wood material within 50 mm of the tree s centre and free of splits checks loose knots and cavities Free of sapwood lighter colour
510. ts and glazing systems to all substrates 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GLASS Glass and glazing materials General Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere with performance under normal conditions of use Safety glasses Standard To AS NZS 2208 Certification Identify each piece or panel to AS 1288 Certification provider An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand JAS ANZ Type AS 1288 Grade A when used in curtain walls Heat soaking Requirement All toughened and heat strengthened glass products Standard To EN 14179 1 Glass tolerances Size squareness and flatness To AS NZS 2208 Plate and sheet i e not patterned Roller wave Maximum 0 15 mm 2 2 GLAZING MATERIALS General Glazing materials including putty glazing compounds sealants gaskets glazing tapes spacing strips spacing tapes spacers setting blocks and compression wedges Appropriate for the conditions of application and the required performance Jointing materials Compatibility Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces Glazing tapes Standards To AAMA 800 Products coded 804 3 806 3 807 3 as applicable Elastomeric sealants Sealing compound polyurethane polysulphide acrylic Single component Ty
511. ts subject to ingress of water are made watertight NATSPEC 153 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0314b Concrete in situ Jointing materials Provide jointing materials compatible with each other and non staining to concrete in visible locations Bond breaking Provide back up materials for sealants including backing rods which do not adhere to the sealant Foamed materials in compressible fillers Closed cell or impregnated types which do not absorb water Slip joints Requirement If concrete slabs are supported on masonry provide proprietary slip joints NATSPEC 154 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0315b Concrete finishes 0315B CONCRETE FINISHES 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide finishes to formed and unformed concrete surfaces as documented and as follows Appropriate to the importance visual or physical of the concrete elements Compatible with following trades and finishes 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Concrete formwork Concrete in situ 1 3 STANDARDS General Formed surfaces To AS 3610 1 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definition applies Green concrete Concrete which has set but not appreciably hardened 1 5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection G
512. tual recognition agreement or NATSPEC 19 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements An organisation recognised as being a Registered Testing Authority under legislation at the time the test was undertaken Required Means required by the documents the local council or statutory authorities If required A conditional specification term for work which may be shown in the documents or is a legislative requirement Samples Includes samples prototypes and sample panels Statutory authority A public sector entity created by a specific law of the Commonwealth State of Territory Supply Supply furnish and similar expressions mean supply only Tests Pre completion tests Tests carried out before completion tests Type tests Tests carried out on an item identical with a production item before delivery to the site Production tests Tests carried out on a purchased item before delivery to the site Progressive tests Tests carried out during installation to demonstrate performance in according with this specification Site tests Tests carried out on the site Completion tests Tests carried out on completed installations or systems and fully resolved before the date for to demonstrate that the installation or system including components controls and equipment operates correctly safely and efficiently and meets performance and other requirement
513. tural steel Coating Coat prepared steelwork as follows Primer Zinc phosphate primer Thickness 70 um Requirement Verify and record thickness Concrete encasing Where members are part concrete encased extend the priming 25 mm into the surface to be encased naccessible surfaces Where surfaces will be in contact or near contact after fabrication or erection apply the finish and allow it to dry before assembly Shop work Apply the primer coat or protective system to the structural steel before delivery to the site Transport and handling Do not damage the paintwork Site work After erection repair damage to the shop coating and apply coating omitted at site connections 3 5 FIRE PROTECTION COATINGS General General Apply fire protection to structural steelwork as required 3 6 ERECTION Temporary work General Provide all necessary temporary bracing or propping Temporary connections If cleats not shown on shop drawings are required submit details Cold formed purlins Trimming members Provide to support edges of roof sheeting along hips valleys and roof penetrations Site welds Completion Weld only when correct alignment and preset or camber have been achieved Overhead welding If overhead welding is required submit proposals Anchor bolts General For each group of anchor bolts provide a template with setting out lines clearly marked for positioning the bolts when casting in Grouting at
514. tural timber under the authority of a recognised product certification program applicable to the product Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works Include the following data for timbers not covered by branding provisions Australian standards or regulations for which branding is required Stress grade Method of grading NATSPEC 189 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0381 Structural timber Seasoned or as s The certification mark of the product certification program The applicable standard Certification Forest certification chain of custody and product labelling to the Timber products finishes and treatment worksection 22 STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD General Standard To AS NZS 2269 0 Bond Type A to AS NZS 2754 1 Int Preservative treatment To the Timber products finishes and treatment worksection Veneer Veneer quality to visible surfaces CD minimum to AS NZS 2269 0 Identification Branding To AS NZS 2269 0 Brand mark Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works 2 3 GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER Product Glued laminated structural timber To AS NZS 1328 1 Production record To AS NZS 1328 1 Laminated members Widths and depths to AS NZS 1328 2 Table 2 2 Direction of laminations Horizontal Preservative treatment To the Timber products finishes and treatment worksection Joints End joints Finge
515. ubmit pieces of timber or timber veneer matching the timber to be used in the works prepared puttied stained sealed and coated in conformance with the specified system of sufficient size so that each piece can be cut into 4 segments marked for identification and distributed as directed Paint General Dulux coatings systems have been selected for this project Submit the manufacturer s details at least 3 weeks before the paint is required as follows Paint brand name and paint line quality statement Material safety data sheets MSDS showing the health and safety precautions to be taken during application The published recommendations for maintenance Tests Fire retardant systems Submit type test results to confirm minimum indices when tested to AS NZS 1530 3 on a substrate representative of the intended use for paint systems specified as Low flame spread or Fire retardant Spread of flame index 3 Sum of Ignitability index and Heat evolved index 7 NATSPEC 329 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0671 DULUX painting Smoke developed index 3 Substrate acceptance Applicator Submit the applicator s certification of the acceptability of the paint finish substrate Timing Before commencing installation Warranty Material Warranty Submit the manufacturer s material warranty as follows Extent Paintwork generally Terms Paint systems are suitable for th
516. uction on a pavement course To the requirements of the Pavement base and subbase worksection Standard Construct kerb and or gutters in fixed forms by extrusion or by slip forming to AS 2876 Foundation concrete quality curing and testing details To AS 2876 Tolerances Design level deviation at any point on the surface of gutters 10 mm Surface deviation to top or face of kerbs and to the surface of gutters 5 mm in 3000 mm Design alignment deviation 25 mm NATSPEC 126 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0277 Pavement ancillaries Exception Kerb laybacks grade changes or curves or at gully pits requiring gutter depression Joints Standard To AS 2876 Concrete pavement Where kerbs and or gutters are cast adjacent with a concrete pavement continue the same type of expansion contraction and construction joints documented for the concrete pavement across the kerb and or gutter Backfill Timing Not earlier than three days after placing kerb and gutter concrete backfill and reinstate the spaces on both sides of the kerb and or gutters Material Granular material free of organic material clay and rock in excess of 50 mm diameter Compaction Compact backfilling in layers not greater than 150 mm thick to a relative compaction of 95 when tested in conformance with AS 1289 5 4 1 for standard compactive effort Pavement Backfill pavement material adjacent to new gutter in conformance wi
517. uctural framing is complete Pole footings Preparation Make sure holes are dry and clear of loose material before placing concrete footings Concrete Minimum 20 MPa Connection Slope concrete top of footing away from the pole to prevent water ingress and compromise to the timber pole Curing Period Allow 10 days after placing concrete encasing before loading or carrying out fabrication work Beam connection Bearing surface Form flat bearing surfaces by checking or notching into the pole to a depth just sufficient to achieve the required width of bearing 3 4 COMPLETION Tightening Initial Tighten bolts screws and other fixings so that joints and anchorages are secure at the date for practical completion Subsequent If unseasoned timber is used retighten after 6 months all bolts screws and other fixings NATSPEC 192 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0382 Light timber framing 0382 LIGHT TIMBER FRAMING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide light timber floor wall and roof framing 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Adhesives sealants and fasteners Timber products finishes and treatment 1 3 STANDARDS General Framing To AS 1684 2 AS 1684 3 or AS 1684 4 as appropriate Design To AS 1720 1 1 4 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be ma
518. ue bead and nails at 300 mm Glued only To the adhesive manufacturer s recommendations with downward pressure during curing Underlay control joints Provide joint widths as follows Against vertical building elements 10 mm Between underlay sheets 6 mm Between tongue and groove sheets Hand pressure assembly Underlay adhesive fixed on concrete slabs Vapour barrier A liquid applied membrane compatible with the adhesive system Plywood Apply a sealant to the underside compatible with the adhesive Orientation for parquet flooring Fix at 45 to the direction of the flooring pattern Orientation for strip flooring Fix sheets in a stretcher bond or at 45 to the floor board direction NATSPEC 315 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0655 Timber flooring Glue and nail fixing Nail centres 300 mm from edges and at 600 x 600 mm Glue beads 10 mm diameter and at 500 x 500 mm Glued only fixing Apply adhesive with a notched trowel to the manufacturer s recommendations Provide downward pressure during curing Underlay control joints Provide joint widths as follows Against vertical building elements 10 mm Between underlay sheets 6 mm Between tongue and groove sheets Hand pressure assembly Underlay mechanically fixed on concrete slabs Orientation for parquet flooring Fix at 45 to the direction of the flooring pattern Orientation for strip flooring Fix sh
519. uesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0621 Waterproofing wet areas Synthetic rubber membranes Factory vulcanized laps 40 mm Field side laps 50 mm for side laps Field end laps 100 mm for end laps PVC membranes Factory welded laps 30 mm Field welded laps gt 75 mm Vertical membrane terminations Upstands At least 150 mm above the finished tile level of the floor or 25 mm above the maximum retained water level whichever is the greater Anchoring Secure sheet membranes along the top edge Edge protection Protect edges of the membrane Flashings Junctions between waterproof surfaces Provide a bond breaker at internal corners behind flashings Junctions between waterproof surfaces and other surfaces Provide a bead of sealant at the following junctions Waterproof and water resistant surfaces Water resistant and water resistant surfaces Water resistant and non water resistant surfaces Perimeter flashings Provide continuous flashings to the full perimeter of waterproof areas at wall floor junctions and to water stop angles Vertical flashings Provide vertical corner flashings continuous across wall wall junctions to at least 1800 mm above finished floor level Vertical liquid applied flashings Return legs at least 40 mm on each wall Overlap the vertical termination of the floor waterproofing membrane at least 20 mm Vertical sheet flashings
520. ure appearance and free of trowel marks and defects Wood float finish After machine floating use wood or plastic hand floats to produce the final consolidated finish free of float marks and uniform in texture and appearance Broom finish After machine floating and steel trowelling use a broom or hessian belt drawn across the surface to produce a coarse even textured transverse scored surface Scored or scratch finish After screeding use a stiff brush or rake drawn across the surface before final set to produce a coarse scored texture Sponge finish After machine floating and steel trowelling use a damp sponge to wipe the surface to produce an even textured sand finish 3 12 COMPLETION Formwork removal Extent Remove formwork other than profiled steel sheeting composite formwork and lost formwork including formwork in concealed locations Timing Do not disturb formwork until concrete is hardened enough to withstand formwork movements and removal without damage Stripping General To AS 3600 where it is more stringent than AS 3610 1 Vertical formwork To AS 3610 1 Appendix B Table B1 Multi storey work Remove formwork without disturbing props supporting succeeding floors Post tensioned concrete Remove formwork supporting post tensioned concrete members to AS 3600 clause 17 6 2 7 Loading General Give notice before loading the concrete structure Protection General Protect the concrete from damage due t
521. using proprietary petroleum taping material Impermeable flexible plastic coating Sealed polyethylene sleeve Low VOC emitting paints Provide the following low odour low environmental impact paint types with the following VOC limits Primers and undercoats lt 65 g litre Low gloss white or light coloured latex paints for broadwall areas lt 16 g litre Coloured low gloss latex paints lt 16 g litre Gloss latex paints 75 g litre 3 14 MARKING AND LABELLING General General Mark services and equipment to provide a ready means of identification and as follows Locations exposed to weather Provide durable materials Pipes conduits and ducts Identify and label to AS 1345 throughout its length including in concealed spaces Cables Label to indicate the origin and destination of the cable Consistency Label and mark equipment using a consistent scheme across all services elements of the project NATSPEC 28 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements Electrical accessories General Label isolating switches and outlets to identify circuit origin Equipment concealed in ceilings Location Provide a label on the ceiling indicating the location of each concealed item requiring access for routine inspection maintenance and or operation In tiled ceilings locate the label on the ceiling grid closest to the item access point In flush ceilings locate
522. utable to exchange rates customs and import duty of imported content of items purchased for incorporation in the works NATSPEC 15 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0142 Preliminaries ABIC SW 2008 Adjustment If there are changes in rates applying to import costs of items listed in the Import cost adjustment schedule add or deduct the amount of the difference to or from the contract sum as applicable Anticipated progress payments General If requested submit a schedule of anticipated progress claims for the contract period Submit a revised schedule with each progress claim Purpose of submission Information only Progress claims Break down With each progress claim submit a statement of amounts claimed in respect of each worksection or trade heading designated in the specification Purpose of submission Review Method of measurement General In conformance with the principles of the Australian Standard Measurement of Building Works ASMM Other civil engineering work To AS 1181 NATSPEC 16 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0171b General requirements 0171B GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 GENERAL 1 4 RESPONSIBILITIES Performance Structural If required provide structures installations and components as follows Fixed accessways To AS 1657 Structural design actions To AS NZS 1170 0 and the Structural design actions schedule Desig
523. ve water being brought to the surface during compaction Mixes table Mix type Thickness mm Upper and lower limits of proportion by weight Cement Fine Coarse aggregate aggregate Bonded cement and sand 35 1 3 0 1 4 5 0 Bonded fine concrete 40 1 3 1 1 3 2 Floating fine concrete 100 1 3 1 1 3 2 Granolithic Floors 25 1 2 1 of 2mm Skirtings 13 3mm Separated fine concrete 70 1 3 1 1 3 2 Slip resistance products General Provide proprietary products manufactured to improve the wet slip resistance of toppings Silicon carbide granules Granule size 2 300 600 um Silicon carbide two part resin Granule size 2 300 um Surface treatment products General Provide proprietary products manufactured for use with cement based toppings to change the characteristics of the surface of the finished topping NATSPEC 283 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0612b Cementitious toppings Water General Clean and free from any deleterious matter 2 2 CONTROL JOINTS Control joint materials Control joint strip A proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwiched between plates with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying Set flush with the finished surface Proprietary slide plate divider strip An arrangement of interlocking metal plates grouted into pockets formed in the concrete joint edges Sealant One part self le
524. velling non hardening mould resistant silicone or polyurethane sealant applied over a backing rod Finish flush with the terrazzo surface Floors Trafficable shore hardness gt 35 Backing rod Compressible closed cell polyethylene foam with a bond breaking surface 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Substrates General Provide substrates as follows Clean and free from any deposit which may impair adhesion of monolithic or bonded toppings Remove excessive projections and voids and fill hollows with a mix not stronger than the substrate or weaker than the topping Roughen hardened concrete by scabbling or the like to remove 2 mm of the laitance and expose the aggregate Bonded toppings General Before laying topping wash the substrate with water and provide a bonding product or treat as follows Keep wet for 2 hours or more Remove surplus water and brush on neat cement or a clean slurry of cement and water Place the topping while the slurry is wet 3 2 APPLICATION Laying General Spread the mix and compact Strike off consolidate and level surfaces to finished levels Monolithic toppings Lay while concrete subfloor is plastic and the surface water is no longer visible Toppings over 50 mm thick Lay in two layers of equal thickness Place a layer of reinforcement between the layers of toppings Lap reinforcement 200 mm and tie Do not create four way laps 3 3 SURFACE FINISHES Finishing methods p
525. way or two way barrier line pattern Hand spraying Hand spray transverse lines symbols legends arrows and chevrons with templates Paint thickness Uniform wet film thickness 2 0 35 mm to lt 0 40 mm Pavement markings Straight or with smooth even curves where intended Edges Clean with a sharp cut off Remove any marking material applied beyond the defined edge of the marking and leave a neat and smooth marking on the wearing surface of the pavement Tolerances Longitudinal line lengths Do not vary by more than 20 mm from the lengths shown in AS 1742 2 Longitudinal line widths Do not vary by more than 10 mm from the widths shown in AS 1742 2 Transverse line lengths and widths Do not vary by more than 10 mm from the lengths and widths shown in AS 1742 2 Dimensions Do not vary the dimensions of arrows chevrons painted medians painted left turn islands and speed markings by more than 50 mm from the dimensions shown on the drawings or in AS 1742 2 as appropriate Place arrows and speed markings square with the centreline of the traffic lane Removal of pavement markings General Remove pavement markings no longer required from the wearing surface of pavements without significant damage to the surface 3 2 CHANNELS AND KERBS Foundation preparation Foundation material Shape and compact to form a firm base before placing any kerb and or gutter Construction not on a pavement course Relative compaction To AS 2876 Constr
526. without leakage to the substrate or adjacent areas 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements Stormwater site Pavement base and subbase 1 3 INSPECTION Notice Inspection Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following Substrate immediately before tiling Trial set outs before execution Control joints before sealing and grouting 1 4 STANDARDS Slip resistance Classification To AS NZS 4586 for the classifications as documented Slip resistance measurement of existing installations To AS NZS 4663 Testing authority General Independent third party Registered testing authority 1 5 SUBMISSIONS Samples General Submit labelled samples of pavers grout and sealants illustrating the range of variation in colour and finish 1 6 TOLERANCES Completed paving General Conform to the Surface level tolerances table Surface level tolerances table Item Level tolerance Absolute Relative Vehicular pavements 5 mm 5 mm Pedestrian pavements 10 mm 10 mm Level discontinuity Between adjacent pavers and other surface features for footpath areas 1 5 mm and roadway areas 2 0 mm NATSPEC 114 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0275b Segmental pavers mortar bed Lippage Unpolished pavers 2 mm Polished pavers 300 x 300 mm or less 1 mm with 5 not exceed
527. x Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5028 Sealer Undercoat Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 eco choice B16 amp B9 amp B9 Cement render Dulux 1 Step Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2263 Acrylic Primer Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 Sealer Undercoat amp B9 amp B9 B17a MDF Dulux Acrylic Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 2290 low VOC system Sealer Undercoat Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 eco choice B17a amp B9 amp B9 Brick and masonry Berger Gold Label Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5046 Acrylic Block Filler Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 B15 amp B9 amp B9 Concrete blockwork Berger Gold Label Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 3100 Acrylic Block Filler Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 B15 amp B9 amp B9 Zinc coated metals Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5029 incl HD Metal Primer water Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 galvanized steel based B12a amp B9 amp B9 zincalume Galvabond zincanneal zincseal zinc primed steel low VOC system Shop primed or red Dulux Quit Rust All Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 4603 oxide primed Metal Primer water Gloss Acrylic B42 Gloss Acrylic B42 ROZP ferrous based B11a amp BY amp B9 metal low VOC system Non ferrous metals Dulux Quit Rust Dulux Aquanamel Dulux Aquanamel SD 5030 incl aluminium Etch
528. xtra 596 of flooring products to be stored on site as spares NATSPEC 318 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0656 Floor sanding and finishing 0656 FLOOR SANDING AND FINISHING 1 GENERAL 1 1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General Provide floor sanding and finishing as documented 1 2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement Conform to the following worksection s General requirements 1 3 STANDARD General Standard To AS 4786 2 1 4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply Coating system Applied materials to enhance wear and protect the flooring material Edge bonding The tendency of some coating systems to glue the edges of strip flooring and parquetry panels which prevents an even distribution of movement gaps Filling Treatment to enhance the surface appearance by Flood filling To fill the pores of open grained timber or minor cracks in parquetry Stopping To fill punched nail head cavities Flooring Hard flooring Timber with a wearing surface not easily cut with an abrasive Mild flooring Timber with a wearing surface easily cut with an abrasive Sanding Basic sanding Sanding procedures resulting in an even plane surface free of irregularities Finish sanding Sanding procedures resulting in a surface suitable for the application of the coating system Sealing Treatment to Prevent ex
529. xtrusions Material Commercial grade alloy B6060 T5 or T6 hardness Finish to visible extrusions Satin clear or medium bronze anodised unless otherwise specified Anodising thickness Perimeter seal extrusions 2 15 um Threshold plates and threshold plate seals 2 25 um PVC RAVEN proprietary grade PVC extrusions Highest quality available Added UV inhibitors where exposed to sunlight Self extinguishing grade Service temperature 5 C to 70 C Silicon rubber RAVEN proprietary grade silicon rubber extrusions Are unique and where designated SE are self extinguishing Added UV inhibitors Service temperature 60 C to 230 C TPE RAVEN proprietary grade TPE extrusions Highest quality available Added UV inhibitors Flammability Index lt 5 to AS 1530 2 where indicated for Bushfire prone areas Service temperature 40 C to 100 C EPDM RAVEN proprietary grade closed cell EPDM rubber extrusions Highest quality available as developed by the automotive industry Added UV inhibitors Classified SE B self extinguishing burn rate to SAE J 369 ISO 3795 Service temperature 40 C to 70 C 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Handing Requirement Match door seals to the handing of doors Supply Factory fit and retrofit Deliver door seals for door perimeter seals and door bottom seals in complete sets for each door ready for installation Identification Mark packaging w
530. y Compaction is completed before stopping work on any day No compaction within 1 m of the laying face except on completion of the pavement against an edge restraint Joint filling Compact all paving units to design levels before the commencement of joint filling Joint filling Filling Spread dry sand over the paving units and fill the joints by brooming Undertake one or more passes with the vibrating plate compactor and refill the joints with sand Repeat the process until the joints are completely filled Timing As soon as compaction is carried out fill gaps with jointing material 3 6 COMPLETION Protection of the work Protection Prevent all vehicular and pedestrian traffic from using the pavement until all compaction and joint filling is completed and all edge restraints are in place Testing Conformance Test for levelness flatness and lippage tolerances Notice Give notice of non conformance Non conformance Reject pavers that are not within tolerance 3 7 CLEANING Cleaning General Leave pavements clean on completion Final inspection Cracking in bound pavements Width 1 5 mm Subsidence Offset less than 1 5 m length of the design profile lt 5 mm Stepping Between adjacent elements within the pavement area lt 5 mm Chipping and spalling to pavement units Maximum 10 per 100 units with chipped or spalled arrises Ponding Maximum 10 mm deep 15 minutes after rain ceases Masonry units Refill joints
531. y one coat of primer and one finishing coat all around before fixing 3 8 POLE STRUCTURES Poles Standard To AS 3818 10 Barrel checks and end splits Straightness To AS 3818 10 clause 1 5 5 Mechanical damage To AS 3818 10 clause 2 2 3 clause 3 2 2 and clause 4 2 2 Indentations may be dressed out before or after preservative treatment provided that such dressing does not adversely affect the treatment and is visually acceptable Stress grade To AS 1720 1 Section 6 2 strength group and F grade for round timbers Removal of bumps General Trimming or removal of bumps is not permitted NATSPEC 191 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0381 Structural timber Protection Metal caps and bands Protect pole tops exposed to weather with metal caps or bands Site preservative treatment Application If untreated timber is exposed by docking checking or dressing apply a saturation coating of preservative before erection or concealment Erecting poles Tolerance Erect poles plumb and true within the limits of deviation from verticality set by the allowed straightness of the poles Setting out General Centre the poles on the framing grids at ground level and roof level Align any allowable straightness deviation parallel to the roof beams Tolerance 10 mm from grid location at ground level Temporary bracing Provision Provide temporary bracing to maintain poles in correct position until str
532. y services pipes and cables Excavation General Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services NATSPEC 70 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0221b Site management 2 8 TREES TO BE REMOVED Designation Extent Refer to demolition plan 29 SITE CLEARING Extent General Clear only the following site areas Areas to be occupied by works such as structures paving excavation regrading and landscaping Other areas designated to be cleared Contractor s site areas If not included within the areas documented above clear generally only to the extent necessary for the performance of the works Clearing and grubbing Clearing Remove everything on or above the site surface including rubbish scrap grass vegetable matter and organic debris scrub trees timber stumps boulders and rubble Grubbing Grub out stumps and roots over 75 mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500 mm below subgrade under buildings embankments or paving or 300 mm below finished surface in unpaved areas Backfill holes remaining after grubbing with sand material to prevent ponding of water Compact the material to the relative density of the existing adjacent ground material Old works Remove old works including slabs foundations pavings drains and access chambers covers found on the surface 2 10 SEDIMENT FILTERS General Inspection For displacement undercutting over topping and soil
533. y window systems Requirement Provide the standard hardware and internal fixing points for personnel safety harness attachment where required by and conforming with the governing regulations Operation General Make sure working parts are accurately fitted to smooth close bearings without binding or sticking free from rattle or excessive play lubricated where appropriate Supply Delivery Deliver window hardware items ready for installation in individual complete sets for each window set as follows Clearly labelled with the intended location In aseparate dust and moisture proof package Including the necessary templates fixings and fixing instructions NATSPEC 221 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0451 AWS aluminium windows and doors 3 3 COMPLETION Trade clean Method Clean with soft clean cloths and clean water finishing with a clean squeegee Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials Extent All frames and glass surfaces inside and out Hardware Adjustment Leave the hardware with working parts in working order and clean undamaged properly adjusted and lubricated where appropriate Keys Contractor s keys Immediately before the date for practical completion replace cylinders to which the contractor has had key access during construction with new cylinders which exclude the contractor s keys Keys For locks keyed to differ and locks keyed alike verify quantitie
534. y with staggered vertical joints all close butted and without crushing Fixing Proprietary adhesive compatible with the insulation Apply sufficient pressure to evenly distribute adhesive Vapour permeable breathable membrane Application Provide a vapour permeable membrane behind external facing material which does not provide permanent weatherproofing or which may be subject to condensation forming on the internal face including the following Boards fixed vertically or diagonally Boards or planks fixed in exposed locations where wind driven rain can penetrate the joints Unpainted or unsealed cladding Behind external cladding in bushfire prone areas to AS 3959 Masonry veneer Installation Run the vapour permeable membrane horizontally on the outer face of external wall framing over the flashing from the bottom plate up Pull taught over the framing and fix to framing members Seal across the wall cavity at the top Horizontal laps At least 150 mm wide lapped to make sure water is shed to the outer face of the membrane End or vertical overlaps laps At least 150 mm wide made over framing Openings Run the vapour permeable membrane over the openings and leave covered until windows and doors are to be installed Cut the membrane on a 45 diagonal from each corner of the opening fold the flaps inside and fix to the inside frame of the opening If the membrane is used to provide a continuous air tight layer seal
535. zed zinc coating on ferrous hollow and open sections To AS 4750 Hot dip galvanizing zinc Ferrous open sections by an in line process To AS NZS 4791 Ferrous hollow sections by a continuous or specialised process To AS NZS 4792 Metallic coated steel sheet To AS 1397 Metal thicknesses specified are base metal thicknesses Steel wire To AS NZS 4534 Stainless steel Bars To ASTM A276 Plate sheet and strip To ASTM A240 A240M Welded pipe plumbing applications To AS 1769 Welded pipe round square rectangular To ASTM A554 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL Metal separation Incompatible sheet metals Provide separation by one of the following Apply an anti corrosion low moisture transmission coating such as alkyd zinc phosphate primer or aluminium pigmented bituminous paint to contact surfaces NATSPEC 42 Tuesday 21 May 2013 ps subscribers subscriber12114677 projectspec 0183b Metals and prefinishes Insert a concealed separation layer such as polyethylene film adhesive tape or bituminous felt Incompatible fixings Do not use Incompatible service pipes Install lagging or grommets Do not use absorbent fibrous or paper products Brazing General Make sure brazed joints have sufficient lap to provide a mechanically sound joint Butt joints Do not use butt jointing for joints subject to loads If butt joints are used do not rely on the filler metal fillet only Filler metal To AS NZS 1167 1

PTL Pty Limited

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents